Technical Specification With GTP Format

Part -2: Technical Specification 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Table of Contents
1.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR OUTDOOR TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 11/0.433KV AS
PER IS 1180 ............................................................................................................................................ 4
c) The heat dissipation calculation sheet shall have to be provided by the bidder along with the
bid. 9
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL TUBULAR POLES FOR OVERHEAD LINES ............................ 43
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV AND 11KV OUTDOOR VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS ......... 47
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 & 33 KV OUTDOOR TYPE CURRENT TRANSFORMER ............. 65
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 & 11 KV OUTDOOR TYPE POTENTIAL
TRANSFORMER.............................................................................................................................. 73
5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV AND 33 KV ISOLATORS ...................................................... 81
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CONTROL & RELAY PANEL FOR 33 KV/11 KV FEEDER WITH
DIRECTIONAL OR NON-DIRECTIONAL O/C AND E/F PROTECTION AND 33/11 KV TRANSFORMER
PANEL WITH & WITHOUT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION FOR VARIOUS 33/11 KV SUB-STATIONS....... 98
7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR IEC 61850 COMPLAINT TRANSFORMER & FEEDER PROTECITON
NUMERICAL RELAYS .......................................................................................................................... 117
8. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 11 KV AND 33 KV COMBINED CT-PT UNITS ................................. 156
9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 1.1 KV GRADE COPPER STRANDED CONTROL CABLE ................ 171
10. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF LT SINGLE CORE CROSS LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE)
INSULATED, FRLS, PVC SHEATHED, ARMOURED POWER CABLES. .................................................... 176
11. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF MEDIUM VOLTAGE COVERED CONDUCTORS (MVCC)............... 193
12. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11/22/33 KV MEDIUM VOLTAGE COVERED CONDUCTOR
(MVCC) ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................................ 200
13. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WEDGE CONNECTOR FOR MVCC ............................................... 213
14. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ACSR CONDUCTORS................................................................. 219
15. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PSC POLES [9.75 METER] ......................................................... 228
16. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GALVANIZED CHANNEL CROSS ARMS ..................................... 235
17. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I CHANNEL CROSS ARM........................................................ 238
18. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 25 KVA 3-PHASE L.T. DISTRIBUTION BOX (WITH MCCBS) ....... 241
18.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 63, 100, 200 & 315 KVA L.T. DISTRIBUTION BOX ..................... 246
18 (A).TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF LTCT METER CABINET SMART METER BOX ........................... 258
19. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR POLYMERIC 33 KV AND 11 KV PIN INSULATOR ....................... 262
20. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 11 KV/22 KV/33 KV COMPOSITE INSULATORS .......................... 264
21. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TENSION HARDWARE FITTINGS FOR T & C TYPE DISC
INSULATOR FOR ACSR CONDUCTOR: ................................................................................................ 278
22. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LT SHACKLE INSULATORS......................................................... 282
23. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 33 KV AND 11 KV GANG OPERATED AB SWITCH ....................... 286

24. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV DROP OUT TYPE FUSE .................................................... 291
25. TECHNICAL SPECIFICTAION FOR 11kV VOLTAGE CLASS SURGE ARRESTORS .............................. 295
26. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF DISTRIBUTION CLASS SURGE ARRESTORS: ................................ 300
27. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GI EARTHING PIPE .................................................................... 307
28. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CAST IRON EARTH PIPE ............................................................ 309
29. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR STAY SET (HT)........................................................................... 310
30. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. STAY WIRE ......................................................................... 313
31. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF HT GUY INSULATOR ................................................................... 316
32. TECHNICAL S32. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. WIRE ....................................................... 318
33. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF MCCB ......................................................................................... 319
34. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CLAMPS & CONNECTORS ........................................................ 321
35. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 11 KV DANGER BOARD .............................................................. 323
36. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR P.G CLAMP FOR ACSR RACCON & WOLF CONDUCTOR ........... 326
37. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ANTI-CLIMBING DEVICES (BARBED WIRE) ............................... 327
38. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ISI MARK HOT DIP GALVANISED MILD STEEL HEXAGONAL HEAD
BOLTS AND NUTS............................................................................................................................... 329
39. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INSULATION PIERCING CONNECTORS SUITABLE FOR 11 KV
COVERED CONDUCTORS: .................................................................................................................. 331
40. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF HOT ROLLED STEEL BEAMS (JOISTS) .......................................... 333
41. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE ............................ 336
42. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CI SPUN PIPE ............................................................................ 339
43. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV AND 11 KV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES: ............ 341
44. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HEAT SHRINKABLE CABLE TERMINATIONS AND JOINTS SUITABLE
FOR XLPE CABLES............................................................................................................................... 351
45. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CABLE GLANDS AND LUGS ......................................................... 358
46. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LAYING, TERMINATION OF CABLES, TAGS AND MARKERS ...... 358
47. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CROSSINGS FOR LINES: ............................................................ 366
48. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SIGN BOARD ............................................................................ 369
49. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS OF SUB-STATIONS ............................................ 370
50. MINIMUM GUARANTEE/WARRANTY REQUIRED FOR SUPPLIED MATERIALS............................. 401
51. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF FOUNDATION / PAD FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER ........ 402
52. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER SECURITY FENCING: ................................................................... 407
1.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR OUTDOOR TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

11/0.433KV AS PER IS 1180
1. SCOPE:
a. This specification covers design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage testing, inspection and testing
before supply and delivery at site of oil immersed, naturally cooled 3-phase 11 kV / 433 V distribution
transformers for outdoor use.
b. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship
and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation, in a manner acceptable to the
purchaser, who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to
reject any work or material which, in his judgment is not in accordance therewith. The offered equipment
shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble-free operation. Such
components shall
are specifically
brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not.
c. The transformer and accessories shall be designed to facilitate operation, inspection, maintenance and
repairs. The design shall incorporate every precaution and provision for the safety of equipment as well as
staff engaged in operation and maintenance of equipment.
d. All outdoor apparatus, including bushing insulators with their mountings, shall be designed so as to avoid
any accumulation of water and should strictly follow relevant standards.
e. The tolerance of guaranteed performance figures shall be as specified in the (Part-I) table 1 of latest
issue of IS 2026 except losses or relevant International Standard except wherever specified otherwise in
this specification.
2. SYSTEM CONDITIONS
The transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation with 3-phase 50 Hz, 11 kV systems in which
the neutral is effectively earthed and they should be designed suitable for service under fluctuations in
supply voltage up to±12%. Permissible under Indian Electricity Supply Act and rules made there under.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS:
A. The Distribution Transformers to be supplied against this Specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions as per IS 2026 (Part - I).
1 Location At various locations within

the state of Assam
2 Maximum ambient air temperature (°C) 45
3 Minimum ambient air temperature (°C) 2
Maximum average daily ambient air temperature (°C)
4 40
Maximum yearly weighted average ambient
5 32
temperature(°C)
6 Maximum altitude above mean sea level (Meters)

1000
7 Maximum Humidity
93%
8 Average number of thunderstorm days
60
9 Average numbers of dust storms per annum
10
10 Maximum rainfall/annum
3500 mm
11 Average rainfall
2280 mm
12 Wind Pressure
97.8 Kg/Sq.mm
13 Altitude above MSL
100 m to 1000 m
Note: The equipment shall generally be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive
to rust and fungus growth unless otherwise specified.
4. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:
A. The transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation with three phase, 50 Hz, 11 kV or 33 kV
system in which the neutral is effectively earthed and they should be suitable for service with fluctuations
in supply voltage upto plus 12.5% to minus 12.5%.
B. The transformers shall conform to the following specific parameters:
Sl. No. Item 11kV Distribution Transformer

1 Capacity (Continuous Rating) 25/63/100/250KVA
2 System voltage (max.) 12 kV
3 Rated voltage HV 11 kV
4 Rated voltage LV 433 - 250 V*
5 Frequency 50 Hz +/- 5%*
6 No. of Phases Three
7 Connection HV Delta
8 Connection LV Star (neutral brought out)
9 Vector group Dyn-11
10 Type of cooling ONAN
C. Audible Sound levels (decibels) at rated voltage and frequency for liquid immersed distribution
transformers shall be as below (NEMA Standards):
Audible sound levels
kVA rating
(decibels)
0-50 48
51-100 51
101-300 55
301-500 56
4.1 Insulation Levels:
Sl. No. Voltage (kV) Impulse Voltage Power Frequency Voltage

(kV Peak) (kV)
1 0.433 - 3
2 11 75 28
OVERLOAD CAPACITY:
The bidder should state clearly the percentage overload the transformers can take for a continuous period of 1
hour. The transformers shall suitable for loading as per IS- 6600/1972 and its latest amendments. The
transformer shall be designed to obtain maximum efficiency at 75% load.
5. STANDARDS:
5.1 The materials shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian/International Standards, with latest
amendments thereof unless otherwise specified herein. Some of them are listed below:
Ind ian Standard Title International and

Internationally Recognized
standards
IS -2026 Specification for Power Transformers IEC 76
IS 1180 Outdoor Type Oil Immersed DTR
(Part-1): 2014
IS 12444 Specification for Copper wire rod ASTM B-49

IS-335 Specification for Transformer Oil IEC Pub 296
IS – 5 Specification for colors for ready mixed paints
IS – 104 Ready mixed paint, brushing zinc chromate,
IS 2099 Specification for high voltage porcelain bushing
IS – 649 Testing for steel sheets and strips and magnetic
IS – 4257 Dimensions for clamping arrangements for
IS – 7421 Specification for Low Voltage bushings
IS – 3347 Specification for Outdoor Bushings DIN 42531 to 33
IS – 5484 Specification for Al Wire rods ASTM B - 233
IS – 9335 Specification for Insulating Kraft Paper IEC 554
IS – 1576 Specification for Insulating Press Board IEC 641
IS – 6600 Guide for loading of oil Immersed Transformers IEC 76
IS – 2362 Determination of water content in oil for
IS – 6162 Paper covered aluminium conductor
IS – 6160 Rectangular Electrical conductor for electrical
IS – 5561 Electrical power connector
IS – 6103 Testing of specific resistance of electrical
IS – 6262 Method of test for power factor and dielectric
insulating liquids
IS – 6792 Determination of electrical strength of
IS - Installation and maintenance of transformers.
5.2.1 Material conforming to other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal or better quality
than the standards mentioned above, would also be acceptable. In case the bidders who wish to offer material
conforming to other standards, the bidder shall clearly bring out the salient points of difference between the
standards adopted and the specific standards in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic
English translations shall be furnished along with the offer.
6. DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION:

6.1 CORE MATERIAL
6.1.1 The core shall be stack / wound type of high-grade cold rolled grain oriented annealed annealed steel
lamination having low loss and good grain properties, coated with hot oil proof insulation, bolted together and to
the frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. The core shall be stress relieved by annealing under inert
atmosphere if required. The complete design of core must ensure permanency of the core loss with continuous
working of the transformers. The value of the maximum flux density allowed in the design and grade of lamination
used shall be clearly stated in the offer should not be more than 1.55 Tesla.
6.1.2 The bidder shall arrange for inspection of the core and approval by the purchaser during
manufacturing stage and intimate in writing at least 15 days about the readiness of the inspection. The
bidder shall also arrange the inspection of the core and windings of any randomly selected transformer at
the discretion of the purchaser.
6.1.1 The grade of core laminations shall be M4 or better.
6.1.2 Core shall be clamped by minimum 12 mm diameter MS Tie rods.
6.1.3 Compliance of CRGO Electrical steel as per IS 3024 [as mentioned in Cl.No.9.1 (a) of IS 1180 (Part1):
2014] shall be ensured through test certificate of the supplier.
6.1.4 The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to combined effect of voltage and frequency)
up to 12.5% without injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get saturated. The bidder shall
furnish necessary design data in support of this situation.
6.1.5 No-load current shall not exceed 3% of full load current up to 100kVA and 2 % for 250 kVA, and will be
measured by energizing the transformer at 433 volts, 50 Hz on the secondary. Increase of voltage of 433
volts by 12.5% shall not increase the no-load current by 6% (maximum) of full load current.
6.2 WINDINGS:
Material:
6.2.1 HV and LV windings shall be wound from Super Enamel covered /Double Paper covered, aluminium
conductor winding up-to 100 kVA.
6.2.2 HV and LV windings shall be wound from Super Enamel covered / Double Paper covered copper conductor
winding for ratings above 100 kVA DTR.
6.2.3 LV winding shall be such that neutral formation will be at top.
6.2.4 The winding construction of single HV coil wound over LV coil is preferable.
6.2.5 Inter layer insulation shall be Nomex /Epoxy dotted Kraft Paper.
6.2.6 Proper bonding of inter layer insulation with the conductor shall be ensured.
6.2.7 Test for bonding strength shall be conducted.
6.2.8 Dimensions of winding coils are very critical. Dimensional tolerances for winding coils shall be provided
with requisite number of windings and shall be so designed to withstand the electro mechanical
stress exerted under short circuit conditions as per ISS: 2026 (Part-5).
6.2.9 Current density for HV and LV winding should not be more than 2.5 Ampere per sq.mm for copper and
1.5 Ampere per sq. mm for Aluminium Conductor.
6.2.10 The core / coil assembly shall be securely held in position to avoid any movement under short circuit
conditions.
6.2.11 Joints in the winding shall be avoided. However, if jointing is necessary the joints shall be properly
brazed and the resistance of the joints shall be less than that of parent conductor. In case of foil windings,
welding of leads to foil can be done within the winding.
6.3 LOSSES:
6.3.1 The transformer of HV voltage up to 11kV, the total losses (no-load + load losses at 75 0C) at 50% of
rated load and total losses at 100% of rated load shall not exceed the maximum total loss values given in
Table-3 up-to 200kVA & Table-6 for ratings above 200 kVA of IS 1180(Part-1):2014 (Latest
Amendment -4).
6.3.2 The maximum allowable losses at rated voltage and rated frequency permitted at 75 0C for 11/0.433 kV
transformers shall be offered by the bidder as per table-3 up-to 200kVA and Table-6 for ratings above
200kVA as per Energy Efficiency Level-1 & above as specified in IS 1180 (Part-1):2014 (Latest
Amendment-4) for all kVA ratings of distribution transformers. For transformers having voltage class up
33kV, the permissible total loss values shall not exceed by 7½ percent of the maximum total loss values
mentioned in Table 6. as per IS 1180(Part-1):2014 (Cl 6.8.1.1, 6.8.1.2, 6.8.1.3 and 6.8.2).
Maximum allowable Losses & % impedance for BIS Level -1 & 2 as indicated below:
Voltage Ratio Rating (kVA) % Max. Losses at Max. Losses at

Impedance 50% Loading 100% Loading (Watts)
(Watts)
11/0.433kV 25 (Al. wound) 4.5 175 595
(BIS Level - 2) 63 (Al. wound) 4.5 300 1050
100 (Al. wound) 4.5 435 1500
11/0.433kV 250 (Cu. wound) 4.5 980 2930
(BIS Level - 1)
6.3.3 The above losses are maximum allowable and there would not be any positive tolerance. Bids with higher
losses than the above specified values would be treated as non-responsive. However, the manufacturer can
offer losses less than above. The utility can evaluate offers with losses lower than the maximum allowable
losses on total owning cost.
6.3.4 TOLERANCES:
No positive tolerance shall be allowed on the maximum losses displayed on the label for both 50%
and 100% loading values.
6.3.5 EFFICIENCY:
The efficiency is the ratio of output in KW to the input in

KW. Efficiency = (Input in KW Total Losses in KW)
Input in KW
The minimum Percentage Efficiency of distribution transformer shall be 98.25 %. Total loss
comprises of No-load loss and Load loss.
6.3.6 Heat Dissipation:
a) Heat dissipation calculation should be based on minimum measured total loss i.e. (No load at
rated excitation + load loss at 100% loading) converted to 750C reference temperature) shall be
supplied during temperature rise test.
b) The heat dissipation by tank wall should be increase to appropriate value considering the
climatic temperature rise.
c) The heat dissipation calculation sheet shall have to be provided by the bidder along
with the bid.
6.4 PERCENTAGE IMPEDANCE:
(i) The value of impedance of transformers at 750C shall be 4.5% for transformers up to and 200 kVA and
for ratings above 200 kVA shall be in accordance with IS 2026.
6.5 Temperature rise: The temperature rises over ambient shall not exceed the limits given below:
S. No. Items Upto 200 Above 200

kVA kVA
Top oil temperature rise measured by thermometer
1 350C 400C
Winding temperature rise measured by resistance method
2 400C 450C
The temperature rise in the core, under the same loading condition, on any part of external surface should not
exceed that permitted for the adjacent part of the winding.
Bids not meeting the above limits of temperature rise will be treated as non- responsive. The transformer
shall be capable of giving continuous rated output without exceeding the specified temperature rise. Bidder
shall submit the calculation sheet in this regard.
6.6 INSULATION MATERIAL:

6.6.1 Electrical grade insulation epoxy dotted Kraft Paper/Nomex and pressboard of standard make or any other
superior material subject to approval of the purchaser shall be used.
6.6.2 All spacers, axial wedges / runners used in windings shall be made of pre-compressed Pressboard-solid,
conforming to type B 3.1 of IEC 641-3-2. In case of cross-over coil winding of HV all spacers shall be
properly sheared and dovetail punched to ensure proper locking. All axial wedges / runners shall be properly
milled to dovetail shape so that they pass through the designed spacers freely. Insulation shearing, cutting,
milling and punching operations shall be carried out in such a way, that there should not be any burr and
dimensional variations.
6.7 TANK:
 The internal clearance of tank shall be such, that it shall facilitate easy lifting of core with coils
from the tank without dismantling LV bushings.
 All joints of tank and fittings shall be oil tight and no bulging should occur during service.
 Inside of tank shall be painted with varnish/hot oil resistant paint.
 The top cover of the tank shall be slightly sloping to drain rain water.
 Thermometer pocket with cap must be located at center of top cover or high side of tank height for
true valve of max top oil temperature.
 The tank plate and the lifting lugs shall be of such strength that the complete transformer filled with
oil may be lifted by means of lifting shackle.
 Manufacturer should carry out all welding operations as per the relevant ASME standards and submit
a copy of the welding procedure and welder performance qualification certificates to the customer.
6.7.7 PLAIN TANK:

a. The transformer tank shall be of robust construction and rectangular in shape and shall be built up of
electrically tested welded mild steel plates of thickness of 5.0 mm and 3.15 mm respectively for
transformers of more than 25 kVA and up to and including 100 kVA and 6 mm and 4 mm respectively
above 100 kVA. Tolerances as per IS1852 shall be applicable.
b. In case of rectangular tanks above 100 kVA the corners shall be fully welded at the corners from inside
and outside of the tank to withstand a pressure of 0.8 kg/cm2 for 30 minutes. In case of transformers of
100 kVA and below, there shall be no joints at corners and there shall not be more than 2 joints in total.
c. Under operating conditions the pressure generated inside the tank should not exceed 0.4 kg/ sq. cm
positive or negative. There must be sufficient space from the core to the top cover to take care of oil
expansion. The space above oil level in the tank shall be filled with dry air conforming to commercial
grade of IS 1747.
i) The tank shall be reinforced by welded flats on all the outside walls on the edge of the tank.
ii) Permanent deflection: The permanent deflection, when the tank without oil is subjected to a
vacuum of 250 mm of mercury for rectangular tank of transformers upto 200kVA and 500mm of
mercury for transformer above 200kVA shall not be more than the values as given below:
(All figures in millimeters)
Horizontal length of flat plate Permanent deflection
Up to and including 750 5
751 to 1250 6.5
1251 to 1750 8
1751 to 2000 9.5
2001 to 2250 11
2251 to 2500 12
2501 to 3000 16
Above 3000 19
d) The tank shall further be capable of withstanding a pressure of 0.8 kg/ sq.cm (g) and a vacuum of 0.7
kg/sq.cm (g) without any deformation.
e) The radiators shall be fin type to achieve the desired cooling to limit the specified temperature rise.
f) Heat dissipation by tank walls excluding top and bottom should be limited to 500 W/sq.mt up to the oil
level, 250 Watts/sq.mt above oil level and 300Watts/sq.mt for cooling tubes. The transformer shall be
capable of giving continuous rated output without exceeding the specified temperature rise. Bidder shall
submit the calculation sheets.
g) Lifting Lugs: 2 Nos. welded heavy duty lifting lugs of MS plate 8 mm. Thick suitably reinforced by
vertical supporting flat welded edgewise below the lug on the side wall.
h) Pulling Lugs: 4 Nos. of welded heavy duty pulling lugs of MS plate of 8 mm, thick shall be provided to
pull the transformer horizontally.
i) Top Cover Gasket & Bolts:
a. The gasket provided in between top cover plate and tank shall be of 5 mm thick neoprene
rubberized cork sheets confirming to IS:4352, Part-II.
b. GI nut bolts shall be of size 38" x 1 ~" with one plain and one spring washer suitably spaced to
press the cover.
c. The height of the tank shall be such that the minimum clear height upto the top cover plate of 120
mm, is achieved from top yoke.
6.7.8 CORRUGATED TANK:
a) The bidder may offer corrugated tanks for transformers of all ratings.
b) The transformer tank shall be of robust construction corrugated in shape and shall be built up of
tested sheets.
c) Corrugation panel shall be used for cooling. The transformer shall be capable of giving continuous
rated output without exceeding the specified temperature rise. Bidder shall submit the calculation
sheet in this regard.
d) Tanks with corrugations shall be tested for leakage test at a pressure of 0.25kg/ sq cm measured at
the top of the tank.
e) The transformers with corrugation should be provided with a pallet for transportation, the dimensions
of which should be more than the length and width of the transformer tank with corrugations.
6.8 TAPS:
a) No tapping shall be provided for transformers up to 100 kVA rating.
b) For ratings higher than or equal to 250 kVA and above, 5 Nos. of taps shall be provided on the high
voltage winding for variation of HV voltage within range of (+)2.5 % to (-) 7.5 % in steps of 2.5%
with Tap Position no. 2 as normal.
c) Tap changing shall be carried out by means of an externally operated self-position switch and when
the transformer is in de-energized condition. Switch position No.1 shall correspond to the maximum
plus tapping. Each tap change shall result in variation of 2.5% in voltage. Provision shall be made for
locking the taping switch handle in position. Suitable aluminium anodized plate shall be fixed for tap
changing switch to know the position number of tap.
7.0 OIL:
7.1 The insulating oil shall comply with the requirements of Type I Insulating Oil as per IS 335(2018).
Use of recycled oil is not acceptable. The specific resistance of the oil shall not be less than 2.5
x1012 ohm-cm at 27° C when tested as per IS 6103.
7.2 Oil shall be filtered and tested for break down voltage (BDV) and moisture content before filling.
7.3 The oil shall be filled under vacuum.
7.4 The design and all materials and processes used in the manufacture of the transformer, shall be such
as to reduce to a minimum the risk of the development of acidity in the oil.
7.5 Total minimum oil volume and minimum weights shall be indicated in the GTP and shall be
verified with the type test reports submitted along with the tech bid.
8.0 CONSERVATOR:
8.1 The conservator shall be provided on transformers of rating 63 kVA and above for plain tank and 200
kVA and above for corrugated tank. For other ratings transformers manufacturer may adopt their
standard practice or follow utility‘s requirement.
sealed type transformers conservator is not required.
8.2 When a conservator is provided, oil gauge and the plain or dehydrating breathing device shall be fitted
to the conservator which shall also be provided with a drain plug

(32 mm [1/4]) Normal size thread with cover. In addition, the cover of the main tank
shall be provided with an air release plug.
8.3 The dehydrating agent shall be silica gel. The moisture absorption shall be indicated by a change in the
colour of the silica gel crystals which should be easily visible from a distance. Volume of breather shall
be suitable for 250 g of silica gel conforming to IS 3401 for 100 KVA transformers and 500g for 250
KVA transformers.
8.4 The capacity of a conservator tank shall be designed keeping in view the total quantity of oil and its
contraction and expansion due to temperature variations. The total volume of conservator shall be such
as to contain10% quantity of the oil. Normally 3% quantity the oil shall be contained in the
conservator.
8.5 The cover of main tank shall be provided with an air release plug to enable air trapped within to be
released, unless the conservator is so located as to eliminate the possibility of air being trapped within
the main tank.
8.6 The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the main tank should be within 20 to 50
mm and it should be projected into the conservator so that its end is approximately 20 mm above the
bottom of the conservator so as to create a sump for collection of impurities. The minimum oil level
(corresponding to -5 0C) should be above the sump level.
9.0 BREATHER
The material used for breather shall be only of Poly propylene. Breather joints will be bolted type in
case of metal container. Breather made of synthetic materials may be provided subject to the purchaser's
approval. Breather volume in gram of silica gel 250 gms. for 100kVA and 500gms for 250kVA.
10. BUSHINGS:
10.1 The bushings shall conform to the relevant standards specified and shall be of outdoor type. The
bushing rods and nuts shall be made of brass material 12 mm diameter for both HT and LT bushings.
The bushings shall be fixed to the transformers on side with straight pockets and in the same plane or
the top cover for transformers above 100 kVA. For transformers of 100 kVA and below the bushing
can be mounted on pipes. The tests as per latest IS 2099 and IS-7421 shall be conducted on the
transformer bushings.
10.2 For 11 kV, 17.5 kV class bushings and for 0.433 kV, 1.1 kV class bushings shall be used.
10.3 Bushing can be of porcelain / epoxy material. Polymer insulator bushings conforming to relevant IEC
can also be used.
10.4 Bushings of plain shades as per IS 3347 shall be mounted on the side of the Tank and not on top
cover.
10.5 Dimensions of the bushings of the voltage class shall conform to the Standards specified and
dimension of clamping arrangement shall be as per IS 4257
10.6 Minimum external phase to phase and phase to earth clearances of bushing terminals shall be as
follows:
Clearance
Voltage
Phase to phase Phase to earth
11 kV 255 mm 140 mm
LV 75 mm 40 mm
10.7 Arcing horns shall be provided on HV bushings.

10.8 Brazing of all inter connections, jumpers from winding to bushing shall have cross section larger than
the winding conductor. All the Brazes shall be qualified as per ASME, section IX.
10.9 The bushings shall be of reputed make supplied by those manufacturers who are having manufacturing
and testing facilities for insulators.
10.10 The terminal arrangement shall not require a separate oil chamber not connected to oil in the main
tank.
10.11 Gaskets shall be made of synthetic rubber or synthetic rubberized cork resistant to hot transformer oil.
[Refer Cl.no.10.1.4 of IS 1180 (Part1):2014]
11. TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
The LV and HV bushing stems shall be provided with suitable terminal connectors as per IS 5082 so as to
connect the jumper without disturbing the bushing stem. Connectors shall be with eye bolts so as to
receive conductor for HV. Terminal connectors shall be type tested as per IS 5561.
12. MOUNTING
The under base of the transformer shall be provided with two channels of adequate size at suitable
spacing for fixing on plinth per clause 14.1 of IS 1180(Part1):2014
13. TERMINAL MARKINGS:
High voltage phase windings shall be marked both in the terminal boards inside the tank and on the
outside with capital letter 1U, 1V, 1W and low voltage winding for the same phase marked by
corresponding small letter 2u, 2v, 2w. The neutral point terminal shall be indicated by the letter 2n.
Neutral terminal is to be brought out and connected to local grounding terminal by an earthing strip.
14. TERMINAL MARKING PLATES AND RATING PLATES:
a) All Transformer HV terminals shall be provided terminal marking plated to Tank. Each terminal,
including with neutral, shall be distinctly marked on both primary & secondary in accordance with the
connection diagram fixed upon the transformer which shall conformed to latest 1S-2026 (part- IV).
b) Each Transformer shall be provided with rating plate having marking as per IS 1180 (part-l):2014
clause no 13 clearly indicating max. total losses at 50% rated load in watts and maximum total losses
at 100% rated load in watts.
c) Rating & terminal marking plates shall be combined into one plate and shall be mark with standard
mark Govern by the provisions of the BIS act 1986.
d) Terminals shall be provided with terminal marking plates. The transformer shall be provided with
riveted rating plate of minimum 18 SWG aluminium anodized material sheet in a visible position. The
entries of the rating plate shall be in indelibly marked (i.e. by etching, engraving or stamping).
e) Marking as `APDCL and `Sr. No.' of transformer shall be engraved on transformer main tank below
L.T. bushings.
f) The name of the company, order No., Scheme, capacity, month and year of manufacturing shall be
engraved on separate plate which shall be firmly welded to main tank and shall form integral part of
the tank.
g) The distribution transformer shall be marked with the Standard Mark. The use of Standard Mark is
governed by the provisions of the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 and the Rules Regulations
made there under.
h) In addition to the BIS certification mark license No. (a seven digit number) represented as CM/L
xxxxxxx shall be clearly & indelibly marked on the rating plate as per the norms of BIS. The width to
height ratio of ISI symbol shall be 4:3.
i) The copy of valid BIS license shall be submitted in support with the bidding document. Each
transformer shall be provided with rating plate having marking as per Cl.no.13 of IS 1180 (Part 1):
2014 clearly indicating maximum total losses at 50% rated load in watts and maximum total losses at
100% rated load in watts.
Following details shall also be given on the rating plate as per Fig.1 of Cl.no.13.1 of IS 1180 (Part 1):
2014 and terminal marking plate with diagram shall be in accordance with Cl.no.13.2 of IS 1180(Part
1): 2014.
(i) BIS Mark.

(ii) BIS License No.
(iii) Energy Efficiency level as approved by BIS
(iv) Order No. Month & year.
(v) Scheme
(vi)Sr. No. of transformer.
(vii) Date of manufacturing Month & year.
(viii) Date of expiry of guarantee period month & year.
(ix) Maximum guaranteed 50% load loss & 100 % load loss figures.
(x) Name and full address of the manufacturer.
(xi) Capacity.
(xii) Rating.
(All details on the rating and diagram plate shall be indeligibly marked i.e. by
engraving or stamping or etching).
15. FITTINGS
The following standard fittings shall be provided:

a) Rating and terminal marking plates, non-detachable.
b) Earthing terminals with lugs - 2 Nos.
c) Lifting lugs for main tank and top cover
d) Terminal connectors on the HV/LV bushings (For bare terminations only).
e) Air release device
f) HV bushing – 3 Nos.
g) LV bushing – 4 Nos.
h) Pulling lugs
i) Stiffener
j) Radiators - No. and length may be mentioned (as per heat dissipation
calculations) / corrugations.
k) Arcing horns or 9 kV, 5 kA lightning arrestors on HT side - 3 No.
l) Prismatic oil level gauge.
m)Drain cum sampling valve for 250 KVA DTR
n) Top filter valve
o) Oil filling hole having p. 1-1/4‖ thread with plug and drain plug on the conservator.
p) Silica gel breather
q) Base channel 75x40 mm for up to 100 kVA and 100 mmx50 mm above 100 kVA,
460 mm long with holes to make them suitable for fixing on a platform or plinth.
r) 4 No. rollers for transformers of 200 kVA and above.
16. FASTENERS:
16.1 All bolts, studs, screw threads, pipe threads, bolt heads and nuts shall comply with the appropriate
Indian Standards for metric threads, or the technical equivalent.
16.2 Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used for small wiring
terminals.
16.3 All nuts and pins shall be adequately locked.
16.4 Wherever possible bolts shall be fitted in such a manner that in the event of failure of locking
resulting in the nuts working loose and falling off, the bolt will remain in position.
16.5 All ferrous bolts, nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall be treated to prevent corrosion,
by hot dip galvanizing, except high tensile steel bolts and spring washers which shall be electro-
galvanized/plated. Appropriate precautions shall be taken to prevent electrolytic action between
dissimilar metals.
16.6 Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three threads through the nut,
except when otherwise approved for terminal board studs or relay stems. If bolts and nuts are
placed so that they are inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners, special spanners shall be
provided.
16.7 The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw thread may form part of a
shear plane between members.
16.8 Taper washers shall be provided where necessary.
16.9 Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back of the securing screws.
17. SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING:
17.1 GENERAL
 All paints, when applied in a normal full coat, shall be free from runs, sags, wrinkles, patchiness,
brush marks or other defects.
 All primers shall be well marked into the surface, particularly in areas where painting is evident and
the first priming coat shall be applied as soon as possible after cleaning. The paint shall be
applied by airless spray according to manufacture recommendations. However, where ever
airless spray is not possible, conventional spray be used with prior approval of purchaser.
18. CLEANING AND SURFACE PREPARATION:
 After all machining, forming and welding has been completed, all steel work surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, welding slag or spatter and other contamination prior to any
painting.
 Steel surfaces shall be prepared by shot blast cleaning (IS9954) to grade Sq. 2.5 of ISO 8501-1 or
chemical cleaning including phosphating of the appropriate quality (IS 3618).
 Chipping, scraping and steel wire brushing using manual or power driven tools cannot remove
firmly adherent mill-scale. These methods shall only be used where blast cleaning is impractical.
Manufacturer to clearly explain such areas in his technical offer.

19. PROTECTIVE COATING:
As soon as all items have been cleaned and within four hours of the subsequent drying, they
shall be given suitable anti-corrosion protection.
20. PAINT MATERIAL:
 Following are the types of paint which may be suitably used for the items to be painted at shop
and supply of matching paint to site:
 Heat resistant paint (Hot oil proof) for inside surface
 For external surfaces one coat of thermo setting powder paint or one coat of epoxy primer
followed by two coats of synthetic enamel/ polyurethene base paint. These paints can be either air
drying or stoving.
 For highly polluted areas, chemical atmosphere or for places very near to the sea coast, paint as
above with one coat of high build Micaceous iron oxide (MIO) as an intermediate coat may be
used.
21. PAINTING PROCEDURE:
 All prepared steel surfaces should be primed before visible re-rusting occurs or within 4
hours, whichever is sooner. Chemical treated steel surfaces shall be primed as soon as the
surface is dry and while the surface is still warm.
 Where the quality of film is impaired by excess film thickness (wrinkling, mud cracking or
general softness) the supplier shall remove the unsatisfactory paint coating and apply
another coating. As a general rule, dry film thickness should not exceed the specified
minimum dry film thickens by more than 25%.
22. DAMAGED PAINTWORK:
 Any damage occurring to any part of a painting scheme shall be made good to the same
standard of corrosion protection and appearance as that was originally applied.
 Any damaged paint work shall be made good as follows:
 The damaged area, together with an area extending 25 mm around its boundary, shall be
cleaned down to bare metal.
 A priming coat shall be immediately applied, followed by a full paint finish equal to that
originally applied and extending 50 mm around the perimeter of the original damage.
 The repainted surface shall present a smooth surface. This shall be obtained by carefully
chamfering the paint edges before and after priming.
23. DRY FILM THICKNESS:
 To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall be applied as a continuous film of uniform
thickness and free of pores. Overspray, skips, runs, sags and drips should be avoided. The
different coats may or may not be of the same colour.
 Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied as per
manufacturer‘s recommendations.
 Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at the edges.

 The requirements for the dry film thickness (DFT) of paint and the materials to be used
shall be as given below:
Total dry film

Area to be
Sl. No. No. of thickness
Paint type painted
coats (min.) (microns)
inside 1 30
1 Thermo setting powder paint
outside 1 60
2 Liquid paint
a) Epoxy (primer) outside 1 30
b) P.U. Paint (Finish coat) outside 2 25 each
3 Hot oil paint/ Varnish inside 1 35/10
24. TESTS FOR PAINTED SURFACE:
 The painted surface shall be tested for paint thickness.

 The painted surface shall pass the cross hatch adhesion test and impact test as acceptance tests
and salt spray test and Hardness test as type test as per the relevant ASTM standards.
Note: Supplier shall guarantee the painting performance requirement for a period of not less
than 5 years.
25. TESTS
25.1 General Conditions
i) All the equipment offered shall be fully type tested by the bidder or his collaborator as per the
relevant standards including the additional type tests.
ii) The type test must have been conducted on a transformer of same design during the last five
years at the time of bidding. The bidder shall furnish four sets of type test reports as per
requirement of the bid document along with the offer. Offers without type test reports will be
treated as non-responsive.
The requirements of site tests are also given in this clause.
iii) The test certificates for all routine and type tests for the transformers and also for the bushings and
transformer oil shall be submitted with the bid.
iv) The procedure for testing shall be in accordance with IS1180 (Part-1) :2014 /2026 as the case may
be except for temperature rise test.
v) Before dispatch each of the completely assembled transformers shall be subjected to the routine
tests at the manufacturer‘s work.
vii) Besides the test reports, the following calculation sheets also needs to be furnished along with the
bid for each category of DTRs.
a. Short circuit (thermal and dynamic) withstand capacity of the distribution transformer by
way of theoretical evaluation, calculations and design considerations in the aforementioned
GTP.
b. Heat dissipation calculation sheet of the distribution transformer.
c. Total losses and Percentage calculation sheet of the transformer.
25.2 ROUTINE TESTS:
 Ratio, polarity, phase sequence and vector group.

 No Load current and losses at service voltage and normal frequency.
 Load losses at rated current and normal frequency.
 Impedance voltage test.
 Resistance of windings at each tap, cold (at or near the test bed temperature).
 Insulation resistance.
 Induced over voltage withstand test.
 Separate source voltage withstand test.
 Neutral current measurement-The value of zero sequence current in the neutral of
the star winding shall not be more than 2% of the full load current.
 Oil samples (one sample per lot) to comply with IS 1866.
 Measurement of no load losses and magnetizing current at rated frequency and
90%, 100% and 110% rated voltage.
 Pressure and vacuum test for checking the deflection.
25.3 TYPE TESTS:
The following type test reports conducted at reputed NABL accredited laboratories like CPRI/ERDA
shall have to be compulsorily submitted:
i) Temperature rise test (IS 2026, Part 2) for determining the maximum temperature rise after
continuous full load run. The ambient temperature and time of test should be stated in the test
certificate.
ii) Impulse voltage test: with chopped wave of IS 2026 part-III. BIL for 11 kV shall be 95 kV peak
instead of 75 kV.
iii) Short circuit withstand test (IS 2026, Part 5).
iv) Air Pressure Test: As per IS 1180.
Clause No 20.3 (a) is a new clause which added after clause No 20.3 at page No 50 of the
Technical Specifications of the bid document and may be read as
25.4 SPECIAL TESTS: The following test shall constitute the special tests. (optional)
i. Determination of sound levels [IS 2026 (Part 10)].

ii. No load current 112.5 percent voltage [refer clause 7.9.2 of IS 1180(Part 1): 2014].
iii. Paint adhesion tests: The test is performed as per ASTM D 3359 (Standard Test Methods for
measuring adhesion by Tape Test).
iv. BDV and moisture content of oil in the transformer (IS 335).
v. Measurement of zero-phase sequence impedance.
vi. Measurement of Harmonics of no-load current.
vii. Short circuit withstand test (IS 2026 (Part 5): Routine tests before and after short ciecuit test
shall be conducted as per IS 2026 (Part I)
7. Clause No 20.4 of Technical Specifications at page no 51 may be read as
25.5 OTHER TESTS:
i. Transformer tank shall be subjected to specified vacuum. The tank designed for vacuum
shall be tested at an internal pressure of 0.35 kg per sq cm absolute (250 mm of Hg) for
one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released shall
not exceed the values specified below:
Horizontal length of flat plate (in mm) Permanent deflection (in mm)
Upto and including 750 5.0

751 to 1250 6.5
1251 to 1750 8.0
1751 to 2000 9.5
2001 to 2250 11.0
2251 to 2500 12.0
2501 to 3000 16.0
Above 3000 19.0
ii. Transformer tank together with its radiator and other fittings shall be subjected to pressure
corresponding to twice the normal pressure or 0.35 kg / sq. cm. whichever is lower, measured at
the base of the tank and maintained for an hour. The permanent deflection of the flat plates after
the excess pressure has been released, shall not exceed the figures for vacuum test.
iii. Pressure relief device test: The pressure relief device shall be subject to increasing fluid pressure.
It shall operate before reaching the test pressure as specified in the above class. The operating
pressure shall be recorded. The device shall seal-off after the excess pressure has been released.
iv. Short Circuit Test and Impulse Voltage Withstand Tests: The purchaser intends to procure
transformers designed and successfully tested for short circuit and impulse test. In case the
transformers proposed for supply against the order are not exactly as per the tested design, the
supplier shall be required to carry out the short circuit test and impulse voltage withstand test
at their own cost in the presence of the representative of the purchaser.
v. The supply shall be accepted only after such test is done successfully, as it confirms on successful
withstand of short circuit and healthiness of the active parts thereafter on un-tanking after a short
circuit test.
vi. Apart from dynamic ability test, the transformers shall also be required to withstand thermal
ability test or thermal withstand ability will have to be established by way of calculations.
vii. It may also be noted that the purchaser reserves the right to conduct short circuit test and impulse
voltage withstand test in accordance with the IS, afresh on each ordered rating at purchaser cost,
even if the transformers of the same rating and similar design are already tested. This test shall
be when they are offered in a lot for supply or randomly from the supplies already made to
consignee‘s stores. The findings and conclusions of these tests shall be binding on the supplier.
viii. Type test certificates for the tests carried out on prototype of same specifications shall be
submitted along with the bid. The purchaser may select the transformer for type tests randomly.
25.6 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
25.6.1 At least 10% transformers of the offered lot (minimum of one) shall be subjected
manufacture before dispatch without any extra charges. The testing shall be carried
out in accordance with IS: 1180 (Part-1): 2014 and IS: 2026.
25.6.2 Checking of weights, dimensions, fitting and accessories, tank sheet thickness, oil quality,
material, finish and workmanship as per GTP and contract drawings.
25.6.3 Physical verification of core coil assembly and measurement of flux density of one unit of each rating,
in every inspection with reference to short circuit test report
25.6.4 Temperature rise test on one unit of the total ordered quantity
25.7 TESTS AT SITE:
The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on transformer after arrival at site and the
manufacturer shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions.
26 INSPECTION:
26.1 In respect of raw material such as core stampings, winding conductors, insulating paper and oil,
supplier shall use materials manufactured / supplied by standard manufacturer‘s and furnish the
manufacturer‘s test certificate as well as the proof of purchase from these manufacturers (excise gate
pass) for information of the purchaser. The bidder shall furnish following documents along with their
offer in respect of the raw materials:
i. Invoice of supplier.
ii.
iii. Packing list.
iv. Bill of lading
v. Bill of entry certificate by custom.
26.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF TRANSFORMER OIL:
26.2.1 To ascertain the quality of the transformer oil, the original manufacturer‘s test report
should be submitted at the time of inspection. Arrangements should also be made for testing of
transformer oil, after taking out the sample from the manufactured transformers and tested in
the presence of purchaser‘s representative.
26.2.2 To ensure about the quality of transformers, the inspection shall be carried out by the
representative at following two stages:
a) Online anytime during receipt of raw material and manufacture/ assembly whenever
the purchaser desires.
b) At finished stage i.e. transformers are fully assembled and are ready for dispatch.
26.2.3 The stage inspection shall be carried out in accordance with Annexure-II.
26.2.4 After the main raw-material i.e. core and coil material and tanks are arranged and transformers are
taken for production on shop floor and a few assembly have been completed, the firm shall intimate
the purchaser in this regard, so that an officer for carrying out such inspection could be deputed, as
far as possible within seven days from the date of intimation. During the stage inspection a few
assembled core shall be dismantled (only in case of CRGO material) to ensure that the CRGO
laminations used are of good quality. Further, as and when the transformers are ready for dispatch, an
offer intimating about the readiness of transformers, for final inspection for carrying out tests as per
relevant IS shall be sent by the firm along with Routine Test Certificates. The inspection shall
normally be arranged by the purchaser at the earliest after receipt of offer for pre-delivery inspection.
The Proforma for pre delivery inspection of Distribution transformers is placed at Annex- III.
26.2.5 In case of any defect / defective workmanship observed at any stage by the purchaser‘s Inspecting
Officer, the same shall be pointed out to the firm in writing for taking remedial measures. Further
processing should only be done after clearance from the Inspecting Officer/ purchaser.
26.2.6 All tests and inspection shall be carried out at the place of manufacture unless otherwise specifically
agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall offer
the Inspector representing the Purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charges, to satisfy him that
the material is being supplied in accordance with this specification. This will include Stage Inspection
during manufacturing stage as well as Active Part Inspection during Acceptance Tests.
26.2.7 The manufacturer shall provide all services to establish and maintain quality of workman ship in his
works and that of his sub-contractors to ensure the mechanical /electrical performance of
components, compliance with drawings, identification and acceptability of all materials, parts and
equipment as per latest quality standards of ISO 9000.
26.2.8 Purchaser shall have every right to appoint a third-party inspection to carry out the inspection process.
26.2.9 The purchaser has the right to have the test carried out at his own cost by an independent agency
wherever there is a dispute regarding the quality supplied. Purchaser has right to test 1% of the
supply selected either from any of the consignee‘s stores or field to check the quality of the
product. In case of any deviation purchaser have every right to reject the entire lot or penalize the
manufacturer, which may lead to blacklisting, among other things.
27. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:
27.1The bidder shall invariably furnish following information along with his bid, failing which his bid shall
be liable for rejection. Information shall be separately given for individual type of equipment offered.
Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of sub-suppliers for the raw materials, list of
standards according to which the raw materials are tested, list of tests normally carried out on raw
materials in the presence of bidder‘s representative, copies of test certificates.
27.2 Information and copies of test certificates as above in respect of bought out accessories.
27.3 List of manufacturing facilities available.
27.4 Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing exists.
27.5 List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally carried out for quality
control and details of such tests and inspection.
27.6 List of testing equipment available with the bidder for final testing of equipment along with
valid calibration reports. These shall be furnished with the bid. Manufacturer shall possess 0.1
accuracy class instruments for measurement of losses.
27.7 Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) withholds points for purchaser‘s inspection.
27.8 The successful bidder shall within 30 days of placement of order, submit following
information to the purchaser :

27.8.1 List of raw materials as well as bought out accessories and the names of sub- suppliers
selected from those furnished along with offer.
27.8.2 Type test certificates of the raw materials and bought out accessories.
27.8.3 The successful bidder shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out
accessories and central excise passes for raw material at the time of routine testing.
28. PENALTY FOR NON PERFORMANCE:
(i) During testing at supplier‘s works if it is found that the actual measured losses are more than the
values quoted by the bidder, the purchaser shall reject the transformer and he shall also have
the right to reject the complete lot.
(ii) Purchaser shall reject the entire lot during the test at supplier‘s work if the temperature rise
exceeds the specified values.
(iii) Purchaser shall reject any transformer during the test at supplier‘s works, if the impedance values
differ from the guaranteed values including tolerance.
29. DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTATION:
29.1The bidder shall furnish along with the bid the dimensional drawings of the items offered
indicating all the fittings.
29.2Dimensional tolerances.
29.3Weight of individual components and total weight.

29.4An outline drawing front (both primary and secondary sides) and end-elevation and plan of the tank
and terminal gear, wherein the principal dimensions shall be given.
29.5Typical general arrangement drawings of the windings with the details of the insulation at each
point and core construction of transformer.
29.6Typical general arrangement drawing showing both primary and secondary sides and end-elevation
and plan of the transformer.
30. PACKING AND FORWARDING:
30.1 The packing should be done as per Manufacturer standard condition, however it should be ensured
that the packing is such that, the material would not get damaged during transit by Rail / Road /
Sea.
30.2 The marking on each package shall be as per the relevant IS.
31. MANADATORY SPARES:
Mandatory spares will be supplied as per purchaser‘s requirement.
32. GUARANTEE
32.1The manufacturers of the transformer shall provide a guarantee of 66 months from the date of receipt at
the consignee of the Utility or 60 months from the date of commissioning, whichever is earlier. In case
the distribution transformer fails within the guarantee period the purchaser shall immediately inform the
supplier who shall take back the failed DT within 7 days from the date of the intimation at his own cost
and replace/repair the transformer within 20 (twenty) days of date of intimation with a roll over
guarantee.
32.2 The outage period i.e. period from the date of failure till unit is repaired/ replaced shall not be
counted for arriving at the guarantee period.
32.3 In the event of the supplier‘s inability to adhere to the aforesaid provisions, suitable
penal action will be taken against the supplier which may inter alia include blacklisting of the firm for
future business with the purchaser for a certain period.
33. SCHEDULES:
33.1 The bidder shall fill in the following schedule which will be part of the offer. If the schedule
are not submitted duly filled in with the offer, the offer shall be liable for rejection.
Schedule A : Guaranteed Technical Particulars
Schedule B : Schedule of Deviations.
34. DEVIATIONS:
34.1The bidders are not allowed to deviate from the principal requirements of the Specifications.
However, the bidder is required to submit with his bid in the relevant schedule a detailed list of
all deviations without any ambiguity. In the absence of a deviation list in the deviation
schedules, it is understood that such bid conforms to the bid specifications and no post-bid
negotiations shall take place in this regard.
34.2The discrepancies, if any, between the specification and the catalogues and / or literatures
submitted as part of the offer by the bidders, shall not be considered and representations in this
regard shall not be entertained.
34.3If it is observed that there are deviations in the offer in guaranteed technical particulars other
than those specified in the deviation schedules then such deviations shall be treated as
deviations.
34.4All the schedules shall be prepared by vendor and are to be enclosed with the bid.
Annexure – II
PROFORMA FOR STAGE INSPECTION OF DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
(A) GENERAL INFORMATION:

1. Name of firm :
2. Order No. and Date :
3. Rating-wise quantity offered :
4. Details of offer
a) Rating
b) Quantity
c) Serial Numbers
5. Details of last stage inspected lot:
a) Total quantity inspected

b) Serial Numbers
c) Date of stage inspection
d) Quantity offered for final inspection of
(a) above with date
(b)
(B) AVAILABILITY OF MATERIAL FOR OFFERED QUANTITY:
Details to be filled in
(C) POSITION OF MANUFACTURING STAGE OF THE OFFERED QUANTITY:
a) Complete tanked assembly

b) Core and coil assembly ready
c) Core assembled
d) Coils ready for assembly
(i) HV Coils
(ii) LV Coils
Note: (i) A quantity of more than 100 Nos. shall not be entertained for stage inspection.
(ii) The stage inspection shall be carried out in case:-
(a) At least 25% quantity offered has been tanked and

(b) core coil assembly of further at least 30% of the quantity offered has been
completed.
(iii) Quantity offered for stage inspection should be offered for final Inspection within 15 days
from the date of issuance of clearance for stage inspection, otherwise stage inspection
already cleared shall be liable for cancellation.
Deviation and
S. No. Particulars As As
Remarks
offered observed
(D) Inspection of Core:
(I) Core Material
Manufacture's Characteristic Certificate
1 in respect of grade of lamination used.
(Please furnish test certificate)
2 Remarks regarding rusting and
smoothness of core.
3 Whether laminations used for top and bottom
yoke are in one piece.
(II) Core Construction:
1 No. of steps
2 Dimension of steps
Step No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
As offered:
W mm
T mm
As found:
W mm
T mm
3 Core Dia. (mm)

4 Total cross section area of core
5 Effective cross-sectional area of core
6 Clamping arrangement
(i) Channel Size
(ii) Bolt Size and No
(iii) Tie Rods size and No.
(iv) Painting
(a) Channels
(b) Tie Roads
(c) Bolts
7 Whether top yoke is cut for LV connection
If Yes, at 7 above, whether
8 Reinforcement is done.
9 Size of support channels provided for core base and
bottom yoke (Single piece of channels are only
acceptable)
10 Thickness of insulation provided
between core base and support channel.
11 Core length (leg center to leg center)
12 window height
13 Core height
14 Core weight only (without channels etc.)
(E) INSPECTION OF WINDING
(I) Winding material
(1) Material used for
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
(2) Grade of material for
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
(3) Test certificate of manufacturer
(enclose copy) for winding material of:
(a) HV
(b) LV
(II) CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
(1) Size of cross sectional area of
conductor for:
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
(2) Type of insulation for conductor of:
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
(3) Diameter of wire used for delta

formation (mm)
(4) Diameter of coils in:
(a) LV winding
I) Internal dia. (mm)
ii) Outer dia. (mm)
(b) HV winding
i) Internal dia. (mm)
ii) Outer dia. (mm)
(5) Current Density of winding material
used for:
a) HV
b) LV
(6) Whether neutral formation on top
(7) HV Coils/Phase
a) Number
b) Turns / Coil Total turns
(8) LV Coils/Phase
a) Number
b) Turns / Coil Total turns
(9) Method of HV Coils joints
(10) Total weight of coils of
(a) HV winding (Kg)
(b) LV winding (Kg)
(F) INSULATION MATERIALS:
(I) MATERIALS:
1) Craft paper
(a) Make
(b) Thickness (mm)
(c) Test certificate of manufacturer
(enclose copy)
2) Press Board
(a) Make
(b) Thickness (mm)
(c) Test certificate of manufacturer
(enclose copy)
3) Material used for top and bottom
yoke insulation
(II) Type and thickness of material used: (mm)
a) Between core and LV
b) Spacers
c) Inter Layer
d) Between HV and LV winding
e) Between phases
f) End insulation
(G) Clearances: (mm)

(I) Related to core and windings

1) LV to core (Radial)
2) Between HV and LV (Radial)
3) (i) Phase to Phase between HV
Conductor
(ii) Whether two Nos. Press Board
each of minimum 1 mm thick
provided to cover the tie rods.
4) Thickness of locking spacers

between LV coils (mm)
5) Axial wedges between HV and
LV coils /phase (Nos.)
6) No. of radial spacers per phase
between HV coils
7) Size of duct between LV and HV
winding (mm)
Between core - coil assembly and tank: (mm)

(II)
1) Between winding and body:

a) Tank Lengthwise
b) Tank Breadth wise
2) Clearance between top cover and top
yoke upto 100 kVA and between top cover
and top most live part of tap changing
switch for 200 kVA and above.
(H) TANK:
(I) Constructional details
1) Rectangular shape
2) Thickness of side wall (mm)
3) Thickness of top and bottom
plate (mm)
4) provision of slopping top cover
towards HV bushing
5) Tank internal dimensions (mm)
a) Length
b) Breadth
c) Height
(i) On LV side
(ii) On LV side
General details:
1) Inside painted by varnish/ oil
corrosion resistant paint (please
specify which type of coating
done).
2) Gasket between top cover and tank

i) Material
(II) ii) Thickness (mm)
iii) Jointing over laps (mm)
3) Reinforcement of welded angle
(specify size and No. of angle provided)
on side walls of tank.
4) Provision of lifting lugs:

a) Numbers
b) Whether lugs of 8 mm thick MS Plate
provided
c) Whether reinforced by welded plates
edge wise below the lug upto re-
enforcing angle of the tank done.
5) Pulling lug of MS Plate

a) Nos.
b) Thickness (mm)
Whether provided on breadth side or length
side
6) Provision of air release plug
7) Provision of galvanized GI Nuts Bolts

with 1 No. Plain and 1 No. spring
washer.
8) Deformation of length wise side wall
of tank when subject to:
a) Vacuum of (-) 0.7 kg. / sq. cm. for
30 min. Pressure of 0.8 kg/sq. cm. for 30
minutes.
(I) RAIDATORS:
1 Fin Radiators of 1.25 mm thick sheet.
a) Dimension of each fin (Lx B x T)
b) Fins per radiator
c) Total No. of radiators
2 certificate regarding heat dissipation

(excluding Top and Bottom) in w/sq m
Verification of position of radiator with
3
respect to bushing.
(J) CONSERVATOR:
1 Dimensions (L x D) (in mm)
2 Volume (m3)
Inside dia. of Conservator tank pipe
3
(mm)
Whether conservator outlet pipe is

projected approx. 20 mm inside the
4
conservator tank.
Whether arrangement made so that oil

5
does not fall on the active parts.
Whether die cast metal oil level gauge

6 indicator having three positions at (-
5°C, 30 °C and 98 °C) is provided.
Whether drain plug and filling hole

7
with cover is provided.
Inner side of the conservator Tank

8
painted with-
(K) BREATHER:
Whether Die cast Aluminium body
1
breather for silica gel provided.
2 Make
3 Capacity
(L) TERMINALS:
Material whether of Brass Rods/
1
Tinned Copper.
a) HV
b) LV
2 Size (dia. in mm)
a) HV
b) LV
Method of Star connection formed on LV
side of 6mm thick (Should use Al./Cu.
Flat bolted/ brazed with crimped lugs on
winding alternatively for 63 and 100 kVA
3 ratings brazing is done covered with
tubular sleeve duly crimped).
- Please state dimensions of Al/ Cu flat or
tubular sleeve used. (mm)
Method of Connection of LV winding to

LV Bushing (end of winding should be
4
crimped with lugs (Al/Cu) and bolted
with bushing stud).
Method of Connection of HV winding to
HV bushing (Copper joint should be done
by using silver brazing alloy and for
5
Aluminium, brazing rod or with tubular
connector crimped at three
spots).
Whether SRB Ptube/insulated paper used
6
for formation of Delta on HV.
Whether Empire sleeves used on the
7 portion of HV winding joining to HV
bushing.
Whether neutral formation is covered
8
with cotton tape
(M) BUSHINGS:
Whether HV bushings mounted on side
1
walls.
Whether sheet metal pocket used for

2 mounting bushing (pipe are not
acceptable)
a) HV
b) LV
Whether arrangement for studs for fitting
of HV Bushing are in diamond
shape (so that Arcing Horns are placed
vertically).
Position of mounting of LV bushings.
Bushing Clearance: (mm)
a) LV to Earth
b) HV to Earth
c) Between LV Bushings
d) Between HV Bushings
(N) TANK BASE CHANNEL /ROLLERS:

1 Size of channel (mm)
Whether channels welded across the
2
length of the tank.
3 Size and type of roller (mm)
(O) OIL:
1 Name of supplier
2 Break down voltage of oil: (kV)
i) Filled in tanked transformer
ii) In storage tank (to be tested by
Inspecting Officer).
3 copy)
(P) ENGRAVING:
1 Engraving of Sl. No. and name of firm.
i) On bottom of clamping channel of
core-coil assembly.
ii) On side wall and top cover of tank
along with date of dispatch.
MS plate of size 125x125 mm welded
on width side of stiffener
Following details engraved (as per
approved GTP):
(a) Serial Number
(b) Name of firm
(c) Order No. and Date
(d) Rating
(e) Name of Inspecting Officer
(f) Designation
(g) Date of dispatch
(R) NAME PLATE DETAILS:
Whether Name Plate is as per approved
drawing
(S) Colour of Transformer
Light Admiral Grey
(T) CHECKING OF TESTING FACILITIES:
(Calibration certificate also to be

checked for its validity)
TESTS:
1. No Load Current
2. No Load Loss
3. % Impedance
4. Load Losses
5. Insulation Resistance Test
6. Vector Group Test (phase
relationship)
7. Ratio and Polarity test relationship
8. Transformer Oil Test (Break Down
Voltage)
9. Magnetic Balance
10. Measurement of winding resistance (HV
and LV both)
11. Induced over voltage withstand test
(Double voltage and Double frequency)
12. Separate source power frequency
withstand test at 28 kV for HV and 3 kV for
LV (one minute).
13. Air pressure/ Oil leakage Test
14. Vacuum test
15. Unbalanced current test
16. Temperature rise (Heat Run) test.
(U) We have specifically checked the

following and found the same as per
G.T.P./deviations observed as
mentioned against each:
i) Restlessness of CRGO laminations
used
ii) Core steps
iii) Core area
iv) Core weight
v) Winding cross sectional area
a) LV
b) HV
vi) Weight of windings
vii) Clearance between winding and wall
of tank (mm)
a) Length-wise
b) Breadth-wise
viii) Clearance between top of yoke/top most
live part of tap changer to tank cover.
ix) Details of Neutral formation
a) LV
b) HV
xi) Slope of tank top
Position of mounting of bushings
Annexure-III
PROFORMA FOR PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION OF DISTRIBUTIONTRANSFORMERS

1. Name of the firm :

2. Details of offer made :
(i) Order No. and Date :
(ii) Rating :
(iii) Quantity :
(iv) Sl. No. of transformers :
3. Date of stage inspection of the lot :
4. Reference of stage inspection clearance :
5. Quantity offered and inspected against the

order prior to this lot
(A) ACCEPTANCE TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT
Sl. No. PARTICULARS OBSERVATIONS

1. (a) Ratio Test AB/an
BC/bn
CA/Cn
(b) Polarity Test
2. No load loss measurement
W1
W2
W3
TOTAL
Multiplying Factor
CT
Watt meter
Total x MF
NET LOSS
3. Load loss measurement
W1
W2
W3
Total
Multiplying Factors:-
CT
Watt meter
PT
Total x MF
Loss at ambient temperature (watt)
Loss at 750 C (with calculation sheet) (watt)
4. Winding Resistance:
H.V. (In Ohms)
(a) At ambient temperature of 0 C. A-B
B -C
C-A
(b) Resistance (Per Phase) at 75 0 C. A

B
C
L.V. (In Ohm/Phase)
(a) At ambient temperature of 0 C. a-n
b-n
c-n
(b) Resistance (Per Phase) at 75 0 C. a
b
c
5. Insulation Resistance (M ohm) : HV-LV
HV-E
LV-E
6. Separate Source Voltage withstand test voltage:
HV 28 kV for 60 secs.
LV 3 kV for 60 secs.
7. Induced over-voltage withstand test at double 100 Hz, 866 volts
voltage and double frequency for 60 seconds.
8. No load current at
90% volts
110% volts
9. Unbalance current
10. Vector group test Diagram and readings be shown in
separate sheets
11. Percentage Impedance at 750 C (Please furnish

calculation sheet)
12. Transformer oil test (Break down voltage)
13. Oil leakage test
14. Heat run test To be carried out once against the
order
15. Bushing clearance (mm) HV LV
(a) Phase to Phase
(b) Phase to Earth
16. Comments on compliance by the firm
on the modifications done as per stage
inspection clearance letter issued
17. Whether fittings of the order have been verified.
18. Whether aluminium die cast silica gel breather
with tin container is fitted on the transformers
offered.
19. Whether engraving of Sl. No. and Name of
firm on core clamping channel, side wall and
top cover of tank has been verified.
20. Whether MS Plate of size 125 x 125 mm welded
on with side of stiffner.
21. Whether engraving of name of firm, Sl. No. and
Rating of transformer, Order No. and date and
Date of Dispatch on MS Plate.
22. Copy of calibration certificates of metering
equipments be enclosed.
B. TO BE SEEN / DIMENSIONS TO BE NOTED AT THE TIME OF DISMANTLING OF

TRANSFORMERS:
Sl. No. PARTICULARS OBSERVATIONS
1. Details of the transformer dismantled for physical

verification
(a) Rating (kVA)
(b) Sl. No.
2. Whether GI Nut Bolts with one spring one plain
washer provided for tightening the tank cover.
3 Details of gasket used between top cover and tank
Material:
(i) Thickness (mm)
(ii) Type of joints
4 Whether core is earthed properly with copper
strip (one end should be tightened in between
the core laminations and other end bolted on
core clamping channel).
5 Connections from winding to bushings (describe
the manner in which it has been done)
(a) HV
(b) LV
(c) Formation of Star connection on LV side.
6 Winding wire dia and cross- sectional area:
(a) HV
(i) Dia (mm)
(ii) Area (sq mm)
(b) LV
(i) L x W x Nos. of layer
(ii) Area (sq mm)
7. Thickness of press board (s) provided between
HV coils to cover the tie rods
8. Whether painted with oil and corrosion resistant
paint / varnish
(a) Inside of the tank
(b) Inside of the conservator tank
(c) Core clamping and core base channels
(d) Tie rods
(e) Core bolts
9. Whether tie rods and core bolts insulated, if yes,
material of insulation.
10. Whether flap on inner side of top cover provided to
prevent direct falling of oil on core- coil assembly.
11. Method of joints
(a) Between HV Coils
(b) Between tap coils

(c) For tap changer
12. Whether engraving of Sl. No. and name of firm done on
bottom channel of core coil assembly.
13. Diameter of copper wire, used for formation of delta
(should not be less than 1.5 times the dia of conductor).
(mm)
14. Whether empire sleeves provided upto the end portion of
HV winding joining to bushing
15. HV Coils:
(a) Inner dia. (mm)
(b) Outer dia. (mm)
16. LV Coils:
(a) Inner dia. (mm)
(b) Outer dia. (mm)
17. Core dia.
18. Core height including base channel and insulation in
between (mm)
19. Leg Center of core
20. Clearances between
(a) Core and LV (mm)
(b) HV and LV (mm)
(c) Phase to phase of HV coils (mm)
(d) Core coil assembly and tank body (mm)
(i) Length-wise
(ii) Width-wise
(e) Top of yoke and top cover (mm)
(f) Top most live part of tap changer and top cover.
21. Weight of core only (kg)
22. Weight of windings (kg)
(a) LV
(b) HV
23. Whether core laminations are in one piece, used for
(a) Bottom yoke
(b) Top yoke
24. Specific remarks regarding smoothness and
rusting of core used.
25 Volume of oil filled (to be done once against the order)
(a) In conservator tank
(b) In tank of the transformer
26 Weight of transformer (inclusive of all fittings,
accessories, oil etc. complete)
27 Inner dimensions of the tank
(a) Length
(b) Width
(c) Height
(i) LV side
(ii) HV side
28 Remarks, if any:
Note: Please ensure that complete details have been filled in the proforma and no. column has
been left blank.
Annexure-IV
SOURCE OF MATERIAL/PLACES OF MANUFACTURE TESTING AND INSPECTION
Sl. No. Item Source of Place of Place of testing

Material Manufacture and inspection
1. Laminations
2. Copper Conductor
3. Insulated winding wires
4. Oil
5. Press boards
6. Kraft paper
7. MS Plates/Angles/Channels
8. Gaskets
9. Bushing HV/LV
10. Paints
SCHEDULE IB ADDITIONAL DETAILS
Sl. No. Description

1. Core Grade
2. Core diameter mm
3. Gross core area sq cm
4. Net core area sq cm
5. Flux density Tesla
6. Mass of core kg
7. Loss per kg of core at the specified flux watt
density
8. Core window height mm
9. Center to center distance of the core mm
10. No. of LV Turns
11. No. of H V turns
12. Size of LV conductor bare/covered mm
13. Size of HV conductor bare/covered mm
14. No. of parallels
15. Current density of LV winding A/sq mm.
16. Current density of HV winding A/sq mm
17. Wt. of the LV winding for Transformer kg
18. Wt. of the HV winding for Transformer kg
19. No. of LV Coils/phase
20. No. of HV coils / phase
21. Height of LV Windings mm
22. Height of HV winding mm

23. ID/OD of HV winding mm
24. ID/OD of LV winding mm
25. Size of the duct in LV winding mm
26. Size of the duct in HV winding mm
27. Size of the duct between HV and LV mm
28. HV winding to LV winding clearance mm
29. HV winding to tank clearance mm
30. Calculated impedance %
31. HV to earth creepage distance mm
32. LV to earth creepage distance mm
FORM FOR GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
Required Guaranteed Technical Particulars
Bidder shall confirm by signing with stamp on the GTP

Sl. No. GTP parameter Bidder confirmation
1 Name of the manufacturer and address

2 Service
3 Type
4 Rating in KVA
a Rated Output
b Rated Voltage - HV
c Rated Voltage - LV
d Rated Current - HV
e Rated Current- LV
f No-load voltage ratio
g No. of phases
h Rated Frequency
5 Method of cooling, whether it has
An elliptical tube radiator having
a
connection to the tank through header
Pressed steel radiators having connection
b
to the tank through pipe
c Corrugated sheet
6 Tank Dimension
a Length
b Breadth
c Height
7 Tank Sheet thickness (Side x Bottom x Top)
8 Size and no. of stiffeners
9 Details of Core
a Core Diameter x Window Height x Limb
Center
b Cross-sectional area
Maximum Flux Density a rated voltage
c
and frequency
d Grade of lamination
e Thickness of lamination
f Weight of the lamination per transformer
i Limb
ii Yoke
iii Total
(Details of the cross-sectional area, flux
density calculation shall be submitted
alongwith the offer)
10 HV Coil Construction details
a Type of winding
b Size of the bare conductor
c Size of the covered conductor
d Cross-sectional area of the conductor
e Conductor covering
f Current at full load per phase
g Current density as offered
h No. of coils per phase
i Internal Diameter of the coil
j External Diameter of the coil
k Axial Length of the coil
l No. Of turns per phase
m Mean Length of turn
n Inter-layer insulation
Weight of the insulated conductor used in
o
one leg
p Resistance per phase at 75oC
q I2R loss per phase x 3
r Maximum Current Density
(guaranteed)
11 LV Coil Construction details
a Type of winding
b Size of the bare conductor
c Size of the covered conductor
d Cross-sectional area of the conductor
e Conductor covering
f Current at full load per phase
g Current density as offered
h No. of coils per phase
i Internal Diameter of the coil
j External Diameter of the coil
k Axial Length of the coil
l No. Of turns per phase
m Mean Length of turn
n Inter-layer insulation
Weight of the insulated conductor used in
o
one leg
p Resistance per phase at 75oC
q i2r loss per phase x 3
r Maximum current density
(guaranteed)
12 Insulation details:
a HV to yoke
b LV to yoke
c Inter-coil spacers between HV sections
d Core channel separator
e Bottom foot channel insulation
f Inter-phase barrier
g Cylinder between core to LV
h Cylinder between LV to HV
i Oil duct between LV to cylinder
j Oil ducts between cylinder to HV
k No. Of blocks per circle
13 Details of internal clearance
Internal clearance between the inner wall of
a
the tank and the outside surface of HV coil
i On the length side
ii On the breadth side
b Radial clearance between core to LV
c Radial clearance between LV to HV
d Phase to Phase clearance between HV limbs
e End clearance of HV Coil to yoke
f End clearance of LV Coil to yoke
g Horizontal spacer between HV Sections
Clearance between top of Yoke and inside
h
of
tank cover
i Gap between Yoke and bottom of tank
14 Type of supports of HV Delta and line leads
15 Material and size of HV Delta leads
16 Material and size of HV Line leads
17 Size of Core frame channel
18 Size and no. of core studs
19 Size and no. of tie rods
20 Core Earthing material
Impulse test voltage on HV winding with
21 1.2/50microseconds wave shape (as per
clause no. 13 of IS-2026-Part III)
22 Performance reference temperature
No load loss at rated voltage and frequency
(No. Load calculation with the handling factor
23 of 25% supported by characteristics curve
shall be submitted alongwith the offer)
Load Loss at rated load at 75oC
(Note: Calculation of load loss alongwith
24
the computation of stray loss shall be
submitted alongwith the offer)
Stray Loss equivalent to KVA rating
25
shall be added to I2R loss
Impedance at full load @ 50 Hz
26
corrected to 75oC
27 % Reactance at Full Load and at 50 Hz
28 % Reactance at Full Load and at 75oC

29 Efficiency at UPF and 0.85 PF
i At 125 % Load
ii At 100 % Load
iii At 75 % Load
iv At 50 % Load
v At 25 % Load
30 Max Efficiency
i Load at which Max. Efficiency will
occur
ii Max. Efficiency
31 Limit of unbalance current on LV Neutral
32 Regulation
i at UPF
ii at 0.90 PF
iii at 0.70 PF
33 Temperature Rise ( Max)
i Top Oil measured by thermometer
ii Winding measured by resistance
34 Particulars of HV and LV Bushings:
a Name of the manufacturer and address
b Type (KV/A/ISS)
i For 11 kV
ii For 433 V
35 Transformer Oil
a Make
b Electrical characteristics
c Qty of Oil for first filling (minimum)
Qty of Oil proposed to be soaked by
d
the insulation
Qty of oil drained out during

physical verification (minimum)
e Note: In case of the proposed oil soaked is
more than the above, the qty of the oil for the
first filling shall be proportionally increased)
Facilities available with the bidders to carry

out acceptance tests on oil samples in respect Bidder shall confirm yes or no, No
f of BDV, tandelta, resistivity and acidity as other reply is appreciated.
per IS 335
36 Weights of the different parts:
a Core
b Aluminium
c Complete active parts
d Tank and fittings
e Complete Transformer
37 Overall dimension:
a Length
b Breadth
c Height
38 Size of the conservator
a Diameter
b Length
Volume
c Note: Conservator volume should be atleast
10% of the total oil qty
39 Thermometer Pocket (TP)
a Location of the TP
b Length of the TP
c Diameter of the pipe
40 Radiator Details
a For Elliptical tube radiators
i No. Of radiator bank per transformer
ii No. Of tube per radiator
iii Length of each tube
Total length of tubes used in
iv
the transformer
Note:
(i) While calculating the length of the tube,
use avg oil temperature which is 0.8 x max
top oil rise.
(ii) Heat dissipation from the top and bottom
surface of the tank shall not be considered
while calculating the tank surface.
(iii) Necessary design calculation in
support of the temperature rise shall be
submitted.
b For pressed steel radiators
i No. Of radiators per transformer
ii No. Of fins per radiator
iii Width of each fin
iv Center height of the pipe
v Header pipe diameter
Note:
(i) Necessary design calculation in support

of temperature rise shall be submitted
alongwith the offer.
(ii) Heat dissipation of the tank side wall shall
be taken as 500W/sq.m.
(iii) Heat dissipation from the top and
bottom shall not be considered.
(iv) Correction factor in respect of horizontal
distance, vertical distance and no. of fins shall
be applied.
Table for watt dissipation per fin of standard
radiator manufacturers shall be submitted with
the offer.
Sand blasting/shot blasting facilities for
41 automatic surface cleaning of the tank
available with the bidder.
42 Type tests
a Is the offered design type tested
b If yes, fill up the following table
Short circuit dynamic and 2 sec thermal

i
withstand test
Impulse withstand test with chopped wave
ii
as per Clause no. 13 of IS2026 Part III
Yes/No
43 Any technical deviation offered Note: If yes, mention the clause no and
reason for deviation.
The details of BIS Level-1 & 2 DTR such as type test reports, GA Drawings, BIS License etc. may be
uploaded as per IS 1180 (Part 1): 2014 with latest amendments (1, 2, 3 & 4).
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL TUBULAR POLES FOR OVERHEAD LINES
1. SCOPE:
This specification covers the general requirements towards design, manufacture, testing at
manufacturers works, supply and delivery for tubular steel poles of circular cross section (swaged
type) for overhead lines.
2. STANDARD:
The tubular steel poles shall conform to the latest edition of Indian Standard specification IS: 2713
(Part – I, III): 1980 or any other authoritative standards (as amended up-todate) except where
specified otherwise in this specification.
3. Topography and Climatic Condition:

The materials offered, shall be suitable for operation in tropical climate and will be subjected to the
sun and inclement weather and shall be able to withstand wide range of temperature variation. For
the purpose of design, average atmospheric temperature may be considered to be 50ºC with humidity
nearing saturation.
4. Materials:
The materials used in construction of tubular steel poles shall be of the tested quality of steels of
minimum tensile strength 540 MPa (: 55Kgf/mm2). The materials, when analysed in accordance with
IS:228 (Part-III:1972) and IS:228 (Part-IX) shall not show sulpher and phosphorous contents of more
than 0.060 percent each.
5. Types, Size and construction:

Tubular Steel Poles shall be swaged type. GI climbing rungs each 700 mm long fabricated out of ISA
60x60x6 mm angles shall be fixed to the pole above 5 mtr. Height at an interval of 450 mm with 10
mm dia. GI u BOLT, spring washers & nuts.
Swaged poles shall be made of seamless or welded tubes of suitable lengths swaged and jointed
together. No circumferential joints shall be permitted in the individual tube lengths of the poles. If
welded tubes are used they shall have one longitudinal weld seam only: and the longitudinal welds
shall be staggered at each swaged joint.
Swaging may be done by any mechanical process. The upper edge of each joint shall be chamfered if
at an angle of about 45o. The upper edge need not be chamfered if a circumferential weld is to be
deposited in accordance with clause No. 5.3 2 of IS: 2713 (Part- I):1980.
The length of joints on swaged poles shall be in accordance with clause No. 5.4 of IS: 2713 (Par-I):
1980.
Poles shall be well-finished, clean and free from harmful surface defects. Ends of the poles shall be cut
square. Poles shall be straight, smooth and cylindrical. The weld joints, if any, shall be of good quality,
free from scale, surface defects, cracks, etc.
Tolerances for outside diameter, thickness, length, weight and straightness shall be in accordance with
IS: 2713 (Part-I) :1980.
The poles shall be GALVENISED and coated with black bituminous paint conforming to IS
: 158-1968 throughout, internally and externally, upto the level which goes inside the earth.
6. Earthing Arrangements:
For earthing arrangement, a through hole of 14mm diameter shall be provided in each pole at a
height of 300 mm above the planting depth.
7. Tests and Test Certificates:
The following tests shall be conducted on finished poles:
Tensile test and chemical analysis for sulpher and phosphorous, Deflection test, Permanent set test,
and Drop test.
In addition to above verification of dimensions as per IS: 2713 (Part-III) : 1980 shall be carried out
during acceptance lots.
Number of poles selected for conducting different tests shall be in accordance to clause No. 10.1.1
and No. 10.1.12: of IS: 2713 (Part-I) 1980.
Tests shall be carried out before supply of each consignment at the manufacturer‘s woks and test
certificates should be submitted to the purchaser for approval prior to delivery.
Re-tests, if any, shall be made in accordance with IS: 2713 (Part-I) 1980.
Purchaser reserves the right to inspect during manufacturing and depute his representative to
inspect/test at the works. If any extra cost is required for carrying out the above specified tests, the
same shall be borne by the manufacturer.
8. Marking:
The poles shall be marked with designation, manufacturer‘s identification, year of
manufacture and name of the purchaser: APDCL (SOPD)
The poles may also be marked with the ISI certification mark.
9. Guaranteed technical particulars:
The manufacturer shall furnish all necessary guaranteed technical particulars in the prescribed
Performa enclosed hereinafter.
10. Performance:
The manufacturer shall furnish a list of the major supplies effected during the last 3 (three) years
indicating the volume of supply and actual delivery dates.
Manufacturer may not be considered if the past manufacturing experience is found to be less that 3
(three) years.
11. Deviation:
Any deviation in technical specification shall be clearly indicated with sufficient reasons thereof.
Purchaser shall however reserve the right to accept and/or reject the same without assigning any
reasons what-so-ever.
ANNEXURE – „A‟
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TUBULAR STEEL POLES (SWAGED TYPE)
16 meter long 14.5 meter long 12 meter long
1) Standard IS: 2713 (Part-I and III): 1980 as amended upto date
2) Type of Pole Swaged Type
3) Designation 540 SP 80 540 SP 76 540 SP 66
4) Overall Length 16.0 meter 14.5 meters 12 meters
5) Planting depth 2.0 meter 2.0 meters 2.0 meters
6) Height above ground 13.70 meter 12.5 meters 10.0 meters
7) Effective length of Each
section.
a) Bottom 7.00 meter 6.50 meters 5.80 meters
b) Middle 4.50 meter 4.00 meters 3.10 meters
c) Top 4.50 meter 4.00 meters 3.10 meters
8) Outside diameter and
Thickness of each Section.
a) Bottom 219.1x5.90 mm 219.1x5.90 mm 219.1x5.90 mm
b) Middle 193.7x4.85 mm 193.7x4.85 mm 193.7x4.85 mm
c) Top 165.1x4.50 mm 165.1x4.50 mm 165.1x4.50 mm
9) Joint Length (in cm.):

a) Bottom (J2) 45 cm. 45 cm. 45 cm.
b) Top (J1) 40 cm. 40 cm. 40 cm.
10) Approximate weight of Pole 416 Kg. 380 Kg. 322 Kg.
11) Point of application of load
0.60 mtr 0.60 mtr 0.60 mtr
below/top (mtr.)
12) Breaking load (in Kgf) 861 947 1199
13) Working load with factor of 379 480
Safety: 2.5 (in Kgf) 344
14) Crippling load (in Kgf) 611 672 851

15) Load for permanent set Not 460 583
exceeding 13mm (in Kgf) 418
16) Load for Temporary

Deflection of 157.5 mm (in Kgf) 60 81 169
A Mild Steel base plate of

A Mild Steel base A Mild Steel base
size 400×400×10mm
plate of size 400 plate of size 400 mm
Base Plate shall be welded at the bottom
mm x 500 mm x x 500 mm x 20mm
of the pole.
20mm shall be shall be welded at the
welded at the bottom of the pole.
bottom of the
pole.
Galvanization: as per Not less than Not less than 610g Not less than 610g
IS:2629/1985, IS:2633/1986 & 610g /sqm (86 /sqm (86 micron /sqm
IS: 4736/1986 with (86 micron aprox.)
micron aprox.) aprox.)
amendment
17) Tolerance As per IS: 2713 As per IS: 2713 (Part-I & As per IS: 2713
(Part-I & Part-III): Part-III): 1980 (Part-I & Part-III): 1980
1980
18) Finish As per IS: 2713 As per IS: 2713 As per IS: 2713
(Part-I & Part- (Part-I & Part-III): (Part-I & Part-III): 1980
III): 1980 1980
19) Manufacturing clause As per IS: 2713 As per IS: 2713 As per IS: 2713
(Part-I & Part-III): (Part-I & Part-III): (Part-I & Part-III): 1980
1980 1980
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR STEEL TUBULAR POLE
(TO BE FILLED IN BY THE BIDDER)
S. No.
DESCRIPTION UNIT SP-80 SP-76 SP-66
Name of the bidder
1 Name of Manufacturer
2 Place of manufacture
3 Country in origin
4 IS Standards Application
5 Type of Pole
6 Total length M
Outside diameter and thickness
7
of section
A Bottom Mm
B Middle Mm
C Top Mm
Minimum Guaranteed weight of
8
pole (without base plate)
9 Effective length of Section
A Bottom
B Middle
C Top
Minimum Guaranteed weight of
9
Base plate
10 Breaking load
11 Crippling load
12 Galvanization—gm/sqm
PERFORMANCE GAURANTEE
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV AND 11KV OUTDOOR VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1. SCOPE
1.1. This specification covers design, manufacturing, assembly, testing at manufactures works, supply of 11KV
and 33 KV Vacuum Circuit Breakers complete with all accessories required for their satisfactory operation for
the sub-transmission system. The Breakers shall be used for Transformer protection or Feeder Control in the
system. The Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be complete with all the accessories and auxiliary equipments
required for their satisfactory operation in various sub-stations of APDCL.
1.2. The breaker shall conform, in all respects to highest standards of engineering, design and workmanship as per
recent Indian or International standards. It shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation
up to the supplier's guaranteed life in a manner acceptable to the purchaser.
1.3. The equipment offered shall be complete with all parts necessary for their effective and trouble-free operation.
Such parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of the supply irrespective of whether they are specifically
indicated in this bid document/work order or not.
1.4. The Bidder/supplier shall bind himself to abide by the considerations of the technical specifications to the
entire satisfaction of the purchaser and shall be required to adjust such details at no extra cost to the purchaser
over and above the tendered rates and prices.
The Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be designed for the power system having the following parameters.
a) Nominal system voltage: 11KV/33KV
b) Highest system voltage: 12KV/ 36KV
c) Number of phases: 3
d) Frequency: 50 Hz + 3%.
e) System earthing: Solidly earthed neutral
f) Short Current Rating: 26.3kA for 3 sec for 33kV/ 25kA for 3 sec for 11kV. (Minimum)
Maximum altitude above sea level 100m
Minimum ambient air temperature 45°C
Maximum daily average ambient air temperature 40° C
Minimum ambient air temperature 2° C

Maximum temperature attainable by an object exposed to the sun 60° C
Maximum yearly weighted average ambient temperature 32° C
Maximum relative humidity 98%
Average number of thunderstorm days per annum (isokeraunic level)
Average number of rainy days per annum 120
Average annual rainfall 2200 mm
Maximum annual rainfall 3500 mm
Maximum wind pressure 260Kg/m²
Seismic level(Horizontal acceleration) 0.24g to 0.48g
Climatic condition Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive

to rust and fungus growth.
4. STANDARDS
4.1. The design, manufacture and performance of the Vacuum circuit breaker shall comply with all currently
applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes.
4.2. Equipment, meeting any other authoritative standard, which ensures equal or better quality then the standard
mentioned above, would also be acceptable. The bidders shall clearly indicate the applicable standards to
which their equipment complies-with. A copy of such standard may also be enclosed.
S. No. Standard Item
IS 13118/ IEC 62271 -100 amended

1 High-voltage alternating-current circuit-breakers.
upto date
2 IEC 694 Common clauses for switchgear
IS 2099/IEC:815
3 Porcelain Bushings
IS 5621:1980
4 IS 2544 Porcelain Post Insulators
5 IEC-2331 High Voltage porcelain bushings.
6 IS 325 - Specification for 1phase induction motor
IS 12063/ 1987 Degree of protection provided by enclosures of

7
IEC: 529 electrical equipment.
8 IS 5 Colour for ready mixed paints and enamels.
9 IEC - 60 - High voltage test techniques

Marking and arrangements for switchgears,

10 IS 5578 & IS:11353
busbars, main connections and auxiliary wiring.
11 IS 4794 Push button switches.
Insulation co-ordination, Terms, definitions,

12 IEC - 71 Part-I & II -
principles and rules
13 IEC 270- Partial discharge measurements.
Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of

14 IS 2629 -
iron and steel.
15 Indian Electricity Rules 2005
5. KEY TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

5.1. The circuit breakers shall be suitable for outdoor operation under the climatic conditions, as Specified under
‗Service Conditions‘ for power transformers, without any protection from sun and rain.
5.2. The circuit breakers shall have the following rating:
S. No. Particulars 33 KV 11 KV
i) Number of Poles 3 Nos. 3 Nos.
ii) Frequency 50 Cycles 50 Cycles
iii) Nominal System Voltage 33 KV 11 KV
iv) Highest System Voltage 36 KV 12 KV
Interrupting Capacity at nominal system

v) 1800 MVA 500 MVA
voltage
vi) Rated Continuous Current 1250 Amps 1250 Amps
vii) Short-time Current Rating for 3 Secs. 26.3 KA 25 KA
viii) Basic Insulation Level 170 KV 75 KV
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage for

ix) 70 KV 28 KV
one Minute
Total Break-time for any Current up to the

x) 3 cycles (max.) 3 cycles (max.)
rated breaking current
xi) Control Circuit Voltage 110 Volt D.C. 110 Volt D.C.
O – 0.3 Sec – CO O – 0.3 Sec – CO –

xii) Operating duty for gang operation
– 3 Min – CO 3 Min – CO
xiii) Mechanical Endurance M2 class M2 class
xiv) Electrical Endurance E2 class E2 class

xv) Capacitor Switching Duty C2 class C2 class
The VCBs shall be suitable for one reclosing followed by one delayed reclosing and
xvi)
lock out
xvii) Minimum clearances
a) Between Phases 430 mm 280 mm
b) Between Live Parts & Ground 4000 mm 3700 mm
c) Creepage Distance 900 mm 300 mm
The above are minimum requirements. The manufacturers may offer their standard design, keeping in vieour minimum
requirements.
6. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

6.1. The circuit breaker shall be of porcelain clad, arc interruption in vacuum type. The breaker, complete in all
respect, shall be supplied with all accessories in-place and all internal wiring installed and terminated in the
mechanism housing and the equipment shall be complete in all respects.
6.2. The circuit breakers shall provide rapid and smooth interruption of current under all conditions, completely
suppressing all undesirable phenomena, even under the most severe and persistent short-circuit conditions or
when interrupting small currents or leading / lagging reactive currents. The details of any device incorporated to
limit or control the rate of rise of re-striking voltage (R.R.R.V.) across the circuit breaker contacts shall be
stated. The over voltage caused by the circuit breaker switching on inductive or capacitive load shall not exceed
3.2 times the normal phase to neutral voltage. The total break-time for the circuit breaker, throughout the range
of breaker operating duty, shall be stated in the tender and shall be guaranteed. The breaker shall be fit for
capacitor switching for 5 MVAr Bank.
6.3. The breakers shall be provided with ‗trip free‘ mechanism.
6.4. The circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures. The cost of necessary frames for
mounting the circuit breakers shall be included in the offered prices. Strongly supported bracket or frame, for
mounting associated 3 nos. 11 KV / 33 KV CTs, shall also be provided. All the structures shall be hot dip
galvanized with 3 dips. Please note that cantilever type supports for mechanism box are not acceptable.
6.5. The mechanism box shall have firm supports from bottom. This is necessary to minimize vibration of
mechanism box, which in turn may disturb various settings. The agency shall indicate clearly the vibration level
and dynamic load of the breaker during fault / normal ON OFF operations in all three directions.
6.6. The circuit breakers shall consist of three identical phase units with a common operating mechanism. While
offering the circuit breaker, the following details should be confirmed and furnished with the tender:
a) Complete construction details of the equipment offered. It should be noted that the breakers should
be suitable for out-door duty. Indoor breakers accommodated in out-door kiosks are not acceptable.
b) Type, make & source of vacuum interrupters with relevant details shall be indicated in the offer,
clearly.
c) The capacity of breaker to interrupt inductive and capacitive currents shall be indicated in the offer
(rating of capacitor bank should be stated and type test report shall be furnished).
d) Spare availability of vacuum interrupter should be confirmed by the bidder for the designed expected
life of the breakers being offered.
e) Items inside the cabinet made of organic material shall be coated with a fungus resistant varnish.
VACUUM INTERRUPTER
a) Interrupters shall be rated for minimum 30,000 mechanical or load operations

b) The design of the vacuum interrupter shall be such that it gives trouble free operation under normal
load and fault conditions throughout the life of the equipment. As the efficiency of the breaker
depends on the degree of vacuum inside the interrupter, manufacturer shall ensure that the same is
maintained consistently during service. To know the residual life of vacuum interrupter, an indicator to
indicate the status of contact erosion shall be provided.
c) The insulating ceramic body of the interrupter should have high mechanical strength and it should be
capable of withstanding high temperature without any significant deterioration in its mechanical and
electrical properties.
d) The metal / alloy used for the fixed and moving contacts shall have very low resistivity and low gas
content. They should be resistant to arc erosion and the contact should have no tendency to get cold-
welded under the high vacuum in the interrupter. Silicone encapsulated Interrupters to avoid tracking
due to condensation
e) The interrupter design should ensure rapid de-ionization of the gap so that normal electrical strength of
the gap is restored instantaneously.
f) The metallic bellow or any other similar vacuum sealing arrangement should be provided at the moving
contact and should have a long fatigue life.
g) Manufacturer‘s catalogue on vacuum interrupter, indicating all the details shall essentially be submitted
with the tender.
6.7 MOUNTING OF 11 KV / 33 KV CTs

The offered steel structures for breakers to be supplied by the bidders should have provision and adequate
strength to accommodate 3 nos. 11 KV / 33 KV CTs on it after provision of suitable supports from ground.
6.8 TEMPERATURE RISE

The maximum temperature attained by any part of the equipment, when in service at site, under
continuous full load conditions, exposed to the direct rays of the sun, shall not exceed 45° Centigrade, above
maximum daily average ambient temperature. The limits of temperature rise shall be as per relevant
standards. The corrections proposed shall be stated in the tender and shall be subject to approval of the owner.
6.9 INSULATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER

The insulation to ground, the insulation between open contacts and the insulation between phases of the
completely assembled circuit breaker shall be capable of withstanding satisfactorily di-electric test voltage
corresponding to specified basic insulation level in the standard.
6.10 INSULATORS
6.10.1
The basic insulation level of the Insulator and insulating porcelains shall be as specified and porcelain shall be
homogenous and free from cavities and other flaws. They shall be designed to have ample insulation,
mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory operation under conditions specified above. All insulators of
identical ratings shall be inter-changeable. The puncture strength of the insulators shall be greater than the
flash over value. The insulators shall be type tested from independent Govt. Laboratory as per relevant
standards or at any recognized and reputed international laboratory or testing institutions.
6.10.2
The porcelain housing for the interrupter shall be of a single piece construction without any joint. It shall be
made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength. Glazing of porcelain
shall be of uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or
condensed water particles (fog).
6.11 OPERATING MECHANISM

a) The circuit breakers shall be designed for remote control from the control room and in addition there shall
be provision for manual operation of circuit breakers during maintenance and for local tripping and
closing by the normal means.
b) The circuit breakers shall have operation control and mechanical ―open‖ ―close‖ indicator, in addition to
facilities for remote electrical indication.
c) All metal parts in the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material. All bearings which require greasing
shall be equipped with pressure grease fittings.
d) The design of the operating mechanism shall be such that it shall be practically maintenance free. The
guaranteed number of years in maintenance free operation, the number of possible full load and full rated
short circuit current breaking operations without requiring any maintenance or overhauling shall be
clearly stated in the tender bid. As far as possible, the need for lubricating the operating mechanism shall
be kept to the minimum and eliminated altogether, if possible.
e) The operating mechanism shall be of the spring charging type, by electric control under normal operation.
The mechanism shall be trip free and operable electrically and mechanically. The mechanism shall be
capable of performing satisfactorily, the reclosing duty cycles indicated above, within the time specified.
All working parts in the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material and all bearings, which require
greasing, shall be equipped with pressured grease fittings. The mechanism shall be strong positive quick
in action and shall be removable without disturbing the other parts of the circuit breaker. The mechanism
and breaker shall be such that the failure of any spring will not prevent tripping and at the same time will
not cause any false tripping or closing. The operating Mechanism should be motor operated spring
charged type preferably without chain drive. The motor for spring charging shall be suitable to perform
satisfactorily for input supply voltage of 230 Volt A.C 50 Hz/D.C with a variation of plus / minus 20 per
cent. The A.C. Motor should have overload protection. Provision should also be made for mounting of
mechanism box at an adequate height and gear ratios shall be so chosen that one man should be able to
charge the spring, without any additional efforts. Provision shall be available for charging the springs
manually as well, and to close CB mechanically.
f) The time taken for charging of closing spring shall not exceed 30 seconds. The spring charging shall take
place automatically preferably after a closing operation. Breaker operation shall be independent of the
spring charging motor which shall only charge the closing spring. Opening spring shall get charged
automatically during closing operation. As long as power supply is available to the charging motor, a
continuous sequence of closing and opening operations (CO) shall be possible.
g) In each circuit breaker, one potential free contact of the limit switch of spring charging motor shall be
provided
for remote indication of spring charged. This contact shall be wired up and brought to the terminal block.
h) Electrical anti-pumping device shall be provided for breaker.
6.12 CONTROL CUBICLE

a) A common control cubicle shall be provided to house electrical, controls, monitoring devices and all
other accessories, except those which must be located on individual poles. The cubicle shall be gasketed
and shall have weather-proof construction, fabricated from sheet steel of minimum 3 mm thickness. The
type test report on degree of protection test (IP-55) shall also be furnished.
b) There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity
during transportation and installation. Control cubicles shall be provided with double hinged door and
padlocking arrangement. The door hinges shall be of union joint type to facilitate easy removal and the
distance between hinges shall not exceed 350 mm. Door shall be properly braced to prevent wobbling.
c) It shall have backwards slanting rain hood of 2 mm thick (14 SWG) sheet for protection against rain water.
d) The cubicle shall have front access door with lock and keys, space heater, internal illumination lamp, 3 pins
5 Amp socket with individual ON-OFF switches shall be provided in the cubicle.
e) For local operation following shall be provided:
i) LOCAL / REMOTE selector switch
ii) TRIP / NORMAL / CLOSE control switches with pistol grip handle
f) The control circuits shall be designed to operate on 110 Volt DC, as indicated in the schedule and it
shall be possible to adopt to work on other voltages by simply changing the operating coils. The shunt
tripping coils shall be designed to operate satisfactorily within 110% and 70% of the rated DC supply
voltage and the shunt closing coils should operate up to 85% of the rated DC voltage. These checks
shall be repeated during pre-commissioning checks at site before putting the breakers in service.
g) AC Power supply for auxiliaries will be available at 230 Volt (+/- 10% variation) single phases 50 C/s
at substation. The agency shall be required to extend this supply, using proper protection, to desired
location through cable.
h) Necessary double compression type cable glands for the cables of the operating mechanism shall be
provided. The cables used for operation are all un-armoured 2.5 sq. mm copper control cables of 1100
V grade. The cable glands shall be suitable for 1 no. 8 core and 2 nos. 4 core cables and cables as per
site requirements. The gland plate should be made of non-magnetic materials and suitably drilled at
site to suit the cable entry.
i) The Circuit breaker shall be provided with trip free Mechanism so that tripping instructions could
over-ride the closing instructions. An additional tripping coil shall also be provided in the trip circuit.
The second coil shall have separate tripping lever arrangements in the mechanism, so as to avail full
advantage of second trip coil. Also the two trip coils shall have separate fuses in the DC circuit, so that
in the event of any short circuit/damage in any one of the trip coils, the supply is available to the other
one.
j) The circuit diagram of Control circuit of VCB along with operating instructions (DOS/ DON‘T) shall
be embossed on metallic plate duly laminated and the same shall be fixed on the rear door of the
control cubicle from inside.
6.13
WIRING
a) Wiring shall be completed in all respects to ensure proper functioning of the control, protection,
monitoring
and interlocking schemes.
b) All the wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, PVC insulated stranded copper conductor of 2.5 sq.
mm as per IS: 1554.
c) Each wire shall be identified at both ends with permanent markers bearing wire numbers as per wiring
diagram.
d) Wire termination shall be done with crimping type connectors with insulating sleeves. Wires shall not be
spliced between terminals.
e) All spare contacts of auxiliary switches etc. shall be wired up to terminal blocks in the control cubicle.
6.14 TERMINAL BLOCKS

a) Terminal blocks shall be of 1100 V grade, box clamp type ELMEX 10 sq. mm or approved equivalent.
Not
more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal. Spare terminals, equal in number to 20% of
active terminals, shall be provided.
b) Terminal block shall be such located to allow easy access. Wiring shall be so arranged that individual
wires
of an external cable can be connected to consecutive terminals.
6.15 TERMINAL CONNECTORS

6 Nos. Terminal bi-metallic connector suitable for Dog conductors shall be supplied with each breaker.
For ensuring quality and uniformity, the owner may decide to specify the design of terminal connector,
the material of terminal connector and thickness of clamps. Further compliance of which will have to be
done by the agency without any extra cost. Suitable earth connector for earthing connections shall also
be supplied. The connector drawing shall be got approved from the owner.
6.16 AUXILIARY CONTACTS

6.16.1 Eight numbers each of auxiliary contacts both of the normally open and normally closed types shall be
provided in each circuit breaker for use in the remote indication and control scheme of the circuit
breaker and for providing safety interlocking. Special contacts for use with trip coils, which permit for
relative adjustment with respect to the travel of the circuit breaker contact, shall also be provided,
wherever required. There shall be provision to add more auxiliary contacts at a later date, if required.
6.16.2 The normally open and normally closed contacts for the control and operation of the equipment shall
have continuous current rating of 10 Amp. The Breaking capacity of the contacts shall be minimum 2
Amp with circuit time constant less than 20 milli seconds at the rated D.C. voltage.
6.16.3 Insulation level of auxiliary contacts shall be 1100 volts, 2.5 kV for 1 min.
6.17 ACCESSORIES
The vacuum circuit breaker shall be supplied as a complete unit with internal wiring installed and
terminated in mechanism box and equipped with the following accessories:
1 Motor operated spring charged mechanism 1 No.

(nominal motor voltage – 230 V AC)
2 Trip coil suitable for 110 V DC 2 Nos.

3 Closing Coil suitable for 110 V DC 1 No.
4 Pistol grip C.B. Control switch having Trip/ 1 No.
5 Local
Normal// Remote selector switch
Close position 1 No.
6 Spring Charged indicator 1 No.
7 Manual operating handle for maintenance 1 No.
8 Facility for manual charging of spring 1 No.
9 Operation counter 1 No.
10 Auxiliary contacts (8 N/O + 8 N/C) 1 Set
11 Anti-pumping device suitable for 110 V DC 1 No.
12 Terminal connectors suitable for connecting Dog 6 Nos.
13 Cubicle
Conductorilluminating lamp with cage and switch 1 No.
14 Spare terminals connectors 20% of Total Terminals
15 Mechanical ON/OFF Indicator 1 No.

16 MCB for both AC and DC supply 1 No. each
17 Space heater and ON-OFF switch in the 1 No.
18 Power Typebox
mechanism 3 Pin Socket with ON-OFF switch 1 Set
19 Earthing Terminals 2 Nos.
20 LED indicating lamps Complete set
6.18 INDICATING LAMPS

The indicating LED lamps should have in-built low voltage protection Circuit (LVGP) and surge
suppressor circuit. Lamp assembly should be of fire – retardant glass epoxy PCB, industrial heat resistant,
fire resistant, non- Hygroscopic DMC material, chrome – plated corrosion resistant solid brass bezel,
polycarbonate lens in desired colour shades of Red , Green, Amber, Yellow etc. the intensity of light
should be minimum 100 mcd at 20 mA . Indication lamp should be suitable to operate on 110 V Direct
Current supply source.
6.19 SURFACE FINISH

All metal sheet surfaces exposed to atmosphere shall be given two primer coats of zinc phosphate and two
coats of epoxy paint with epoxy base thinner. All metal parts not accessible for painting shall be made of
corrosion resisting material. All machine finished or bright surfaces shall be coated with a suitable
preventive compound and suitably wrapped or otherwise protected. All paints shall be carefully selected to
withstand tropical heat and extremes of weather within the limits specified. The paints shall be light
admiral grey shade No.627 of IS 5. The paint shall not scale off or wrinkle or be removed by abrasion due
to normal handling.
6.20 GALVANIZING
All ferrous parts including nuts, bolts, plain and spring washers of size M 10 and above, support channels,
structures, etc. shall be hot dip-galvanized to conform to latest version of IS 2629 or any other equivalent
authoritative standard. All other fixing nuts, bolts, washers of size below M 10 shall be made out of
stainless steel.
6.21 EARTHING
The operating mechanism housing, support structures etc. shall be provided with two separate earthing
terminals for bolted connection to 50 x 8 mm MS flat to be provided by the purchaser for connection to
station earth mat. The connecting point shall be marked with "earth" symbol No.86 of IEC publication 117-
1 part 1
6.22 MOUNTING
a) The design and supply of support structure, required for mounting the Circuit Breaker in Purchaser's
switch yard, shall be in the bidder's scope. The bidder's scope shall also include foundation bolts, nuts,
plain washers, spring washers etc necessary for the support structure. The support structure can be
lattice type or tubular type and shall be made out of hot dip galvanized steel. Wheel mounted type
support shall not be accepted. The support structure shall be installed on a concrete plinth of 300 mm
height to be arranged by the Purchaser. The height of the support structure shall meet the following
requirements.
i) Vertical clearance of lowest live part as specified in clause 6.
ii) Minimum height of 2950 mm above the top of concrete plinth (This is a Statutory Regulation).
b) The Circuit Breaker shall be connected to adjacent equipment in the switch yard through ACSR
conductor.
c) The loading data to be considered by the bidder for design of support structure shall include the following.
i) Dead weight of the Circuit Breaker, Structure, Bus Bars
ii) Operational steady state and impact loading
iii) Wind load on a Circuit Breaker, Structure, Bus Bars
iv) Short circuit forces
d) The support structure shall be designed on the basis of applicable Indian/ International Standards and
codes
of practice.
7 TYPE TESTS
7.1 Type test certificates on VCB for the following tests, strictly as per IS 13118, with latest amendment
thereof, from any of the independent Govt. Laboratory, or at any recognized and reputed international
laboratory or testing institution, shall invariably furnished:
a) Short Circuit Duty Tests
b) Out of phase making and breaking tests.
c) Short Time Current Rating Tests
d) Mechanical Endurance Test & Electrical operation Test.
e) Temperature Rise Test
f) Lightning Impulse Voltage withstand Test
g) Capacitor Switching Duty Test for Single Bank of 5 MVAR capacity
h) Power Frequency withstand Voltage Test dry & wet
i) Degree of protection IP-55 for control cubicle
7.2 The above type test certificates must accompany drawing of type tested equipment, duly signed by type
testing authority.
7.3 The above tests must not have been conducted on the equipment earlier than 5 years from the date of
opening of bids.
7.4 In case of any change in design/type of Breaker already type tested and the one offered against this
specification, the owner reserves the right to demand repetition of type tests, without any extra cost.
7.5 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS

All acceptance and routine tests, as stipulated in relevant standards, shall be carried out by the
manufacturer, in presence of owner‘s representative. Immediately after finalization of the programme of
testing, the manufacturers/supplier shall give, fifteen days advance intimation to the owner, to enable him
depute his representative for witnessing the tests.
8 INSPECTION
The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or his representative at any stage of manufacture. The
successful Bidder/manufacturer shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative/s at a reasonable
notice when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification
by the purchaser, shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with
the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.
9 RATING PLATES
The detailed rating plate shall be as per IS and in addition, shall indicate the following:
a) Circuit Breaker and its operating device shall be provided with rating plate/s made out of corrosion proof
metal, marked with the following data. The data shall be either punched or engraved on the plate/s.
b) Manufacturer's name or trade mark by which he may be readily identified.
c) Serial number and type designation of CB & Operating mechanism
d) Year of manufacture
e) Voltage
f) Lightning impulse withstand voltage
g) Normal current
h) Short circuit breaking current
i) Duration of short circuit
j) Mass of circuit breaker with support structure.
k) Auxiliary D.C. supply voltage of closing and opening devices
l) Out of phase making & breaking current
m) A.C. supply voltage of auxiliary circuits.
n) Insulation level
o) Frequency
p) Purchase order reference
q) Operating sequence.
The rating plates shall be installed in such positions that the same shall be clearly visible to a man standing on
ground. i.e. at the level of eye site.
10 EXPERIENCE
Minimum 3 years‘ experience in the field of design and manufacture of the equipment offered is
essential for the bidder. Details in this regards shall be clearly stipulated in the offer.
11 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The Vacuum Circuit Breakers offered shall be guaranteed for satisfactory performance for a period of 66
months from the date of receipt of complete Vacuum Circuit Breakers at destination store/site in good
condition or 60 months from the date of satisfactory commissioning of Vacuum Circuit Breakers whichever
is earlier. The equipments found defective/failed within the above guarantee period shall be replaced
/repaired by the supplier free of cost within one month of receipt of intimation. If the defective/failed
Vacuum Circuit Breakers are not replaced /repaired as per the above guarantee clause, the purchaser shall
recover an equivalent amount as deemed fit from any of the supplier's bills.
12 DOCUMENTATION
12.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards organization (ISO) 'A' series of drawing sheet/Indian
Standards Specification IS 656. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for micro filming. All dimensions
and data shall be in System International Units
12.2 DRAWINGS:
The bidder shall furnish four sets of relevant descriptive and illustrative published literature/pamphlets
and the following drawings for preliminary study:
i) General outline drawings showing outside dimensions, shipping dimensions, weights, quantity of
insulating media air receiver capacity and such other prominent details.
ii) Sectional views showing the general constructional features of the circuit breaker including operating
mechanism, arcing chambers, contacts, with lifting dimensions for maintenance.
iii) Schematic diagrams of the scheme for control, supervision and reclosing.
iv) Structural drawing, design calculations and loading data for support structures.
v) Foundation drilling plan and loading data for foundation design.
vi) Bill of Materials.
vii) Type test reports of circuit breakers along with a separate list showing all the tests carried out with
date & place of test.
viii) Test reports, literatures and pamphlets of bought out items and raw materials.
12.3 The successful bidder shall submit THREE sets of final versions of all the above said drawings in A-3 size,
bill of material, packing list & all type test reports for purchaser's approval to the office of CGM (PP&D).
The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within reasonable
period.
12.4 The successful bidder shall furnish in the form of nicely bound volumes, the manuals covering erection,
commissioning, operation and maintenance instructions and all relevant information and drawings
pertaining to the Vacuum Circuit Breakers as well as auxiliary devices. Each manual shall also contain one
set of all the approved drawings type test reports as well as acceptance test reports to corresponding
consignment dispatched. The total quantity of the operating manuals/approved drawings sets to be supplied
by the supplier shall be equal to the number of three phase breakers of rating, ordered.
12.5 The manufacturing of the Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All
manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the Vacuum Circuit Breakers prior to the approval
of the drawings shall be at the supplier's risk.
12.6 Approval of drawings/work by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of any of his responsibility and
liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirements of
the latest revisions of applicable standards, rules and codes of practices.
13 PACKING AND FORWARDING

13.1 The Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be packed in suitable crates so as to withstand handling during
transport and outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable materials shall
be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper lifting
arrangement such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases
shall be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.
13.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following
information:
i) Name of the consignee.
ii) Details of consignment.
iii) Destination.
iv) Total weight of consignment.
v) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
vi) Handling and unpacking instructions.
vii) Bill of materials indicating contents of each package and spare materials
13.3 The supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of materials are approved by the purchaser before
dispatch.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
FOR 33kV, 1250A, 26.3 kA for 3 sec/ 11KV, 1250A, 25kA VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Bidder's Confirmation
Sl. No. Description
For 33KV For 11KV
2 Type of Outdoor switchgear
3 Designation of outdoor circuit breaker
VCB conforms to IEC 62271- 100 amended upto date / IS:

4
13118:1991: Yes/No
Whether offered outdoor circuit breaker is porcelain clad

5
type (yes/no)
Shall outdoor circuit breaker provided 3 number of poles

6
(yes/no)
7 Rated voltage of outdoor circuit breaker in kV.
Is offered out door circuit breaker suitable for 50 Hz rated

8
frequency (Yes/No)
Type of operation - Mechanically coupled gang operated:

9
Yes/No
Operating mechanism, A. C. Control & Protective devices,

lighting fixtures, space heaters and motor operating on
10
supply single phase, 250 Volts ± 10% A.C., 50 Hz, two pole
with one pole grounded: Yes/No
Maximum continuous voltage of outdoor circuit breaker in

11
kV
12 Rated continuous current of outdoor circuit breaker in amps.
Offered VCB shall be suitable for solid neutral earthing:

13
Yes/No
Rated symmetrical short circuit breaking current (for 3

14
seconds) of outdoor circuit breaker in ka (rms) 25 kA
Rated operating sequence of outdoor circuit breaker shall be

15
o-0.3 sec-co-3 min - co
Amplitude factor of outdoor circuit breaker on restriking

16
voltage at 100% rated breaking capacity shall be 1.4
First pole to clear factor of outdoor circuit breaker on

17 restriking voltage at 100% rated breaking capacity shall be
1.5
Rate of rise of restriking voltage of outdoor circuit breaker

18 on restriking voltage at 100% rated breaking capacity in
kv/microsecs) 50/70
Dry-1 minute power frequency withstand voltage of outdoor

19 circuit breaker between line terminal and earth in kvrms
shall be 50/70kV
Dry-1 minute power frequency withstand test voltage for

20 outdoor circuit breaker between terminal with breaker
contacts open in kvrms
1.2 / 50 micro second impulse with-stand voltage for

21 outdoor circuit breaker between line terminal and earth in
kvp
1.2 / 50 micro second impulse with-stand voltage for

22 outdoor circuit breaker between terminals with breaker
contacts open in kvp
23 Material of main contacts of outdoor circuit breaker
Material of terminal pad of outdoor circuit breaker

24
(copper/Aluminium)
If Terminal Pads are made of metal other than aluminum,

25 thickness of silver plating on terminal pads shall be at least
25 microns.
The current density for copper terminal pad shall not be

26
more than 1.6 A/sq. mm.
The current density for other than copper terminal pad shall
27
not be more than 1 A/sq. mm.
Net cross section of terminal pad of outdoor circuit breaker

28
in sq mm
29 Material of make –break contacts in Vacuum Interrupter
30 Material of tips of Main contacts of circuit breaker
Whether electrical anti pumping device provided for outdoor

31
circuit breaker (yes/no)
Size of auxiliary contacts of outdoor circuit breaker in sq.

32
Mm.
33 Material of auxiliary contacts of outdoor circuit breaker
Continuous current capacity of auxiliary contacts of outdoor

34
circuit breaker in amps.
Breaking current capacity of auxiliary contacts of outdoor

35
circuit breaker in amps.
Insulation level of auxiliary contacts of outdoor circuit

36
breaker in volts.
1 minute p. F. Withstand voltage of auxiliary contacts of

37
outdoor circuit breaker in kvrms.
Whether any contact multiplier are used for outdoor circuit

38
breaker (yes/no) (if *yes* then fill 39 to 42)
39 Make of contact multiplier used for circuit breaker
Making and breaking capacity of contact multiplier used for

40
outdoor circuit breaker in ka
Voltage rating of contact multiplier used for outdoor circuit

41
breaker in kv
Capacity of coil of contact multiplier used for outdoor

42
circuit breaker in watts
No. Of normally open auxiliary contacts provided for

43 outdoor circuit breaker available for use in remote C&R
panels
No. Of normally close auxiliary contacts provided for

44 outdoor circuit breaker available for use in remote C&R
panels
Whether potential free contact available for remote

45 indication of spring charged" of outdoor circuit breaker
(yes/no)
Voltage rating of bushing used for outdoor circuit breaker in

46
kv.
Dry-1 minute power frequency withstand voltage of bushing

47
used for outdoor circuit breaker in kvrms
Dry flashover voltage of bushing used for outdoor circuit

48
breaker in kvrms
Wet flashover voltage of bushing used for outdoor circuit

49
breaker in kvrms
1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand voltage of bushing

50
used for outdoor circuit breaker shall be 125/170 kvp
Total creepage distance of bushing used for outdoor circuit

51
breaker shall be 300 mm.
Center to center minimum clearances in air between phases

52
of outdoor circuit breaker in mm
Minimum Clearances provided in air between two Phases:

53
in mm
Minimum clearances in air between live part to live part of

54
phases of outdoor circuit breaker shall be 430 mm.
Minimum clearances in air between live part to earth of

55
outdoor circuit breaker shall be 450mm
Minimum clearances in air between live part of outdoor

56
circuit breaker to ground level shall be 3700 mm
Height of the lowest part of the support insulator from

57
ground level
58 Class of Insulating Material
59 Max. closing time in ms (Max.150 ms)
Max. total break time at 100 % rated interrupting breaking

60
capacity: 100 ms
Type of closing mechanism of outdoor circuit breaker shall

61
be motor assisted spring charged mechanism.
Type of tripping mechanism of outdoor circuit breaker shall

62 be motor assisted spring charged mechanism with shunt trip
coil.
Burden of trip coil of outdoor circuit breaker at 110 V (DC)

63
in watts
Burden of closing coil of outdoor circuit breaker at 110 V

64
(DC) in watts
Whether mechanical on/off and "spring charged" indications

65
for outdoor circuit breaker provided (yes/no)
Whether manual trip/close of outdoor circuit breaker

66
possible (yes/no)
Whether mechanical spring charging for outdoor circuit

67
breaker possible (yes/no)
Voltage rating of spring charging motor of outdoor circuit

68
breaker in volts
Burden of spring charging motor of outdoor circuit breaker

69
in VAmp
Control circuit voltage of outdoor circuit breaker shall be 30

70
volts d. C. (yes/no)
The surface finish paints of non-galvanized metallic part of

71
VCB shall be battleship gray shade No.632 of IS 5.
72 Process of painting of parts of outdoor circuit breaker
Type of primer used for painting of parts of outdoor circuit

73
breaker
Type of finish paint used for painting of parts of outdoor

74
circuit breaker
Degree of protection of Operating Mechanism enclosure is

75
IP 55 as per IEC529/ IS 2147
Mounting of CB On hot dip galvanized steel support

76 structure or on the operating mechanism box, as the case
may be, to be supplied by the tenderer
Whether all type tests are carried out on outdoor circuit

77 breaker at NABL laboratories within five years from date of
opening of tender (yes/No)
Whether type tested on offered design of outdoor circuit

78
breaker (yes / no).
A list of recommended spares with unit rates for each circuit

breaker that may be necessary for satisfactory operation and
79
maintenance of the circuit breaker for a period of 5 years
shall be submitted.
A list and unit rates of all the special tools, equipments and
80 instruments required for erection, testing, commissioning
and maintenance of the breaker shall be submitted
The list of necessary tools/equipments which will be

81
supplied free of cost with each CB furnished separately.
Are following Type test reports submitted with offer for

82
offered equipment
a. Lightening impulse withstand voltage test: Yes/No

b. Power Frequency Voltage withstand test (dry & wet).
:Yes/No
c. Temperature rise test: Yes/No
d. Measurement of resistance of Circuit: Yes/No
e. Short time and peak withstand current tests: Yes/No
f. Mechanical operation test: Yes/No
g. Degree of protection (IP55) for all cabinets: Yes/No
h. Out of phase making and breaking tests: Yes/No
i. Short Circuit Making and Breaking current Tests
a) No load operation before and after test
b) Basic test duties no. 1 to 5
c) Single Phase Short circuit test
d) Condition of breaker after short circuit test
83 Are the following drawing submitted
a. General outline drawings showing outside dimensions,
shipping dimensions, weights, quantity of insulating media
air receiver capacity and such other prominent details.
:Yes/No
b. Sectional views showing the general constructional
features of the circuit breaker including operating
mechanism, arcing chambers, contacts, with lifting
dimensions for maintenance: Yes/No
c. Schematic diagrams of the scheme for control,
supervision and reclosing: Yes/No
d. Structural drawing, design calculations and loading data
for support structures: Yes/No
e. Foundation drilling plan and loading data for foundation
design: Yes/No
f. Type test reports of circuit breakers along with a separate
list showing all the tests carried out with date & place of
test: Yes/No
g. Test reports, literatures and pamphlets of bought out items
and raw materials: Yes/No
Whether bidder adequate in-house testing facilities for
84
conducting acceptance tests in accordance with relevant IS.
85 Type of operation shall be suitable for 3 phase reclosing:
Yes/No.
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 & 33 KV OUTDOOR TYPE CURRENT TRANSFORMER
1. INTRODUCTION
This section covers the specification of 33 kV and 11kV Current Transformer suitable for outdoor service.
Any other parts not specifically mentioned in this specification but otherwise required for proper
functioning of the equipment should be included by the tender in the offer. The CTs should normally be
installed above VCB. The VCB & CT should be installed on common mounting structure. In places, where
VCB are not provided in the substation, separate CT mounting structure shall be provided with CTs.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Unless otherwise modified in this specification, the Current Transformer shall comply with the latest
version of relevant standards (IS 2165, IS 2705(I-IV), IS 2099, IS 5621, IS 2071, IS 335, IS 13947(part I),
IEC 185, IEC 270, IEC 44(4), IEC 171, IEC 60, IEC 8263, IEC 815, Indian electricity Rules 2003) or
better international standards. This list of standards is for guidance only. The contractor shall be solely
responsible to design & manufacture the CT suitable for 33kV & /11 kV systems.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS
The CT supplied against these specifications shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under
the tropical conditions, as mentioned for power transformers.

Maximum daily average ambient air
40° C
temperature
Maximum temperature attainable by an object
60° C
exposed to the sun
32° C
temperature
Average number of thunderstorm days per
annum (isokeraunic level)
Climatic condition Moderately hot and humid tropical

climate conducive to rust and fungus growth.
4. SYSTEM PARTICULARS
a) Nominal System Voltage 33kV & 11kV
b) Highest system Voltage 36kV & 12kV
c) Rated Frequency 50Hz & 50Hz
d) No of phases Three & Three
e) System neutral earthing -Solidly Earthed-
f) One minute Power Freq. 70kV & 28kV
withstand voltage (rms)
g) Lighting Impulse withstand Voltage 170kVp & 75kVp
i) System fault level -25kA for 3sec-
5. TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF CT
a) Type Single phase, dead tank, outdoor, oil
filled & hermetically sealed
b) Type of mounting Pedestal type

c) Rated primary current As per BPS
d) Rated Continuous thermal current 120 % of rated
Primary current
e) Rated short time withstand As per IS 2705 Pt. I
Requirement for sec. Winding
f) Rated short time withstand 25kA(RMS)
Current
i) Duration (for primary current 3Sec
of 150amps and above)
ii) Duration (for primary current 1Sec

below 150amps)
g) Rated dynamic withstand 62.5

Current (KA rms)
h) Max temp rise As per IEC-185/ IS 2705
i) Minimum creepage distance 25 mm /KV
of porcelain housing(mm)
j) One minute power frequency 3 kV
Withstand voltage between
Secondary terminal & earth
k) Detail of Secondary Cores Metering Protection
Current ratio (As per BPS)
Accuracy class 0.5 5P10
Burden (VA) 15 15
Instrument security Factor ≤5 -

Accuracy Limit Factor - 10
Note: The ratings indicated for instrument transformer are tentative only and may be changed to meet the
requirements.
6. INSULATION
The insulation of the CT shall be so designed that the internal insulation shall have higher electrical withstand
capability than the external insulation. The designed dielectrics withstand values of external and internal
insulations shall be clearly brought out in the GTP. The dielectric withstand values specified in this specification
are meant for fully assembled CT. The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed the maximum
temperature rise limits specified in the relevant standard.
7. PORCELAIN HOUSING
It shall be single piece of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical & dielectric strength. It will be
glazed with uniform Brown or Dark brown colour with smooth surface finish. The Creepage distance for the
porcelain housing shall be at least 25 mm per kV.
8. TANK & SURFACE FINISH

The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimize possible locations of oil
leakage. The tank shall be fabricated of MS steel sheet of min. 3.15 mm for sides & 5 mm for top & bottom.
The bottom of the tank shall be adequately accessible for periodical maintenance of open surface.
The metal tanks shall be coated with at least two coats of zinc rich epoxy painting. The inner surface shall be
painted with oil resistance white enamel paint. All the ferrous hardware, exposed to atmosphere, shall be hot dip
galvanized. All other fixing nuts, bolts, washers in the electrical current path shall be made out of stainless steel.
9. GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

9.1 The CT shall be of dead tank design and shall be so constructed that it can be easily transported to site within the
allowable transport limitation, even in horizontal position, if the transport limitation so demands. The C.T. shall
be hermetically sealed and method of such sealing shall be detailed in the offer.
9.2 CT secondary terminals shall be brought out in a weatherproof terminal box. The terminal box shall be provided
with removable gland plate and glands. The cable glands shall be suitable for 1100 volts grade PVC insulated,
PVC sheathed multi core stranded 6 sq.mm copper conductor cable. This terminal box shall be dust and vermin
proof. The dimensions of the terminal box and its opening shall be adequate to enable easy access and working
space with the use of normal tools.
9.3 Polarity shall be invariably marked in each primary and secondary terminal. Facility shall be provided for short
circuiting and grounding of the CT secondary terminals inside the terminal box.
9.4 The CT shall be provided with a rating plate with dimensions and marking as per IS-16227. The markings shall
be punched and not painted. The serial number and code of the supplier shall also be punched on the tank to
identify the unit in case of loss or damage to the rating plate.
9.5 The CT shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and thereafter hermetically sealed to eliminate
breathing and to prevent air and moisture entering into the tank. Oil filling and / or oil sampling cocks,
if provided to facilitate factory processing should be permanently sealed before dispatching the CT. The
method adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in the offer.
10. WINDING
11. PRIMARY WINDING
It shall be made of high conductivity rigid copper wire. The primary winding current density shall not exceed
the limit of 1.6 Amp per sq. mm for normal rating. The design current density for short circuit current as well as
conductivity of metal used for primary winding shall be as per IS 2705. The calculation for the selection of
winding cross section shall be furnished by contractor. The primary terminal shall be of standard size of 30 mm
dia x 80 mm length of heavily tinned (min. thickness 15 micron) electrolytic copper of 99.9 % conductivity.
12. SECONDARY WINDING
Shall be made of insulated copper wire of electrolytic grade. Type of insulation used shall be described in the
offer. For multi ratio design, the multi ratio will be achieved by reconnection of the primary winding or
secondary winding. The excitation current of the CT shall be as low as possible. The contractor shall furnish the
magnetization curves for all the cores.
The terminal box shall be dust free & vermin proof. The size of the terminal box shall be big enough to enable
easy access and working space with the use of normal tools.
The secondary terminals studs shall be provided with at least 3 nuts and two plain washers, these shall be made
of brass duly nickel plated. The min. stud outer dia shall be 6 mm & length 15 mm. The min spacing between
the centers of the adjacent studs shall be 1.5 time the outer dia of the stud.
POLARITY
The polarity shall be marked on each CT at the primary and secondary terminals.
13. INSULATION OIL

The first filling of oil in CT shall be in contractor‘s scope. The oil shall be as per IS 335:2018.
To ensure prevention of oil leakage, the manufacturer will give following details supported by drawings:
i) Location of emergence of Primary & Secondary terminals
ii) Interface between porcelain & metal tanks
iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box
Any nut & bolt and screw used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushing for taking out the terminals shall
be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings & not on the porcelain.
If gasket joints are used, Nitrite Butyl Rubber gasket shall be used. The grooves shall be machined with
adequate space for accommodating gasket under pressure.
The CT shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing. It will be properly sealed to eliminate breathing & to
prevent air & moisture from entering the tank. The sealing methods/arrangement shall be described by the
contractor & be approved by the owner.
14. OIL LEVEL INDICATOR

The CT shall be fitted with prismatic type oil sight window at suitable location so that the oil level is clearly
visible with naked eye to an observer standing at ground level.
To compensate oil volume variation due to temperature variation, Nitrogen cushion or the stainless steel bellows
shall be used. Rubber diaphragms are not permitted for this purpose.
15. EARTHING
Two earthling terminals shall be provided on the metallic tank of size 16 mm dia. & 30 mm length each
with one plain washer & one nut for connection to the station earth mat.
16. JUNCTION BOX

The junction box shall be of MS sheet having thickness of 2mm, synthetic enamel painted as per procedure
mentioned in General Technical Requirement (Min. thickness 55 micron). The shade of junction box shall be
697 of IS: 5. Disconnecting type terminal blocks for CT secondary lead shall be provided. The junction
boxes shall be weather proof type with gaskets, as per section-I (Introduction and general technical
requirements) conforming to IP-55 as per IS-13947 (Part-I).
17. LIFTING & MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT

The CT shall be provided with two lifting eyes to lift the CT. This shall be so positioned so as to avoid any
damage to the CT during lifting for instillation or transportation purpose. This shall be detailed in General
Arrangement drawing.
The CT shall be of pedestal mounting type suitable for outdoor installation on steel/cement concrete structures.
All the clamps, bolts, nut and washers etc. required for mounting the CT on the structure shall be supplied along
with the CT and shall be galvanized. The contractor shall supply all the terminal connectors etc. required for
connection to the CT.
18. TESTING
Type Test:
The Current Transformer design offered in the Bid should have been successfully type tested at NABL
laboratories for the tests indicated as follow in line with the relevant standard and technical specification. These
Type Tests should have been carried out within five years prior to the date of opening of tender. The bidder
shall be required to submit complete set of the type test reports along with the offer.
In case these type tests are conducted earlier than five years, all the type tests as per the relevant standard shall
be carried out by the successful bidder at NABL in presence of purchaser's representative free of cost before
commencement of supply. The undertaking to this effect should be furnished along with the offer without which
the offer shall be liable for rejection.
If there is any change in the design/ type of old type tested current transformers to be offered against this
specification, then the offer is considered for placement of order. However, successful bidders have to carry
out the said type tests on offered type equipment before commencement of supply at their own expense.
Sl. No. Type test Description
A Schedule of Type Test for CT
1 Verification of terminal marking and polarity.
2 High voltage power frequency tests on primary windings.
3 High voltage power frequency tests on secondary windings.
4 Over voltage inter turn test.
Determination of error according to the requirement of appropriate accuracy

5
class
6 Short time current test.
7 Impulse voltage test.
8 Temperature Rise Test.
Instrument Security Factor Test on Both phase of the CT as per Cl. No.7.1.2
9
of Is-2705 (Part-II).
High Voltage Power-frequency Wet withstand voltage test as per Cl. No.9.9
10
of IS-2705 (Part-I).
Acceptance & Routine Tests:-

All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the respective applicable standards amended up-to-date for
current transformer shall be carried out by the supplier in the presence of purchaser's representative without
any extra cost to the purchaser before dispatch.
19. INSPECTION
19.1. The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The successful bidder shall
grant free access to the purchaser‘s representative at any reasonable time when the work is in progress. All
facilities must be made available by supplier/ manufacturer for unrestricted inspection of the works, raw
material & manufacture of all the accessories & for conducting necessary tests as declared therein.
19.2. No current transformer shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the current transformer has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested.
19.3. Inspection and acceptance of any current transformer under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve
the supplier of his obligation of furnishing current transformer in accordance with the specification and shall
not prevent subsequent rejection, if the current transformer is found to be defective.
20. PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The equipment offered shall be guaranteed for satisfactory performance for a period of 66 months from the
date of receipt of complete equipment at site in good condition or 60 months from the date of satisfactory
commissioning, whichever is earlier. In case of failure within this period, the supplier shall make necessary
repairs / replacement of the faulty current transformer at no extra cost to the purchaser.
21. DOCUMENTATION
21.1. List of Drawings & Documents:

The bidder shall furnish two sets of the following drawings along with offer.
a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment

b) Sectional views showing:
i) General Constructional features of Current Transformer, dimensions of conductor, depth of insulation,
clearance between paper insulation & the inside of porcelain, grading stages used for primary insulation,
whether & how a semi conducting tape is used to cover metal foils etc.
ii) The Sectional view shall show the materials / gaskets / sealing used for perfect hermetic sealing and
arrangement for compensation of oil volume variation.
iii) The insulation, the winding arrangements, method of connection of the primary / secondary winding
to the primary / secondary terminals etc.
iv) Porcelain housing used and its dimensions along with the mechanical and electrical characteristics, as
well as volume of oil.
c) Arrangement of secondary Terminal box & details of connection studs provided.
d) Name Plate
e) Schematic drawing
f) Type Test reports in case the equipment has already been type tested.
g) Test reports, literature, pamphlets of the bought out items, and raw material
h) Bill of material and packing list.
i) Pressure release device
j) Oil level indicator
k) Drain plug
l) Bushing drawing
21.2 The successful bidders shall submit three sets of final versions of all the above said drawings in line with
Technical Specifications.
21.3 Adequate copies of acceptance and routine Test Certificates, duly approved by APDCL shall accompany the
dispatched consignment.
21.4 The manufacturing of the current transformers shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and
no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the APDCL. All manufacturing and
fabrication work in connection with the current transformers prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at
the supplier‘s risk.
21.5 One set of nicely printed and bound volume of operation, maintenance and erection manuals in English
language per Current Transformer of each voltage rating shall be submitted by the supplier to respective
consignees along with the dispatch documents of each unit. The manual shall contain all the drawings and
information required for erection, operation and maintenance of the Current Transformer. The manual shall
also contain a set of all the approved drawings, Type Test reports etc.
21.6 Approval of drawings by APDCL shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and liability for
ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirement of the
Technical Specification, latest revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of practices. The equipment
shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of
relevant standards at the time of ordering and APDCL shall have the power to reject any work or materials
which, in his judgment, is not in full accordance there with.
22. PACKING & FORWARDING

22.1 The current transformers shall be packed in wooden crates of good quality and shall be suitable for vertical /
horizontal transportation as the case may be, and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor
storage in stores before erecting. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during
transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and
marked with the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting
hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by supplier
without any extra cost.
22.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following information:
a) Name of the consignee.
b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Sign showing upper / lower side of the crate.
f) Handling and unpacking instructions.
g) Bill of material indicating contents of each package
22.3 The supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of material are approved by the APDCL before
dispatch.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CURRENT TRANSFORMER
Bidders Confirmation
Sl. No. Particular of GTP Parameter
33kV CT 11kV CT
1 Manufacturer‘s Name & address
2 Type of equipment
3 Type of Mounting
4 Equipment Conforming to Standards
5 Rated Voltage / Highest System Voltage in KV
6 Rated Primary Current (Amp)
7 Rated Secondary Current (Amp)
8 Frequency (HZ)
9 Ratio of Current Transformer
10 Details of Cores
i) Number of Cores
ii) Purpose
iii) Burden (VA)
iv) Class of Accuracy
Rated Short Time Withstand Current for 1 Sec.

11 duration
12 Rated Dynamic Withstand Current (KAp)
13 Method of Earthing system to be connected to
One minute Dry Power Frequency Withstand

14 Voltage (KV rms) of Primary Winding
One minute Wet Power Frequency Withstand

15 Voltage (KV rms) of Primary Winding
1.2/50 micro-second Impulse Withstand Voltage

16 (KVP)
The die-electric Withstand values (KVp)of

17 external & internal insulation
One minute Power Frequency Withstand

18 Voltage (KV rms) of Secondary Winding
19 Minimum Creepage Distance (mm)
20 Weight of oil (kg/Ltrs.)
21 Total Weight (kg)

22 Mounting details
23 Overall dimension
24 Type of Winding
25 Material of Winding
26 Size & Cross Section of Primary Winding
27 Size & Cross Section of Secondary Winding
28 No. of Primary Turns
29 No. of Secondary Turns
Current Density of Primary & Secondary

30 Winding (max. – 1.6A/sq.mm)
31 Primary Terminal
32 Type of Insulation
Whether Current Transformer confirms to

33 Temperature Rise limits
34 Type of oil compensation
35 Type of pressure release device provided
36 Partial Discharge level
Rated continuous Thermal Current (120% of the

37 rated Primary Current)
38 Instrument Security Factor (ISF ≤ 5)
39 Class of Insulation
Actual clearance between live part & ground

40 (mm)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 & 11 KV OUTDOOR TYPE POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers specification of 33kV and 11kV Potential Transformer suitable for outdoor service.
Any other parts not specifically mentioned in this specification but otherwise required for proper
functioning of the equipment should be included by the tender in the offer.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Unless otherwise modified in this specification, the Potential Transformer shall comply with the latest
version of relevant standards (IS 3156, IS 2099, IS 5621, IS 335, IS 13947(Part I), IEC 186, Indian
electricity Rules 2003, IEC 815) or better international standards. This list of standards is for guidance
only. The contractor shall be solely responsible to design & manufacture the PT suitable for 33 kV/11kV
systems.
The PT supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the
tropical conditions as detailed for power transformers.
Maximum daily average ambient air temperature 40° C
Maximum temperature attainable by an object exposed to the sun 60° C
Maximum yearly weighted average ambient temperature 32° C
Average number of thunderstorm days per annum (isokeraunic level)
Climatic condition Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive

to rust and fungus growth.
4. SYSTEM PARTICULARS
a) Nominal System Voltage 33kV 11kV
b) Highest system Voltage 36kV 12kV
c) Rated Frequency 50Hz 50Hz
d) No of phases Three Three
e) System neutral earthing ---Solidly Earthed--
f) One minute Power Freq. 70kV 28kV
Withstand voltage (rms)
g) Lighting Impulse withstand Voltage 170kVp 75kVp

h) System fault level ---25 kA for 3sec---
5. TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF PT
a) Rated primary Voltage 36 KV 12 KV
b) Type Single phase potential transformer
c) Voltage/ Ratio(kV) 33/0.11 11/0.11
d) Rated voltage factor 1.2continuous 1.5–30seconds

e) One minute power freq. Withstand voltage for
Primary Terminals 70 kV(rms) 28 kV
Secondary winding 36 kV 12 KV
f) Min. Creepage Distance 25 mm/kV of Highest System Voltage

g) Detail of secondaries Core I Application Metering
Accuracy 0.5 0.5
Burden (VA) 100 100
Note: The ratings indicated for instrument transformer are tentative only and may be changed to meet the
requirements.
6. INSULATION
The insulation of the potential transformers shall be so designed that the internal insulation shall have
higher electrical withstand capability than the external insulation. The designed dielectrics withstand
values of external and internal insulations shall be clearly brought out in the GTP (Guaranteed Technical
particulars). The dielectric withstand values specified in this specification are meant for fully assembled
instrument transformer. The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed the maximum
temperature rise limits specified in annexure IV under the conditions specified there in.
7. PORCELAIN HOUSING
7.1. It shall be single piece of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical & dielectric strength. It
will be glazed with uniform Brown or Dark brown colour with smooth surface finish. The creepage
distance for the porcelain housing shall be at least 25mm per kV.
7.2. The contractor shall clearly detail in his bid the details of attaching the metallic flange to porcelain,
pressure release valve and also how primary & secondary terminals shall be brought out.
8. TANK & SURFACE FINISH

8.1. The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimize possible locations of
oil leakage. It shall be fabricated of MS steel sheet of min. 3.15 mm for sides & 5 mm for top & bottom.
The tank will be finished with min. 2 coats of zinc rich epoxy paint externally. The inner surface shall be
painted with oil resistance white enamel paint.
8.2. All ferrous hardwares, exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dipped galvanized.
9. GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

9.1. The PT shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and
to prevent air and moisture entering the tanks. Method adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in
the offer and shall be subject to approval of the purchaser.
9.2. The PT shall be so constructed that it can be easily transported to site within the allowable transport
limitations, even in horizontal position, if the transport limitations so demand.
10. WINDING
PRIMARY WINDING
It shall be made of insulated electrolytic copper wire. The neutral end of the winding shall be brought outside for
earthing. The primary terminal shall be of standard size of 30 mm dia x 80 mm length of heavily tinned (min.
thickness 15 micron) electrolytic copper of 99.9 % conductivity.
SECONDARY WINDING
It shall be made of insulated copper wire of electrolytic grade. The terminal box shall be dust free & vermin
proof. The size of the terminal box shall be big enough to enable easy access and working space with the use of
normal tools.
The secondary terminals studs shall be provided with at least 3 nuts and two plain washers. These shall be made
of brass duly nickel plated. The min. stud outer dia shall be 10 mm & length 15 mm. The min spacing between
the centres of the adjacent studs shall be 1.5 time the outer dia of the stud.
POLARITY
The polarity shall be marked on each PT at the primary and secondary terminals.
11. INSULATION OIL

The first filling of oil in PT shall be in contractor‘s scope. The oil shall be as per IS 335.To ensure prevention of
oil leakage, the manufacturer will give following details supported by drawings :
i) Location of emergence of Primary & Secondary terminals
ii) Interface between porcelain & metal tanks
iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box
Any nut & bolt and screw used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushing for taking out the terminals shall
be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings & not on the porcelain.
If gasket joints are used, Nitrite Butyl Rubber gasket shall be used. The grooves shall be in machined with
adequate space for accommodating gasket under pressure.
The PT shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing. It will be properly sealed to eliminate breathing & to
prevent air & moisture from entering the tank. The sealing methods/arrangement shall be described by the
contractor & be approved by the owner.
12. OIL LEVEL INDICATOR
The PT shall be fitted with prismatic type oil sight window at suitable location so that the oil level is clearly
visible with naked eye to an observer standing at ground level.
To compensate oil volume variation due to temperature variation, Nitrogen cushion or the stainless steel bellows
shall be used. Rubber diaphragms are not permitted for this purpose.
13. EARTHING
Two earthling terminals shall be provided on the metallic tank of size 16 mm dia & 30 mm length each with one
plain washer & one nut for connection to the station earth mat.
14. Junction Box
The junction box shall be of MS sheet having thickness of 2mm, synthetic enamel painted as per procedure
mentioned in General technical Requirement (Min. thickness 55 micron). The shade of junction box shall be 697
of IS: 5. Disconnecting type terminal blocks for PT secondary lead shall be provided. The junction boxes shall be
weather proof type with gaskets as per section-I (Introduction and general technical requirements) conforming to
IP-55 as per IS-13947 (Part-I).
One junction box shall be provided for 3 numbers of single phase CT‘s and PT‘s.
15. LIFTING & MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
The PT shall be provided with two lifting eyes to lift the PT. This shall be so positioned so as to avoid any
damage to the PT during lifting for installation or transportation purpose. This shall be detailed in General
Arrangement drawing.
The PT shall be of pedestal mounting type suitable for outdoor installation on steel/cement concrete structures.
All the clamps, bolts, nut and washers etc. required for mounting the PT on the structure shall be supplied along
with the PT and shall be galvanized. The contractor shall supply all the terminal connectors etc. required for
connection to the PT.
16. TESTING
16.1. Type Tests:
The Potential Transformer offered in the Bid should have been successfully type tested at NABL laboratories for
the tests indicated as follow in line with the relevant standard and technical specification. These Type Tests
should have been carried out within five years prior to the date of opening of tender. The bidder shall be required
to submit complete set of the type test reports along with the offer. In case these type tests are conducted earlier
than five years, all the type tests as per the relevant standard shall be carried out by the successful bidder at
NABL in presence of purchaser's representative free of cost before commencement of supply. The undertaking to
this effect should be furnished along with the offer without which the offer shall be liable for rejection. If there is
any change in the design/ type of old type tested Potential transformers to be offered against this specification,
then the offer is considered for placement of order. However, successful bidders have to carry out the said type
tests on offered type Potential transformers before commencement of supply at their own expense.
Sl.No. Type test Description
A Schedule of Type Test for PT
2 Power frequency dry withstand test on primary winding.
3 Power frequency dry withstand test on secondary winding.
Determination of errors according to the requirement of the

4
appropriate accuracy class.
5 Temperature rise test.
Impulse voltage test for voltage transformer for service in

6
electricity exposed installation.
High Voltage Power-frequency Wet withstand voltage test as per

7
Cl. No.9.7 of IS-3156(Part-I)
Acceptance & Routine Tests:-

All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the respective applicable standards amended up-to-date for
potential transformer shall be carried out by the supplier in the presence of purchaser's representative without any
extra cost to the purchaser before dispatch.
17. INSPECTION
17.1. The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The successful bidder
shall grant free access to the purchaser‘s representative at any reasonable time when the work is in progress. All
facilities must be made available by supplier/ manufacturer for unrestricted inspection of the works, raw material
& manufacture of all the accessories & for conducting necessary tests as declared therein.
17.2. No potential transformer shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the potential
transformer has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.
17.3. Inspection and acceptance of any potential transformer under this specification by the purchaser shall not
relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing potential transformer in accordance with the specification and
shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if the potential transformer is found to be defective.
18. PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

The equipment offered shall be guaranteed for satisfactory performance for a period of 66 months from the date
of receipt of complete equipment at site in good condition or 60 months from the date of satisfactory
commissioning, whichever is earlier. In case of failure within this period, the supplier shall make necessary
repairs / replacement of the faulty potential transformer at no extra cost to the purchaser.
19. DOCUMENTATION
19.1. List of Drawings & Documents :-
The bidder shall furnish two sets of the following drawings along with offer.
a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment

b) Sectional views showing :-
i) General Constructional features of Potential transformer, dimensions of conductor, depth of insulation,
clearance between paper insulation & the inside of porcelain, grading stages used for primary insulation,
whether & how a semi conducting tape is used to cover metal foils etc.
ii) The Sectional view shall show the materials / gaskets / sealing used for perfect hermetic sealing and
arrangement for compensation of oil volume variation.
iii) The insulation, the winding arrangements, method of connection of the primary / secondary winding to the
primary / secondary terminals etc.
iv) Porcelain housing used and its dimensions along with the mechanical and electrical characteristics, as well
as volume of oil.
c) Arrangement of secondary Terminal box & details of connection studs provided.
d) Name Plate
e) Schematic drawing
f) Type Test reports in case the equipment has already been type tested.
g) Test reports, literature, pamphlets of the bought out items, and raw material
h) Bill of material and packing list.
i) Pressure release device
j) Oil level indicator
k) Drain plug
l)Bushing drawing
19.1 The successful bidders shall submit three sets of final versions of all the above said drawings in line with
19.2 Adequate copies of acceptance and routine Test Certificates, duly approved by APDCL shall accompany
the dispatched consignment.
19.3 The manufacturing of the potential transformers shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the APDCL. All
manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the potential transformers prior to the approval of
the drawing shall be at the supplier‘s risk.
19.4 One set of nicely printed and bound volume of operation, maintenance and erection manuals in English
language per Potential transformer of each voltage rating shall be submitted by the supplier to respective
consignees along with the dispatch documents of each unit. The manual shall contain all the drawings and
information required for erection, operation and maintenance of the Potential transformer. The manual
shall also contain a set of all the approved drawings, Type Test reports etc.
19.5 Approval of drawings by APDCL shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and liability for
ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirement of the
Technical Specification, latest revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of practices. The
equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest
revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and APDCL shall have the power to reject any
work or materials which, in his judgment, is not in full accordance therewith.
20 PACKING & FORWARDING

20.1 The potential transformers shall be packed in wooden crates of good quality and shall be suitable for
vertical / horizontal transportation as the case may be, and suitable to withstand handling during transport
and outdoor storage in stores before erecting. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable material shall
be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper
arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the
packing cases shall be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.
20.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following information:
i) Name of the consignee.
ii) Details of consignment.
iii) Destination.
iv) Total weight of consignment.
v) Sign showing upper / lower side of the crate.
vi) Handling and unpacking instructions.
vii) Bill of material indicating contents of each package
20.3 The supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of material are approved by the APDCL before
dispatch.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33KV & 11KV OUTDOOR PT
Bidders Confirmation
Sl. No. Particular of GTP Parameter
33kV PT 11kV PT
1 Manufacturers name & Type of PT
2 Manufacturer's type Designation.
3 Whether Conforming to standards
4 Rated Primary Voltage in kV
5 Number of secondary windings
6 Rated secondary voltage (Volts)
7 Rated burden (VA)
8 Accuracy class
9 Highest system voltage (kV)

10 Quantity of oil ( Liters )
i) Type of insulation & Temperature rise limits
Whether Potential transformer conforms to the Temperature rise

ii)
limits
iii) Rated voltage factor & time
One minute power frequency withstand voltage test (dry) (kV

iv)
rms)
One minute power frequency withstand voltage test (wet) (kV

11
rms)
12 1.2/50 microsecond impulse wave withstand test voltage (kVP)
One minute power frequency withstand voltage on secondary

13
(kV rms)
14 Minimum Creepage distance (mm)
15 Weight of oil (kg)
16 Total weight (kg)
17 Overall dimensions
18 Mounting details
19 Primary terminals
Whether Type test reports (within 5 years) are submitted along

20
with the offer?
21 Type of oil compensation
22 Whether experience sheet n is submitted along with the offer?
Whether 5 year continuous servicing performance certificate is

23
submitted along with the offer?
24 Whether Drawings are submitted along with the offer?
Whether Pressure release device of technical specification is

25
provided?
26 Type of insulation material used for PT

5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV AND 33 KV ISOLATORS
1. SCOPE
This specification provides for design, manufacture, testing at manufactures works, inspection, packing
and delivery of outdoor station type 12kV and 36kV (Local) manual operating mechanism air break
disconnects (Isolators) with/without earthing blades and complete in all respect with bi-metallic
connectors and other accessories and auxiliary equipment for installations in various substations in
Assam. Operating mechanism, fixing details etc. shall be as described herein.
The Isolators to be supplied against this Specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under
the following climatic conditions.
At various locations within
1 Location
the state of Assam
Maximum average daily ambient air temperature

4 35
(°C)

5 32
temperature(°C)
Maximum altitude above mean sea level 1000

6
(Meters)
7 Maximum Humidity 93%
8 Average number of thunderstorm days 45->50
9 Average numbers of dust storms per annum 10
10 Maximum rainfall/annum 3500 mm
11 Average rainfall 2280 mm
12 Wind Pressure 97.8 Kg/Sq.mm
13 Altitude above MSL 100 m to 1000 m
14 Seismic Level 0.24g to 0.48g
Note:
The equipment shall generally be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and
fungus growth unless otherwise specified.
The isolators shall be suitable for outdoor installation with 3-phase 50 Hz, 11 kV/33kV systems and they should be
designed suitable for service under fluctuations in supply voltage up to ±12%. Permissible under Indian Electricity
Supply Act and rules made there under.
4. STANDARDS
The isolators and isolator-cum-earthling switches shall comply with the requirements of IS 9921 (as
amended up to date) and the latest edition of IEC 62271-102 (IEC 60129). The Insulators shall comply
with the requirement of latest edition of IS 2544/1973 and IEC 60168/1988 (as amended up to date)
Sl. No. Standard No. Title

1 IS 9921 (Part 1 to 4) Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and Earthing
Switches for Voltages Above 1000 V - Part I
2 IEC 62271-102 (IEC/ 60129) Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
3 IEC 62271-1 (IEC 60694) High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 1: Common
specifications
4 IS 2544/ IEC 60168 Porcelain post insulators for systems with nominal voltage
greater than 1000 Volts
5 IS 5350 Dimensions of Indoor and Outdoor Porcelain Post Insulators
and Post Insulator Units for Systems with Nominal Voltages
Greater than 1000 V
6 IS 2629 Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Iron and
Steel
7 IS 4736 Hot-dip Zinc Coatings on Mild Steel Tubes
8 IS 4759 Hot-dip zinc coatings on structural steel and other allied

products
9 IS 6745 Method for determination of mass of zinc coating on zinc
coated iron and steel articles
10 IS 2633 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated
articles
11 IS 9530/1980 Recommended practice for silver plating
12 IS 5925/1970 Recommended practice for silver plating for general
engineering purposes
13 BS 2816/1964 Testing of silver plating thickness
14 IS 6735/1994 Spring lock washers
15 IS 2016 Plain washers
16 IS 1161 Steel tubes for structural purposes
17 IS 1239 GI pipe (‗B‘ class or Medium class)
18 IS 2147 Degree of protection provided for enclosures for low
voltage control gear
19 IS:4691 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for rotating
electrical machinery
17 IS: 5561 Electrical Power Connectors
5. KEY TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

The equipment covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements listed below. The Isolator must
be Double Break, center pole rotating type
Sl. No. Parameter Unit Requirements for Requirements for (11kV)

(33kV)
1 Rated Freq. Hz. 50 50
2 System Neutral Earthing Solidly earthed Solidly earthed
3 No. of phase (poles) No. 3 3
4 Temp. rise Deg. C As per standards IS/IEC As per standards IS/IEC
5 Safe duration of overload Minutes
a) 150 % of rated current 5 5
b) 120 % of rated current 30 30
6 Rated voltage KV rms 36 12
7 Type of isolator (AB) DBCR DBCR
8 Rated normal current Amps. 800 / 1250 400/ 630
9 Rated short time KA rms 25 25

withstand current for 3
second
10 Rated peak current KA peak 63 63
11 Rated short circuit make KA peak 63 63

current
12 Derating factor unity Unity
13 Basic Insulation Level
1) Lightning Impulse
withstand voltage
a) Pole to earth & KV peak 170 75

between poles
b) Across isolating KV peak 195 85

distance
Sl. No. Parameter Unit Requirements for Requirements for (11kV)

(33kV)
2) Rated power freq.

withstand voltage
a) Pole to earth & KV rms 70 28

between poles
b) Across isolating KV rms 80 32

distance
14 Min. creepage distance mm 900 300
(The protected creepage

distance shall not be less
than 50% of total)
15 Phase to phase spacing for mm 1500 900

installation
16 Min. clearances mm
a) Phase to earth 430 370
b) Between rotating post 485 310

and fixed post on one
phase
17 Height of centre line of mm 3700 3700

terminal pad above
ground level
18 Special Requirements:
Isolator main switch (MS) shall be required to make or break the line charging current when no
significant change in voltage occurs across the isolating distance on account of make or break.
The isolator required is not with ―Turn and twist mechanism‖. It must be rotating type.

6.1. TYPE & RATING
Isolators shall have three posts per phase, triple pole single throw, gang operated out-door type silver plated
contacts with horizontal operating blade and isolators posts arranged vertically. The isolators will be double
break type. Rotating blade feature with pressure relieving contacts is necessary i.e. the isolator shall be
described in detail alongwith the offer. All isolators shall operate through 90 degree from their fully closed
position to fully open position, so that the break is distinct and clearly visible from the ground level.
The equipment offered by the tenderer shall be designed for a normal current rating of 400A, 630 A for
11 KV & 800 A, 1250 A for 33 KV suitable for continuous service at the system voltage specified
herein. The isolators are not required to operate under load but they must be called upon to handle
magnetization currents of the power transformers and capacitive currents of bushings, bus-bars connections,
very short lengths of cables and current of voltage transformers.

The rated insulation strength of the equipment shall not be lower than the levels specified in IS 9921 IEC
publication No. IEC 62271-102 (IEC 60129), which are reproduced below:
Standard Rated voltage Standard Impulse One minute power

declared of the Isolator withstand Voltage frequency withstand
voltage positive kV polarity voltage KV (RMS)
kV/rms (peak)
Across the To earth and Across the To earth and
isolating between poles isolating between poles
distance distance
11 KV 12 85 75 32 28
33 KV 36 195 170 80 70
The 11 KV and 33 KV isolators are required with post insulators but with mounting structures. The isolators
should be suitable for mounting on the Boards standard structures. The isolators shall be supplied with base
channels along with fixing nuts, bolts and washers for mounting on the structured.
6.2 TEMPRATURE RISE
The maximum temperature attained by any part of the equipment when in service at site under continues
full load conditions and exposed to the direct rays of Sun shall not exceed 45 degree centigrade above
ambient temperature.
6.3 ISOLATOR INSULATION
Isolation to ground, insulation between open contacts and the insulation between phases of the completely
assembled isolating switches shall be capable of withstanding the dielectric test voltage specified above.
6.4 MAIN CONTACTS
All isolators shall have heavy duty self-aligning and high pressure line type fixed contacts of modern
design and made of hard drawn electrolytic copper. The fixed contact should be of reverse loop type. The
various parts shall be accordingly finished to ensure interchangeability of similar components.
The fingers of fixed contacts shall be preferably in two pieces and each shall form the reverse loops to hold
fixed contacts. The fixed contacts would be placed in ‗c‘ clamp. The thickness of ‗C‘ clamp shall be
adequate. This channel shall be placed on a channel of adequate thickness. This channel shall be welded on
an insulator mounting plate of 8mm thickness. The spring of fixed contact shall have housing to hold in
place. This spring shall be made of stainless steel with adequate thickness. The pad for connection of
terminal connector shall be of Aluminium with thickness not less than 12 mm.
The switch blades forming the moving contacts shall be made from tubular section of hard drawn
electrolytic copper having outer diameter not less than 38 mm and thickness 3 mm. These contacts shall be
liberally dimensioned so as to withstand safely the highest short circuit and over voltage that may be
encountered during service. The surfaces of the contacts shall be rendered smooth and silver
plated. The thickness of silver plating shall not be less than 15 microns for 11 KV and 25
microns for 33 KV. In nut shell, the male and female contact assemblies shall be of robust
construction and design of these assemblies shall ensure the same.

a) Electro-dynamic withstand ability during short circuit without any risk of repulsion of contacts.
b) The current density in the copper parts shall not be less than 2 Amp/sq.mm and aluminium
parts shall be less than 1 Amp / sq.mm.
c) Thermal withstand ability during short circuit.
d) Constant contact pressure even when the live parts of the insulator stacks are subjected to
tensile stresses due to linear expansion of connected bus bar of flexible conductors either
because of temperature verification or strong winds.
e) Wiping action during closing and opening.
f) Self-alignment assuring closing of the switch without minute adjustment.
The earthing switch should be provided with three sets of suitable type of fixed contacts below the fixed
contacts assemblies of the main switch on the incoming supply side and the sets of moving contacts having
ganged operation. These contacts shall be fabricated out of electrolytic copper for 33 KV isolators with earth
switch and designed to withstand current on the line.
Arcing contacts/Horn: Arcing contacts are not required.
6.5 AUXILIARY SWITCHES:
Auxiliary switches are to be provided both for main and earth switches and shall be mechanically actuated
by the corresponding, operating mechanism, Four (4) number of each normally 'Open' and normally 'Close'
contacts shall be provided purchaser's interlocking and protection scheme.. Design which permits the change
of normally ‗close‘ contact to normally ‗open‘ contact or vice versa with minimum modification would be
preferred. Switches shall be provided for indication of switch position, electrical interlocking, remote
semaphores etc.
Each auxiliary switch shall be equipped with four (4) numbers of spare auxiliary contacts in addition
to mention above.
Auxiliary switches shall be mounted in a weatherproof housing, which shall have provision for entry of
cables of proper size and for fixing of cable glands. The auxiliary switch and auxiliary circuits shall be
capable of carrying a current of atleast 10 Amps continuously.
6.6 CONNECTORS
The connectors for 11KV isolator shall be made of Aluminium alloy LM-9 or LM-25 and shall be suitable
for Raccoon/Dog ACSR Conductors for 11KV and Wolf conductors for 33 KV with horizontal and vertical
takeoff arrangement. The details in regard to dimensions, the number of bolts to be provided, material and
manufacture shall be furnished by the bidder for owner approval before manufacturing. The groove provided
in the connection should be able to accommodate conductor size mentioned above smoothly.
The clamps to be offered should be manufactured by gravity die-casting method only and not by sand
casting process. It is necessary that suitable clamps are offered along with the isolator and also it is
obligatory to give complete technical particular of clamps along with the drawing, as per details given
above and also as per following detail:
a) The terminal connector shall be manufactured and tested as per IS: 5561.
b) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities.
c) All the sharp edges shall be blurred and rounded off.
d) No part of the clamp shall be less than 12 mm thick.
e) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact
resistance.
f) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirement of IS:
5561.
g) All nuts and bolts shall be made of stainless steel only. Bimetallic sleeve/liner shall be 2
mm thick
Wherever necessary, bi-metallic strip of standard quality and adequate dimension shall be used.
6.7 POST INSULATOR

11KV / 33KV insulators shall be of reputed make subject to owner approval. The post insulators for the
above 11 KV isolators shall comprise of three numbers 11 KV insulators per stack and 9 such stack shall
be supplied with each isolator. Similarly, for 33 KV isolators, two numbers 33 KV insulators per stack and
9 stacks shall be supplied with each isolator. The insulator stack shall conform to the latest applicable
Indian or IEC standard and in particulars to the IS; 2544 specification for porcelain post insulators. The
porcelain used for manufactures of insulators shall be homogeneous, free from flaws or imperfections
that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality, and they shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and
impervious to moisture. The glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown colour, free from glisters,
burns and other similar defects. Insulators of the same rating and type shall be interchangeable.
The porcelain and metal parts should be assembled in such a manner that any thermal expansion
differential between the metal and the porcelain parts throughout the range of temperature variation
shall not loosen the parts or create undue internal stresses which may affect the electrical or mechanical
strength and rigidity. Each cap and base shall be of high-grade cast steel or malleable steel casting and
they shall be machine faced and smoothly galvanized. The cap and base of the insulators shall be
interchangeable with each other.
The tenders shall in variably enclose with the offer, the type test certificate and other relevant technical
guaranteed particulars of insulators offered by them. Please note that isolators without type test certificates
will not be accepted.
Each 11KV / 33KV Post Insulators used in the isolators should have technical particulars as detailed
below:
Sl. No. Particulars 11KV 33KV
1 Nominal system voltage KV (rms) 11 33
2 Highest system voltage KV (rms) 12 36
Dry P.F. One minute with stand KV

3 35 75
(rms)
Wet PF one minute withstand KV

4 35 75
(rms)
1.3 times the actual dry flash over

5 P.F. Puncture withstand test voltage KV
voltage of the unit
Impulse voltage withstand test KV

6 75 170
(peak)
7 Visible discharge test KV voltage 9 27
8 Creepage distance mm (min) 300 900
9 Tensile strength in KN 10 16
10 Short time current rating for 3 Secs KA 25 25
For 33 KV Isolators: In place of 33 KV Post Insulator the composition of 2 units of 22KV Post Insulators
per stack complying with the following parameters are acceptable:
a Nominal system voltage 33 KV
b Highest system voltage 36 KV
c Impulse voltage withstand 170 KV
Power frequency wet withstand

d 75 KV
voltage
e Height of stack 500 mm
f Creepage distance (Minimum) 900 mm
g Tensile Strength 30KN
h Bending strength 4.5KN
6.7 OPERATING MECHANISM FOR 11KV / 33KV ISOLATORS:

All Isolators and earthing switches shall have separate dependent manual operation. The Isolator should
be provided with padlocking arrangements for locking in both end position to avoid unintentional
operation. For this purpose Godrej make 5 lever brass padlocks having high neck with three keys shall be
provided. The isolating distances should be visible for isolators.
The Isolators and Isolators with earth switch inclusive of their operating mechanism should be such that
they cannot come out of their open or close position by gravity wind pressure, vibrations reasonable
shocks or accidental touching of connecting rods of the operating mechanism. Isolators should be capable
of resisting in closed position, the dynamic and thermal effects of maximum possible short circuit current
at the installation point. They shall be so constructed that they do not open under the influence of the
short circuit current. The operating mechanism should be of robust construction and easy to operate by a
single person and conveniently located for local operation in the switchyard. Provisio n for earthing of
operating handle by means of 8 SWG GS wire must be made.
6.8 PIPES
Tandem pipes operating handle shall be class BIS marked type having atleast 24mm internal diameter for
11KV/33KV isolator. The operating pipe shall also be class B ISI marked with internal diameter of atleast
32 mm and 38 mm for 11 KV and 33KV isolators respectively.
The pipe shall be terminated in to suitable universal type joints between the insulator bottom bearing
and operating mechanism.
6.9 BASE CHANNEL

The Isolator shall be mounted on base fabricated from steel channel section of adequate size not less than
75x40x6 mm for 11KV and 100x50x6 mm for 33KV.
To withstand total weight of isolator and insulator and also all the forces that may encounter by the isolator
during services, suitable holes shall be provided on this base channel to facilitate it‘s mounting on our
standard structures. The steel channel in each phase shall be mounted in vertical position and over it two
mounting plates atleast 8 mm thick with suitable nuts and bolts shall be provided for minor adjustment at
site.
6.10 CONTROL CABINET
The control cabinet of each operating mechanism shall be made out of 12 SWG (2.64 mm thick) sheet
steel in the form of plate or casting. Control cabinet shall be provided with hinged doors alongwith pad
locking arrangement. Sloping rain hood shall be provided to cover all sides. 15 mm thick neoprene or
better type of gaskets shall be provided to ensure degree of protection of at least IP55 as per IS: 2147. The
cabinet shall be suitable for fixing on support structure with adjustment for vertical, horizontal and
longitudinal alignment. Details of the arrangement provided for such adjustment as well as for sealing shall
be furnished along with the tender.
6.11 CLEARANCES
We have adopted the following minimum clearance for isolators in our system. The bidder should
therefore keep the same in view while submitting their offers:
Center distance between Poles Distance between center lines

Description (Center to Center) of
i.e. Phase to Phase clearance outer posts on same pole
11 KV Isolator 75 cm 60 cm
33 KV Isolator 12 cm 96 cm
7. TYPE TESTS
7.1 The equipment offered, shall be fully type tested as per the relevant standards. The tenderer shall furnish
one set of the type test reports along with the offer. The purchaser reserves the right to demand repetition
of some or all the type tests in the presence of purchaser's representative. For this purpose the tenderer
may quote unit rates for carrying out each type test.
7.2 If type tests are carried out beyond 5 years, then the offer may be considered for placement of order
however, successful bidders have to carry out the said type tests before commencement of the supply at
their own expense.
7.3 During the type test the isolator shall be mounted on its own support structure or equivalent support
structure and installed with its own operating mechanism to make the type tests representative. Drawing
of equivalent support structure if any and mounting arrangements made for type tests shall be furnished
for purchaser's approval before conducting the type tests.
7.4 The type tests shall be conducted on the isolator along with approved insulators and terminal connectors.
7.5 Mechanical endurance test shall be conducted on the main switch as well as earth switch on one
disconnect of each type.
7.6 The isolators shall be subjected to the following type test in accordance to with IS: 9920.
Dielectric test (impulse and one minute) power frequency withstands voltage.
a) Temperature rise test

b) Rated off load breaking current capacity
c) Rated active load breaking capacity
d) Rated line charging breaking capacity

e) Rated short time current
f) Rated peak withstand current
g) Mechanical and Electrical Endurance
The equipment shall be subjected to the following routine test.
a) Power frequency voltage dry test.

b) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit
c) Operating test.
The porcelain will have pull out test for embedded component and beam strength of porcelain base.
8. PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS
Contractor shall carry out following tests as pre-commissioning tests. Contractor shall also perform any
additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field instructions of the equipment Supplier or
Employer without any extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for
conducting these tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the
Employer for approval.
(a) Insulation resistance of each pole.
(b) Manual operation and interlocks.
(c) Insulation resistance of control circuits and motors.
(d) Ground connections.
(e) Contact resistance.
(f) Proper alignment so as to minimize the vibration during operation to the extreme possible.
(g) Measurement of operating Torque for isolator and Earth switch.
(h) Resistance of operating and interlocks coils.
(i) Functional check of the control schematic and electrical & mechanical interlocks.
(j) 50 operations test on isolator and earth switch.
9. PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE:
The equipment shall be guaranteed for satisfactory performance for a period of 66 months from the date
of receipt at site in good condition or 60 months from the date of commissioning, whichever is earlier. In
case of failure within this period the supplier will make good the faulty equipment at no extra cost to the
purchaser.
10. DOCUMENTATION:
10.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards. All drawings shall be "A3" size only. All
dimensions and data shall be in System International units.
10.2 List of drawings and documents:

The tenderer shall furnish four sets of following drawings along with his offer:
a. General outline and assembly drawings of the isolator, operating mechanism, structure, insulator
and terminal connector.
b. Sectional views and descriptive details of items such as moving blades, contacts, arms, contact,
pressure, contact support, bearing, housing of bearings, bushes, balancing of heights, phase coupling
pipes, base plate, operating shaft, guides, swivel joint operating mechanism and its components, etc.
c. Drawings with structure for the purpose of type tests.

d. Name plate.
e. Schematic drawing
f. Type test reports in case the equipment has already been type tested.
g. Test reports, literature, pamphlets of the bought out items, and raw material.
10.4 The successful tenderer shall, within 10 days from date of LOA get approval of above said drawings
from office of CGM (PP&D), APDCL, Guwahati
10.5 Six sets of the type test reports, duly approved by the purchaser, shall be submitted by the supplier for
distribution, before commencement of supply. Adequate copies of acceptance and routine test
certificates, duly approved by the purchaser, shall accompany the dispatched consignment.
10.6 The manufacturing of the equipments shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and no
deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All manufacturing and
fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the
supplier's risk.
10.7 Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and liability
for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable standards, rules and
codes of practices.
11.0 INSTRUCTION MANUALS:
Twenty five copies of the erection, operation and maintenance manuals in English shall be supplied for
each type of the disconnect one month prior to dispatch of the equipment. The manual shall be bound
volume and shall contain all drawings and information required for erection, operation and maintenance
of the isolator including but not limited to the following particulars:
a. Marked erection prints identifying the component parts of the disconnect as shipped with assembly
drawings.
b. Detailed dimensions and description of all auxiliaries.
c. Detailed views of the insulator stacks, metallics, operating mechanism, structure, interlocks, spare
parts etc.
12. SPARES:
The tenderer shall furnish in his offer, a list of spares with unit rates for disconnect that may be necessary
for maintenance of the isolator for a period of five years. The purchaser reserves the right for selection of
items and quantities of these spares to be ordered.
The cost of following spares shall be quoted separately.
a. Insulators
b. Contacts
c. Moving blades
d. Springs
e. Bearings
In addition list of optional spares may be enclosed.
14. PACKING AND FORWARDING

14.1 The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport, as the case may be,
and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall
be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing.
The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution
symbols. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided,
any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.
14.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following
information.
a. Name of the consignee
b. Details of consignment
c. Destination
d. Total weight of consignment
e. Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
f. Handling and unpacking instructions
g. Bill of material indicating contains of each package.
14.3 The supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of material are approved by the purchaser
before dispatch.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 KV & 11 KV ISOLATORS
Sl. No. PARTICULARS 33KV ISOLATOR 11KV ISOLATOR
1 Manufacturer's Type/Designation/Installation
2 Manufacturer's Name and works address of

Manufacture
3 Standard(s) according to which the isolators are

manufactured
4 Type of Disconnector
5 Maximum design voltage at which the isolator can

operate (kV)
6 Rated Frequency (Hz)
7 Rated Voltage (KV)
8 Max. current that can be safely interrupted by the

isolator
i) Inductive (A & % PF)

ii) Capacitive (A & % PF)
9 Continuous current rating
i) Nominal (Amps)
ii) Under site conditions (Amps)
10 Rated short time withstand current
i) For 3 seconds (KA rms)
ii) For 1 second (KA rms)
iii) Rated peak withstand current (kAp)
10 Milli Volt drop test voltage between:
11 i) Contacts
ii) Terminals of each phase
12 Current density at the minimum cross- section of:
a) Moving blade (Amps/Sq.mm.)
b) Terminal pad (Amps/sq.mm.)
c) Male Contacts (Amps/sq.mm.)
d) Female Contacts (Amps/sq.mm.)
e) Terminal Connector (Amp/sq.mm)
13 Max. temp. rise of following current carrying parts

when carrying rated current continuously (deg.C)
over an ambient of 50 deg.C instead of 40 deg.C
mentioned in relevant IS.
i) Moving blades
ii) Contacts with silver plating
iii) Terminal pad.
iv) Bi-metallic terminal connector
v) Springs
14 Class (outdoor or indoor)
15 Derating factor for specified site conditions
16 No. of operations the isolator can make without

deterioration of contacts.
17 Insulation levels
i) Lightning Impulse withstand voltage (kV peak)
a) Phases to Earth
b) Isolating Distance
ii) Power frequency withstand voltage (kVrms)
a) Phases to Earth
b) Isolating Distance
18 Minimum clearance in air (mm):
i) When switch is closed:
a) Between adjacent poles of different phases

(center to center)
b) Between live parts and earth
ii) When switch is open:
a) Between poles of same phase (center to center)
b) Between adjacent poles of different phases

(center to center)
19 Design and Construction
i) No. of insulators per pole
ii) No. of breaks per pole
iii) Type of closing/opening mechanism

(Horizontal/Vertical break straight etc.)
should be GANG operated through hand
iv) Contacts (Male):
a) Material and grade
b) Dimensions & Cross-sectional area in sq.mm.
v) Contacts (Female):
vi) Moving Blades:

vii) Terminal pad:
viii) Arching horns:
ix) Springs
x) Contact Support:
a) Material, size and length of plate
b) Material and size of plate
xi) Rain hood - Material grade and size
xii) Nuts and Bolts
a) Size, material and grade in live parts
b) Size, material and grade in other parts
xiii) Insulator base plate
Material and size & min. thickness of plate below

insulators.
xiv) Bearings:
a) Make, Type and No. of bearings for:
i) Rotating insulator base assembly
ii) Operating mechanism
iii) Whether lubricating nipple is provided
b) Make, and size of bearing housing
xv) Size of GI pipes (medium class) used for:
a) Down operating pipe (mm)
b) Connecting pipe for same phase (mm)
c) Connecting Pipe for adjacent poles(mm)

xvii) Tandem pipe
a) Size class and No. of pipes
b) Size of shackle, screw
c) No. of bearings/bush and its material and size.
xvii) Type of interlock
xviii) Type of universal/swived joint
a) Between bearing and down pipe
b) Between down pipe and operating mechanism
xix) Insulators
a) Type.
b) No. of units per insulator
c) Rating of insulators(KV)
d) Height of each insulator stack (mm)
e) Bolt circle diameter(mm)
f) Tensile strength (kg.)
g) Compressive strength (Kg.)
h) Torsional strength (kg. m.)
i) Cantilever strength upright
j) Power frequency dry flashover voltage (KV)

rms.
k) Power frequency wet flash-over voltage (KV)

rms.
l) Impulse flash-over voltage (positive wave)

(KV) peak.
m) Impulse withstand voltage (kv) peak
n) Power frequency puncture voltage (KV) rms.
o) Visual discharge voltage level (KV) rms.
p) Creepage distance: Total (mm)
q) Dry arcing distance (mm)
xx) Base:
a) Size, Nos. & length of steel sections used
b) Overall size(mm)
c) Total weight (Kgs)
xxi) Terminal Connectors:
a) Clamp Body:
i) Alloy Composition
ii) Plating if any
iii) Dimension
b) Bolts and nuts size
i) Alloy composition
ii) Tensile strength
a) Type of washers used
b) Materials of braids
c) Temperature rise when carrying rated current at

50 deg.C ambient (deg.C)
d) Weight of each type of clamp (Kg.)
20 Mass of isolator hardware in Kg.
A) Without earth blade
21 Type of contacts
22 Nuts & Bolts
a) Size, material & grade in live parts
b) Terminal connectors.
c) Other parts.
23 Locking arrangement of Isolators and earth switch

operating mechanism
24 Whether isolator hardware is complete with all

accessories
25 Details of type test reports furnished:
Item IS: Type test Testing
Report No. authority & date

i) Isolator
ii) Terminal connector
iii) Degree of protection
26 List of brought out items
27 List of drawing furnished
28 Marking
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CONTROL & RELAY PANEL FOR 33 KV/11 KV

FEEDER WITH DIRECTIONAL OR NON-DIRECTIONAL O/C AND E/F PROTECTION AND
33/11 KV TRANSFORMER PANEL WITH & WITHOUT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
FOR VARIOUS 33/11 KV SUB-STATIONS
1.0 Scope:
This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, testing before supply, inspection, packing and
delivery and other basic technical requirements in respect of control and relay panels for 33 kV/11 KV
feeders, 33/11KV Power Transformers without differential protection and 33/11KV Power Transformers
with differential protection to be installed at various 33/11 kV sub-stations. The equipment to be supplied
against this specification is required for vital installations where continuity of service is very important.
The design, materials and manufacture of the equipment shall, therefore, be of the highest order to ensure
continuous and trouble-free service over the years. The Manufacturer has to design the Schematics for
protection and Control of all equipment including monitoring indications, visual and audible alarm,
interlocking schemes among different equipment. Any other requirement which are not specifically
covered here but which are necessary for successful commissioning of the Sub stations are also within the
scope of the Contract.
The equipment manufactured should conform to the relevant standards and of highest quality of engineering
design and workmanship. The equipment manufactured shall ensure satisfactory and reliable performance
throughout the service life. The Schedule of requirement of the Panel is furnished separately in details.
2.0 Service Conditions:
2.1. System particulars:
Nominal system voltage 33 kV & 11 kV

Corresponding highest system voltage
36 kV & 12 kV
Frequency 50 Hz±3%
Number of phases 3
33 kV Grounded through Earthing Transformer
Neutral earthing 11 kV solidly earthed
2.2. Equipment supplied against the specification shall be suitable for satisfactoryoperation under the
following tropical conditions:
Max. ambient air temperature 60 ° C
Max. relative humidity 100 %
Max. annual rainfall 1450 mm
Max. wind pressure 150 kg/sq. m.
Max. altitude above mean sea level 1500 meters
Isoceraunic level 50
Reference Ambient Temperature for 50 deg C

temperature rise
Climatic Condition Moderately hot and humid tropical climate
conducive to rust and fungus growth
Max. ambient air temperature 60° C
Max. wind pressure 150 kg/sq. m.
Max. altitude above mean sea level 1500 meters
Reference Ambient Temperature for

50° C
temperature rise
Moderately hot and humid tropical climate
Climatic Condition
conducive to rust and fungus growth
2.3. The climatic conditions are prone to wide variations in ambient conditions and hence the
equipment shall be of suitable design to work satisfactorily under these conditions.
2.4. Auxiliary supplies available at the various sub-stations are as follows:
3.0 Rating:
A. C. Supply 230 volts, with ± 10% variation, Frequency 50Hz with ±3%
i.
110 V DC. DC system is 2 (two) wire with necessary earth fault

annunciation scheme. DC supply shall be normally fed from Battery
ii D.C. Supply charger. In case of failure of AC supply to Battery Charger, DC
supply voltage will be available
from Lead Acid Battery.
3.1. Unless otherwise specified all equipment and material shall conform to the latest IS applicable
standards. Equipment complying with other internationally recognized standards will also be
considered if it ensures performance equivalent or superior to Indian standards. In the event of supply
of equipment conforming to any international \ internationally recognized standards other than the
standard listed below.
3.2. The equipment provided shall also comply with the latest revisions of Indian Electricity act and
Indian Electricity rules and any other applicable statutory provisions, rules and regulations.
3.3. All equipment provided under the specification shall generally conform to the latestissue of
the following:
Degree of Protection provided for enclosure of electrical
a) IS 12063/1987
equipment.
b) IS 5/2004 Colour for ready mixed paints & enamels.
c) IS 3231 / 1986 & 1987 Electrical relays for power system protection
d) IEC 60255 Numerical biased protection relay
d) IS 8686/1977 Static Protective Relays
e) IS 1248/2003 Indicating instruments
f) IS 14697/1999 HT Static Tri vector TOD Energy meter
IS 6875 amended up todate
g) Control switches
h) IS 4794/1968 & 1986 Push buttons

Control Switches (LV Switching devices for control and
i) IEC 337 &337-1
auxiliary circuit)
j)
IEC:60185 Current Transformers
k) IEC:60186 Voltage Transformer
Marking and arrangement for Switchgear Bus
l) IS 375
m) IS:5578/1984 Marking of insulated conductors.
3.4. CT, PT Ratio and Transformer Details:
CIRCUIT 33KV CT RATIO/CLASS

33Kv Feeder 400-200/5-5 A 0.5S,5P10
400-200/5-5-5A, for 10 MVA
33kv side of 33/11kv
0.5S/5P10/PS and 200-100/5-5A
transformer
For up to 5 MVA Tr. 0.5/5P10
11KV side CT for 5 MVA & 600-400/5-5-5A, 0.5/5P10/PS at phase side
10 MVA Transformer
600/5A, PS for 10 MVA 33/11KV transformers for bothPhase &

11KV transformer BushingCT for REF
neutral. 400/5A, PS for u p t o 5 MVA
33/11KV transformer for only neutral.
33 KV PT RATIO 33KV, single phase, Accuracy class

Electro-magnetic PT Ratio/Class 33KV/√3/110V/√3,
110V/√3-110V/√3 ,0.5S/3P
TRANSFORMER 33/11KV, up to 10 MVA, Dyn11
DETAILS
4.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS:
4.1. CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL
The Control and Relay Panel shall be of Simplex type and the access door shall be provided at the back of
each Panel where no instruments or relays shall be mounted. The indicating and signaling devices and
relays etc. shall be mounted on the front side and the auxiliaries which shall be inside the Panel. The access
door shall be at the back side and of double door type of height 1900 mm.
In front of Panel where relays and instruments are to be mounted shall be stretcher leveled steel plate 3
mm. thick and side panel, doors and top covers shall be of 2mm. thick steel plate. Light sections of
structural steel shall be used for panel frame.
The individual panel shall be 2250 mm. in height with Channel base, 610 mm. in depth and of suitable
width limited to 1000mm to accommodate the equipment at a suitable height, suitable gaps to facilitate
easy workability as specified hereafter. Individual piece of Channel base of C&R Panel is to be provided to
obtain the flexibility of inter- changing the Panel, if any.
The complete panel shall incorporate all necessary instruments, meters, relays, auxiliary relays, control
switches, indicating lamps, mimic, annunciator, audible alarms, horizontal and vertical wiring trough,
wiring supports, interior lighting system, terminal blocks , fuses and links etc.
4.2. CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
a. The Control and Relay Panel frame shall be suitable for erection of flush concrete floor and
secured to it by means of evenly spaced grout bolt projecting through the base channels from
members of the frame.
b. The manufacturer shall ensure that the equipment specified and such unspecified
complementary equipment required for completeness of protection/control scheme be properly
accommodated in the panels without congestion and if necessary to provide panels with larger
width. No price increase at a later date on this account shall be allowed.
c. Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof for
tropical use. The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP-41 in
accordance with IS-2147. Type test report in this respect shall be furnished with offer.
d. Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise structural
frames enclosed completely with specially selected smooth finished, cold rolled sheet steel of
thickness not less than 3 mm for weight bearing members of panels such as base frame, front
sheets and door frames and not less than 2mm for sides, door, top & bottom portions. There
shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to vibration and rigidity
during transportation and installation.
e. Design, material selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat

appearance, inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head apparent front outside, with
all exterior surfaces tune and smooth.
f. All holes and extension windows in the Panel shall be blanked and access doors shall be lined
with compressible liners at the edges. The EMPLOYER will shut off the bottom crevices with
cream cement, the Cable Entry holes with weak concrete and the cable trench with present
R.C. Slabs or checker plate. All control and supply cables will be laid in a distribution trench
running under the panel . The Cable will branch off into each cubicle through entry holes in the
concrete floor opening in the bottom cubicles. Necessary Drawings for concrete floor and
trench shall be supplied by the manufacturer to enable the EMPLOYER to construct the
foundation floor for these panels. The drawings shall show details of the distributing trench,
cable entry holes, glands and positions of grouting bolts. The EMPLOYER will prepare
foundation with pocket for grouting bolts. The manufacturer shall supply channel base,
suitable grouting bolts, lock nut and washers.
g. Control Cable entries to the panel shall be from the bottom. Bottom plates of the panels shall
be fitted with detachable gland plates to allow cable entries from the bottom. Gland plates shall
be suitable for fixing the cable glands at an elevated height of at least 100 mm above the
ground level. Terminal Connectors and Test terminal blocks for cables shall be fixed at an
elevated height of at least 200 mm above the Bottom plate. Side blocks cut out to be arranged
at the top of both sides of panel for inter panel bus wires. Dimensions of the cut out will be
300 mm X50 mm , 255 mm from the top.
4.3 GENERAL:
a. Materials shall be new; the best quality of their respective kinds and such as is usual and
suitable for work of like character. All materials shall comply with the latest issues of the
specified standard unless otherwise specified or permitted by EMPLOYER.
b. Workmanship shall be of the highest class throughout to ensure reliable and vibrations free
operations. The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that the stresses to
which they may be subjected shall not cause distortion, undue wear, or damage under the most
c. Severe conditions encountered in service.
d. All parts shall conform to the dimensions shown and shall be built in accordance with
approved drawings. All joints, datum surfaces and meeting components shall be machined and
all castings shall be spot faced for nuts. All machined finishes shall be shown on the drawings.
All screw, bolts, studs and nuts and threads for pipe shall conform to the latest standards of the
International Organization for Standardization covering these components and shall all
conform to the standards for metric sizes.
e. All materials and works that have cracks, flaws or other defects or inferior workmanship will
be rejected by EMPLOYER.
4.3.1 Assembly:
Necessary items of equipment shall be assembled in the factory prior to shipment and routine tests
shall be performed by the manufacturer as per the requirements of the latest issue of IEC/IS as
specified under each equipment in these specifications to demonstrate to the satisfaction of
EMPLOYER that the switchgear panels comply with the requirements of the relevant IEC/IS
standards.
4.3.2 Casting:
Casting shall be true to pattern, of workmanlike finish and of uniform quality and condition, free from
blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, cracks or other injurious defects, shall be
satisfactorily cleaned for their intended purpose.
4.3.3 Welding:
Wherever welding is specified or permitted, a welding process, including stress relieve treatment as
required if necessary, conforming to an appropriate and widely recognized professional standard shall
be used. All welders and welding operators shall be fully qualified by such a standard.
4.4 Mounting
o All equipment on and inside the panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the terminal
blocks ready for external connection.
o Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be accomplished individually
without interruption of service to adjacent devices and are readily accessible without use of special
tools. Terminal marking shall be clearly visible and of permanent nature.
o The manufacturer shall carry out cutout, mounting and wiring of the bought out items which are to be
mounted in the panel in accordance with the corresponding equipment manufacturer's drawings.
o The center line of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less than 750 mm from the
bottom of the panel. The center line of relays and meters and recorders shall be not less than 450 mm
from the bottom of the panel.
o The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be matched to give a neat and
uniform appearance. Likewise the top of all meters, relays and recorders etc. shall be in one line.
o The control switches for circuit breakers shall be located on the mimic diagram corresponding to
their exact position of the controlled equipment in the single line drawing. The location of the
switches
o shall be within working height from the floor level for easy and comfortable operation.
o No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.
o All the equipment connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to minimise the risk of
fire and damage.
The constructional details and mounting arrangement for various front mounted equipments shall be
as per the enclosed drawings. The center lines of any relays, if additionally provided, shall not be less
than 450 mm from ground level.
5.0 WIRING
5.1 All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 volts grade single core, multistrand flexible tinned copper
wires with PVC insulation which has provided its utility in tropical region against hot and moist
climate and vermin (Misc. white ant and cockroaches etc.) Rubber insulated wiring will not be
accepted. Wire numberings and colour code for wiring shall be as per IS:5578/1984. The wiring
should be encased in suitable width PVC casing. The wiring diagram for various schematics shall be
made on thick and laminated durable white paper in permanent black ink and same should be pasted on
the inside surface of the door.
5.2 The sizes of wiring in different circuit shall not be less than these specified below:
TABLE-I
Circuit Permissible size of wire

Metering and Relaying Circuits
connected Current Transformer 2.5 mm²
Potential Circuits for metering and
Relaying, Control, Visual Audible 1.5 mm²
Alarms and Signalling Circuit
The following colour schemes shall be used for the Wiring:
TABLE TABLE– II
CIRCUIT WHERE USED COLOUR OF WIRE
Red Phase of Instrument Transformer Circuits Red

Yellow Phase of Instrument Transformer Circuits
Yellow
Blue Phase of Instrument Transformer Circuits

Blue
Neutral connection, earthed or not earthed in the instrument Black

Transformer Circuit
A.C. Control Wiring Circuits using auxiliary supply and

Black
D.C. Control Wiring Circuit using Battery Supply
Grey
Earth Connection Green
5.2.1
a) All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and
connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring gutters & trough shall be
used for this purpose.
b) Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall be used for inter
panel wiring. Inter connections to adjacent panels shall be brought out to a separate set of
terminal blocks wires. All bus wiring for inter panel connection shall preferably be provided
near the top of the panels running throughout the entire length of the panels.
c) Wiring connected to the space heaters in the cubicles shall have porcelain beaded
insulation over a safe length from the heater terminals.
d) Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type and tinned copper lugs
which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves shall be provided to all
the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond
with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit
tightly on the wire and shall not fall off when the wire is disconnected for any purpose.
Termination shall be such that no strand of a conductor shall left loose or overhanging.
Conductor termination shall be secured to the holding nuts/screws, terminal blocks etc.
with washers interposed between the terminals/holding nuts/screw heads. The terminals
shall be so connected that no conductor ferrule code gets masked due to overlay of
conductors.
e) All spare contacts of relays shall be wired up to terminal blocks.
f) Each wire shall be continuous from end to end and shall not have any joint within
itself individually.
g) Wires shall be connected only at the connection terminals or studs of the terminal blocks,
meters, relays, instruments and other panel devices.
h) Terminal Ends of all wires shall be provided with numbered Ferrules. At point of inter-
connection where a change of number is necessary, duplicate Ferrules shall be provided with
the appropriate numbers on the changing end.
i) At the terminal connection, washers shall be interposed between terminals, wire terminals
and the holding nuts. All holding nuts shall be secured by locking nuts. The connection
stud shall project at least 6 mm from the lock nut surface. Wire ends shall be so
connected at the terminal studs that no wire terminal numbered ferrule gets masked due
to succeeding connections. All wires shall be suitable for bending to meet the terminal stud at
right angles with the stud axis, and they shall not be skewed.
j) All studs, nuts, bolts screws etc. shall be threaded according to the British Standard
practice unless EMPLOYER‘s prior approval to any other practice of threading is obtained
6.0 TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTION
Terminal blocks shall be of clip-on design made out of non-trackable insulating material of 1100 V
grade. All terminals shall be stud type, with all current carrying and live parts made of tinned plated
brass. The studs shall be of min 4 mm dia brass. The washers, nuts, etc. used for terminal connectors shall
also be of tinned plated brass. All blocks shall be shrouded by easily removable shrouds made of
transparent die- electric materials.
The terminal connector/blocks shall be disconnecting type terminal connectors for PT and same
with automatic shorting of C.T. secondary terminals shall be provided in CT secondary circuit. All
other terminal connectors shall be Non-disconnecting type. Terminal should be shock protected in single
moulded piece. Terminal block should have screw locking design to prevent loosening of conductor.
Provision shall be made on each pillar, for holding 10% extra connection (5% incoming + 5% outgoing).
At least 20% spare terminals for each type shall be provided. All terminals shall be provided with ferrules
indelibly marked or numbered and identification shall correspond to the designations on the relevant
wiring diagrams. The terminals shall be rated for adequate capacity which shall not be less than 10 Amps
for control circuit. For power circuit it shall not be less than 15 Amps.
7.0 SPACE FOR CONTROL CABLES AND CABLE GLANDS
Sufficient space for receiving the Control Cables inside the Panel at the bottom of the cubicles and
mounting arrangement for the terminal cable glands shall be provided. Removable type separate cable
entry plate (may be two) shall be fixed with bottom plate. The specification does not cover supply of
control cables and cable glands for which the EMPLOYER will make separate arrangement.
8.0 SPACE HEATERS
240 V, 50 HZ Tubular Space Heaters suitable for connection to the Single Phase A.C. Supply complete
with On-Off Switches located at convenient position shall be provided at the bottom of the Panel to
prevent condensation of moisture. The Watt loss per Unit surface of heater shall be low enough to keep
surface temperature well below sensible heat. A thermostat control unit with variable temperature shall be
installed to control the heater. The 240 V AC supply for the heater shall be controlled by a suitably rated
single pole miniature circuit breaker compartment to be mounted on an insulator. One AC Ammeter with
0-1.0 Amp range shall be provided in series with the heater to monitor the current drawal of the Heater.
9.0 DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL OF AUX. POWER CIRCUIT

9.1. D.C. CIRCUIT
There shall be only one 110V D.C. for the entire Control and Relay Panel fed from a D.C.
Distribution Panel. A continuous D.C. Bus shall be provided in the Control and Relay Panel and D.C.
supply for control, protection, indication and supervision of circuit breaker and other equipment shall be
teed off from D.C. bus through a set of 20 Amp rated H.R.C. Fuse on positive and negative side. D.C.
supply to be teed off shall bedistributed within the Panel as below:
(a) Control DC scheme both positive and negative side with 16 Amp fuse
(b) Close/Trip Ckt 1 and Trip Ckt 2 without fuse; closing circuit with 10A fuse.
(c) Indication Circuit through a set of 6 Amp. HRC Fuse both at +ve and –ve side
(d) Protective relay circuits through 6A fuse both at +ve and –ve side
(e) Annunciation ckt with 6Amp fuse on both at +ve and –ve side
(f) DC Emergency Lamp with 6Amp fuse both at +ve and –ve side
Three nos. of D.C. operated no-volt auxiliary relay (self-reset type) provided with hand reset type flag
with inscription ― Main D.C. Fail, Control Dc fail & Protection DC fail with 4NO+4NC in each relay.
2 NC contact for DC fail alarm and Indication, 1NO wired upto SCADA TB and 1NO wired upto spare
TB.
One Push button having N/C Contact used in Series with the above relay for D.C. Fail Test
purpose.
9.2. A.C. CIRCUITS
230 Volts, Single Phase A.C. Aux. Supply to the Control and Relay Panel will be fed from A.C.
Distribution Panel through a 16Amp MCB provided there. One 16 Amps rated HRC Fuse shall be
provided at the Control & Relay Panel for the Incoming A.C.Supply. Two A.C. operated no volt auxiliary
relay (self-reset type) rated for 230V shall be provided with hand reset flag with inscription ― A.C.
Fail & DC Fail Accept with 4NO+4NC contacts for each relay. One push button having N/C
Contact used in Series with above relay for―A.C. Fail Test purpose.
9.3. P.T. SECONDARY CIRCUIT
There may be two nos. 33KV bus PT, one in each bus section. P.T. supply shall be available from selected
33 KV Bus P.T through suitable PT selection scheme by switch. Two sets of Fuse and link of suitable
rating shall be provided for the Incoming P.T supplies and two sets, one for each PT of 3 nos. coloured
LED indicating lamps shall be provided for supervision of the Fuse. Lamps shall be connected between
respective phases and neutral. The arrangement of distribution of P.T. Secondary Circuit shall be asfollows:
(a) Potential supply to the protective relay circuit for Feeder where necessary shallbe fed from
selected Bus P.T. supply bus.
(b) Potential supply to meters, Energy meters and indicating instrument of each panel shall be
fed from selected Bus P.T. supply bus.
(c) Selected P.T. secondary supply to the protective relays of each panel shall be fed through 4
poles - MCB and link in neutral in each panel where necessary with two change over
contacts for annunciation.
d) Selected P.T. secondary supply for metering and indicating instruments of each panel
shall be fed through 4 pole MCB o f a p p r o p r i a t e r a t i n g in each phase
and link in neutral in each panel of
33KV system voltage.
e) Two position (PT-1/PT-2), minimum 4(four) way PT selector switch (stay put type),
minimum 16A rating shall be provided in each panel for metering ckt. Additional 4 way PT
selector switch is required for protection wherever applicable. The no. of way may increase
during detailed engineering.
9.4. FUSE AND LINK
Fuses shall be of cartridge type. Carrier and base for the fuse and links for all D.C. and A.C.
Circuits shall have imprint of rating, voltage and circuit designation.
9.5. MIMIC DIAGRAMS
a) Provision shall be made for 10 mm. wide painted and overall drawing mimic diagram by the
EMPLOYER on the exterior of the front panel to represent the single line arrangement of the station
equipment. Provision shall be made in such a way that center line of the mimic bus shall be at a
suitable height from the bottom of the C&R Panel.
b) Colour scheme for mimic diagram as follows:
KV Class Colour Shade Index as per ISS

33 KV Brilliant green 221
11 KV Air Craft blue 108
400/230 V Black 309
Earth White -
110 V Canary yellow -

c) In 33 KV simplex type C&R panels, Symbol marking for the position indication of isolators,
earth switches etc. ON/OFF indication for Circuit breaker, PT supply indication, CB spring charge,
auto trip, trip ckt healthy etc. shall be mounted along the mimic diagram at appropriate location.
Non-Discrepancy type control switch for the C.B. shall be mounted within the mimic, indicating
the C.B. ON/OFF status.
10.0 Labeling
All front mounted as well as internally mounted items including MCBs shall be provided
with individual identification labels. Labels shall be mounted directly below the respective
equipment and shall clearly indicate the equipment designation. Labelling shall be on
aluminium anodised plates of 1 mm thickness, letters are to be properly engraved.
11.0 Earth Bus
Each panel shall be provided with two earth bus of size 25 x 6 mm (min) each. The earth bus
shall be of tinned plated copper, and all metallic cases of relays, instruments etc. shall be connected
to this earth bus independently for their effective earthing. The wire used for earth connections
shall have green insulation.
12.0 Circuit breaker Control Switch:
 PISTOL GRIP TYPE Non- discrepancy T-N-C spring return type switch shall be provided
for remote operation of circuit breaker to ensure that manual pumping of closing solenoid
not possible. The switch shall be mounted in the mimic diagram itself such that the stay-put
('N') position will render the continuity of the mimic. One green LED for 'breaker open'
indication and one red LED for 'breaker closed' indication shall also be provided
adjacent to the T-N-C switch.
 Switches should have finger touch proof terminals. For the convenience of maintenance
screw driver guide should be from top/bottom of the switch and not from the side. Terminal
wire should be inserted from the side of the switch terminal.
 Terminal screws must be captive to avoid misplace during maintenance.
 Switch shall be with 48 mm x 48 mm escutcheon plate marked with Trip & Close.
 Trip-neutral-close, with pistol grip handle must be pushed in to spring return to either trip
or close position from Neutral position for safety and not just turn to trip.
 One contact to close in each position of Trip and Close. Contact rating shall be 12A at 110V DC.
 One spare contact is required in off & on position.
13.0 Local/Remote switch:
Local/Remote switch should be 4-pole, 2 way Lockable and stay put type.
14.0 Indicating Lamps & Contact Multiplier

i) INDICATING LAMPS
L.E.D. Type Indicating Lamps shall be provided on the Control Panel to indicate the
following:
Sl. No. Functions Quantity Colour of Lamp
C.B. Spring charged

1 1 No. Blue
indication
2 C.B. trip Coil/Circuithealthy 2 No. White

indication
C.B. Auto tripped
3 1 No. Amber
indication
Panel D.C. Fail
4 1 No. Amber
indication
P.T. Supply indicating
5 2 sets Red/Yellow/Blue
Lamp
6 C.B. ―ON indication 1 No. Red
7 C.B. ―OFF indication 1 No. Green
All the lamps shall be connected to the auxiliary D.C. supply of the Sub-Station except Sl. No. (4) & Sl.
No. (5) which should be connected to the auxiliary A.C. supply and P.T. Secondary supply respectively.
The Lamp shall be suitable for Panel purpose and shall be Low Watt consumption. All indicators shall have
bright LEDs having long life. Conventional bulbs are not acceptable. The indicating LEDs with resistors
shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a continuous basis. However, the specification of indicating
lamps may likely to be changed/ modified as per requirement of EMPLOYER.
Lamps for circuit breaker ―ON‖, ―OFF‖, ―TRIP CKT HEALTHY‖ and ―AUTO TRIP‖ indications. LED
indicating lamp complete with static circuits and features should be supplied with Low voltage protection
circuit (LVGP) and surge suppressor circuit having LED indication. Lamp assembly should be of fire –
retardant glass epoxy PCB , industrial heat resistant, fire resistant, non hygroscopic DMC material, chrome
– plated corrosion resistant solid brass bezel, polycarbonate lens in desired colour shades of Red, Green ,
Amber, Yellow etc. the intensity of light should be minimum 100 mcd at 20 Ma. Indication lamp should be
suitable to operate on 30 V direct current supply source. Acceptable make are BINAY Opto Electronic
Private Ltd. or equipment.
ii) Contact Multiplier
230 Volts, Single Phase, 50 HZ A.C. Supply operated Contact Multiplier to beprovided, if required.
15.0 TERMINAL BLOCK / TTB
1. Terminal Blocks for incoming A.C and D.C. Circuit and C.T., P.T. & SCADA Circuit should
be located on the left hand side and Transformer supervision, breaker control and spare in
right hand side of the wall of the Panel seen from back side respectively.
2. 3-Phase, 4-Wire Link type Test Terminal Block having sealing provision shall be provided in
Metering Circuit of each Panel.
16.0 SAFETY EARTHING
1. Earthing of metallic parts or metallic bodies of the equipment on the Panel shall be done
with soft drawn single conductor bare Copper Tail connections shall have minimum area of 16
sq, mm. and the main earthing connection 60 sq.mm. These wires shall be connected by suitable
terminals and clamps junction. Soldered connections shall not be employed.
2. The neutral point of star connected LV winding of instrument transformers and one corner of the
open delta connected LV side of instrument transformers shall be similarly earthed by tail
connected with main earth wire of Panel Earthing System. Multiple earthing of any instrument
transformer circuit shall be avoided.
17.0 PANEL LIGHTING
1. The Panel interior shall be illuminated by CFL lamps connected to 230 Volt Single Phase A.C.
The illumination of the interior shall be free from shadows and shall be planned to avoid any
strain or fatigue to the wireman likely to be caused due to sub-normal or non-uniform
illumination. One emergency D.C. light shall be provided for each panel with individual switch
with proper identification mark.
2. A toggle switch or door operated switch shall be provided for control of A.C. lighting in each
panel.
3. One combined 15 Amps. 3-Pin and 5 Amps. 2-Pin Power Socket outlet together with Plus
Pins shall be provided at convenient points in each Panel for A.C. Supply.
18.0 ANNUNCIATOR
A. ELECTRONIC ANNUNCIATOR
1. Suitable Multi-way Microprocessor based electronic Annunciator for the visual and audible
alarm on the control panel using bright LEDs shall be provided in each panel to indicate over
current and earth fault protection operated. In addition to above, each electronic annunciator of
Transformer Control Panel shall have provision to indicate Transformer trouble trip/alarm
function operated. Also one window of the Annunciator shall have to be used for Non-Trip A.C.
Fail Alarm Indication and one window for Trip Circuit unhealthy indication. Each Electronic
Annunciator shall have provision for connection with accept/reset/lamp test/mute Push buttons
for proper functions. Electronic annunciator shall have provision for connection with Electronic
Buzzer/Electronic Bell for Trip & Non-Trip Audio Alarm of common annunciation scheme.
Electronic Annunciation shall have provision for flashing illuminating display with inscription for
operation of respective Protection Relay. The Micro-Processor based Electronic Annunciator
should have separate coloured windows for Trip & Non-Trip Annunciation for easy detection.
2. Annunciator fascia units shall have translucent plastic windows for each alarm point.
3. Electronic Annunciator shall have first Fault Indication Facilities & System WatchDog
4. Annunciator facia plate shall be engraved in black lettering with respective alarm inscription as
specified. Alarm inscriptions shall be engraved on each window in not more than three lines and
size of the lettering shall be about 5 mm. The inscriptions shall be visible only when the
respective facia LED will glow.
5. Annunciator facia units shall be suitable for flush mounting on panels. Replacement of individual
facia inscription plate and LED shall be possible from front of the panel.
6. Unless otherwise specified, one alarm buzzer meant for non-trip alarms and one bell meant for
trip alarms shall be provided in each control panel (mounted inside).
7. Each annunciator shall be provided with 'Accept', 'Reset' and 'Test' push buttons, in addition to
external PB.
8. Special precaution shall be taken by the manufacturer to ensure that spurious alarm conditions do
not appear due to influence of external magnetic fields on the annunciator wiring and
switching disturbances from the neighbouring circuits within the panels.
9. In case 'RESET' push button is pressed before abnormality is cleared, the LEDs
shall continue to glow steadily and shall go out only when normal condition is restored.
10. Any new annunciation appearing after the operation of 'Accept' for previous
annunciation, shall provide a fresh audible alarm with accompanied visual alarm, even if the
process of "acknowledging" or "resetting" of previous alarm is going on or is yet to be carried
out.
B. Provision for testing healthiness of visual and audible alarm circuits of annunciator shall be available.
16 Window Annunciation Scheme for 10 MVA & 12 MVA Transformer(individually

controlled) to indicate following functions:
1 Differential protection (87) operated 1 no.
2 Non-directional protection (O/C+E/F) operated 1 no.
3 Oil Temp./Winding Temp/MOG Alarm for 1 no.
transformer
4 Oil Temp./Winding Temp Trip for transformer 1 no.
5 REF 64R (HV side) tripped 1 no.
6 REF 164R (LV side) tripped 1 no.
7 Buchholz Alarm for transformer 1 no.
8 Buchholz Trip for transformer 1 no.
9 OLTC Buchholz/ Main Tank PRV Trip for 1 no.
transformer
10 AC fail 1 no.
Trip Circuit/Coil 1or Trip Circuit/Coil 2 Unhealthy 1 no.

11
12 Non-directional O/C & E/F Relay Trouble 1 no.
13 Differential relay trouble 1 no.
14 Spare 1 no.
15 Spare 1 no.
16 Spare 1 no.
Mounting Flush
No. of facia windows 16
Supply voltage 30 V DC
No. of LEDs per window 2
Properly
Lettering on facia plate engraved
12 Window Annunciation Scheme for Feeders to indicate following functions:
i) Non-directional O/C operated 1 No

ii) Non-directional E/F operated 1 No
iii) Panel D.C. Fail 1 No
iv) Trip Circuit Coil 2 Unhealthy 1 no.
v) Panel AC fail 1 no.
vi) Trip Circuit/Coil 1 Unhealthy 1 no.
vii) Non-directional O/C & E/F Relay Trouble 1 no.
viii) PT MCB Tripped 1 No
ix) Spare 1 no
x) Spare 1 no.
xi) Spare 1 no.
1 no.
xii) Spare
Mounting Flush

Lettering on facia plate Properly engraved
12 Window Annunciation Scheme for Parallel Feeders to indicate following functions:
i) Directional O/C operated 1 no.

ii) Directional E/F operated 1 no.
iii) Panel DC Fail 1 no.
iv) Trip Circuit/Coil 2 Unhealthy 1 no.
v) Panel AC fail 1 no.
vi) Trip Circuit/Coil 1 Unhealthy 1 no.
vii) Directional O/C & E/F Relay Trouble 1 no.

viii) PT MCB Tripped 1 no.
ix) Spare 1 no.
x) Spare 1 no.
xi) Spare 1 no.
xii) Spare 1 no.
Mounting Flush
Properly
Lettering on facia plate
Engraved
C. PANEL D.C. FAIL ALARM SCHEME
Control & Relay Panel shall have a common ― Panel D.C. Fail Alarm Scheme operated by 230 V Single phase
A.C.
Aux. Supply for audible as well as visual alarm in case of failure of D.C. incoming supply to the Panel.
Another Single Element Relay without Flag and 1 no. self-reset type N/O & 1 no. N/C contact having inscription
Panel D.C. fail‗ alarm accept Relay shall be provided. Besides above, 1 no. Indicating Lamp, 1 no. A.C. Operated
Electric Hooter and 2 nos. Push Button, one having 1 no. N/C contact, the other having 1 no. N/O contact shall also
be provided for successful operation of the scheme. All auxiliary relays required to render Annunciation System
operative and shall be considered to be within the scope of the tender.
AC fail, DC fail scheme shall be operated by relay not contactor.
19.0 INDICATING INSTRUMENT AND METERS
a. All instruments shall be flush mounted, back connected type and provided with dust tight cases for tropical
use with dull black enamel finish. All fixing screws, nuts and threaded parts shall be designed to Indian
Standards.
b. All instruments shall be of class 0.5 type. The calibration of the instruments shall function satisfactorily
when mounted on steel panels or alternatively magnetically shielded instruments shall be used.
c. Instruments shall be capable of indicating freely when operated continuously at any temperature from 0
to 500C.
d. All circuits of instruments shall be capable of withstanding applied load of 20% greater than the rated
capacity for a period of eight hours.
e. The instruments shall be capable of withstanding the effect of shock vibration and adi- electric test of 2000
Volts r.m.s. to ground for one minute as per relevant ISS.
19.1 Ammeters:
All ammeters shall be provided with direct reading scale. Full Scale Value of the Ammeters shall be
100% of the nominal current of maximum C.T. ratio. The ammeters shall be connected to measuring
C.T. Core. Ammeters shall be suitable for R.Y.B. Phase measurements. However, the ammeters to
be supplied shall be of type DIGITAL. The auxiliary power of the ammeters should be 230V AC.
19.2 Voltmeters
Volt Meter shall be provided with direct reading scale. The maximum value of the volt-scale be 15%
in excess of the normal Circuit Voltage. The rated voltage of the Volt Meter shall be 110V A.C.
However, the voltmeters to be supplied shall be of type ―DIGITAL. The auxiliary power of the
voltmeters should be 230V AC.
a. Voltmeter Selector Switch:
One Voltmeter selector switch having 7 position 6 way stay-put type shall be provided.
b. PT Selector Switch:
One PT selector switch, 2 position, stay put type shall be provided.
19.3 Energy Meters
Tariff Metering Equipments
RS232/RS485 port should be compatible for DLMS as well as Modbus Protocol
(a) Three element Tri-vector Meters shall be supplied by the EMPLOYER. But Panel Wiring for the
Meters along with Test Terminal Block and space for the Tri-vector Meters are to be provided for the
Panels.
20.0 NAME OF IDENTITY PLATES
a) All instruments, relays and such other similar electrical devices mounted on the control and
relay panel shall be provided with name plates bearing the manufacturer's name, serial
identifying number and the Electrical rating data.
b) 3mm thick and 25mmX150mm brass or plastic plates bearing suitable

Identification marks shall be fixed under the terminal wiring at the test blocks, at the fuse blocks
and at the cable terminals. Similar plates shall be fixed on the exterior of the panel in
appropriate places to indicate function of control switches, push button etc. such as isolator
control switch, breaker control switch, DC fail test, accept reset etc. Suitable identification
marks shall be provided for individual casing part of the relays and other equipment. Plates
should be screwed and riveted to the Panel.
c) 50mm wide brass or plastic plate bearing suitable circuit description (which will be furnished
after order is placed) etched in 30 mm size letters shall be provided for each panel and mounted
on the top of both outer of the front panels. These plates shall be removable type.
d) Schematic Diagram of CT, PT, CB circuitry & AC, DC Ckt, Indication and
Annunciation Ckt along with protection circuitry giving the terminal nos. and Bus wire details
shall be printed in laminated durable stickers and pasted inside the panel Door page wise of the
respective panel.
e) Each unit of control and relay panel shall be provided with a label located at the bottom on the
front and shall contain the following details:
i) Manufacturer's name
ii) P.O.no. and date
iii) Drg. ref. no. pertaining to the panel.
21.0 PAINTING
Panel painting shall be done by the modern process of painting. All unfurnished surface of the steel
panel and frame work shall be sand blasted or suitably cured to remove rust, scale, foreign adhering
matter or grease. A suitable rust resisting primer shall be applied on the interior and exterior surface of
steel, which shall be followed by application of an undercoat suitable to serve as base and binder forth
finishing coat.
Details of Painting:
Surface treatment by seven tank process

Paint type Powder coated. Pure polyester base grade A structure
finish
Paint shade RAL 7032 for external & internal surface

Paint thickness Minimum 80 microns
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 11 KV C&R PANEL
1. Type of make of breaker :

2. Service voltage and frequency :
3. Rated current :
4. Making capacity :
5. Breaking capacity :
(i) Symmetrical :
(ii) Asymmetrical :
6. Short time current rating for 3 Sec. :
7. No. of break per pole :
8. Total length of break per pole :
9. Type of arc control device :
10. Arc duration
(i) With no load :
(ii) With 100% SC Current :
11. Total Break time :
(From trip impulse to arc extinguishing) :
(i) With 10% SC current :
(ii) With 100% SC current :
12. Make time in case of spring operated
Mechanism
13. Duty cycle :
14. Contact of VI :
(i) Type of material & finish of :
fixed main contacts

(ii) Type of material & finish of :
Moving contacts
15. Minimum clearance in air :
(i) Between phases :
(ii) Between live parts & earth :
16. Details of operating mechanism :
17. Degree of protection :
18. Whether the circuit breakers is :
Designed to close and latch on making :
Or fitted with making current release
19. Whether fixed trip or trip free :
20. No. of contact of auxiliary switch :
(i) Normally open :
(ii) Normally closed :
21. Is the equipment vermin proof :
22. BUS BARS :
(i) Main Bus bar material :
(ii) Cross-sectional area (item wise) :
(iii) Insulation :
(iv) Minimum electrical clearance :
(a) To earth :
(b) Between phases :
(c) Breaker opening time :
(d) Breaker opening time :
23. Power required for heater :
24. Whether heater is continuously rated :
25. Weight of circuit breaker trolley :
26. Protective Characteristics :
(i) Impulse withstand (1/50 :
Micro sec. wave)
(ii) One time withstand test :
27. Protective relay characteristics :
(i) Secondary resistance of :
Protection CT
(ii) Trip coil :
(iii) Make & type of relay :
28. Whether sheet steel construction is :
According Para 1.3.1 of specification
29. Whether circuit breaker is type tested :
According to ISS/IEC & when
7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR IEC 61850 COMPLAINT TRANSFORMER & FEEDER

PROTECITON NUMERICAL RELAYS
1. Scope:
1.1. This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, testing before supply, inspection, packing
and delivery and other basic technical requirements in respect of protective directional/non-
directional Overcurrent & Earth Fault and Differential multifunctional combined microprocessor
based protection and management relays for 33 kV and 11 kV feeders and for 33/11KV Power
Transformers installed at various 33/11 kV sub-stations. The bidder is to be supply Relay against this
specification is required for vital installations where continuity of service is very important. The
design, materials and manufacture of the equipment shall, therefore, be of the highest order to ensure
continuous and trouble-free service over the years. The manufacturer has to design the schematics
for protection and control of all equipment including monitoring indications, visual and audible
alarm, inter locking schemes among different equipment. Any other requirement which are not
specifically covered here but which are necessary for successful commissioning of the relays are also
within the scope of the Contract.
1.2. The relays manufactured should conform to the relevant standards and of highest quality of
engineering design and workmanship. The equipment manufactured shall ensure satisfactory and
reliable performance throughout the service life.
2. Service Conditions:
2.1. System particulars:

Nominal system voltage 33 kV & 11 kV
Corresponding highest system 36 kV & 12 kV
voltage
Frequency 50 Hz±3%
Number of phases 3
Neutral Earthing 11 kV solidly earthed
2.2. Climatic Conditions:

Equipment supplied against the specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following
tropical conditions:
Max. ambient air temperature 45 ° C
Max. wind pressure 260 kg/sq.m.
Max. altitude above mean sea level 1000 mtrs.
Reference Ambient Temperature for 60 ° C

temperature rise
Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive
Climatic Condition
to rust and fungus growth
The climatic conditions are prone to wide variations in ambient conditions and hence the equipment shall be
of suitable design to work satisfactorily under these conditions.
3. Applicable Standards:
3.1. Unless otherwise specified all equipment and material shall conform to the latest IS/IEC applicable standards.
Equipment complying with other internationally recognized standards will also be considered if it ensures
performance equivalent or superior to Indian standards. In the event of supply of equipment conforming to
any international / internationally recognized standards other than the standard listed below.
3.2. All the relays provided under the specification shall generally conform to the latest issues of the following:
a) IS 12063/1987 Degree of Protection provided for enclosure of electrical equipment.

b) IS 5/2004 Color for ready mixed paints & enamels.
c) IS 3231 / 1986 & Electrical relays for power system protection
1987
d) IEC 60255 Numerical protection relay
d) IS 8686/1977 Static Protective Relays
e) IS 1248/2003 Indicating instruments
f) IEC 61850 Edition I Communication Protocol for RELAYs.
& II
g) IEC 62439 HSR& PRP
h) IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol
i) IEC 60068 HEC for PCBs.
l) IS 375 Marking and arrangement for switchgear Bus
m) IS 5578/1984 Marking of insulated conductors.
Table 1: List of standards applicable
4. GENERALREQUIREMENT OF NUMERICAL RELAYS:

The relay in general shall comply with the all the requirements mentioned in General requirements below. The
following protections shall be provided to feeder and power transformers by numeric relays.
4.1. Numerical multifunctional combined microprocessor based feeder protection and management relay will
protect the 33 kV or 11kV feeders and 33/11kV transformers from all electrical and other faults along with
reporting system, disturbance record for fault analysis. Manufacturer should comply with any special
requirement or feature asked for retrofitting the relays. All numerical relays shall be provided with ‗Relay
Failure Annunciation contact‖ which must be extra from the output contact specific Relay in the detail
technical specification.
4.2. The numerical relay must have an IEC 61850 Edition I & II. The Numerical relay must have PRP &
HSR compliant dual redundant rear RJ45 port and process bus 9-2LE support for future upgradation.
4.3. The MTTR of the offered relay shall be less than 30 mins facilitating quick replacement of faulty unit
without disturbing majority of wirings.
4.4. The relays shall employ IPC [institute for interconnecting and packaging electronic circuits] Class 3 printed
circuit boards i.e. IPC 610-3.
4.5. The relay shall have the facility to program the pickup threshold between 40 to 150 % of VDC independently
per digital input to prevent the spurious pick up of binary during inputs DC earth fault condition and should
be ESI 48- 4EB2 compliant.
4.6. The relays provided should comply with the international standards of NERC-CIP/BDEW for cyber security
to provide protection against unauthorized disclosure, transfer, modification, or destruction of information
and/or information systems, whether accidental or intentional.
4.7. All PCB used in relays should have harsh environmental coating as per standard IEC 60068 (HEC) to increase
the particle repellence and thereby increasing the life of relay. RELAY shall be manufactured using lead- free
components. The bidder must submit supporting documents regarding the conformity of the relevant standard
in the offered relay. G3 certificate will be accepted as a proof of conformity for operation in the extreme
environmental conditions.
4.8. The relay shall provide an operating range of -40°C to 60°C and be tested as per IEC 60068 for 16 Hours
operation between -40°C to 85°C.
4.9. The relay shall have a USB/RS232/RJ45 communication port for connecting to a local PC/Laptop for setting
and viewing the data from the relay. The relay must have either IEC 61850 + IEC 103 or IEC 61850+
Modbus with minimum two nos. redundant PRP and HSR compliant RJ45 communication port. Use of any
type of converter is not acceptable.
4.10. The RELAY shall be provided with 1 set of common support software compatible with Windows 10 which
will allow easy uploading of settings of RELAY in addition to downloading of event, faults, disturbance
records, measurements for trouble shooting purposes.
4.11. Manufacturer of relays should have their own SAS application so that they can provide easy system solution
if required in future.
4.12. The manufacturer shall provide all necessary software tools along with source codes to perform addition
of bays in future and complete integration with SCADA by the User. These software tools shall be able
to configure relay, add analog variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking logics etc. for
additional bays / equipment which shall be added in future.
4.13. Relay parameterization should be accomplished with the front panel keys and display. Due to the numerous
settings, this manual method can be somewhat laborious. To simplify programming and provide a more intuitive
interface, set points can be entered with a PC/Laptop running Setup software should be provided with the relay
so that the engineers can configure /upload/ Download the settings and Disturbance records without any hassles.
5. TYPE TESTS:
Offered relay must be type tested for the following tests:
Sl. No. Type Test Test Specification

1 Performance test
1.1 Measurement accuracy of characteristic quantity and specified time IEC 60255-1
1.2 Limits of operating range of auxiliary energizing inputs and auxiliary voltage IEC 60255-1
dependence
1.3 Limits of frequency range and frequency dependence IEC 60255-1
1.4 Limits of ambient temperature and ambient temperature dependence IEC 60255-1
2 Rated burden requirement
2.1 Measuring circuits IEC 60255-1
2.2 Auxiliary circuits IEC 60255-1
2.3 Signaling inputs IEC 60255-1
3 Thermal requirements
3.1 Maximum allowable temperature IEC 60255-27
3.2 Limits of continuous and temporary thermal withstand and values of input IEC 60255-27
energizing quantities
3.3 Limits of short time thermal withstand value of input energizing quantities IEC 60255-27
3.4 Limiting dynamic value IEC 60255-6
4 Insulation test
4.1 Insulation resistance measurement IEC 60255-27
4.2 Dielectric test IEC 60255-27
4.3 Impulse voltage withstand capability test IEC 60255-27
4.4. Protective bonding resistance test IEC 60255-27
5 Power supply requirements
5.1 Voltage dips to dc auxiliary voltage IEC 60255-26
5.2 Interruptions to dc auxiliary voltage IEC 60255-26
5.3 Ripple in dc auxiliary voltage IEC 60255-26
5.4 Voltage dips to AC auxiliary voltage IEC 60255-26
5.5 Interruptions to ac auxiliary voltage IEC 60255-26
6 Environmental test
6.1 Cold test IEC 60068-2-1
6.2 Dry heat test IEC 60068-2-2
6.3 Damp heat, cyclic IEC 60068-2-30
6.4 Storage temperature test IEC 60068-2-1 & 2
Electromagnetic compatibility requirement
7 Emission tests
7.1 Radiated radio-frequency emission test IEC 60255-26
7.2 Conducted radio-frequency emission test IEC 60255-26
8 Immunity tests – enclosure
8.1 Electrostatic Discharge test IEC 60255-26
8.2 Radiated radio-frequency immunity test IEC 60255-26
8.3 Power-frequency magnetic field immunity test IEC 60255-26
8.4 Pulse magnetic field immunity test IEC 61000-4-9
8.5 Damped oscillatory magnetic field immunity test IEC 61000-4-10
9 Immunity tests- Port

9.1 Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields IEC 60255-26
9.2 Fast transient disturbance test IEC 60255-26
9.3 Slow Damped Oscillatory Waves Immunity test (1 MHz burst) IEC 60255-26
9.4 Surge Immunity test IEC 60255-26
9.5 Power frequency immunity test IEC 60255-26
10 Contact performance
10.1 Contact making/Breaking capacity test
10.2 Continuous capacity
11 Mechanical performance requirements
11.1 Durability of relay operation IEC 60255-6
11.2 Durability of plug-in relays IEC 60255-6
11.3 Durability of relay setting controls IEC 60255-6
11.4 Vibration response and endurance test IEC 60255-21-1
11.5 Shock response and withstand test IEC 60255-21-2
11.6 Bump test IEC 60255-21-2
11.7 Seismic test IEC 60255-21-3
12 IEC 61850 performance requirements
12.1 Level A 1 certificate
12.2 IEC 61850 Edition II Part 6,7-1,7-2,7-3,7-4 and 8-1
12.3 IEC 61850-5 Edition 2 Performance class P1
Type test reports for the above tests shall be submitted for verification of APDCL along with bid, failing which bid
will be rejected. The type test reports should be either from CPRI, DNV-GL & ERDA.
6. Training:
Suitable training to be imparted to APDCL‘s persons on the following items:
a) Relay setting and parameterization
b) Relay configuration with respect to I/P, O/P and functional block for protection.
c) GOOSE configuration.
d) Configuration and Interfacing required for third party SCADA System Integration.
e) Diagnostic features for disturbance records.
7. Inter-operability test and Demonstration: The demonstration and inter –operability test will be an
integral part of the evaluation process, for which due intimation will be sent to the bidders. The
manufacturer shall have to demonstrate inter –operability test with other bidders participating in the
tender in presence of APDCL‘s officials. All the necessary arrangement to perform the inter-operability
test will be under the scope of the bidders. All bidder has to bring the following equipment to
demonstrate the Interoperability testing.
a) Each Type of offered relay (Relay Type and complete article no should match as per tender offering)
– 1 no. each
b) Ethernet Switch (Type of Port as offered in Numerical Relays) – 2 nos.
c) GPS / SNTP Server – 1 no.
d) Required Patch Chord – 1 set
e) Power Supply Modules – as required.
The following points to be checked during the interoperability test:
 Necessary user friendly configuration tool shall be provided to configure the RELAY. It should be
compatible with SCD / ICD files generated by a third party system Goose signals shall be freely
configurable for any kind of signals using graphic tool/user friendly software.
 Time synchronization from the SNTP and PTP server.
 Signal exchange over GOOSE communication from one make of relay to the other make of relays.
 Binary signals to be exchanged.
 Control command to be published.
 One LED to be configured with GOOSE signal received from the other RELAY for checking quick
indication of the signal receipt.
 Protection operation signal to be configured to other relays.
 Disturbance recorder needs to be configured for the signal exchange.
 GOOSE receiving time to be shown in the relay display from event recorded and disturbance recorder.
 GOOSE transfer time should be less than message type 1A, Performance Class P1 i.e. 10 ms.
One of protection stage should be set to minimum time value (e.g. 20 ms) and injecting the current value in all
relays in series. Checking the protection function blocking with published GOOSE signal of protection start from
other relay. This shall ensure that GOOSE communication signal from other relay reaches before 15 ms.
Disturbance fault records to be captured in COMTRED format (.DAT and .CFG). Each relay DR function needs
to be configured for protection start, protection trip, breaker control commands as well as waveform recording of
current and voltage signals.
 Remote Parameterization to be shown.

 Port redundancy to be checked.
 Communication failure is to be checked by opening the communication cable while GOOSE message
transfer.
 Parameterization from the front port to be shown.
 RTU simulator for command execution by relay over IEC 61850 Communication.
The offered relay will only be accepted after fulfilment of above Q.R. & successful inter -operability test as per
the evaluation of the APDCL‘s assessing officers.
8. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NUMERICAL OC/EF RELAY WITH DIRECTIONAL AND

NON-DIRECTIONAL:
8.1. The following are the technical requirement of feeder protection relay
Sl. No. Feature and Function Technical requirement
It is intended to automate the Switchgears specified in the scope of supply

and use Communicable Numeric relays for Protection, Control, Metering
and Status monitoring. This specification is based on the understanding that
an integrated Automation System along with protections shall be provided
and same shall have provisions for Integration with SCADA system. All the
Purpose and feeders shall be remote controlled from APDCL‘s SCADA and from the
1
application local console of the numerical relays. Numerical multifunctional combined
Microprocessor based Feeder protection and management relay to protect
the 33kV Feeder from all electrical and other faults along with reporting
system, Disturbance record for fault analysis. Manufacturer should comply
with any especial requirement or feature asked for retrofitting the relays.
Relay should be IEC 61850 compliant. Relay should have 4 CT input for
O/C and E/F protection. There should be option for derivation of E/F
internally.
1. Relay should have minimum Four group of setting. Setting group

changeover required from digital status input.
2. Electrical over load protection with selectable IEC curves with three
stages, first stage to be used as IDMT and second stage to be used as high
set for short circuit protection and third stage for Definite Time.
3. Earth fault protection in two stages with IEC characteristics. First stage
to be used as IDMT/Definite Time and second stage to be used as
instantaneous elements. Earth fault element should be suitable for both
CBCT and residual type CT connection.
4. One stage Negative phase sequence Protection with IEC Curves.
5. CB Fail Protection & time settable as per user
6. The relay should be immune to DC switching while carrying
current i.e. no spurious trip should be generated if relay DC is made On and
Off.
7. The relay should conform to the IEC255-4 or BS 142 for Inverse time
characteristics.
8. The relay should have features to monitor for one stage broken
Main Protection conductor feature for alarm and trip by calculating I2/I1 and CB opening
2
feature time.
9. The relay should have inrush blocking feature.
10. The relay should have the current based thermal overload feature
incorporated.
11. The relay shall have the feature to detect the HIZ faults which is
characterized by the low earth fault currents.
12. The relay should have cold load pick up feature to provide stability
during start up after a long shut down, Cold load pick up (CLP) logic should
work by either inhibiting one or more stages of the over current protection
for a set duration or raising the over current setting of selected stages, for
the cold loading period.
13. Trip circuit supervision: Relay shall have inbuilt Trip Circuit
Supervision function for supervising minimum two nos. trip coil both
during CB open and CB closed condition
14. Fault Locator: The relay shall include a fault-locating algorithm to
calculate the fault location with +/- 2.5 % accuracy for phase-to-phase and
phase-to-earth faults in effectively and low-resistance earthed networks.
Relay shall be completely Numerical with protective elements having

software algorithm based on sampling of Analog inputs. Sampling Rate of
3 Processor feature Analog Signal: The sampling rate should be 800Hz for 50 Hz signal or
better for each analog channel. Hardware based measurements shall not be
acceptable.
The operation of Relay shall be possible both locally from the Switchgear
and remote & Local Work station. The local position shall be displayed in
remote / local workstation and remote operation shall be blocked if the
Operational switch is in Local. Clear control priorities shall prevent initiation of
4
Philosophy operation of a single switch at the same time from more than one of the
various control levels and there shall be interlocks among various control
levels. The priority shall always be with the lowest enabled control level.
Relay accuracy shall not be affected by system frequency fluctuation.
1. Minimum 14 number binary inputs are required.

2. All binary inputs should be settable threshold voltage from 20 to 170 V
DC.
3. Setting group is required to be changed with any binary input status.
4. Trip circuit supervision with BI or BO status
5. The Binary inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1ms resolution.
Status/Optical
5 Contact bouncing in binary inputs shall not be assumed as change of state.
Inputs/Digital inputs
6. Relay should have comprehensive self-diagnostic feature with remote
indication of relay failure and alarm shall be generated without tripping of
circuit.
7. Provision of Testing relays output without any current injection.
8. No. of programmable LEDs - at least 9 nos. with latching option.
9. All the BI should be freely configurable.
All measurements should be in primary quantities. Minimum following

displays are required in alpha numeric:
1. Three phase (Positive sequence) current
2. Neutral (zero sequence) current
3. All the trips should have clear indication on the relay interface.
Main measuring
6 4. Three nos. of Fixed LEDs (for trip, Alarm, Relay available & Relay out
and reporting feature
of service) & minimum 9 nos. three colour programmable LEDs which can
be assigned to any protection function for local annunciation.
5. Resetting should be selectable as hand reset or auto reset.
6. The default relay LCD shall be user defined to display primary circuit
loading.
1. Fault record: The relay shall have the facility to store at least last 100
time-stamped fault records with information on cause of trip, trip values of
electrical parameters.
Tools for Fault
7 2. Event record: The relay shall have the facility to store at least 1000 time
diagnostics
stamped event records with 1ms resolution.
3. Disturbance records: The relay shall have capacity to store at least 20
sec disturbance record waveforms.
1. The relay setting and programming should be stored in EEPROM so that

during Aux. Power failure no data is lost. The last 5 fault DR records should
be in flash memory and DR will not erase in case of DC supply fail for
more than 2 days.
2. Relay should have event log, trip log and DR record. All logs should go
in to history.
3. All tripping of relay should initiate DR in auto without extra binary input.
Triggering of DR with binary input should be user configurable.
Memory and 4. Should be able to record at least 10 fault records and 20 event records in
8 flash memory.
Recording Feature
5. Minimum 10 nos. of latest trip log with cause of trip should be stored in
memory along with date and time stamping. The memory should not be
lost with the switching off of DC.
6. The relay should have fault-recording feature with current

waveform and Digital Input status. The fault waveform should consist of
minimum four current waveforms of three phase current and zero sequence
current and DI status. Triggering time for Pre and Post should have user
selectable. This record should be in flash memory for minimum 7(seven)
days even after switching off the DC supply.
Both 240 V AC and 110 V DC [ - 25% to + 10%]

2 wire unearthed system. Necessary software shall be in-built for proper
9 Auxiliary Supply
shutdown and restart in case of power failure. Auxiliary supply burden will
be around 20Watt.
Rated CT/PT
10 5/1 Amp (User selectable), CTs used to be protection class
secondary
11 Rated frequency 50 HZ +/- 5%
1. Operating ambient temperature upto 55Deg C.

2. Operating Humidity upto 93%.
3. Relay shall meet the requirement for withstanding electromagnetic
12 Ambient condition
interference according to relevant parts of latest IEC 60255-25. Failure of
single component within the equipment shall neither cause unwanted
operation nor lead to a complete system breakdown.
1. Relay should be flush mounted type.

2. Module to be preferably draw out type then it should have CT shorting
facility of make before break type.
Module and 3. Mounting in switchgears located in non AC rooms.
13
Mounting 4. Galvanic isolation between field connection and relay hardware should
be there.
5. The relays should be housed in a robust metal case suitable for panel
mounting conforming to IP 51 (Front face) and IP 20 in the rear side.
The relay should have facility to comprehensively monitor the healthiness

of its circuits and components by own monitoring system. In case of any
problem of hardware and software elements of the relay, the fault diagnosis
information shall be displayed on the LCD and an alarm should be
generated by one of the output contacts. The alarm as soft signal to be sent
Watchdog and self-
14 to SCADA system as well. Necessary support documentation explaining the
monitoring
self-diagnostic feature shall be furnished. Watch dog contact shall be
provided in addition to required 14 BI, 10 BO (Relay supervision contact
must be additional from 10 BO). All the BI & BOs shall be freely
configurable. All binary inputs should be settable threshold voltage from
20…170 VDC.
15 Settings As detailed in Clause No. 11 of Technical Specification
Minimum 10 number binary/digital output are required out of which

1. One potential free change over contact should be provided for start
inhibit of relay.
2. All o/p contact should be freely programmable.
3. To enable fast direct tripping of the circuit breaker, the relay must have 2
optional high-speed binary outputs with an operate time of ≤ 2-3 ms. The
16 Relays Output binary output contacts shall be rated to make and carry 30 A for 0.5 s with a
breaking capacity of ≥1 A (L/R<40 ms).
4. Rating of trip contacts.
a) Contact durability>10K operation.
b) 30 Amp make and carry for 0.5 sec for trip contact.
c) Make and carry for trip contacts L/R<=50ms Rating of Alarm contacts.
d) 8 Amp make and carry continuously (ac or dc).
1. The offered relay shall have a comprehensive local MMI (man-machine

interface) for interface. It shall have the following minimum elements so
that the features of the relay can be accessed and setting changes can be
done locally.
- At least 48 character alphanumeric backlit LCD display unit.
- The LCD panel should be able to display graphical data such as at least 2
Configurable SLDs, vector diagram of instantaneous power.
2. Should have password protected key padlock. The password of the relay
Relay software and should of Level 4 to provide security to the setting parameters.
17 Man Machine 3. Tactile keypad for 4 navigation keys for browsing and setting the relay
Interface menu.
4. Necessary software for relay setting, retrieving DR, event log, trip log
should be supplied by the Manufacturer. The License of the software is to
be issued to APDCL for the entire lifespan of the relay.
5. Additional functions can be added to RELAY by software up-gradation
and downloading this upgraded software to the relays by simple
communication through PC.
6. Multiuser/Corporate license for installation on minimum 40 nos. Of
PCs/Laptops.
Date and Time stamping with faults and record. The clock should be
powered from internal cell and should not require setting after every DC
switching. The internal cell life shall be minimum 7 years. Time
18 Date and time
synchronization by SNTP and PTP. Via IEC61850 only. The relay must
support IEEE 1588 v2 for high accuracy time synchronization in Ethernet
based applications.
All CT and PT terminals shall be provided as fixed (screwed) type terminals

on the relay to avoid any hazard due to loose connection leading to CT
19 Lugs and terminators
opening or any other loose connection. Necessary amount of lugs should be
supplied along with each relay for CT connection and control wiring.
1. The relays should be supplied with manuals with all technical and
operating instructions.
Manuals, Drawings 2. All the internal drawings indicating the logics and block diagram
20
and Literature details explaining principle of operation should be given at the time of
supply.
3. Mapping details shall be submitted in IEC format.
1. MICS document (model implementation conformance statement).

2. PICS (protocol implementation conformance statement.
Standard
3. Conformance Test certificate from DNVGL/CPRI.
documentation per
21 4. PIXIT document.
Relay, according to
All the above mentioned certificates shall be submitted.
IEC 61850
5. ICD file
6. SCD file
The Manufacturer shall provide all necessary software tools along with
source codes to perform addition of bays in future and complete integration
Extendibility in
22 with SCADA by the User. These software tools shall be able to configure
Future
relay, add analog variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking logics
etc. for additional bays/equipments which shall be added in future.
The supplier should mention following:

1. Product maturity: The Manufacturer should mention the time period for
which the product is in the market.
2. Expected product life shall be minimum 10 years and additional 10
years service support after obsolution notice if any.
23 Lifespan
3. Hardware/Firmware change notification process and Upgrades to be
provided free of cost within the Guarantee period/5 years whichever is later,
if needed.
4. Lifespan of standard tools and processes for relay configuration,
querying and integration.
As detailed in Table 1: List of Standards Applicable Clause No. 3.2 of

24 Standards
1. The relay should have Latest IEC 61850 Edition 2 or better

Communication Protocol.
2. Relay should support PRP (parallel Redundancy protocol) as per IEC
62439-3. 3. Functioning of Relay shall not hamper to fault occurring any
interconnected relay.
4. The Relays must have two fiber-optic Ethernet ports with HSR and PRP-
25 Communication Port
1.
5. The relay shall have a USB/RS232/RJ45 communication port for
connecting to a local PC/Laptop for setting and viewing the data from the
relay. Both IEC 103 (to communicate with existing SAS) and IEC 61850
must be available simultaneously in single relay with minimum two nos.
redundant communication port (FO or RJ45). Use of any type of converter
is not acceptable.
Each RELAY shall be clearly marked with manufacturer‘s Name, type,
Name Plate and
26 serial no. and electrical rating data. Name plates shall be made of anodized
marking
aluminium with white engraving on black surface.
Relays will be guaranteed for the period of sixty six months from the date
27 Guarantee
of last receipt at respective T&C Divisions.
Any problem in the said period should be attended free of charge

28 Performance
inclusive of repair/replacement of relays/ component (both H/W, S/W).
As detailed in the table for type tests in Clause No. 5 of Technical

29 Type Test
Specifications.
As detailed in Interoperability Test and Demonstrations in Clause No. 7 of

30 Inter-operability test
8.2 PROTECTION SCHEMES FORNUMERICAL OC/EF RELAY WITH DIRECTIONAL AND NON-
DIRECTIONAL:
The following protection functions must be available in RELAYs for feeder protection :
a) Timed and instantaneous phase and earth fault protection (Directional and Non Directional):
Relay should have minimum 3 CT input for Directional and Non Directional Over Current and 1 CT input for
Earth Fault an . Relay should have timed and instantaneous phase fault in all three phases and earth fault with
minimum 3 independent stages (IDMT & DT) for OC & EF protection and should support wide range of
ANSI/IEC/IEEE curves and with adjustable reset time.
The relay must have three-stage directional phase overcurrent protection (67) with voltage memory and positive
and negative-sequence polarization.
The relay must have three-stage directional earth-fault protection (67N) with selectable negative and zero-
sequence polarization. I0 and U0 shall be derived either from the phase voltages and currents or from the
measured neutral current and residual voltage.
Note: Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection is not required for Non Dir Over Current and Earth
Fault relay BOQ Sl. No. 2.
b) Inrush blocking feature:
Second harmonic blocking feature for over current and earth fault protection to be provided.
c) Thermal Overload:
The device should incorporate a current-based thermal characteristic, using fundamental load current to
model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element should be settable with both alarm and
trip stages.
d) High impedance earth fault protection:
Relay shall have feature to detect high impedance earth faults which are characterized by low earth fault
currents. The HiZ fault protection scheme shall be incorporated integrating both Fundamental Analysis
and Harmonic Analysis algorithm such that the RELAY is capable of adequate coverage for the diversity
of the voltage/current characteristics presented by HiZ faults in both low loading and high loading
conditions. This function will see an earth fault which is very difficult to detect by a conventional feeder
protection relay.
e) Negative sequence over current feature:
One stage of negative sequence over current protection with DT & IDMT feature (user selectable) to be
provided.
f) Broken conductor (BC)protection (Phase Discontinuity Protection):
The relay should have features to monitor for single stage broken conductor. The offered relay shall have
inbuilt algorithm to detect low magnitude fault current to detect downed conductor. The relay should be
support two stages – BC Alarm & BC trip and functions by calculating I2/I1. This function shall work
for 50 Hz system with efficiently grounded or isolated neutral. The Broken Conductor protection feature
shall be incorporated in such a way that the relay operates in case of mal-operation of single phase
switchgear, operation of fuses, open jumper or broken conductor.
g) Circuit breaker failure protection:
CB fail protection function by incorporating CB fail timer & criteria for resetting CBF timer should be
user selectable.
h) Cold load pick up feature:
To provide stability during start up after a long shutdown, cold load pickup (CLP) logic should work by
either:
 Inhibiting one or more stages of the over current protection for a set duration.
 Raising the over current settings of selected stages, for the cold loading period.
i) Trip circuit supervision: Relay shall have inbuilt Trip Circuit Supervision function for supervising
minimum two nos. trip coil both during CB open and CB closed condition.
j) The relay in addition to the above basic function should also provide the following functions:
 The relay shall have the facility to latch the trip output relay.
 Relay shall have facility to control the CB in local/remote/ combination of both.
a) It should have test mode facility to test the relay operation during commissioning/maintenance activity
which allows:
o Secondary injection testing to be performed on the relay without operation of the trip
contacts.
o Binary inputs /output status monitoring
o Binary output contacts test and LED tests.
k) Fault Locator: The relay shall include a fault-locating algorithm to calculate the fault location with +/- 2.5 %
accuracy for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults in effectively and low-resistance earthed networks.
Note: Only required for Directional OCEF protection Relay.
l) Fuse Fail Supervision: The offered relay should have fuse failure supervision that detects failures between the
voltage measurement circuit and the relay. The failures are detected either by the negative sequence-based
algorithm or by the delta voltage and delta current algorithm. Upon the detection of a failure, the fuse failure
supervision function activates an alarm and blocks voltage-dependent protection functions from unintended
operation.
9. Measurements :
All measurements should be in primary quantities. The default relay LCD shall be user defined to display
primary circuit loading. As a minimum, the relay should measure and display in alpha-numeric the following
standard quantities:
a) Phase currents
b) Neutral currents - derived and measured
c) Thermal state
d) Positive, negative and Zero sequence current
e) Ratio of negative to positive sequence current
f) Breaker operation counter
g) Breaker trip counter for Earth Fault
h) Breaker trip counter for Over Current.
i) Breaker operating time
j) Resetting of display should be selectable as hand reset or auto reset.
k) Three Phase Neutral Voltage (Only for Dir OCEF protection Relay)
l) Frequency & Power Factor (Only for Dir OCEF protection Relay)
m) Power & Energy Measurement (Only for Dir OCEF protection Relay)
10. Settings:
Setting range of offered relays shall comply the below Table, bidder to confirm each range in below
table, and this document to be submitted with GTP.
Bidder To
Sl. No Protection Function: (Numerical Feeder protection Relay)
Confirm Yes/No
1 Three Phase Non Directional Over Current Protection
Plug Setting
Low Set Stage - 0.05...5.00 × In, in steps 0.01
High Set Stage - 0.10...40.00 × In in steps 0.01
Instantaneous Stage - 1.00...40.00 × In in steps 0.01
Time Setting
Time multiplier Low Stage and High Set stage 0.05...15.00 in step 0.01
Operate delay time For Low stage and high stage 40...200000 ms in step
10
Operate delay time For Inst Stage 20...200000 ms in step 10
Operation accuracy:
Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Phase angle: ±2°
Three Phase Directional Over Current Protection
Plug Setting
Low Stage - 0.05...5.00 × In, In steps 0.01
High Stage - 0.10...40.00 × In, In steps 0.01
Time Setting
Time multiplier - 0.05...15.00 in step 0.01

2
Operate delay time - 40...200000 msin step 10
Directional mode shall be site selectable 1. Non-directional, 2. Forward,

3. Reverse
Characteristic angle -179...180° in steps 1
Operation accuracy:
Phase angle: ±2°
Three Phase Non Directional Earth Fault Protection
Plug Setting
Start value Low Stage - 0.010...5.000 × In, in step 0.005
High stage - 0.10...40.00 × In, in step 0.01
Inst Stage - 1.00...40.00 × In, in step 0.01

3
Time Setting
Time multiplier Low and High stage - 0.05...15.00 in step 0.01
Operate delay time Low & High stage - 40...200000 ms in step 10
Inst Stage - 20...200000 ms in step 10
Operation accuracy: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
Three Phase Directional Earth Fault Protection

4
Plug Setting
High Stage - 0.10...40.00 × In in step 0.01
Directional mode Low and High stage shall be site selectable as 1. Non-
directional, 2. Forward, 3. Reverse
Time Setting
Time multiplier Low Stage 0.05...15.00 in step 0.01
High Stage - 0.05...15.00 in step 0.01
Operate delay time Low Stage - 50...200000 ms in step 10
High Stage - 40...200000 ms in step 10
Operation Accuracy:
Phase angle: ±2°
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection:
Start value 0.01...5.00 × In, in step 0.01

5
Time multiplier: 0.05...15.00 in step 0.01
Operate delay time: 40...200000 ms in step 10
Broken Conductor protection:
Start value : 10...100% in step 1

6
Operate delay time : 100...30000 ms in step 1
Min phase current: 0.05...0.30 × In in step 0.01
11. PROTECTION OF 33 KV POWER TRANSFORMERS:

In addition to compliance with the ‗General requirements of numerical relays‘ as detailed above, differential
protection (87) for two winding transformer shall have the following features:
a) The relay shall be very fast in operation. The relay shall be inherently stable for external through fault
conditions without affecting the speed of operation for internal faults. The relay shall have stabilized
differential protection (87T) with two independently settable stages. The biased low-set stage shall provide
fast fault clearance while remaining stable when high currents are passing through the protected zone,
which increases current measurement errors. The instantaneous high-set stage shall provide very fast
clearance of severe internal power transformer faults with a high differential current regardless of their
harmonics content. The operate time of the instantaneous stage shall be less than 25ms.
b) The relay is equipped with six phase-current inputs and one neutral-current input. The rated level of the
current inputs is 1/5 A and selectable in the relay software.
c) The relay shall provide biased differential protection with triple slope tripping characteristics with faulty
phase identification / indication. The range for the differential pick-up shall be from 0.1 to 2.5 pu. Its
operating time shall not exceed 30 ms at 5 times rated current.
d) The relay shall have either a built in facility / software of ratio and phase angle correction or necessary
interposing auxiliary current transformers of universal type, shall be provided in the respective panel. The
necessary adaptation to the current ratios and vector groups shall be made using software (with internally
settable adaptation for CT ratio matching and vector group) and all current inputs (1A and 5A) shall allow
direct connection to the main CT, i.e. no interposing current transformers for matching transformer group
and main CTs ratio shall be required.
e) The relay shall have ‗no gap‘ detection technique to detect light CT saturation on a per phase basis. The no
gap detection technique unblocks the low set differential element during light CT saturation, allowing the
low set differential element to trip faster.
f) The relay shall be provided with 2nd harmonic restraint or any other inrush proof feature to ensure
stability during inrush condition and to prevent operation due to magnetizing inrush current when the
transformer is charged either from HV or LV side. The second harmonic blocking threshold shall be
nd
programmable one and it should be possible to deactivate the 2 harmonic restraint feature. But this feature
shall not affect the speed of operation for internal fault. The ratio of the second harmonic component to the
fundamental wave for the differential currents of the measuring system shall serve as the criterion for this
feature.
g) The differential protection functions shall be provided with a 2nd harmonic blocking to avoid tripping at
magnetizing inrush when the transformer is energized either from the HV or LV-side and with a 5th
harmonic restraint to avoid tripping at over-excitation. It shall be possible to set the blocking and
unblocking levels for the 5th harmonic restraint to manage excessive overvoltage situations.
h) The relay shall have saturation discriminator as an additional safeguard for stability under through fault
conditions.
i) All output relays of the differential relay shall be suitable for both signals and trip duties.
j) The relay shall be with 2-bias winding. The relay shall have transient bias to enhance the stability of
differential element during external fault condition.
k) The relay shall have adjustable bias slopes; slope m1 from 5 % to 50 % and slope m2 from 15% to 150 %
and m3 from 100% to 150 % so as to provide maximum sensitivity for internal faults with high stability
for through faults. The relay shall have adjustable operating setting range of 10% to 50% at zero bias.
l) The relay shall have an unrestrained high set element to back up the biased differential function and the
setting range for it shall have a minimum setting of 5pu and a maximum setting of 30 pu.
m) The relay shall be such that there will not be any necessity of changing the setting of the relay whenever
the transformer taps are changed from +5% to-10%.
n) Differential relay shall have facility for setting, parameterization, downloading of stored data, data
captured by disturbance recorder etc. locally through PC. Licensed version of the relay software should be
provided as per the lifespan of the relay. Necessary software, cables, connectors and other accessories as
required for download, analyze data etc. shall be within the scope of successful bidder.
o) The relay shall have disturbance recording (with time stamp) function with suitable no. of analog and
digital channels, Memory size and number of disturbances stored in the relay shall be clearly indicated in
the offer. No. of site selectable binary inputs, binary outputs, watchdog contact details, front and rear
communication port details along with necessary hardware and software details shall be furnished.
11.1. The following are the technical requirement of Differential protection relay:
Sl. No. Feature and Function Technical requirement

It is intended to automate the Switchgears specified in the scope of supply

and use Communicable Numeric relays for Protection, Control, Metering and
Status monitoring. This specification is based on the understanding that an
integrated Automation System along with protections shall be provided and
same shall have provisions for Integration with SCADA system. All the
feeders shall be remote controlled from APDCL‘s SCADA and from the local
console of the numerical relays.
Purpose and
1
application
Numerical multifunctional combined Microprocessor based Transformer
protection and management relay to protect the 33kV Transformer from all
electrical and other faults along with reporting system, Disturbance record for
fault analysis. It shall be numerical adjustable/variable percentage biased
type differential relay. Manufacturer should comply with any especial
requirement or feature asked for retrofitting the relays. Relay should be IEC
61850 compliant.
• The relay shall be very fast in operation with an operating time less than 40
millisecond at 5 times setting.
• The relays shall be inherently stable for external through fault conditions
without affecting the speed of operation for internal faults.
• The relay shall have built in facility of ratio and phase angle correction.
• The relay shall be provided with 2nd harmonic restraint or any other inrush
proof feature to prevent operation due to magnetizing in rush current when
the transformer is charged either from HV or LV side. But this shall not
affect the speed of operation for internal fault.
• It shall be provided with 5th harmonic restraint features to prevent
operation due to possible over excitation of the transformer. This shall also
not affect the speed of operation for internal fault.
• The relay shall have 2 instantaneous phases over current(50) elements and 2
IDMT(51) phase over current elements with standard IEC / ANSI
characteristics selection. It shall be possible to select either winding 1 or
winding 2 for each element. Shall have possibility to add user defined
Main Protection characteristics for IDMT element.
2
feature • The relay shall have facility to provide derived earth fault current protection
as well as measured earth fault protection. Relay shall have 2 elements each
for Instantaneous and IDMT derived earth fault (50N/51N), 2 elements each
for Instantaneous and IDMT measured earth fault (50G/51G). It shall be
possible to select either winding 1 or winding 2 for each element. Shall have
possibility to add user defined characteristics for IDMT element.
• The relay shall be with 2-bias winding. The differential characteristics shall
incorporate two bias stages - first stage for steady state errors i.e tap position
and CT ratios and second stage for transient errors i.e. CT saturation.
• The relay shall have Negative Phase Sequence O/C protection with 2 DTL
& 2 IDMT elements for measurement of derived Negative sequence current.
Shall be possible to select STD IEC/ANSI characteristics. It shall be possible
to select either winding 1 or winding 2 for each element.
• The relay shall be such that there will not be any necessity of
changing the setting of the relay whenever the transformer taps are changed
from +5% to-10%.
• The relay shall have high Impedance Restricted Earth fault Protection for
LV side .
• The relay shall have Circuit Breaker failure function. 2 element shall be
provided- 1 element per winding. The circuit breaker fail function shall be
triggered from an internal trip signal or from a binary input. Alternatively, if
the trip is from a mechanical protection the circuit breaker position can be
used to determine a failure. A second time delay shall be available to enable
another stage to be utilized if required. An input shall also available to bypass
the time delays when the circuit breaker is known to be faulty.
• The relay shall have Negative Phase Sequence O/C protection with 2 DTL
& 2 IDMT elements for measurement of derived Negative sequence current.
Shall be possible to select STD IEC/ANSI characteristics. It shall be possible
to select either winding 1 or winding 2 for each element.
Relay shall be completely Numerical with protective elements having

software algorithm based on sampling of Analog inputs. Sampling Rate of
3 Processor feature Analog Signal: The sampling rate should be 1000 samples for 50 Hz signal or
better for each analog channel. Hardware based measurements shall not be
acceptable.
The operation of Relay shall be possible both locally from the Switchgear and
remote & Local Work station. The local position shall be displayed in remote
/ local workstation and remote operation shall be blocked if the switch is in
Operational Local. Clear control priorities shall prevent initiation of operation of a single
4
Philosophy switch at the same time from more than one of the various control levels and
there shall be interlocks among various control levels. The priority shall
always be with the lowest enabled control level. Relay accuracy shall not be
affected by system frequency fluctuation.
1. Minimum 14 number binary inputs are required.

2. All binary inputs should be settable threshold voltage from 20 to 170 V
DC.
3. Setting group is required to be changed with any binary input status.
4. Trip circuit supervision with BI status
5. The Binary inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1ms resolution.
Status/Optical
5 Contact bouncing in binary inputs shall not be assumed as change of state.
Inputs/Binary inputs
6. Relay should have comprehensive self diagnostic feature with remote
indication of relay failure and alarm shall be generated without tripping of
circuit.
7. Provision of Testing relays output without any current injection.
8. No. of programmable LEDs - at least 10 nos. with latching option.
9. All the BI should be freely configurable.
All measurements should be in primary quantities. Minimum following

displays are required in alpha numeric:-
1. Three phase (Positive sequence) current
2. Neutral (zero sequence) current
Main measuring
6 3. Differential current, Voltage, Frequency etc.
and reporting feature
3. All the trips should have clear indication on the relay terminals
4. Resetting should be selectable as hand reset or auto reset.
5. The default relay LCD shall be user defined to display primary circuit
loading.
1. Fault record: The relay shall have the facility to store at least last 100
time-stamped fault records with information on cause of trip, trip values of
electrical parameters.
Tools for Fault
7 2. Event record: The relay shall have the facility to store at least 1000 time
diagnostics
stamped event records with 1ms resolution.
3. Disturbance records: The relay shall have capacity to store at least 15 sec
disturbance record waveforms.
1. The relay setting and programming should be stored in EEPROM so that

during Aux. Power failure no data is lost. The last 5 fault DR records should
be in flash memory and DR will not erase in case of DC supply fail for more
than 2 days.
2. Relay should have event log, trip log and DR record. All logs should go
in to history.
3. All tripping of relay should initiate DR in auto without extra binary input.
Triggering of DR with binary input should be user configurable.
Memory and 4. Should be able to record at least 10 fault records and 20 event records in
8 flash memory.
Recording Feature
5. Minimum 10 nos. of latest trip log with cause of trip should be stored in
memory along with date and time stamping. The memory should not be lost
with the switching off of DC.
6. The relay should have fault-recording feature with current

waveform and Digital Input status. The fault waveform should consist of
minimum four current waveforms of three phase current and zero sequence
current and DI status. Triggering time for Pre and Post should have user
selectable. This record should be in flash memory for minimum 7(seven)
days even after switching off the DC supply.
Both 240 V AC and 110 V [- 25% to + 10%]

9 Auxiliary Supply 2 wire unearthed system. Necessary software shall be in-built for proper
shutdown and restart in case of power failure.
Rated CT/PT
10 5/1 Amp (User selectable), CTs used to be protection class
secondary
11 Rated frequency 50 HZ ±5%
1. Operating ambient temperature upto 60Deg C.

2. Operating Humidity upto 95%.
3. Relay shall meet the requirement for withstanding electromagnetic
12 Ambient condition
interference according to relevant parts of latest IEC 60255-26. Failure of
single component within the equipment shall neither cause unwanted
operation nor lead to a complete system breakdown.
1. Relay should be flush mounted type.

2. Module to be preferably draw out type then it should have CT shorting
facility of make before break type.
Module and 3. Mounting in switchgears located in non AC rooms.
13
Mounting 4. Galvanic isolation between field connection and relay hardware should be
there.
5. The relays should be housed in a robust metal case suitable for panel
mounting conforming to IP 54 (Front face) and IP 20 in the rear side.
The relay should have facility to comprehensively monitor the healthiness of

its circuits and components by own monitoring system. In case of any
problem of hardware and software elements of the relay, the fault diagnosis
information shall be displayed on the LCD and an alarm should be generated
Watchdog and self- by one of the output contacts. The alarm as soft signal to be sent to SCADA
14
monitoring system as well. Necessary support documentation explaining the self-
diagnostic feature shall be furnished. Watch dog contact shall be provided in
addition to required 14 BI, 10 BO (Relay supervision contact must be
additional from 10 BO). All the BI & BOs shall be freely configurable. All
binary inputs should be settable threshold voltage from 20…170 VDC.
15 Settings As detailed in Clause No. 11 of Technical Specification
Minimum 10 number binary/digital output are required out of which

1. One potential free change over contact should be provided for start inhibit
of relay.
2. All o/p contact should be freely programmable.
3. To enable fast direct tripping of the circuit breaker, the relay must have 2
optional high-speed binary outputs with an operate time of ≤ 2-3 ms. The
16 Relay outputs binary output contacts shall be rated to make and carry 30 A for 0.5 s with a
breaking capacity of ≥1 A (L/R<40 ms).
4. Rating of trip contacts.
a) Contact durability>10K operation.
b) 30 Amp make and carry for 0.5 sec for trip contact.
c) Make and carry for trip contacts L/R<=50ms Rating of Alarm contacts.
d) 5 Amp make and carry continuously (ac or dc).
1. The offered relay shall have a comprehensive local MMI (man-machine

interface) for interface. It shall have the following minimum elements so that
the features of the relay can be accessed and setting changes can be done
locally.
- At least 48 character alphanumeric backlit LCD display unit.
- The LCD panel should be able to display graphical data such as at least 2
Configurable SLDs, vector diagram of instantaneous power.
2. Should have password protected key padlock. The password of the relay
Relay software and should of Level 4 to provide security to the setting parameters.
17 Man Machine 3. Tactile keypad for 4 navigation keys for browsing and setting the relay
Interface menu.
4. Necessary software for relay setting , retrieving DR, event log, trip log
should be supplied by the Manufacturer. The License of the software is to be
issued to APDCL for the entire lifespan of the relay.
5. Additional functions can be added to RELAY by software up-gradation
and downloading this upgraded software to the relays by simple
communication through PC.
6. Multiuser/Corporate license for installation on minimum 35 nos. of
PCs/Laptops.
Date and Time stamping with faults and record. The clock should be
powered from internal cell and should not require setting after every DC
18 Date and time switching. The internal cell life shall be minimum 5 years. Time
synchronization by SNTP. The relay must support IEEE 1588 v2 for high
accuracy time synchronization in Ethernet based applications.
All CT and PT terminals shall be provided as fixed (screwed) type terminals

on the relay to avoid any hazard due to loose connection leading to CT
19 Lugs and terminators
opening or any other loose connection. Necessary amount of lugs should be
supplied along with each relay for CT connection and control wiring.
1. The relays should be supplied with manuals with all technical and
operating instructions.
Manuals, Drawings
20 2. All the internal drawings indicating the logics and block diagram details
and Literature
explaining principle of operation should be given at the time of supply.
3. Mapping details shall be submitted in IEC format.
1. MICS document (model implementation conformance statement).

2. PICS (protocol implementation conformance statement.
Standard
3. Conformance Test certificate from DNVGL/CPRI.
documentation per
21 4. PIXIT document.
Relay, according to
All the above mentioned certificates shall be submitted.
IEC 61850
5. ICD file
6. SCD file
The Manufacturer shall provide all necessary software tools along with
source codes to perform addition of bays in future and complete integration
Extendibility in
22 with SCADA by the User. These software tools shall be able to configure
Future
relay, add analog variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking logics
etc. for additional bays/equipments which shall be added in future.
The supplier should mention following:-

1. Product maturity: The Manufacturer should mention the time period for
which the product is in the market.
2. Expected product life shall be minimum 20 years.
23 Lifespan 3. Hardware/Firmware change notification process and Upgrades to be
provided free of cost within the Guarantee period/5 years whichever is later,
if needed.
4. Lifespan of standard tools and processes for relay configuration, querying
and integration.
As detailed in Table 1: List of Standards Applicable Clause No. 3.2 of

24 Standards
1. The relay should have Latest IEC 61850 Edition 2 or better

Communication Protocol.
2. Relay should support PRP(parallel Redundancy protocol) as per
IEC 62439-3. 3. Functioning of Relay shall not hamper to fault
occurring any interconnected relay.
4. The Relays must have two fiber-optic Ethernet ports with HSR and
PRP-1.
5. The relay shall have a USB/RS232/RJ45 communication port for
connecting to a local PC/Laptop for setting and viewing the data from
the relay. Both IEC 103 (to communicate with existing SAS) and IEC
61850 must be available simultaneously in single relay with minimum
two nos. redundant communication port (FO or RJ45). Use of any type
of converter is not acceptable.
Each RELAY shall be clearly marked with manufacturer‘s Name, type, serial
Name Plate and
26 no. and electrical rating data. Name plates shall be made of anodized
marking
aluminium with white engraving on black surface.
Relays will be guaranteed for the period of sixty six months from the date of
27 Guarantee
last receipt at respective T&C Division.
Any problem in the said period should be attended free of charge

28 Performance
inclusive of repair/replacement of relays/ component (both H/W, S/W).
As detailed in the table for type tests in Clause No. 5 of technical

29 Type Test
specifications.
Suitable training to be imparted to employer persons on the following items:-

1. Relay setting and parameterization
2. Relay configuration with respect to I/P, O/P and functional block for
protection.
30 Training 3. GOOSE configuration.
4. Configuration and Interfacing required for third party SCADA System
Integration.
5. Diagnostic features
The details of syllabus to be finalized with APDCL.
As detailed in Interoperability Test and Demonstrations in Clause No. 7 of

31 Inter-operability test
technical specifications.
11.2 Protection schemes for numerical Transformer differential protection relay:
Biased differential protection (87 T): Numerical biased differential protection relay with inbuilt current amplitude &
vector group compensation feature & also with differential high set element for two winding power transformer compliant
to IEC 60255.
Selectable 1 Amp / 5 Amps for both HV

C.T. secondary & LV sides
Online display of HV & LV phase currents & differential current- Needed
Adjustable bias setting 5 to 50% In.
Operation based on fundamental frequency -50 Hz
Programmable HV/LV CT ratio of T/F vector group -Needed
Inbuilt REF protection -Needed
Inbuilt HV & LV side over current & earth fault protection - Needed
Inbuilt transformer trouble auxiliary relay - Needed
Backlit LCD display - Needed
Harmonic restrain feature- Needed with settable feature for 2 nd and 5th Harmonics
Storing facility of latest 100 fault events with real time clock
Password protection – 4 Level
Quiescent condition – approx. 4 watt
DC burden
Under trip condition – 110 Volt - approx 4 watt, 110 Volt -
approx 7 watt.
Through current only: approx. 0.15VA for 1 amp & 0.30VA
AC burden for 5amp (per bias circuit) Bias & differential Ckt only: 2.8
VA for 1 amp & 3.2 VA for 5 amp.
Contact arrangements Two change over self reset tripping contacts & two
annunciation contacts
Contact rating Make & carry 7500VA for 0.2 sec. with max 30 A & 300 V
AC or DC carry continuously 5 amp AC or DC break 1250
VA AC or 50 W DC resistive, 25 W L/R – 0.04 s subject to
max. 5 amp & 300 Volts
Current Input Six for differential & one for REF
a) Numerically stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault protection (64R)

This function should be provided to maximize the sensitivity of the protection of earth faults. The
REF function should be selected separately for each winding and programmable as either high or
low impedance. The REF function should be able to share the same CTs with the biased differential
function. As in traditional REF protections, the function should respond only to the fundamental
frequency component of the currents. The REF protection provided should be suitable for auto
transformer also.
The numeric REF protection relay shall provide the following functions:
I. The relay shall both Numerically stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault protection
(64R) and High-impedance restricted earth-fault protection with metrosil is required.
II. Current / voltage operated high impedance type with a suitable setting to cover the
maximum portion of transformer winding. Necessary calculation to prove the above
winding coverage shall be furnished along with the tender.
III. Tuned to the system frequency. Have suitable nonlinear resistor as required to limit the
peak voltage and stabilizing resistance.
IV. Operating time shall be less than 40ms.
V. Have suitable stabilizing resistor to prevent mal operation during external faults, if
necessary.
VI. Bidder to consider required Non Linear (VDR) resistance of metrosil make and
stabilizing resistance required for the Restricted Earth Fault protection.
b) Overload Protection:
The RELAY shall have thermal overload protection for alarm and trip condition with continuously
adjustable setting range of 10-400% of rated current.
c) Over current Protection (50,51):

The RELAY shall have three stages of definite time over current protection as back up operating with
separate measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the negative sequence
current and the residual current. In addition the relay shall have three stages of Inverse time
overcurrent protection operating on the basis of one measuring system each for the three phase
currents, the negative sequence current and the residual current.
d) Negative-sequence over current protection: One stage of negative sequence over current
protection with DT & IDMT feature (user selectable) to be provided.
e) Local Breaker Back-Up Protection:
The relays shall have in-built LBB protection to detect the failure in the local breaker using the
undercurrent Criteria and zero crossing detection and trip the upstream breaker. A set of D.C. voltage
operated auxiliary relays with coil cut-off arrangement and 2-N/O and 2-N/C contacts, Self-reset with
Hand reset flag indicator type shall be provided for each Transformer for:
Buchholz Alarm.
Buchholz Trip.
Winding Temp. Trip & winding Temp alarm.
Oil Temp trip & Oil Temp Alarm.
Pressure Release Device Trip.
OSR for OLTC trip
11.3. MEASUREMENTS:
All measurements should be in primary quantities. The default relay LCD shall be user defined to display
primary circuit loading. As a minimum, the relay should measure and display in alpha-numeric the
Instantaneous, Minimum and Maximum values with time stamp following standard quantities:
a) Phase currents and Phase Angles (HV & LV)
b) Neutral currents - derived and measured
c) Bias/Restraining Current
d) Differential Currents
e) Thermal state
f) Positive, negative and Zero sequence current
g) Ratio of negative to positive sequence current
h) Breaker operation counter
i) Breaker trip counter for Earth Fault

j) Breaker trip counter for Over Current.
k) Breaker operating time
l) Resetting of display should be selectable as hand reset or auto reset.
11.4. Setting range of offered relays shall comply the below Table, bidder to confirm each range in below table, and
this document to be submitted with GTP.
Sl. Protection Function: (Numerical Transformer protection (Two Winding) Bidder to Confirm
No relay) (Yes/No)
Three Phase Non Directional Over Current Protection

1 Plug Setting
Low Set Stage - 0.05...5.00 × In, in steps 0.01
High Set Stage - 0.10...40.00 × In in steps 0.01
Inst Stage - 1.00...40.00 × In in steps 0.01
Time Setting
Time multiplier Low Stage and High Set stage 0.05...15.00 in step 0.01
Operate delay time For Low stage and high stage 40...200000 ms in step 10
Operate delay time For Inst Stage 20...200000 ms in step 10
Three Phase Non Directional Earth Fault Protection
Plug Setting
High stage - 0.10...40.00 × In, in step 0.01
Inst Stage - 1.00...40.00 × In, in step 0.01
Time Setting
Time multiplier Low and High stage - 0.05...15.00 in step 0.01
Operate delay time Low & High stage - 40...200000 ms in step 10
Inst Stage - 20...200000 ms in step 10
2 Operation accuracy: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

High operate value: 500...3000 %Ir in step 10
Low operate value: 5...50 %Ir in step 1
Slope section 1 : 10...50% in step 1
Slope Section 2: 100...500 %Ir in step 1
Restraint mode (Selectable) : Waveform
2nd Harmonic + waveform
5th Harmonic + waveform
2nd Harmonic + 5th Harmonic + Waveform
Start value for 2nd Harmonic: 7...20% in step 1
Start value for 5th Harmonic : 10...50% 1
Operation Accuracy: ±2 Hz ±3.0% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
3 Numerically stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault protection
Operate value: 5...50 %In in step 1
Minimum operate time: 40...300000 ms in step 1
Restraint mode: 2nd Harmonic
Start value: 2nd harmonic: 10...50% in step 1
Operation accuracy: ±2.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In
4 High-impedance biased restricted earth-fault protection:
Operate value: 1.0...50.0%In in step 0.1
Minimum operate time: 40...300000 ms in step 1
5 Negative-sequence over current protection:
Start value 0.01...5.00 × In, in step 0.01
Time multiplier: 0.05...15.00 in step 0.01
Operate delay time: 40...200000 ms in step 10

12. SPARES:
The manufacturer shall quote item-wise Unit Prices for all type of critical spares and other consumable spares
recommended by him. Such spare shall include Electronic Cards, terminal connectors, display units and other
essential spare parts of the RELAYs. The manufacturer/Supplier is also required to provide the Plates to be used
in the existing panels for retrofitting of the RELAYs.
13. DRAWING & LITERATURE:
Triplicate copies of the following drawings and literature shall be submitted along with the order copy:
Principal dimension details of each RELAYs.
Schematic Wing Diagram for Terminal Block is to be submitted. Moreover it should be pasted on the casing of
the RELAYs for ease of commissioning works.
Illustrative, descriptive literature, General Technical Data & Specification of Devices.
14. DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED ALONG WITH THE OFFER:
a. The contractor shall invariably submit the following documents, failing which the offers are liable
for rejection:
b. Bill of Material (schedule-IA/IB/IC).
c. Documents supporting the qualifying requirements / past performance reports.
d. Undertakings from relay manufacturer regarding:
i. Non-phasing out of the relays for at least 10 years from the date of supply.
ii. For extending technical support and back-up guarantee.
iii. Detailed catalogue/ technical literature in respect of all components/ accessories including
bought-out items.
e. Names of supplier of bought out item.
f. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer.
A. GTP for Directional Numerical OC & EF Relay for 33 KV Feeders
S.
Parameter Requirement as per TS Bidder‟s Offer
No.
1 Directional OC & EF Relay
a Make
b Type
c Model no
d Auxiliary supply 110 V DC and 230 VAC
Flush Mounted Draw out
e Mounting
type
2 Conformance to
a IEC 60255 Yes

b IEC 61850 Ed I & II Yes
Electromagnetic Interference as per
C Needed
IEC 60255-26
Upgradable to IEC 61850 9-2 LE for
d Needed
process bus
e PRP as per IEC 62439-3 Needed
f HSR Needed
3 CT and VT inputs
No of CT Inputs
For Over Current 3
For Earth Fault 1
VT inputs 4
Large mimic graphical
4 Size of the LCD Display
display
4 level password protection
Password protection
Needed
Relay equipped with CB open and
5 Yes
close push buttons
The relay should have Protection
6
schemes
a Three phase Over Current Yes
b Earth Fault Yes
c Thermal Over Load Yes
d Broken Conductor with 1 stage Yes
1 Inrush Blocking Feature Yes
2 Loss of Load No
High Impedance with Earth fault
3 Yes
Protection
Negative Phase Sequence Over
4 Yes
Current feature
5 Circuit breaker failure Protection Yes
Trip Circuit Supervision for two trip
6 Yes
coils
7 Auto reclose No
8 Cold Load Pick up Yes
9 Fuse fail Supervision Yes
10 Life Span [ guaranteed] 10 Years
One time delayed element and two
11 Yes
high set elements
Setting range and Step for IDMT O/C Start Value: 0.05 to
A
element for over Current 5xIn in steps of 0.01
0.05…..15.00 in steps of
B Time multiplier settings
0.01
Selectable time curve for IDMT
C Yes
Element
0.10 to 40 x In in steps of
Setting range and tap for high set
D 0.01 [ High Set Stage]
elements for both Current
1 to 40 x In [ Inst. Stage]
40…..200000 ms in steps of
E Time delay
10
Setting range and Step for IDMT E/F Start Value : 0.05 to 5 x
F
element for Earth Fault Current In in steps of 0.01
0.05…..15.00 in steps of
G Time multiplier settings
0.01
High Set with Delay for Earth Fault E/F High Set : 0.10 to 40 x
H
Current In in steps of 0.005
I Time delay 0.05….15 in steps of 0.01
Relay must have user

J Sampling rate of analog signal selectable sampling rate up
to 800Hz for 50 Hz.
Whether remote controllable from
12 Yes
SCADA
13
A No of Binary Inputs 16
Max. No of Binary inputs (internally To be specified by the
B
Feasible) bidder
Settable threshold voltage
C Voltage ratings of Binary Inputs from 40 to 150% of DC
supply.
Provision for testing without current
D Yes
injection
Supervision for CB Open and Close
14 Yes
Status
9 nos. of freely
No. of Programmable LEDs and No.
15 configurable LEDs
of non Latched LEDs
3 nos. of fixed LEDs.
Analog measurement and display
16 Yes
supported
100 latest with time
17 Fault Record Storage capacity
stamping
18 Event Storage capacity 1000 with time stamping
19 Disturbance record storage capacity 20 sec DR Waveform
20 MMI with Keypad and LCD Provided Yes
CT Secondary should be user

21 1A/5A
selectable
22 Rated Frequency 50 Hz
23
A Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55o C
B Relative Humidity 93% Non Condensing

24 watch Dog Yes
25 CT ratio Settings SETTABLE
26
A No of Binary Output contact 10 Nos + 1 No. watch Dog
Max. No of Binary inputs (internally To be specified by the
B
Feasible ) bidder
C Contact Rating 8 Amp Continuous
Make and carry for 3 Sec 15 Amp
Make and carry for 0.5 Sec 30 Amp
Operation time less than 2-3ms
SNTP and PTP via IEC
27 Mode of Time Synchronization
61850
28 Type of Lugs and terminations
A For BI/BO Pin type
B For CTs Ring Type
29 MTTR 30 Mins
PCB used in the relay is in compliance
30 Required
of HEC as per IEC 60068
Type test reports attached
31 Compliance to Type Test
in the TS.
2 No. RJ 45 Port /2 no. FO
A Rear Port Details -100 MBPS
port
1 No. RJ 45 Port/1 no. USB
B Front Port Details -10 MBPS
Port
Whether time synchronization are
33 Yes
native to the RELAY
Start and Trip Contacts are freely
34 Yes
Programmable
RELAY should be directly connected

to the laptop without the use of any
35
intermediate converter through RJ 45
Port
Specify the application for

36 configuration and data downloading
from the RELAY
Software is to be provided for data
37 downloading of events, Fault records
for evaluation of the same
Graphical configuration tool for
38 I/O,O/P and functional building block
for protection and control
Any other software required for
39
integration with SCADA
40 DC Burden Less than 20 W
GTP FOR NON DIRECTIONAL NUMERICAL OC & EF RELAY FOR TRANSFORMER (BACK UP)
and 11 KV FEEDERS
S. No. Parameter Requirement as per TS Bidder‟s Offer

1 Non Directional OC & EF Relay
a Make
b Type
c Model no (Complete Article no )
d Auxiliary supply 110 V DC and 230 VAC
e Mounting Flush Mounted Draw out type
2 Conformance to
a IEC 60255 Yes
Electromagnetic Interference as per
C Needed
IEC 60255-26
d IEC 61850 9-2 LE for process bus Needed
f HSR Needed
3 CT and VT inputs
No of CT Inputs
For Over Current 3
For Earth Fault 1
VT inputs Not Required
4 Size of the LCD Display Large mimic graphical display
Password protection
Needed
Relay equipped with CB open and
5 Yes
close push buttons
6
schemes
Three phase Over Current (Non
A Yes
Directional)
B Earth Fault (Non Directional) Yes
C Thermal Over Load Yes
D Broken Conductor with 1 stage Yes
E Inrush Blocking Feature Yes
F Loss of Load No
High Impedance with Earth fault
G Yes
Protection
Negative Phase Sequence Over
H Yes
Current feature
I Circuit breaker failure Protection Yes
Trip Circuit Supervision for Two
J Yes
Trip Coil
K Auto reclose No
L Cold Load Pick up Yes
M Fuse Fail Super Vision NO
J Life Span [ guaranteed] 10 Years
7
One time delayed element and two
A Yes
high set elements
Setting range and Step for IDMT O/C Start Value : 0.05 to 5xIn
B
element for over Current in steps of 0.01
C Time multiplier settings 0.05…..15.00 in steps of 0.01
Selectable time curve for IDMT

D Yes
Element
0.10 to 40 x In in steps of 0.01
Setting range and Step for high set
E [ High Set Stage]
elements for both Current
1 to 40 x In [ Inst. Stage]
F Time delay 40…..200000 ms in steps of 10
Setting range and Step for IDMT E/F Start Value : 0.05 to 5 x In
G
element for Earth Fault Current in steps of 0.01
H Time multiplier settings 0.05…..15.00 in steps of 0.01
High Set with Delay for Earth Fault E/F High Set : 0.10 to 40 x In
I
Current in steps of 0.005
Time delay 0.05….15 in steps of 0.01

J sampling rate of analog signal selectable sampling rate up to
1000 Samples /cycle @ 50 Hz
8 Yes
SCADA
A No of Binary Inputs 14 nos.
Max. No of Binary inputs

B To be specified by the bidder
(internally Feasible )
C Voltage ratings of Binary Inputs from 40 to 150%of DC
SUPPLY.
Provision for testing without
D Yes
current injection
10 Yes
Status
9 nos. of freely configurable
No. of Programmable LEDs and
11 LEDs
No. of non Latched LEDs
3 nos. of fixed LEDs.
12 Yes
supported
13 Fault Record Storage capacity 100 latest with time stamping

MMI with Keypad and LCD

16 Yes
Provided
CT Secondary should be user
17 1A/5A
selectable
19
A Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55o C
B Relative Humidity 93 % Non Condensing
20 watch Dog Yes
22
A No of Binary Output contact 10 Nos + 1 No. watch Dog
Max. No of Binary outputs

B To be specified by the bidder
(internally Feasible )
High Speed Output contact with 2 nos. (Included in total 10
C
less than 3 ms operation time nos.)
D Contact Rating 8 Amp Continuous
Operation time less than 2-3ms
23 Mode of Time Synchronization SNTP via IEC 61850
A For BI/BO Pin type
B For CTs Ring Type
25 MTTR 30 Mins
PCB used in the relay is in

26 Required
compliance of HEC as per IEC
60068
Type test reports attached in

27 Compliance to Type Test
the TS.
2 Nos. RJ 45 Port / 2 no. FO

a Rear Port Details -100 MBPS
port
1 No. RJ 45 Port / 1 no. USB
b Front Port Details -10 MBPS
Port
Whether time synchronization are
29 Yes
native to the RELAY
30 Yes
Programmable
RELAY should be directly
connected to the laptop with out the
31
use of any intermediate converter
through RJ 45 Port
Specify the application for
32 configuration and data downloading
from the RELAY
33 downloading of events, Fault
records for evaluation of the same
Graphical configuration tool for
34 I/O, O/P and functional building
block for protection and control
35
integration with SCADA
A. GTP for Numerical Differential Relay for DTR.
S. No. Parameter Requirement as per TS Bidder‟s Offer
1 Differential Relay
a Make
b Type
c Model no
d Auxiliary supply Both 110 V DC and 230 VAC
e Mounting Flush Mounted Draw out type
2 Conformance to
a IEC 60255 Yes
IEC 61850 9-2 LE for process bus

C sample values Needed
Electromagnetic Interference as per IEC

D 60255-26 Needed
f HSR Needed
3 No of CT Inputs
For Differential protection 6
For Restricted Earth Fault 1
4 Size of the LCD Display Large mimic display

Password protection Needed
Relay equipped with CB open and close

5 push buttons Yes

6 schemes
a Three phase Over Current Yes
b Earth Fault Yes
c Sensitive earth Fault Yes
d Differential Protection Yes
e Adjustable Bias Settings Yes
f REF with High Impedance Yes
g Inrush Blocking Feature Yes
h Loss of Load No
i Over and Under Frequency Not needed
Negative Phase Sequence Over Current

j feature Yes
k Circuit breaker failure Protection Yes
l Trip Circuit Supervision Yes

m Over fluxing Not Needed
Harmonic restraints settable for 2H and

n 5H Required
o Life Span [ guaranteed] 10 Years
One time delayed element and two high

a set elements Yes
Setting range and Step for IDMT element O/C Start Value : 0.05 to 5xIn
b for both Current in steps of 0.01
c Time multiplier settings 0.05…..15.00 in steps of 0.01
d Selectable time curve for IDMT Element Yes
O/C Start Value : 0.10 to 40 x

Setting range and Step for high set In in steps of 0.01 [ High Set
e elements for both Current Stage] 1 - 40 x In [ Inst. stage]
40….200000 ms in steps of
f Time delay 10
Setting range and Step for IDMT element E/F Start Value : 0.010 to 5 x
g for Earth Fault Current In in steps of 0.005
h Time multiplier settings 0.05…..15.00 in steps of 0.01
High Set with Delay for Earth Fault E/F High Set : 0.10 to 40 x In
i Current in steps of 0.005
Time delay 0.05….15

selectable sampling rate up to
j sampling rate of analog signal 1000 samples /cycle @ 50 Hz

8 SCADA Yes
A No of Binary Inputs (Equipped) 14
Max. No of Binary Inputs (internally

B Feasible ) To be specified by the bidder

C Voltage ratings of Binary Inputs from 40 -150% of DC supply.
Provision for testing without current

D injection Yes

10 Status Yes
No. of Programmable LEDs and No. of 9 nos. of freely configurable

11 non Latched LEDs LEDs 3 nos. of fixed LEDs.

12 supported Yes
13 Fault Record Storage capacity 100 latest with time stamping
16 MMI with Keypad and LCD Provided Yes
17 CT Secondary should be user selectable 1A/5A
19
a Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55o C
b Relative Humidity 93 % Non Condensing
20 watch Dog Yes
22
A No of Binary Output 10 Nos + 1 No. watch Dog
Max. No of Binary outputs (internally

B Feasible) To be Specified by bidder
C Contact Rating 8 Amp Continuous
Operate time less than 1 ms
23 Mode of Time Synchronization SNTP and PTP
a For BI/BO Pin type
b For CTs Ring Type
25 MTTR 30 Mins
26 Required
PCB used in the relay is in compliance of
HEC as per IEC 60068
27 Life Span [ guaranteed] 10 years
28 Compliance to Type Test Type test reports attached
2 No. RJ 45 Port/ 2 Nos. FO

A Rear Port Details Port
B Front Port Details 1 No. RJ 45 Port/ 1 No. USB
Whether time synchronization are native

30 to the relay Yes

31 Programmable Yes
Relay should be directly connected to the

relay without the use of any intermediate
32 converter through RJ 45 Port
Specify the application for configuration

33 and data downloading from the relay

downloading of events, Fault records for
34 evaluation of the same
Graphical configuration tool for I/O,O/P

and functional building block for
35 protection and control

36 integration with SCADA
8. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 11 KV AND 33 KV COMBINED CT-PT UNITS
1. SCOPE:
This specification covers design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage testing, inspection, testing before
dispatch, supply and installation and commissioning of 11KV & 33KV CT PT Combined Metering Sets of
class of accuracy 0.5s for 11 KV, 0.2s for 33 KV as per the particulars given in the schedule attached.
2. STANDARD:
Except where modified by this specification the component parts of the equipment shall comply with the
following ISS available (the latest versions):
Current Transformers IS 2705/1992
Potential Transformers IS 3156/1992
HV Porcelain Bushing IS 5621
Insulation Oil IS 335/1983
Galvanization IS 2629
Structural Steel (Std. Quality) IS 2062
Colours for ready mix paints IS-5
3. TYPE FOR 11 KV:
The metering transformer equipment shall be of pole mounting type for outdoor use. They are to be used in 11KV
Three Phase with solidly earthed neutral and suitable for 3 Phase 4 Wire 50 cycles network. The equipment is
required for operation of HT Tri-vector Meters and shall be oil cooled.
The CT-PT sets shall have the following ratings:
S. NO. Description CT PT
1 Type Three Single phase One three phase Star/Star
2 Accuracy Class 0.5S 0.5
3 Rated frequency 50 HZ(+)/(-) 5% 50 HZ(+)/(-) 5%
4 Rated primary current Upto 200-100A N/A
5 Rated secondary current 5/1 Amps N/A
6 Rated primary voltage 11KV
7 Rated secondary voltage 110/ √ 3 V
5 VA at (0.8 lagging PF) per

8 Rated burden 30 VA (0.8 lagging PF) per phase
phase
9 Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 sec.
10 Current Density 1.5 A/sq.mm.
6.4kA for ratios <50/5A,

13.1kA for ratios
Short circuit current withstand
11 time 50/5A<100/5A, 18.4kA for
ratios 100/5A<400/5A for 1
second for ratios
Dynamic current Power

12 28 KA
frequency
withstand voltage on primary

13 28 KV for one minute 28 KV for one minute
winding
withstand voltage on secondary

winding
Lightning Impulse withstand

15 75 KV 75 KV
voltage
16 Winding materials Copper Copper
17 Class insulation A A
18 Instrument Security Factor Less than 5

Maximum allowable
19 temperature rise 50 0C 50 0C
4. TYPE FOR 33 KV:
The metering transformer equipment shall be of pole mounting type for outdoor use. They are to be used in 33 kV
Three Phase with solidly earthed neutral and suitable for 3 Phase 4 Wire 50 cycles network. The equipment is
required for operation of HT Tri-vector Meters and shall be oil cooled.
The CT-PT sets shall have the following ratings:
S. NO. Description CT PT
1 Type Three Single phase One three phase Star/Star
2 Accuracy Class 0.2 S 0.2
3 Rated frequency 50 HZ(+)/(-) 5% 50 HZ(+)/(-) 5%
4 Rated primary current Upto 200-400 A N/A
5 Rated secondary current 5/1 Amps N/A
6 Rated primary voltage 33 KV
7 Rated secondary voltage 110/√3 V
5 VA (0.8 lagging 30 VA (0.8 lagging PF) per

8 Rated burden
PF)per phase phase
1.2 continuous and 1.5 for

9 Rated voltage factor
30 sec
10 Current Density 1.5 A/sq. mm.
6.4kA for ratios

Short circuit current withstand <50/5A, 13.1kA for
11 ratios 50/5A<100/5A,
time
18.4kA for ratios
100/5A<200/5A and
25kA for ratios

200/5A<400/5A for 1
second for ratios
12 Dynamic current 40 KA
Power frequency withstand

voltage on primary winding
Power frequency withstand

voltage on secondary winding
Lightning Impulse withstand

15 170 KV 170 KV
voltage
16 Winding materials Copper Copper
17 Class insulation A A
18 Instrument Security Factor Less than 5
Maximum allowable temperature

19x 50⁰ C 50⁰ C
rise
5. DESIGN:
a) The equipment shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under all conditions of service.
b) The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provisions for safety of all those concerned in
the operation and maintenance of the equipment. A pressure relief valve/explosion vent shall be invariably
provided to the CT PT set. It shall be provided at the top cover of the tank.
c) All outdoor apparatus shall be so designed that water cannot collect at any point and enter the CT/PT set. The
top cover of the tank, secondary terminal cover, inspection chamber cover plate is suitable bent at the edges
(at least 25mm bent) so that the gaskets are not exposed to moisture.
d) No inspection cover at any side of the CTPT shall be provided.
e) All connections and terminals shall be of sufficient size for carrying the specified currents continuously
without undue heating.
f) The CTPT sets shall be hermetically sealed type (shall not communicate with atmospheric air) in
construction without any oil conservator. The workmanship shall be of the highest standard. All CTPT sets
must be tested for ‗Leak test‘ through Nitrogen Gas for a pressure of 10 PSI (Pound sq. inch).
g) The neutral of primary PT winding shall be floating. The neutral of PT Secondary winding shall be earthed.
h) All bolts, nuts, washers in contact with non-ferrous parts shall be of brass.
i) All ferrous parts including bolts & nuts liable to corrosion, forming integral part of the equipment shall be
smoothly and continuously hot dip galvanized.
j) The secondary terminal box and oil gauge shall be arranged with MU.
k) The core shall be high grade non-ageing electrical silicon laminated steel or of better grade of low hysteric
loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy, at both normal and over current / voltage.
l) All winding shall be of insulated high grade Electrolytic copper wire and the manufacturing of the units shall
be done completely closed and air-conditioned room otherwise fibre glass insulation sleeves are to be
provided for primary winding. Details of winding and core shall be furnished.
m) The secondary winding neutral of PT and secondary terminals of CTs and PTs shall be brought out in one
single secondary terminal box through 3 KV bushings. The secondary terminals of all the CTs and PTs
mounted on the inside of the tank shall be completely moulded with epoxy cast resin in such a way
that no live part and termination point of the secondary terminals are accessible inside the tank. The
terminals shall be marked as per ISS and supporting marking plate with earth terminal shall be provided.
The secondary terminal box compartment shall be divided in two portions - One portion containing
secondary of all CTs and the other portion shall contain all secondary PT connections with neutral and one
body earthed. The whole compartment shall be covered by one bolted cover with sealing arrangement. At
least two bolts at diagonally opposite corners of secondary terminal box shall be suitable for sealing
arrangement. All other bolted covers and inspection windows covers, where provided shall also have sealing
bolts for sealing purpose. Suitably shorting links shall be provided for individual CT shorting and PT
secondary neutral.
n) The secondary terminal box shall have cable gland/ flange suitable to receive two Nos. control cable of size
6 core x 4 sq.mm & 4 core X 2.5 sq. mm or 11core x 2.5sqmm at the bottom of the secondary box for
metering connections to secondary winding of 33 KV CT-PT circuits respectively.
o) The 33 KV CT PT Set shall have 3 Nos. incoming and 3 Nos. outgoing outdoor type bushing. 33 KV CT-PT
Sets shall have 6 Nos. bimetallic terminal connectors suitable for DOG/WOLF/PANTHER conductor.
These should be type tested from CPRI/ NABL accredited Labs and reports be furnished with offer. The
reports should not be older than 5 years for Short Circuit Test. The dimension & drawing to be furnished
with offer shall be duly signed and sealed by testing authority. Inspecting officer shall verify the original
type test reports at the time of inspection for terminal connectors & bushings.
p) No oil drain plug at the bottom of the CT-PT Sets shall be provided.
q) The under base of CT-PT Sets shall be provided with 2 Nos. 100x50x6mm channels to make them suitable
for fixing to a platform or plinth. These channels shall be provided through continuous welding with tank of
the CT-PT Sets.
6. SEALING:
Sealing arrangement for sealing on the secondary terminal box (both inner & outer door) and the top cover of the
tank in the two opposite corners shall be provided. This may be made by providing a hole on tail of corner bolts of
adequate size to pass the sealing wire or above 13 SWG.
7. FLUCTUATION IN VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY:
For continuous operation, entire equipment shall be subjected to variation of voltage up to 20% and -30%
and frequency of +/- 5%.
8. CORE:
8.1 CORE MATERIALS:
Non aging oxide film coated fresh suitable Mu-metal or Mu-metal plus CRGO toroidal cores for CT. For
lamination of PT first quality laser grade CRGO shall be used as core material. All the stresses developed due to
cuttings, punching etc. shall be relieved by suitable stress relieving process.
8.2 CORE CONSTRUCTION AND DESIGN:
o Core is supporting steel and insulation shall be such that harmful changes in electrical and physical
properties shall not occur during the life time of the CTPT unit.
o Core winding shall be strongly braced so that it shall not get displaced in operation due to shrinkage on
short circuit forces. Core assembly shall be rigidly clamped with M.S. Channel and mounted to the tank.
8.3 CORE OF PT:
The core of PT shall be effectively earthed by copper braided flexible wire of minimum area of 40 mm2 cross-
section. The core shall be rigidly branched with insulated bolts an the assembly shall be rigidly clamped with MS
Channels and mounted on the tank.
8.4 CORE OF CT:
The tenderer shall provide toroidal core only. It shall be same as given in type tested unit. Core / Winding
assembly of CT shall be rigidly mounted in the tank.
8.5 WINDING:
It shall be of electrolytic grade copper conductor with super enameled Insulation, conforming to relevant ISS. The
winding design and contraction shall be such that it shall withstand impulse voltage. The details as per Guaranteed
Technical Particulars shall be provided. The winding shall be preferable in two sections.
CT WINDING:
It shall be of electrolytic grate copper conductor with DPC/DCC and super enameled insulation conforming
relevant ISS. The winding design and construction shall be such that it shall withstand impulse voltage and short
circuit currents. The winding shall be provided with rigid insulating supporting hylum sheets of minimum 5 mm
thickness on both the sides duly tightened by insulating fasteners only and by cotton cord etc.
a) Each coil shall be wound of paper insulated, continuously, smooth high grade, electric copper conductor.
b) The materials used in the insulation and assembly of the winding shall be in-soluble, non-catalytic and
chemically inactive in the transformer oil.
c) Winding assembling shall be dried in vacuum thoroughly shrunk to final alignment and vacuum
impregnated with tested transformer oil.
d) Design arrangement, insulated and assembly of the winding on the core shall be so as to ensure uniform
distribution of voltage amongst all coils.
9. BUSHING:
 Brown glazed HV bushing of approved make shall mounted as stated in 4(e) of Annexure-I on top
cover of tank. The list of approved suppliers for Porcelain insulators may be obtained from this
office. The hollow porcelain bushings shall be confirming to IS-5621. The metal parts of the
bushings shall be tinned copper with minimum tinning with 50 micron with spring washer and plain
washer (minimum 2.0 mm thick electroplated) with 3 (three) nos. nuts, one lock nut and two nuts for
terminal connection.
 Bushing clamping and accessories together with the connected bolts/studs shall be hot dip
galvanized. However, nuts and washers shall be SS-304.
 Arcing horn shall be avoided.
 Suitable bird guard will be required for all HT bushings
The tests as per IS-2099/1962 shall be conducted on the transformer bushings as detailed below:
 Dry flash over voltage.

 Wet flashover voltage.
 Dry 1 Min. withstand volt,
 Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 Micro Seconds –ve wave).
 Manufacturer s test certification may be furnished for every lot of offer.
The bushings shall be of reputed manufacturers like M/s. Jayashree Insulators, M/s. WS Industries, M/s. BHEL,
M/s. Allied Ceramics, M/s. India Potteries and M/s. IEC which are having complete testing facilities.
10. STEEL TANK:
The tank shall be fabricated from fresh MS Sheet of 5mm, thickness for top cover, flange and bottom of the tank
and of 3.15mm thickness for side walls so as to withstand pressure built in during the expansion of oil during
temperature rise or forces generated during short circuit. The expose fabricated tank with cover and other ferrous
fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned, scrapped process and hot dip galvanized as per relevant IS-2629. All nuts,
bolts, washers, screws, etc. exposed to the atmosphere shall be of 304 grade of stainless steel.
The curb of the tank shall be minimum 50mm wide. The top cover shall have slope of minimum 10 degree to
drain off water in rainy season. The oil resistant gasket of neoprene rubber or nitral or synthetic rubberized cork
of minimum 8mm thickness shall be provided. Adequate number of SS-304 grade bolts of M12 x 50mm (length)
size bolts at maximum 115mm (with tolerance of mm) C/C apart with 2 mm thick washer of 304 grade SS shall
be provided. Four numbers of lifting lugs of 5mm thickness shall be provided on tank sides and two nos. on top
cover. The top cover shall be fabricated in such a way that nowhere the top cover gasket is exposed to air.
Suitable PRV are to be placed on the top cover of the tank to prevent explosion
11. TERMINAL BOX
The terminal box shall be closed box type, water/vermin proof with tinned copper terminals of minimum 6mm
dia x 35mm with electroplated spring washers and three numbers nuts. The terminal marking and polarity
marking shall be done by etched aluminum square plated duly fixed in irremovable manner. The terminal box
shall have cable entry hole to accommodate metallic gland (approx of 1.1/4‖ size) suitable to termination of 10
core, 2.5 Sq. mm PVC insulated steel armored cable. The terminal box covers shall have the provision of sealing
the terminal box for which minimum Four nos. of corner bolts to be fixed on the flange of the box shall be
provided with adequate hole on the bottom for sealing purpose. The terminal box with the cover closed and cable
in position must have degree of protection conforming to IP-54. The minimum projection of the box shall be
70mm.
The Serial number, ratio, and date of dispatch shall have to be ENGRAVED on side (opposite to secondary
terminal box), of tank with letter of suitable depth and 25mm height filled with RED color.
The fabrication of the CTPT set tank shall be such that there shall not be any oil leakage from welded positions.
The four numbers corner bolts of top cover shall have suitable hole for inserting sealing wire.
a) Secondary chamber
shall have double door (inner & outer) with suitable arrangement for sealing of both the doors. The inner door
shall be of transparent Polycarbonate so that secondary terminal connections can be viewed without
breaking the inner door seals.
b) The following details
of equipment shall be engraved on tank with at least 10 mm letters.
1. Make:
2. Ratio:
3. Class of accuracy:
4. Serial No:
5. Month & year of manufacturing
6. Property of employer
66 (Sixty Six) months guarantee embossed plate shall be welded opposite side of name plate.
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT:
The under base of all CTPT sets shall be provided with two nos of 150x75x6 mm GI channels and foundation
dimensions shall be suitably placed with tank base uniform for all sets with only ±2 mm tolerance, to avoid
modification of structure / plinth, whenever CTPT set is replaced.
12. OIL:
o The transformer oil to be supplied in the CTPT tank shall be new oil conforming to requirements as stated
in Annexure-II when tested according to IS-335/1983
o The current transformer shall be so constructed as to ensure that the oil does not flow or leak out even
when the current transformer is used continuously at the maximum allowable temperature; similarly the
potential transformer shall be so constructed as to ensure that the oil does not flow or leak out
o Oil shall be filled up to the top of HT side bushing, hence necessary provision shall be made for expansion
of oil due to rise in temperature.
13. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:
The Technical Particulars as specified in IS shall be guaranteed. Every tenderer shall furnish the particulars
required and guarantee the values so furnished for the supplies.
14. CABLE DETAILS:

The terminal box shall have cable entry hole of size 38mm dia. with 1.1/4 inch double compression flame proof
metal cable glands to avoid cutting of cable sheath. The terminal box shall have provision to seal the terminal
box.
15. CLEARANCE:
The minimum air clearance for HV shall be as per IS-3347.
16. TESTING & INSPECTION:
16.1 QUALIFICATION:
The tenderer shall have to furnish to following test certificates and documents.
 All type tests certificates as listed under Annexure-III carried out on ONE single sample unit and
tests must not be carried out more than Three years prior to the date of submission of the tender
offer. The above test shall be carried out in any Govt. approved Test Lab as indicated above.
 The tenderer shall also submit one type test certificate for the test of ―Instrument Security Factor‖ as
per the Cl. No. 7.1.2 of IS-2705 (Part-II). The value of ISF must be 2.5 or less than 2.5 and the test
must have been conducted at any Govt. Testing Lab not prior to more than 3 years from the date of
submission of the offer.
 The copy / proof of bill / in voice of purchase of core material.
 The copy of BH curve for the core material intended to be used in regular supply of CTPT units.
If above test certificates are not submitted the offer will not be considered as “Qualified”.
NOTE: The technical offers of the suppliers submitted along with above Type Test Certificates for Three Phase
combined CTPT unit (with all other technical specifications unchanged) conducted successfully on one single unit
with all other rating and specification, i.e. STC, ISF etc. unchanged, will also be considered / accepted for
evaluation purpose. However the successful / qualified tenderer shall have to prepare the prototype units as per
tender‘s requirement and get tested for all tests (as per APDCL‘s discretion) at any Govt. Test Lab prescribed by
the APDCL and in the presence of APDCL‘s officer, within a period on ONE month from the date of LOI, failing
to which the order shall be liable to be canceled without payment toward any compensation on account of
cancellation of the order by the purchaser.
16.2 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATE:
On the strength of above qualification, LOI will be placed if offer passed in other requirements. However,
before commencement of bulk supply, the supplier has to submit Test Certificates for all the Type Tests as
prescribed under Annexure-III for CTPT sets with ration as specified.
All the tests as specified in Annexure-III shall have to be conducted only in the presence to the APDCL‘s
representative on ONE single Proto / sample unit.
The FINAL purchase order OR A/T shall be placed only after successful type testing on Proto units in the
presence of APDCL authority.
NOTE: The time limit for above test must be 30 days or whichever approved by APDCL. The cost of all type
testing and its related expenses shall have to be borne by supplier.
16.2.1 The APDCL in its discretion also reserves the right to carry out all or any type tests on any CTPT set
from the lot offered for inspection by the firm at CPRI / ERDA or Govt. Recognized Lab. in presence of
APDCL officers and representative of firm at APDCL‘s cost. Any decision based on this testing shall be
applied to the full ordered quantity. However, if the unit fails in test, then the test charges shall have to be
borne by the supplier.
16.3 ACCEPTANCE
TESTS:
The tests shall be carried out at manufacturer‘s works as ―Acceptance Tests‖ on all CT PT sets offered for
inspections as per applicable is of individual units and this specification as per Annexure-IV.
16.4 ROUTINE TESTS:
The firm shall carry out the routine tests on each CTPT set being offered for inspection
and submit the routine test certificate to the inspector deputed for inspection of CTPT
sets and acceptance of the lot. Routine tests shall be carried out as per Annexure-V
16.5 PROTO TYPE UNITS
The successful tenderer shall have to prepare minimum 2 nos. of proto type units or
ratio as specified under Cl. No: 16.2 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATE: above, separately
conforming to this specification prior to manufacturing of bulk supply. The prototype
units shall be subjected to (i) all Acceptance Tests as per relevant clause.
The testing fees shall have to be borne by the supplier.
17. GUARANTEE:
o The combined CTPT set offered shall have guarantee for good design, materials and workmanship. The
defective units shall have to be repaired / replaced free of cost if reported 66 months of their receipt at site or 60
months from the date of commissioning of equipments whichever is earlier.
o The firm shall be responsible for proper performance of the equipment for 66 months of their receipt at site or 60
months after commissioning whichever is earlier.
o Reported failed units under guarantee period as above shall be repaired / replaced as early as possible. In any
case, it shall be repaired / replaced within 30 days. The failed units are to be collected by the supplier from our
field offices within 15 days of reporting. If immediate arrangement for collection of failed unit is not collected
and if the units are not repaired within two months‘ time, the APDCL will deduct full cost of CTPT unit from
the bill. All the suppliers have to give 10% Performance Bank Guarantee in advance as security deposit.
ANNEXURE – III
Sl. No. Type test Description
A Schedule of Type Test for CT


2 High voltage power frequency tests on primary windings.
3 High voltage power frequency tests on secondary windings.
4 Over voltage inter turn test.
5
Determination of error according to the requirement of appropriate accuracy class
6 Short time current test.
7 Impulse voltage test.
8 Temperature Rise Test.
Instrument Security Factor Test on Both phase of the CT as per Cl. No.7.1.2 of Is-
9
2705 (Part-II).
High Voltage Power-frequency Wet withstand voltage test as per Cl. No.9.9 of IS-
10
2705 (Part-I).
B Schedule of Type Test for PT

2 Power frequency dry withstand test on primary winding.
3 Power frequency dry withstand test on secondary winding.
Determination of errors according to the requirement of the appropriate accuracy
4
class.
5 Temperature rise test.
Impulse voltage test for voltage transformer for service in electricity exposed
6
installation.
High Voltage Power-frequency Wet withstand voltage test as per Cl. No.9.7 of IS-
7
3156(Part-I)
ANNEXURE – IV
1. Schedule of Acceptance Test for CT as per clause No. 16.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
1. Verification of terminal marking and polarity.

2. High voltage power frequency tests on primary windings.
3. High voltage power frequency tests on secondary windings.
4. Over voltage inter-turn test.
5. Determination of error according to the requirement of appropriate accuracy class.
6. Instrument Security Factor Test on Both phase of the CT as per Cl. No.7.1.2 of Is-2705 (Part-II).
2. Schedule of Acceptance Test for P.T. as per Clause No. 16.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

2. Power frequency dry withstand test on primary winding.
3. Power frequency dry withstand test on secondary winding.

4. Determination of errors according to the requirement of the appropriate accuracy class.
ANNEXURE – V
3. Schedule of Routine Test for CT as per relevant clause,
ROUTINE TESTS:

2. High voltage power frequency tests on primary windings.
3. High voltage power frequency tests on secondary windings.
4. Over voltage inter-turn test.
5. Determination of error according to the requirement of appropriate accuracy class.
6. Instrument Security Factor Test on Both phase of the CT as per Cl. No.7.1.2 of Is-2705 8
(Part-II).
4. Schedule of Routine Test for P.T. as per relevant Clause,

ROUTINE TESTS:

2. Power frequency dry withstand test on primary winding.
3. Power frequency dry withstand test on secondary winding.
4. Determination of errors according to the requirement of the appropriate accuracy class.
3. DRAWINGS AND LEAFLETS (along with tender):
Two sets of drawings showing clearly the general arrangements, sectional views, fitting details, electrical
connections, foundation details, overall dimensions and design features of each component part shall
accompany the tender. The contractor has to submit clear & detail drawing with description how he will arrange
the double door system in secondary chamber with sealing. Technical leaflets giving the operating instructions
shall also be furnished along with tender. Literature and drawings are to be sent along with each equipment
while dispatching, after approval of Project Manager.
4. DEVIATIONS :
The deviations between these CTPT sets and NABL approved Standard Lab (CPRI, ERDA, etc.,) type tested
CTPT set along with detailed reasons for deviations if any shall be submitted along with tender.
5. TOLERANCES :
Unless otherwise specified herein the test value of the transformers supplied shall be within the tolerance
permitted in the IS on the guarantee values.
6. SEALING OF CTPT SETS AFTER TESTING AND INDIVIDUAL TEST REPORTS :
After witnessing testing on sample quantity and physical inspection of all offered CTPT sets both internally
and externally, the APDCL‟s authorized inspection officer shall provide numbered plastic seals to two
opposite corners of tank, Secondary Chamber of all offered CTPT sets, for delivery of correct inspected
materials only. The manufacturer has to provide test report duly mentioning all test results, seal bit
numbers and name & address of Employer representative after inspection is over. The seal bit numbers
shall also be mentioned in the test reports signed by Employer representative submitted for delivery
instructions.
7. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF TRANSFORMER OIL
To ascertain the quality of transformer oil, the manufacturer‘s test report shall be submitted at the time of
inspection. Arrangements shall be made for testing the transformer oil, after taking out the samples from the
manufactured CTPT sets and tested in the presence of Employer representative (or) if desired, in an independent
laboratory manufactured CTPT sets and tested in the presence of Employer representative (or) if desired, in an
independent laboratory.
8. NAME PLATE :
The Purchase order No. and Date of purchase order, the words “PROPERTY OF EMPLOYER NAME”. The
name plate shall be non-detachable type & fixed with rivets, not with bolts & nuts. The name plate shall bear year
& month of manufacture & other data as per IS. Space shall be provided to punch the date of installation by user
group.
9. WARRANTY :
The manufacturer will warrant for the satisfactory functioning of the material / equipment as per specification for a
minimum period of 66 months from the date of dispatch of the material / equipment in good condition indicating
GP covering date upto ------------ .The tenderer shall indicate the source of all materials. He shall also indicate the
name of the manufacturer and make of conductor, Transformer oil Electrical Steel Laminations, Construction Steel
etc.
10. FITTINGS :
The following fittings / accessories are to be provided to the CTPT units.
a) Drain plug 19mm (3/4‖ size) at the bottom of the tank with pad lock. 1 No
b) Oil level Gauge 1 No

MS earthing terminals with two nos. nut & bolts and washer with earth
c) symbol 2 Nos
Rating and terminal marking plate (Etched All) riveted to tank. (The
d) rating plate shall have all details as per IS-2705 and 3156 along with 1 No
order no. of APDCL and connection diagram).
2 Nos on top
cover and 4 Nos
e) Lifting lugs of minimum 8mm thick on tank side
f) Base mounting channel MS 150m x 75mm x 6mm 2 Nos

g) Oil filling hole with cap 1 No
h) PRV 1 No
HV porcelain bushings of approved make as per Annexure-I. If the
supplier wants to use any other make bushing then it shall be got
approved form APDCL before use and it shall be clearly indicated in
i) As required
Annexure-I-B.
ii) LV terminals (Minimum 6 mm dia) tinned copper with spring

washer Plain washer and nuts with phase and polarity marking etched
plated.
iii) 30 mm Double Compression- Flame Proof metallic Gland.
iv) Bird guard for HT side bushings.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33KV & 11KV CT-PT SETS
(I) FOR 33KV & 11KV COMPLETELY ASSEMBLED CT-PT SETS.
Sl. No. PARTICULARS TO BE FURNISHED BY BIDDER

1 Name & Address Of Manufacturer.
2 Overall Dimensions of CT-PT Set.
3 Mounting Details.
4 i) Total Mass of Completely
Assembled Ct-Pt Set With Oil.
ii) Mass of first filling Insulation Oil.
iii) Volume Of Oil (Litres)
5 i) Material Of Tank/Enclosure Sheet.
ii) Thickness Of The Tank

Sheet.(Mm)
A) Bottom.
B) Top Cover
C) Sides
6 Make of Insulating Oil to be used in
CT-PT Sets.
7 Whether All The Fittings And
Accessories provided as per
Specification?
8 Whether Sealing Arrangement is as
per Specification?
9 Whether CT-PT Sets Are Suitable for
satisfactory operation under abnormal
system condition Viz., Single Phasing
Supply Arrangement by looping
Supply Phase with other Line Phase ?
10 Min. Electrical Clearance between
Phases. with Bushings Mounted
(mm)
11 Min. Electrical Clearance Between
Phases. to Earth with Bushing
Mounted (mm)?
12 Arrangement provided to take care of
expansion and contraction in Oil.
13 Whether Pressure Relief Device
Provided?
14 Test Results Of Oil As Per Is : 335
A) Break Down Voltage
B) Tan Delta At 90 Deg. C
C) Colour Of Oil (shall be colourless)
(II) For 33kv & 11kv Single Phase Current Transformers

S. No. Particulars TO BE FURNISHED BY BIDDER
1 Nominal System Voltage (KV Rms)
2 Highest System Voltage (KV Rms)

3 Insulation Level:
A) Impulse Withstand Voltage (KV
Peak)
B) One Minute Power Frequency Dry
Withstand Voltage (KV rms)
(i) Primary (KV rms)
(ii) Secondary (KV rms)
C) One Minute Power Frequency Wet
Withstand Voltage (KV rms)
5 Rated Transformation Ratio.
6 Rated Output (VA Burden)
7 Class Of Accuracy.
8 Short Time Thermal Current For One
Second (KA Rms)
9 Rated Dynamic Current (KA peak)
10 Rated Cont. Thermal Current
(Karms)
11 Max. Instrument Security Factor.
12 Detail Of Windings.
Particulars Ct No. of Cross Sectional Total Weight
Ratio Turns Area of each of Wdg. In
turn in Sq. Mm. Kg. Per
(Approx.) Unit
i) Primary
ii) Secondary
13 Current Density of both HV & LV
winding
14 Guaranteed Ratio Error (Max.)
15 Guaranteed Phase Angle Error (Max.)
16 Max. Temp. Rise of the winding over
an ambient temp. of 50 Deg. C at
Rated Continuous Thermal Current
At Rated Frequency & With Rated
Burden.
17 i) Insulation Class
ii) Insulation Material used.
18 Core Details:
i) Material
ii) Weight of Core
19 Type of Insulting Oil Whether as Per
IS-335 And Latest Amendment.
20 Whether Short Circulating

Arrangement for CTs is as per
Specification.
21 Bushing Detail
A) Make
B) Catalogue No.
C) Total Creepage Distance (mm)
D) Is To Which Bushing Conforms.
E) Arcing Distance (mm)
F) Max. Creepage Factor.
22 Whether Current Transformer used
are of Resin Cast Oil Immersed Type
or Otherwise.
23 IS to Which CT conforms
24 Make of Terminal Connectors.
(iii) For 33kv & 11kv Three Phase Potential Transformers
S. No. PARTICULARS TO BE FURNISHED BY BIDDER
1 Nominal System Voltage (KV Rms)

2 Highest System Voltage (KV Rms)
3 Insulation Level:
A) Impulse Withstand Voltage (KV
Peak)
B) One Minute Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage (KV Peak)
5 Rated Transformation Ratio.
6 Rated Output (VA Burden Per Phase)
7 Class Of Accuracy.
8 Rated Voltage Factor And Time.
9 Winding Connections
A) Primary
B) Secondary
10 Detail Of Windings.
Particulars PT No. of Cross-Sectional Total Wt. of
Ratio Turns Area of Each winding in
(Sq.mm) KG (Approx.)
i) Primary Winding (Copper).
ii) Secondary Winding (Copper). 110
V
11 Guaranteed Phase Angle Error (Max.)
12 Guaranteed Max. Temp. Rise of the
Winding over an Ambient Temp. Of
50 Deg. C at Rated Continuous
Thermal Current, at Rated Frequency
& with Rated Burden.
13 Bushing Detail
A) Make
B) Catalogue No.
C) Total Creepage Distance (mm)
D) Is To Which Bushing Confirms.
E) Arcing Distance (mm)
F) Max. Creepage Factor.
14 i) Insulation Class
ii) Insulation Material Used.
15 Core Details:
i) Material
ii) Weight Of Core
16 Whether Any Fuse have been
provided in Secondary Side of PT ?
17 Whether Neutral of PT For HT Side is
Floated?
9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 1.1 KV GRADE COPPER STRANDED CONTROL

CABLE
1. SCOPE:
This specification covers, design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer‘s works, supply and delivery, free at
Destination Stores of ISI marked of 1.1KV grade PVC insulated armoured stranded heat resistant (HR) copper control
cables as specified in quantity schedule to be used at sub-stations of APDCL. Sizes of the LT control cable are:
i. 2C x 2.5 sq. mm
ii. 4C x 2.5 sq. mm
iii. 7C x 2.5 sq.mm
iv. 10C x 2.5 sq. mm
The Control Cables are required for the control, protection, instrumentation, auxiliary Power Supply. Each tender
must be accompanied by full information required in the bidding schedule together with pertinent manufacturer‘s
literatures, drawings, instruction manuals to enable the purchaser to make an appraisal of the quality and suitability of
the materials offered. Failure to comply with the provision may be sufficient reason to reject the bid.
2. STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS:

All materials shall comply with the applicable provisions of the latest edition of Indian Standards, Indian Electricity
Rules, Indian Electricity Act and other applicable statutory provisions, rules and regulations.
The following standards would apply to the specification.
a) IS-1554 (Part-I) – PVC insulated heavy duty.

b) IS-8130-Conductors for PVC insulated Cables.
c) IS-3961 (Part-II) - Recommended current ratings for Cables.
d) IS-5831-PVC insulated and sheath of Electric Cable.
e) Other relevant standards for screening.
3. CLIMATIC AND ISOCERAUNIC CONDITIONS:

3.1. The climatic conditions at site under which the material shall operate satisfactory are as follows:
a) Maximum ambient temperature of the air-in shade (˚C): 50
b) Minimum temperature of the air in shade (˚C): 4
c) Maximum daily average ambient temperature (˚C): 45
d) Maximum Yearly average ambient temperature (˚C): 30
e) Maximum relative humidity (%): 100
f) Average number of thunderstorm days per annum. : 100
g) Average annual rainfall (cm): 200
h) Maximum wind pressure (Kg/M2): 150
i) Earthquake acceleration (g): 0.04 x 2 g
j) Height above Sea Level (m): Not exceeding 1000
3.2 The material offered shall be suitable for continuous operation at the full rated capacity under the
above conditions.
4. CRITERIA FOR SELECTION OF CONTROL CABLES:

• Aluminium Conductor PVC insulated armoured power cables of 1.1 KV grade shall be used for various
applications in switchyard area/control room.
• For all control/protection/instrumentation purposes PVC insulated armoured control cables of minimum 2.5 sq.mm.
size with stranded copper conductor shall be used.
• AC input Cable to the Battery Charger shall be of PVC insulated, armoured, stranded Copper Cable. DC output
Cables from the Charger as well as from the battery shall be of PVC insulated, armoured, stranded Copper Cable.
• All connections for PT and D.C. Circuit to control and relay panel shall be made with not less than 2.5 sq. mm.
copper stranded control cable.
• All connections of CT circuits to control and relay panel shall be made with not less than 4 sq. mm. copper stranded
control cable.
• Separate cable shall be used for AC and DC.
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS / DESIGN CRITERIA:
a) The material of PVC insulated copper conductor shall be made from high conductivity copper rods
complying with IS: 613
b) Cables shall be capable of satisfactory operation under Power Supply System frequency variation of + 5%
and voltage variation of + 10%.
c) Wire before stranding shall be approximately circular in cross section, smooth, uniform in quality and
free from scale, spills, splits and other defects. The conductor shall be clean; reasonably uniform in size,
shape and its surface shall be free from sharp edges. Manufacturer shall ensure that not more than two
joints are provided in any one of the single wires forming every complete length of conductor and no
joints shall be within 330 mm. of any other joints in the same layer. Joints shall be brazed, silver soldered
or electric or gas welded. No joints shall be made in the conductor after it has been stranded. Each
Conductor shall consist of multi strand copper wire for 2.5sq.mm cross section. Conductor wire shall be
stranded. The Cable shall be laid in ground or on ladder type traps or drawn in conduit in a hot, humid
and tropical atmosphere. The trays may be over head, suspended or run in concrete trenches with
removable covers. The tenderer shall indicate clearly the de-rating factor for the above conditions.
d) 1100 Volts Grade Heat Resisting (HR) Copper Cables suitable for use where the combination of ambient
temperature and temperature rise due to load results in conductor temperature not exceeding 85 deg.C
under normal continuous operation and 160 deg.C under short-circuit condition with stranded annealed
copper conductor, HR PVC insulated, HR extruded PVC inner sheathed, round galvanized steel wire
armoured (for multi core cable only) and overall HR extruded PVC sheathed shall generally conform to
latest revision of IS:1554(Part-I). The cores shall be colour coded as per I.S. for easy identification.
e) Cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches and underground. Cables shall be designed to
withstand all mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under steady state and transient operating
condition.
CURRENT RATING:
The Cables will have current rating derating factors for an ambient temperature of 45 deg. C and ground cable is
required to be taken into consideration. The current ratings shall be based on the maximum temperature 85 deg.
C for continuous operation at the rated current.
INSULATION:
The insulation of sheath shall consist of a compound based on one of the followings.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC).
Suitable co-polymers of which the major constituent shall be Vinyl Chloride.
The PVC insulated 1100V grade control cables shall be suitable for a maximum rated conductor temperature of
700C. The Insulation shall be extruded PVC to Type-A of IS : 5831.
The thickness of insulation, tolerance on thickness of insulation and insulation resistance of the material shall
conform to IS:1554Part-I.
The PVC material for insulation and outer sheathing shall have smooth finish. Armouring shall be of single layer
of 1.6/1.4 mm. dia. G.I. Steel Wires though enough to withstand mechanical stressed during handling and shall be
resistant to action of oil, acid and alkali. Single layer of 1.6/1.4 mm
OUTER SHEATH:
An outer sheath shall be provided over armoring. The outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion. The outer sheath
shall be so applied that it fits closely over armoring.
The outer sheath shall be of Type STI, PVC compounds conforming to IS: 5831. Outer sheath shall be Fire
retardant type FR, CI. Minimum thickness of PVC outer sheath, Standard Colour and tolerance on thickness of
armoured cables shall conform to Clause 14.4.2 of IS:1554 (Part-I).
INNER SHEATH:
For multi core armoured cables, the inner sheath shall be of extruded PVC. The inner sheath for common
covering shall be of non-hygroscopes, fire retardant material and shall be softer than insulation. The inner sheath
shall be so applied that fits closely on the laid up cores. Thickness of the inner sheath shall conform to Clause
12.3 of IS: 1554 (Part-I).
ARMOURING:
Armoring shall be applied over the inner sheath in case of multicore cables. The armour shall be galvanized round
steel wires. Nominal diameter of round steel wires shall conform to Clause No.13.3 of IS:1554(Part-I).
GUARANTEE:
Electrical characteristics shall be guaranteed by the bidder. In case of failure of materials to meet the guarantee,
APDCL shall have right to reject the material. Guaranteed Technical Particulars are to be submitted by successful
bidder during detailed engineering along with submitted drawings/documents. However format for submission of
GTP shall be handed over to intending bidders at the time of sale of tender documents.
DRUM LENGTH OF CABLES:
The Cables shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums. The wooden drums should be bearing
distinguishing number with following information duly stencilled on the outer side of one flange.
Name of the Manufacturer.

Normal sectional area of the Conductor of the Cable.
Number of Cores.
Type of Cable & Voltage for which it is suitable.
Length of Cable in this drum.
Direction of rotation of Drum (an arrow)
Gross Weight.
Purchase Order No. & Date.
Year of Manufacture.
Property of APDCL.
Date of Delivery.
Drums shall be proofed against attack by white ant and termite, Conforming toIS-10418-1982.
The Cables shall be supplied in Drum lengths of 250/500m, which shall be subject to tolerance of not more than +
5% and the variation in the total quantity of cables due to tolerance in individual drum length shall be limited to+
2.5% for all types of cable. Non-standard drum length shall not be acceptable. However, before packing the
cables on drums, the successful bidders will be required to obtain purchaser‘s approval for the drum lengths.
Embossing on the outer sheath of the Cable with marking ―Name of Employer; IPDS‖ and length of the Cable in
meters at suitable intermittent distance, preferably 1Mtr.should be done.
DRAWING DATA & MANUAL:
The following information shall be furnished in triplicate along with the tenders:
a) Manufacturer‘s leaflets giving construction details, dimensions and characteristics of

different Cables.
b) Current rating of cables including derating factor due to grouping, ambient temperature
and Type of various installations.
c) Write up sketch illustrating the manufacturer‘s recommendation for splitting, jointing

and termination of different type of cables.
d) List of customers to whom the cable for similar rating has been supplied.
CONTRACT DRAWINGS, MANUALS AND GTP:
In the event of placement of Letter of Award, contractor shall submit GTP for all type and sizes of cables,
drawings and manuals in six copies to the Chief General Manager (PP&D), APDCL, Bijulee Bhawan (6th floor),
Guwahati – 781001 for approval.
After approval Six (6) sets of approved GTP, operating and maintenance manual including instruction manual
shall be submitted by the Contractor for our record and distribution to site.
TESTS AT MANUFACTURER‟S WORKS AND TEST CERTIFICATES:
Each type and size of cable shall comply with the requirements of routine test as per relevant Indian Standard.
All routine and Acceptance tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer‘s works on every lot of offered different
type and sizes of cables as per relevant Indian Standards. Selection of samples for acceptance test as well as
rejection and retesting shall be guided by relevant IS. The entire cost of acceptance and routine tests that are to be
carried out as per relevant IS shall be treated as included in quoted price of control and power cable. Three (3)
copies of test reports shall be submitted to the Chief General Manager (PP&D), APDCL, Bijulee Bhawan (6th
floor), Guwahati – 701 021 for approval and distribution to site. The contractor shall give at least 15 (fifteen) days
advance notice to the Chief Engineer (PP&D), intimating the actual date of inspection and details of all tests that
are to be carried out.
TEST REPORTS AND TYPE TESTS:
Only type tested Control Cables are to be offered conforming to our technical specification, and relevant IS and
IEC. Control Cables offered should be similar with ones on which type testing has been carried out as per relevant
IS and IEC. Three sets of complete type test reports carried out in NABL accredited laboratory shall have to be
submitted by successful bidder positively along with submission of drawings during detailed Engineering. The
submitted type test report shall proof that the type test have been carried out within five years from the date of
submission of bid. Successful bidder may require producing original copies of type test reports at the time of
detail engineering if asked by APDCL.
Each type test report shall comply the following information with test result:
o Complete identification, date and serial no.

o Method of application, Where applied, duration and interpretation of each test
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF 1.1 KV GRADE COPPER STRANDED CONTROL

CABLE
Sl. No. Item Particulars 2 Core 4 Core 7 core 10 core

Name of manufacturer and location
1
of factory
2 Standards to which conform
3 Type and size of cables
4 Voltage Rating
5 Thickness of insulation (mm)
6 No. of cores
7 Thickness of inner sheath (mm)
8 Material for inner sheath
9 Thickness of outer sheath (mm)

10 Material for outer sheath
11 Overall dia. of cable (mm)
12 Armour
13 Material
14 Shape
15 Dimension
16 No. of strands and wire dia.
Cross-section of the conductor
17
(sq.mm)
18 Maximum continuous current (amps.)
19 In ground at 32oC
20 In duct
21 In air/trench at 40oC
Maximum short circuit current
22
(amps.)
23 Conductor resistance at 20oC
Approx. net weight per 100 m.
24
length (Kg)
25 Standard drum length (m)
10. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF LT SINGLE CORE CROSS LINKED POLYETHYLENE

(XLPE) INSULATED, FRLS, PVC SHEATHED, ARMOURED POWER CABLES.
1. Scope:
The scope of this specification covers the design, manufacture testing, packing, supply & delivery on FOR
destination basis of ISI marked 1100 volts grade, LT Cable, single core, Cross linked Polyethylene (XLPE),
FRLS, insulated, PVC sheathed, armored power cables for effectively earthed systems conforming to IS:7098
/88 with latest amendments and as per specification detailed.
2. Standards:
2.1 Unless otherwise stipulated in the specifications, the latest version of the following Standards shall be
applicable:
a. IS 7098 (Part 1)-Cross-linked Polyethylene insulation for Cables.

b. IS 8130-Conductors for insulated electrical cables and flexible cords.
c. IEC 60502 – Power Cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages
from 1kV to 30kV
d. IS 10810(series)-Methods of tests for cables.
e. IS 10418-Drums for electric cables.
f. IS 3975-Specification for mild steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring of cables.
g. IS 5831-Specification for PVC insulation sheath for electric cables.
h. IS 10462-Fictitious calculation method for determination of dimensions of protective

coverings of cables Part 1 - Elastomeric and thermoplastic insulated cables.
3. The cables manufactured to any other International Standards like BSS, IEC or equivalent standards not less
stringent than Indian Standards are also acceptable. In such cases the Manufacturer shall enclose a copy of the
equivalent international standard, in English language.
Location and Service Conditions:
A. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The XLPE Cables may be laid buried directly in ground at a depth of one meter in average, anywhere in Assam
and terminate for outdoor connection to a power transformer or to overhead lines and also indoor connection for
indoor switchgear. The cables may also be laid within covered cable trenches, in cable racks or open-air ladder
trays etc. for certain portion of lengths. The XLPE Cables to be supplied against this Specification shall be
suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions.
At various locations within

1 Location
the state of Assam

4 Maximum average daily ambient air temperature (°C) 40
5 32
temperature(°C)
6 Maximum altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000
7 Maximum Humidity 93%
8 Average number of thunderstorm days 60
9 Average numbers of dust storms per annum 10
10 Maximum rainfall/annum 3500 mm
11 Average rainfall 2280 mm
12 Wind Pressure 97.8 Kg/Sq.mm
13 Altitude above MSL 100 m to 1000 m
Note:
The item shall generally be for use in hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth
unless otherwise specified.
A. SYSTEM DETAILS
Nominal system voltage (rms) (U) 0.433KV

Highest system voltage (rms) (Um) 1.1 KV
Number of Phase 3
Frequency 50Hz
Variation in Frequency +/- 3%
Type of Earthing Solidly Earthed
Total relay & circuit breaker Operating time 14 – 20 cycles
B. SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:
Technical parameters of the cable shall be as follows:
Sl. No. Particulars Unit Requirements
L T XLPE POWER CABLE OF FRLS

TYPE, 1Cx35sq.mm, 1Cx50sq.mm,
1Cx70sq.mm, 1Cx95sq.mm,
1 Type of Cable :
1Cx300sq.mm
2 Standard applicable in general : IS: 7098 PART (I)

3 Rated voltage V 240/440
4 Single/ three Core - Single
5 Armoured / Unarmoured - Armoured
6 System - 1100 V Earthed
7 Highest System Voltage V 1100
8 Current rating
116 for 1Cx35 sq.mm
134 for 1Cx50 sq.mm
167 for 1Cx70 sq.mm
199 for 1Cx95 sq.mm
a In ground at 300C A 225 for 1Cx120 sq.mm
255 for 1Cx150 sq.mm
117 for 1Cx35 sq.mm
140 for 1Cx50 sq.mm
176 for 1Cx70 sq.mm
221 for 1Cx95 sq.mm
0
b In air at 40 C A 268 for 1Cx120 sq.mm

9 Short Circuit Current for 1 KA 3.37 for 1Cx35 sq.mm
second duration 4.79 for 1Cx50 sq.mm

6.68 for 1Cx70 sq.mm

High Voltage withstand
10 KV rms 3kV
capacity

Max. DC resistance of
11 ohm/km 0.253 for 1Cx120 sq.mm
conductor at 20 Deg. C
Max. AC resistance of 0.100 for 1Cx120 sq.mm
12 ohm/km
conductor at 90 Deg. C 0.128 for 1Cx300 sq.mm
Reactance of cable at normal 0.0968 for 1Cx120 sq.mm
13 ohm/km
frequency (Approx.) 0.0881 for 1Cx300 sq.mm
Electrostatic capacitance at microfarads per 0.61 for 1Cx120 sq.mm
14
normal frequency km 0.69 for 1Cx300 sq.mm
15 Overall Diameter of the Cable Mm
16 CONDUCTOR
Material to IS: 8130, H4 Grade
:
a Material of Conductor Aluminium Class 2
: Conductor, Stranded compacted Circular
b Standard Applicable : IS: 8130
c Shape of Conductor : Circular
d Conductor Size Sq. mm 1x120, 1x300
15 for 120sqmm and 30 for 300sqmm
e Min. number of strands No.
(Min)
17 INSULATION
a Material ; XLPE
b Voltage Grade V 650/1100
c Standard Applicable : IS: 7098 Part-I
Continuous withstand
d °C 90°C
temperature
Short-circuit withstand
e °C 250°C
temperature
By triple extrusion; sleeve extrusion not

f Method of application :
Permitted.
1.2 mm for 1Cx35 sq.mm

g Minimum thickness Mm 1.5 mm for 1Cx120 sq.mm
18 ARMOUR
Non-magnetic Hard drawn aluminium
single round wire H4 grade, as per IS:
a Material :
8130 with max resistivity of 0.028264
ohm sq.mm. l meter at 20 deg. C.
b Minimum Coverage : 90%
c Gap between armour wires : Shall not exceed one armour wire space
d Breaking load of point : 95% of normal armour
Nominal dimension of Al.
e : 1.6mm
round wire
19 OUTER SHEATH
Extruded FRLS PVC Type ST2 as per
a Material :
IS: 5831
b Colour : Black
c Whether FRLS : Yes
d Method of application : Extruded
i) Name of manufacturer
ii) Year of manufacture
iii) Voltage grade
iv) Size of cable
e Marking : v) Cable code
vi) Name of purchaser ―APDCL‖
vii) ISI certification mark.
viii) Successive length
ix) Marking for FRLS cable.
f Minimum thickness of outer 1.4mm for 1Cx120sqmm and 1.56mm

:
sheath for 1Cx300 sq mm
Upto30mm: 1.5mm (No -ve tolerance)

20 TOLERANCE ON OUTER Above 30mm: 2 mm or 5% whichever is
DIAMETER less. No negative tolerance shall be
accepted.
21 MINIMUM BENDING
15 x O.D.
RADIUS
22 CABLE DRUMS As specified.
a Type & construction Wooden drum, As per IS 10418
1000m (±) 5% for 120sqmm /500m (±)

5% for 300sqmm
b Standard drum length Note: There shall be no negative
tolerance in the overall item wise P.O
quantity.
i. Reference of IS / IEC standard.
ii. Manufacturer‘s name or trademark.
iii. Size of cable (Cross Section) and
voltage grade.
iv. No. of cores.
v. Nominal cross-sectional area of
conductor
vi. Cable code.
vii. Length of cable on the drum
viii. Gross and Net weight
c Marking on Cable drums
ix. Direction of rotation of drum (by
means of an arrow)
x. Position of outer end of cable
xi. Year of manufacture
xii Reference of Tender No. / P.O. No.
date
xiii Property of ―APDCL‖.
xiv. Name of consignee and the
destination.
xv. ISI Certification Mark.
C. DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION AND TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
Conductor
The conductor of the cable shall be made from high conductivity, Electrolytic, H4 Grade, stranded aluminium to
form compacted and circular /shaped conductor having resistance within limits as specified in IS 8130/ 1984 with
latest amendments. The aluminium conductor shall be of class-2 as per IS 8130.
Insulation
Insulation shall be suitable for LT system voltage and the insulating material shall be cross linked Poly Ethylene
(XLPE), and applied by triple extrusion process as per IS 7098 Part-1 and its latest amendments. The insulation
shall be an extrusion of thermosetting cross linked poly ethylene rated for 90ºC continuous operation. The
insulating material shall have excellent electrical properties with regard to resistivity, dielectric constant and loss
factor and shall have high tensile strength and resistance to abrasion. This shall not deteriorate at elevated
temperatures or when immersed in water. The insulation shall be preferably fire resistant and resistant to chemicals
like acids, alkalis, oils and ozone. The insulation properties shall be stable under thermal conditions arising out of
continuous operation at conductor temperature of 90ºC rising momentarily to 250ºC under short circuit conditions.
It shall be free from any foreign material or porosity visible to the unaided eye. The insulation shall be so applied
that it fits closely on the conductor and it shall be possible to remove it without damaging the conductor. The
average thickness of insulation shall not be less than the nominal value as specified in IS: 7098 (Part I) with latest
amendments. Tolerance on insulation thickness shall be as per IS-7098 Part-1. The insulation shall withstand
mechanical and thermal stress under both steady state and transient operating conditions.
The following properties of insulation shall be strictly adhered to:
Sl. No. Properties Requirements
1 Tensile Strength 12.5N/mm², Min.

2 Elongation to break 200%, Min
3 Aging in air oven:
a) Treatment: Temperature: 135±3°C
Duration: 7 days
b) Tensile Strength variation: ±25%, Max
c) Elongation variation: ±25%, Max
4 Hot set:
Time under load 15 min
Mechanical stress 20N/cm²
b) Elongation under load 175%, Max
c) Permanent elongation (set) after cooling 15%, Max
5 Shrinkage:
a) Treatment: Temperature 130±3°C
Duration 1 hour
b) Shrinkage 4%, Max
6 Water absorption (Gravimetric):
Duration 14 days
b) Water absorbed 1 mg/cm², Max
7 Volume Resistivity
1x1014 ohm-cm, Min
a) at 27°C
b) at 70°C 1x1013 ohm-cm, Min
8 Thermal Resistivity 350 degrees C cm/W
Power factor at maximum conductor
9 0.008
temperature
10 Dielectric strength 22 kV/mm
 The XLPE insulation shall be suitable for specified 1.1 KV system voltage.
 The manufacturing process shall ensure that insulations shall be free from voids.
 The insulation shall withstand mechanical and thermal stresses under steady state and transient
operating conditions.
Core identification (for multiple core cables)

Individual core of multi-core cables shall be colour coded and/or numbered for proper identification in accordance
with clause 10.1 of IS: 7098 (Part – I).
Fillers and Laying up of cores (for multiple core cables):
In multi core cables, the cores shall be laid together with a suitable right hand lay. The interstices shall be filled with
non-hygroscopic material. Further, the compounds used with fillers shall be such as to have no deleterious effect on
other components of the cable and to be stable at cable temperatures.
Armouring:
The armour of cables shall consist of either galvanized round steel wires as per clause 13.2 of IS: 7098 (Part I). The
armouring shall be applied such that the minimum area of coverage shall be 90% and the gap between any two
armour strips/ wire shall not be more than the width of strip/ diameter of armour wire. The galvanized steel wire shall
comply with the requirements of IS: 3975- with latest amendments. In case of Single core cable armouring shall be of
Non-magnetic material conforming to IS: 3975 – 1999 (amended upto date). The dimensions of the galvanized steel
wire shall be as per IS: 7098 (Part-I) (Table 6, Clause 13.3, armouring size and dimension shall be as per method (b),
method (a) is not acceptable) with latest amendments. No tolerance on the negative side shall be acceptable.
Tolerance on size of armour shall be as per IS:7098 Part-1 & IS:3975. Manufacturers shall furnish the calculation /
data sheet for the short circuit carrying capability of the Armour.
Outer sheath:
The outer sheath shall consist of extruded tough outer sheath of PVC compound insulation over the armouring.
Extruded PVC ST2, outer sheath as per IS: 5831/1984, IS: 7098Part 1, IEC: 60502 Part – 1, BS: 6622, LSOH to BS:
7835 shall be applied over armoring with suitable additives to prevent attack by rodents and termites. Outer sheathing
shall be designed to offer high degree of mechanical protection and shall also be heat, oils, chemicals, abrasion and
weather resistant. Common acids, alkalis, saline solutions etc., shall not have adverse effects on the PVC sheathing
material used. The colour of the outer sheath shall be black. The cable must meet all the requirements of the IS: 7098
(Part 1) amended up to date and shall bear ISI mark. Suitable additives shall be added to give anti-termite protection.
General:
All materials used in manufacturing of cable shall be new, unused and of finest quality. All materials shall comply with
the requirements / tests as per applicable IS / IEC specification, Indian Electricity Rules and any other statutory
provision of rules & regulations. The purchaser reserves the right to ask for documentary evidence of the purchase of
various materials, (to be used for the manufacture of cable) as a part of quality control. Quality Assurance plan shall be
submitted. Each of cable type and size shall be ISI certified. The manufacturer shall submit self-certified Xerox copy
of valid ISI license with the offer.
Continuous Current rating: As per Specific Technical Requirements
Short circuit Current rating: As per Specific Technical Requirements
Operation:
i) Cable shall be suitable for operation under voltage and frequency variation as per Latest Indian
Electricity rule.
ii) Cable shall be suitable for laying in air, in duct or buried underground directly or through trenchless
boring.
iii) Cable shall have heat & moisture resistance properties. These shall be of type & design with proven
record on distribution network service.
Tests:
A. Type tests:
All the cable types and sizes i.e. items offered shall have been fully type tested as per IS 7098 (Part-1)
with amendments upto date at CPRI/ERDA or other reputed third party NABL accredited Laboratory The
bidder shall upload one set of the original authenticated copy of type test reports along with the offer.
These type tests must have been conducted within last five years prior to date of Bid opening. The
purchaser however reserves the right to demand repetition of type tests without any extra cost. For each
type and size the type test must be carried out independently.
The purchaser also reserves the right to have tests carried out at manufacturer’s / supplier’s cost from
an independent agency, whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of the supplied lot.
The type test conformance reports/certificates of all the type tests as per IS7098 part-1 shall be
uploaded invariably with the offer and shall not be more than five years old from the date of
submission of Bid.
a) Tests on conductor:
i) Tensile test
ii) Wrapping test
iii) Resistance test
b) Tests for armouring strips / wires.
c) Tests for thickness of insulation (eccentricity) and sheath.
d) Physical tests for insulation:
i) Tensile strength and elongation at break.
ii) Ageing in air oven
iii) Hot set
iv) Shrinkage test
v) Water absorption test (gravimetric)
e) Physical tests for outer sheath:
i) Tensile strength and elongation at break.
ii) Ageing in air oven
iii) Shrinkage test
iv) Hot deformation
v) Loss of mass in air oven
vi) Heat shock
vii) Thermal stability
viii) Carbon black content of polythene sheath.
f) Insulation resistance test (volume resistivity)
g) High voltage test
h) Flammability test
i) FRLS Tests- The following FRLS tests are to be conducted as per the referred standard
i) HCL gas evolution test (IEC - 754.1)
ii) Oxygen Index (ASTM-D-2863)
iii) Temperature Index (ASTM-D-2863)
iv) Smoke density test (ASTM-D-2863)
v) Flammability test (IEC-332.1)
vi) Swedish Chimney test (SS-424 14 75)
vii) Ladder Test (IEEE-383)
XLPE cables shall be tested as per IS 7098 / IEC.

The LT XLPE cables shall be routine tested as per relevant IEC/IS
The first lot offered shall not be less than 50% of ordered quantity of each size of LT XLPE ARMORED CABLE.
APDCL at its discretion may collect one sample from the 1st Lot of LT XLPE ARMORED Cable of each size as
received in purchaser‘s store shall be selected and sealed by the inspecting officer nominated by purchaser‘s for getting
it type tested at any CPRI / ERDA/ NABL accredited testing laboratory. The charges incurred towards type test of the
material received in our stores shall be borne by the Supplier.
In case sample from first lot fails then:

a. Supplier shall have to replace the full quantity of the respective inspected lot supplied to various stores that
are lying unused at stores and already being utilized at site.
b. Sample from next lot shall be selected again for type test. All test charges incurred towards type test of the
material for second time shall be borne by the Supplier. In case sample again fails in the type test then further
supplies shall not be accepted.
B. Acceptance test:
The selection of sample pieces for acceptance test shall be as per Appendix A of IS 7098 (Part-I), of each lot offered
for inspection or part thereof. The minimum shall be one drum.
The following shall constitute the acceptance test:
a. Tensile test for Aluminium.

b. Wrapping test for Aluminium.
c. Conductor resistance test.
d. Test for thickness of insulation.
e. Test for thickness of inner and outer sheath.
f. Hot-set test for insulation.
g. Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and outer sheath.
h. High voltage test.
i. Insulation resistance (volume resistivity) test.
All the acceptance tests shall be carried out by the firm, in the presence of purchaser‘s representative at their works.
The firm shall give atleast 15 days advance notice to the purchaser to enable him to depute the engineer for
witnessing the tests. The test certificates for acceptance tests witnessed by inspecting officer/ engineer shall be
submitted for approval before dispatch of material.
C. Routine Tests:
The following shall constitute the routine tests. The Inspector will inspect the routine tests at the time of
inspection.
(a) Conductor resistance test
(b) High-voltage test for 5 minutes [as per Clause 16.2 of IS: 7098 (Part-I).
Quality Assurance Plan:
A detailed list of bought out items which got into the manufacture of cables shall be furnished indicating the name
of the firms from whom these items are procured. The bidder shall enclose the quality assurance plan invariably
along with offer followed by him in respect of the bought out items, items manufactured by him & raw materials in
process as well as final inspection, packing & marking. The Company may at its option order the verification of
these plans at manufacturer's works as a pre-qualification for technically accepting the bid.
Identification mark:
The outer sheath of the cable shall bear following identification parameters embossed at intervals of length
of one meter of cable, throughout the cable:
i) Name of manufacturer
ii) Year of manufacture
iii) Voltage grade
iv) Size of cable
v) Cable code
vi) Name of purchaser ―APDCL‖
vii) ISI certification mark.
viii) Successive length
ix) Marking for FRLS cable.
Packing and forwarding:
The cable as per specified delivery lengths, shall be securely wound/packed on non-returnable wooden drums as per
IS: 10418 – 1972 and packed in drums suitable for vertical / horizontal transport, as the case may be and shall be
suitable to withstand rough handling during transport and outer storage. The outer surface of the drum shall be
painted with white aluminum paint. Similarly, the inside surface of drum shall have the protective layer of varnish /
paint.
The wooden drums shall be reinforced with steel bends and strips for better protection.
Length: The cable shall be supplied in standard drum length as per detail below:
Size(sq.mm) 1C (meter)
0-up to16 2000
Above 16-up to 50 1500
Above 50-up to 150 1000
Above 150-up to 300 750
Above 300 500
The ends of the cable shall be sealed by means of non- hygroscopic heat shrinkable sealing material.
The following information be stenciled on the drum with either water proof ink or oil paint:
i. Reference of IS / IEC standard.

ii. Manufacturer‘s name or trademark.
iii. Size of cable (Cross Section) and voltage grade.
iv. No. of cores.
v. Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor
vi. Cable code.
vii. Length of cable on the drum
viii. Gross and Net weight
ix. Direction of rotation of drum (by means of an arrow)
x. Position of outer end of cable
xi. Year of manufacture

xii. Reference of Tender No. / P.O. No. date
xiii. Property of ―APDCL‖.
xiv. Name of consignee and the destination.
xv. ISI Certification Mark.
The firm shall be responsible for any damage to the cables during transit due to improper and inadequate packing.
Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks, shall be provided. Any cable found short
inside the packing cases shall be supplied by the supplier, without any extra cost.
Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list, containing the following information:
(a) Name of consignee
(b) Details of consignment
(c) Destination
(d) Total weight of consignment
(e) Handling and unpacking instruction
(f) Bill of materials, indicating contents of each package.
Inspection:
The Manufacturer shall furnish a complete and detailed quality plan for the manufacturing process of the cable. All
raw materials shall conform to relevant applicable standards and tested for compliance to quality and requirement.
The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The successful bidder shall grant
free access to the purchaser‘s representative at reasonable time, when the work is in progress. Inspection and
acceptance, of any cables under this specification by the purchaser, shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of
supplying cable in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if the cables are not
found as per the technical specifications.
The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the programme of manufacturing of cables so that
arrangement can be made for inspection.
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance / routine tests of the bought out items.
The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection
call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of
APDCL. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by APDCL in deputing the Inspecting Officer,
carrying out such inspection.
At least 5% of total numbers of drums subject to minimum of 2 in each lot put up for inspection shall be selected at
random to ascertain the length/workmanship of cable by the following method:
o At the work of the manufacture, the cable shall be transferred from one drum to another for checking any
manufacturing defects in the cable drum selected for conducting acceptance tests, at the same time
measuring its length with the help of pulley & cyclometer graduated in presence of inspector. The
difference in the measured length thus obtained from the declared length by the supplier in the packing list
shall be applied to all the drums if the cable is found short during checking the sample lot (s).
o The supplier shall present the latest Calibration Certificate(s) of testing instruments/ equipment to be used
for the testing of the material covered in the Purchase Order to the authorized inspecting officer /inspecting
agency of the purchaser. The testing instruments / meters /apparatus etc. shall be got calibrated by the
supplier from time to time from an independent testing laboratory / house having valid accreditation from
National Accreditation Board for testing and calibrating laboratories for the testing equipment or from
original manufacturers having traceability to NABL /NPL. The testing instruments / equipment shall be
duly sealed by the Calibrating Agency and mention thereof shall be indicated in the calibration
certificate(s).
Documentation:
The bidder shall furnish following documents along with his offer - Sectional view, showing the General
constructional feature with conductor / conductor screen / insulation / armoring / inner and outer sheath etc.
Drawing of cable drums with details of material dimension and paint etc.
All the required type test reports.
Technical Literature, pamphlets for the supplied items.
Technical and guaranteed particulars:
The bidder shall furnish all Guaranteed Technical Particulars, as called for, in the GTP section of this Specification.
Particulars, which are subject to guarantee, shall be clearly identified. Offer not containing these information shall
not be considered for acceptance.
Warranty Period:
The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser,
up to destination, the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proved as defective in
quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 36 months from the date of
commissioning. The consignee or any other officer of APDCL actually using the material will give prompt notice
of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but
not, in any case, exceeding 20 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective material within a
reasonable period, but not exceeding 20 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the
purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the
sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred
on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier‘s account and set off against any
outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty shall be for the entire duration of the
warranty period.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR THE SUPPLY OF SINGLE

CORE LT XLPE ARMOURED CABLES (Al).
S. No. Item Particulars 1CX120SQMM 1CX300SQMM
Name of the manufacturer and country of

1
origin
2 Country of Manufacture
3 Type of cable / cable code
4 Applicable standard
Voltage
5 a) Rated Nominal voltage
b) Rated Maximum voltage
Suitability for :
6 a. Earthed system
Conductor
a) Nominal cross section (sq.mm)
b) Material
c) Shape
7
d) Diameter of conductor (mm)
e) Number of wires per conductor (Nos.)
f) Nominal diameter of wire in conductor
(mm)
Insulation XLPE
a) Curing process (furnish details separately)
b) Material/Composition
8 c) Dia over insulation
i. Nominal (mm)
ii. Average (mm)
iii. Minimum (mm)
Inner sheath
a) Type / composition
9 b) Material
d) Tolerance on thickness
e) Diameter of cable over sheath (mm)
Armouring
a) Material
10 b) Dia. of wire
Nom. (mm)
Min. (mm)
Outer sheath
a) Type / composition
11 b) Material
c) Nominal thickness
d) Tolerance on thickness
e) Diameter of cable over sheath (mm)
Anti-termite treatment to outer sheath
a) Material
12 External overall dia. of cable
Short circuit rating of conductor 90 deg. C
operating temperature for 1 Sec.
Minimum cable bending radius (in terms of

13
cable diameter)
14 Permissible maximum tension
Continuous current rating under specified
15 insulation conditions at conductor temperature
of 65 deg. C and 90 deg. C.
16 Ground Temperature 30 deg. C
17 Thermal resistivity of soil 150 deg. C CM/W
18 Depth of laying 200 mm
19 Ambient Air temperature 40 deg. C
20 No. of circuits 1 OR 2
21 Spacing between two circuits
22 Formation
Maximum permissible conductor
23 temperature for continuous operation under
specified installation conditions (deg. C)
Conductor temperature at rated current (deg.
24
C)
Basic impulse level at conductor temperature
25
of 90 deg. C (KV)
26 Impulse wave shape
27 Power frequency with stand voltage (KV)
Tan Delta at 50 Hz (at U.KV and 90 (-5/+10)
28
deg. C
29 Sheath voltage at max. load
30 Withstand voltage of sheath on spark test
Permissible short circuit current ratings of
conductor
i) 0.1 Sec KA
31
ii) o.2 Sec KA
iii) 0.5 Sec KA
iv) 1.0 Sec KA
Conductor resistance DC & AC
a) at 20 deg. C (d.c)/A.C. ohm/KM
32 b) at 90 deg. C (d.c)/A.C. ohm/KM
c) at 105 deg. C (d.c)/A.C. ohm/KM over load
temp) a.c. (ohm)
Equivalent star resistance at 50 Hz of 3
phase current
33 a) at 20 deg. C (d.c)/A.C. ohm/KM
b) at 90 deg. C (d.c)/A.C. ohm/KM
c) at 10% continuous overload temperature
(ohm/KM)
34 Star reactance at 50 HZ (ohm/KM)
Approximate impedance at 50 hz per KM
a. at 20 deg. C ohm/KM
b. at 90 deg. C ohm/KM
c. at 10% continuous overload temperature
(ohm/KM)
35 Self-electrostatic capacitance per phase (Micro
farad/KM)
Maximum power factor at charging KVA of
cables when laid direct in ground at normal
36 voltage & frequency
a) at ambient Temperature
b) at Maximum conductor Temperature
Impedance
a) Positive and negative sequence impedance
37 37 (ohm/KM)
b) Zero sequence impedance (ohm/KM)
c) Zero sequence data
Series reactance / Resistance
38 a) Series resistance (ohm/KM)
Series reactance (ohm/KM)
Shunt capacitive reactance (ohm/KM)
39 Sheath resistance at 20 deg. C ohm/KM
40 Surge impedance of cable (ohm/KM)
IR value at amient temperature per KM
Maximum magnitude of partial discharge at
1.5 U.o
At Ambient Temperature (Po)
At High Temperature (Po)
Losses per Km.
NOTE : (i) Cable Conductor size 400 sq. mm
a) Total 3 phase dielectric loss
41 i. One circuit alive Kw/KM
ii. Both circuits alive KW/KM on each circuit
b) Total 3 phase resistive loss
i. One circuit alive Kw/KM
ii. Both circuits alive KW/KM on each circuit
c) Total 3 phase sheath / screen loss
i. One circuit alive Kw/KM
ii. Both circuits alive load KW/KM on each
circuit
42 d) Other losses due to reinforcement
43 One circuit alive KW/KM
44 Both circuits alive KW/KM on each circuit
Total losses
i. One circuit alive KW/KM
ii. Both circuits alive KW/KM
Charging current at rated voltage per Km
(Amps)
Short circuit capacity of conductor for one
45 second at 90 deg. C prior to short circuit and
250 deg. C during short circuit (KA)
Screening factor of cable for calculating
interference on control and communication
cables :
Approximate value of attenuation of carrier
current signals operating over a frequency
46 range
i. 50 KC/s- dB/KM
ii. 100 KC/s- dB/KM
iii. 150 KC/s- dB/KM
iv. 200 KC/s- dB/KM
Shipping weight and size of cable drum
a) Size of Drum
i. Dia of Drum (M)
47 ii. Width of Drum (M)
iii. Gross Weight (Kgs)
iv. Length of cable per Drum(M)
v. Weight of Cable (Kg/M)
LT XLPE Current Rating Factor
Single Point Bonded Both End Bonded

Particulars 65 deg. C 90 deg C 65 deg. C
90 deg. C Amps
Amps Amps. Amps
Current Rating conductor size 400

Sq. mm
a) In Ground
i. Of each circuits (when both the

circuits alive)
b) In Duct

circuits alive)
ii. Of one circuits (when other

circuit is isolated)
c) In pipe, one cable per pipe.

circuits alive)
d) In Air
circuits alive)
LT XLPE Derating Factors
VARIATION IN GROUND TEMPERATURE:
Ground Temperature (deg. C): 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Rating Factor
VARIATION IN DEPTH OF LAYING:
Depth of Laying (Meters): 0.7 0.9 1 1.2 1.3 1.5
Rating Factor
VARIATION IN THERMAL RESISTIVITY OF SOIL
Thermal Resistivity of Soil: (deg. C cm/watt) 100 120 150 200 250
Rating Factor
VARIATION IN AIR TEMPERATURE:
Air Temperature (deg. C): 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
Rating Factor
VARIATION DISTANCE (MM):
Axial Distance (mm) Between circuits: 100 200 300 400 600 800
Rating Factor
11. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF MEDIUM VOLTAGE COVERED CONDUCTORS

(MVCC)
INTRODUCTION
These Specifications lay down the Constructional, Dimensional and Performance requirements for Covered
Conductors which consist of a Conductor surrounded by a covering made of Insulating Material (as described
hereunder) as protection against accidental Contacts with other covered conductors and with grounded parts such as
tree branches, etc. The MVCC should be suitable for use under operating condition as specified below:
1. Ambient air temperature : 45°C

2. Maximum temperature of conductor at rated current : 90° C
3. Wind condition at site : 1 meter / sec
4. Solar radiation at site : 1200 watts / sq m
5. Maximum allowable temperature under Short circuit condition : 250°C
Data sheet providing details of the conductor data provided above shall be submitted along with the offer.
CLIMATIC AND ISOCERAUNIC CONDITIONS
The climatic and isoceraunic conditions at site under which the materials /equipment shall operate
satisfactorily are as follows:
a) Maximum temperature of air in shade: 40º C
b) Minimum temperature of air in shade: 2º C
c) Maximum Humidity: 93 %
d) Isoceraunic level: 60
e) Average of rainy days per annum: 150
f) Average number of days of thunderstorm per annum: 25
g) Average number of days of dust storm per annum: 10
h) Average annual rainfall: 2280 mm
i) Number of months of tropical monsoon per annum: 5 (May to Sept.)
j) Maximum wind pressure: 150Kg/sq. m.
k) Altitude (above mean sea level): 50 to 250m
The reference ambient temperatures assumed for the purpose of this specification are:
a) Maximum ambient temperature: 45ºC
b) Maximum average daily ambient temperature: 35ºC
c) Maximum average yearly ambient temperature: 30º C
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
1) CONDUCTOR
Conductor material: All Aluminum Alloy (AAAC).
Nominal cross section: 120 sq. mm for AAAC conductors.
Conductor design: The Conductor shall be stranded, round and should be Non Compacted.
Non compacted Conductors shall comply with all the requirements of EN 50397-1-2006.
The D.C. Resistance of the conductor shall not exceed that given in EN 50397-1-2006 by more than 5%.
2) FILLING (WATER BLOCKING)
The Stranded Conductor shall be longitudinally water tight by means of a water blocking material incorporated
during the extrusion process. The use of grease /water swellable tape / water swellable powder etc. is not permitted.
The water blocking material shall be stable at maximum operating conductor temperature of 90°C. The final
MVCC should result in a product with an advanced triple extrusion technology with improved water blocking, semi
conductive layer, XLPE insulation and an outer covering with carbon doped XLPE.
The water blocking compound shall be compatible with the conductor material as well as the semi conducting
polymer screen layer above it and not adversely affect its electrical or mechanical properties.
3) SEMICONDUCTING SCREEN
A semi conductive polymeric screen should be applied over the filled stranded conductor to ensure a lower voltage
stress on the Insulation applied over the screen.
The thickness of the semi conductive polymeric screen should be of minimum 0.3 mm.
4) INSULATION
The Insulation should be dual layered with the Inner Layer being XLPE with a nominal thickness of 1.2 mm for
Voltages up to 11 KV and 1.7 mm for 33 KV and the Outer Layer being a suitable Polymer which is UV Resistant,
Non Tracking and Erosion Resistant with a nominal wall thickness of 1.1 mm for Voltages up to 11 KV and 1.6
mm for 33 KV. The minimum combined Insulation Thickness of both Layers should be 2.3 mm for Voltages up to
22 KV and 3.0 mm for Voltages upto 33 KV minimum.
The conductor manufacturing and stranding process shall incorporate the longitudinal water blocking also. The
Semi Conducting Screen, Inner Insulation and Outer Insulation should be extruded in one step i.e. triple extrusion
to ensure a good, permanent bond between the three layers and also with the conductor.
It shall be possible to remove the Semi Conducting Screen, Inner and Outer Insulation Layers without damage to
the conductor.
Figure 1 shows the Cross Section of a Covered Conductor with AAAC Conductor and Figure 2 shows the Cross
Section of a Covered Conductor with AAAC Conductor.
FIGURE 1 (AAAC)
5) TYPE TESTS:
Sl. No. Description of Test As per standard
1 Conductor Resistance Test

2 Thickness of Insulation & Covering
3 Tensile strength
Percentage Elongation at break of Insulation before ageing,
4 after ageing & Completed Cable ageing
5 Carbon black content test on outer covering
6 Resistance to UV rays on outer covering
7 Shrinkage test on outer covering
8 Shrinkage test on Insulation
9 Pressure test at high temperature EN 50397-1-2006
10 Hot set test on Insulation
11 Water Absorption test on Insulation
12 Shore D hardness test
Test for longitudinal water tightness with heat cycle and
13 without heat cycle
14 AC High Voltage test
15 Spark test on the covering
16 Leakage Current Measurement
17 Tracking Resistance test
18 Slippage Test
Type test report for Covered conductors is to be submitted with the bid.
ELECTRICAL TESTS
Conductor Resistance Test: To be done as a Routine as well as Type Test as per EN 50397-1-2006.
High Voltage Test as per EN 50397-1-2006: Type test
Test Voltage: Phase to Phase Voltage of the System for which the Covered Conductor is used.
No. of Specimens: One
Length of Specimen (minimum): 5 meters
Duration of Immersion in Water (minimum): 1 Hour
Temperature of Water: (20 ± 5)° Centigrade
Test Duration: with conductor screen
4 Hours for Routine Test
48 Hours for Type Test

Requirement: No Breakdown
1.1 Spark Test on Covering:

Routine test: Test Voltage 0.7 X Phase to Phase Voltage of System (A.C.) or Phase to Phase Voltage of
System (D. C.)
Requirement: No Breakdown
1.2 Leakage Current Test - Type test

Test Voltage 0.7 X Phase to Phase Voltage of System (A. C.)
Requirement: Maximum Leakage Current 1mA

Tracking Resistance: Type test
1) Construction and dimensions

2.1) Compliance with the design requirement
2.2) Thickness of the covering
3) Construction and Mechanical Properties of the conductor

3.1) Rated Tensile strength
3.2) Construction & dimension
4) Non – electrical tests on covering: Type tests

Mechanical Properties:
a) Before Ageing of Sample: As per Table 1 in accordance with EN 50397-1-2006.

b) After Ageing of Sample: As per Table 1 in accordance with EN 50397-1-2006.
c) Carbon black Content: As per Table 1 in accordance with EN 50397-1-2006
d) Resistance to UV rays: As per Table 1 in accordance with EN 50397-1-2006
e) Ageing of Complete Product Sample: As per Table 1 in accordance with EN 50397-1-2006.
f) Shrinkage test: As per Table 1 in accordance with EN 50397-1-2006
g) Hot-Set-Test: As per Table 1 and in accordance with EN 50397-1-2006.
h) Pressure Test at High Temperature: As per Table 1 in accordance with EN 60811-3-1, Sub Clause 6.1.
i) Water Absorption: As per Table 1 in accordance with EN 50397-1-2006
j) Shore D hardness: As per Table 1 in accordance with EN 50397-1-2006
5) Test for longitudinal water tightness

a) As Type Test with Heat Cycle and in accordance with IEC 60502 -2
No of Specimen – 1
Length of Specimen-----3 Meters
Test Duration -- 24 hours
Bending Radius – 20 X Diameter of Covered Conductor
Requirement – No Leakage
b) As Routine Test without Heat Cycle and in accordance with IEC 60502 -2
No of Specimen – 1
Length of Specimen – 1 metre
Test Duration – 1 Hour
MARKING
The covered conductors shall carry the marking at regular interval as below.
a. Manufacturer name
b. Voltage Grade
c. Covered AAAC conductor
d. Conductor Size.
e. Year of Manufacturing.
f. Specification reference
g. Net weight of conductor in Kg
h. Gross weight of conductor in Kg
i. Length of conductor in meter
j. Name of Scheme
k. Property of APDCL
Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 120 sq.mm Covered Conductors
Sl. No. Description Offered Parameters
A LoA/ P.O No. for reference

B Project Area
1 Make
3 Rated Operating Voltage
4 Type of Cable
5 Conductor
a) Conductor Material and Grade If Aluminimum, mention the grade
Nominal cross section of the
b)
conuctor
c) Shape of conductor
No. of wires/approx. Dia of
d)
wire
e) Conductor strandign formation
6 Water Blocking Layer Compound and other information
7 Semi Conducting Layer
a) Material
b) Nom. Thickness
8 Insulation
a) Material
b) Nom. Thickness
c) Colour
9 Outer Covering
a) Material
b) Nom. Thickness
c) Colour
10 Whether UV resistant?
Approx. Overall dia of finished
11
cable
Approx. weight of finished
12
cable
13 Max. Load (IEC61597)
Maximum Short circuit current

14
(1 sec)
D.C Resistance at 20 deg C and
15
90 DegC
Resistance Temperature Co-
16
efficient
17 Lightning Impulse Withstand
strength of XLPE layer
18 Tensile Strength of Conductors
Minimum Volume Resistivity
19
of insulation
a) at 27 deg C
b) at 90 deg C
Maximum load (IEC287),
conductor temp. 80deg C, air Continuous current rating under such
19 temp. 50 deg C, wind speed condition to be given and maximum
0.5m/sec, solar radiation 1200 value as well.
W/sqm.
Maximum allowable
20
temperature for :
Continuous operation at Rated
a)
Current
b) Short Circuit Condition,
Maximum temperature upto
21 which water blocking material
shall remain stable
Whether water blocking
22 materials incorporated during
the extrusion process
Average and maximum lifespan
23
of the covered conductor
Type Test as per EN 50397-1:
24
2006
a UV Resistant
b XLPE Thickness (Outer layer)
XLPE Thickness (Insulation
c layer)
d Semiconducting layer thickness
e Compacted/Non compacted
f Longitudinal water tightness
g Leakage current
h Conductor Resistance Test
Thickness of Insulation &
i Covering
j Tensile strength
Percentage Elongation at break
of Insulation before ageing,
after ageing & Completed
k Cable ageing
Carbon black content test on

l outer covering
Shrinkage test on outer
m covering
n Shrinkage test on Insulation
o Hot set test on Insulation
Water Absorption test on
p Insulation
Test for longitudinal water
q tightness
r AC High Voltage test
s Leakage Current Measurement
t Tracking Resistance test
u Slippage Test
Marking on Outer Sheath
25
(Printing/Embossing)
26 Sequential length marking
GUARANTEE:
1. The OEM shall ensure that MVCC shall be guaranteed for a period of 66 months from the date of receipt at the
consignee of the Utility or 60 months from the date of commissioning, whichever is earlier. In case the MVCC
fails within the guarantee period the purchaser shall immediately inform the OEM and the OEM shall immediately
replace the damaged MVCC within 15 days from the date of the intimation at his own cost.
12. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11/22/33 KV MEDIUM VOLTAGE COVERED

CONDUCTOR (MVCC) ACCESSORIES
1.0 Scope:
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing and supply of accessories for
Medium Voltage Covered Conductor (MVCC) rated up to 33000 volts.
2.0 System Parameters:
1 Nominal Voltage 11/22/33 kV

2 System Highest Voltage 12/24/36 kV
3 Type of Earthing Effective Effective
4 System Fault Current 11kV for 1 second
3.0 Service Conditions:
1 Average Ambient Temperature 30° C

2 Maximum Ambient Temperature 55° C
3 Maximum Relative Humidity 99%
4 Environmental Condition Humidity tropical climate with
polluted atmosphere
4.0 Applicable Standards:
1 EN 50397-1 (November Covered Conductor Specification- Up to 33 KV

2006)
2 EN 50397-2 (October Covered conductors for overhead lines and the
2009) related accessories for rated voltages above 1kV
a.c. and not exceeding 36kV a.c. PART 2 :
Accessories for covered conductors :
tests and acceptance criteria
3 EN 50182 Conductors for overhead lines- Round wire
concentric lay conductors
5.0 Cable Data:
Sl. No. Description of Medium Voltage Covered Conductor
1 As per Tender Specification
Type of Medium Voltage Covered Conductor Accessories
Sl. No. Description Application
1 Tension Assembly (TA) For fitting onto a pole for tensioning at the
beginning or end of a length of MVCC, or for
anchoring while a major change in direction.
The Tension assembly consists of one wedge type

Tension / anchoring clamp and one Tracking
protection IPC.
2 Insulator Clamp / Tie (IC) For supporting and aligning MVCC at an

intermediate pole in a length, with small angle of
deviation.
The Insulator Clamp hold the MVCC in its position

on top of the pin or post insulator. Insulator Tie
consists of either an ―Insulated Plastic‖ or
―Metallic helical‖
Type for Line Alignment.
3 Suspension Clamp (SC) For supporting a length of MVCC at an

intermediate pole in a length, with large angle of
deviation with a disc insulator. The suspension
clamp consists of an ―Assembly with one locking
type
Suspension clamp with provision to fix in

Insulators.
4 Insulation Piercing Connector For main to main (MVCC) networking connection.

(IPC)
For main to branch (MVCC) networking
connection.
For Temporary Earthing Provision from MVCC

Cable for maintenance purpose This connector is to
ensure the electrical characteristics with in the
required limits, while ensuring necessary insulation
protection against tracking and water penetration
on MVCC.
5 Full Tension Joints (TJ) Mid-span full tension joints for jointing MVCC
over a span
Tension / Anchoring Clamp.
Anchoring assemblies are used to firmly hold the MVCC to a concrete or steel pole and transmit the
mechanical tension.
o At the end of a run
o At a major change in direction of over 30 degrees.
The clamp should consists of an Aluminium alloy corrosion resistant body, Rigid sling (―bail‖) of
stainless steel with Tracking insulation piercing connector and self-adjusting plastic wedges
which shall anchor/hold the cable.
The following key criterion to be followed for the design of the same:
o There shall be no losable part (except bail) in the process of clamping arrangement
o Locking mechanism should be wedge type self-locking. Wedges are to be made of high
strength, Frost, heat and UV-radiation resistant plastic with glass fibre.
o The fittings shall be able to withstand the specific minimum failure load (SMFL) and shall
not damage the covering. The SMFL is the minimum load 20K for 50-70 sq mm and 28KN
for 95-157 sq mm and 60KN for 160-241 sq mm.
o Tracking insulation piercing connector shall be made of aluminium and having multiple teeth.
The insulation piercing connector shall be supported by both side of rigid bail to ensure
proper fixing and shall have aluminium alloy shear head to ensure proper tightening at all
working temperatures.
Rigid Sling (Bail) of Anchor Assembly
o The Anchoring assembly shall be supplied with a stainless steel rod to connect the Tension
Clamp to the Insulator clamp on the pole.
o The Rigid Bail forming part of clamp should have sufficient distance (minimum 300 mm)
between bracket and body of clamp and shall have sufficient mechanical strength to
withstand the mechanical test for the complete assembly tests in this specification.
o Flexible bail is not acceptable due to the reason to withstand the load.
o Rigid Bail should be fitted with provision to remove from the clamp to have easy installation.
Wedge Type Tension Clamp for Anchoring Assembly
o Wedge type clamps shall be used for clamping the MVCC without damaging the insulation
and shall be capable of clamping an uncut MVCC so that it can continue without break to the
connecting point or next span.

o The clamp shall be of aluminium with fully insulating type of mechanical and weather
resisting thermoplastic wedges.
o No tools shall be needed for fitting the MVCC into the clamp.
o The wedge shall be connected to insulation piercing connector and connector shall move with
wedge movement
Covered conductor SFML Tightening torque for Minimum weight
size connector requirement
50-70 sq mm 20KN 40 Nm 1.1 Kgs (min)
95-157 sq mm 30KN 40 Nm 2.4 Kgs (min)
160-241 sq mm 60KN 22-30 Nm 2.4 Kgs (min)
The fittings shall be able to withstand the specific minimum failure load (SMFL) and shall not
damage the covering and shall be designed to prevent the ingress of moisture during service.
Insulator Clamps / Ties
The Clamps / ties shall be designed suitably to hold the MVCC in its position on top of the insulator.
The Clamps is preferred to be made of Insulating Plastic materials or protected with Insulating Plastic
material to ensure tracking resistance and to avoid any insulation damage to covered conductor due
abrasion while mechanical or wind induce vibration.
o Cable ties shall bind the covered conductor on the insulator top groove or side groove
e.g. with the insulators.
o It shall be easy to install without use of any tools.
o Cable ties shall be plastic covered, zinc coated steel wire
o The sets include 6 pcs ties.
o Ties shall have colour code / marking for easy to recognize the right size.
Suspension Clamps
 The Suspension Clamps shall be made of corrosion resistant Aluminium alloy and to
avoid any insulation damage to covered conductor due abrasion while mechanical or wind
induce vibration.
 The suspension clamps shall have sufficient current carrying capability to avoid damage
by fault currents as mentioned in EN 50397-2 standard.
 The clamp should be suitable to accommodate from 50 to 157 sq mm cable size.
 The suspension clamp should be suitable for angles up to 90º.
 The SMFL load should be minimum 30KN.
 The suspension clamp should be tested in accordance to EN 50397-2 standard.
 Suspension should have minimum bolt 16 mm and should be equipped with
Aluminium alloy shear head bolts with tightening torque as 40Nm.
 Bolt and side frame shall be hot dip galvanized.
 The clamp should have an in-built insulation piercing contact.
 Insulation piercing connector part should have a silicone seal which prevents the moisture
getting into the conductor.
 The insulation piercing clamp piece should be connected to the body with a wire for
balancing the potential.
 The suspension clamp should be tested for radio interference.
 The suspension clamp should not have loose parts, so it is easy to handle even in difficult
conditions.
 Suspension clamp should be with a pulley for covered conductors to ensure removing
requirement of additional separate installation pulley.
 The clamp shall have provision to accommodate conductor joints with diameter under 30
mm can be pulled through the suspension clamp.
Covered conductor size SFML Tightening torque for Slip load min
connector
50-70 sq mm 20KN 40 Nm 4KN

95-157 sq mm 30KN 40 Nm 4KN
160-241 sq mm 60KN 30 Nm 4KN
Insulation Piercing Connectors for MVCC
Insulation Piercing Connectors are designed to make a connection between the uncut main conductor
and a branch cable conductor without having to strip either cable to expose the conductor. Instead, the
tightening action of the IPC will first pierce the Insulation, than make good electrical contact between
the main and branch conductor while simultaneously insulating and sealing the connection.
The insulation piercing connectors shall be of the following type(s) depending on the applications.
Connectors (Insulation Piercing)
o The connector shall be in accordance to standard EN 50397-2 and shall not be limited to only
Body made of entirely of mechanical and weather resistant UV resistant reinforced polymer
insulation material or full body made out of weather resistant aluminium alloy with outer
cover made of weather resistant UV resistant polymer insulation material.
o The tightening arrangement shall be fitted with weather resistant aluminium alloy torque
limiting shear heads to prevent over tightening or under tightening and ensuring same torque
at all working temperatures.
o Plastic shear head is not permitted as property & behaviour of plastic will vary with
temperature being India a large demography.
o Minimum and maximum tightening torque shall be mention by manufacturer as per EN
Standard 50397 – 2.
o The connector must perform piercing and connection on Main and Branch cable
simultaneously using single / two bolts for tightening.
o The shear bolt / nut shall be suitable for tightening with a hexagonal socket of 13 mm or
17mm.
o The connector should be able to pierce the nominal insulation thickness of the conductor can
be between 2.3-4.0 mm.
o The piercing teeth of the connector is made of tinned aluminium alloy with equivalent cross
section with respect to current carrying capacity of conductor for which it is used as per EN
50397 -2.
o Connector shall be suitable for a main conductor range 50 – 157 and tap cable range 50-157 sq mm
o In case of plastic body connector. The connector shall be fully Greece / gel free. No Greece or
gel to be used anywhere in connector. The teeth should be insert-moulded in plastic body and
sealing part shall be an integral part of plastic body as composite plastic and elastomer by
double-injection moulded method and shall have compression plate and lover frame.
o In case of Aluminium body connector. The Greece should be used for water protection. The
teeth should be in multiple rows and provided with an elastomer sealing cap. The connector
shall have aluminium alloy shear head.
o Each connector should be provided with a cap to seal the cut end of the Branch cable.
Mid Span full tension automatic Joints
o The joint should be as per standard EN 50397-2.

o The joint should be the automatic joint to ensure easy and quick to make.
o No tools are needed for the installation. The design must be push in and made type
o The joint shall be colour coded for easy to find the correct size.
o The joint shall have strong wedge to ensure a safe joint.
o Joint shall have insulation cold shrink sleeve tubing for tool free operation
o Reference standard, type test and design requirements of EN Standard 50397 – 2
o The joint shall have the same basic insulation properties as the conductor covering. In this
case, the test shall by carried out according to EN 50397-1, Table 2, ref. 1.2 ―High voltage
test‖
Insulation End Cap
The Insulated End Cap shall be suitable for effectively sealing the end terminal of the covered
conductors. The inner diameter range of the Cap shall be such that it shall tightly fit to the covered
conductors to prevent entry of moisture.
o Cap shall be made of elastomer material
o Cap shall accommodate the conductor size
o No tool is required for the sealing end cap installation
o It shall be tested for 33KV working voltage
Arc protion device (APD)
Arcing protection horns for the suspension insulator. The power arc device is designed particularly
for the small arc currents. These are used as arc protection with tension insulator on covered
conductor lines.
o The protection devise includes two horns, which are fixed to the metal parts of the tension
insulator so that the peaks are towards each other and the distance between the peaks is
adjustable.
o Aluminium Material shall be Corrosion resistant aluminium alloy, tensile strength 300 N/ mm²
o Screws shall be hot dip galvanized and washer should be stainless steel
o The screws of the clamps should have a tightening torque of 44 Nm
o The device should have am aluminium thread having diameter as 25 mm² and length as 2.1 meters.
o The connector is watertight by silicone greased teeth.
o It should be tested in accordance to EN 50397-2 standard.
Current limiting device (CLD)
These are used for protecting covered conductor lines against over voltages caused by lightning. The
device is suitable for horizontal suspension cross arms, which are equipped with pin insulators
o The CLD shall be used on straight line cross arms with pin insulators for arc protection.
o CLD should have a surge arrester, a fixing bracket, a spark horn/an arc protection horn.
o Three sets are needed for one cross arm.
o Connector is made of aluminium alloy.
o Plastic connector cover is UV-radiation resistant.
o Bracket, arcing horns and bolts are made of hot dip galvanized steel
MARKING:
On Covered Conductor
The covered conductors shall carry the following marking as per CENELEC 50397-1 or as agreed.
On Accessories
All products mentioned above shall permanently bear:

– Manufacturer‘s trade mark or logo;
– Product code or reference;

– The minimum and maximum cross section for which the unit is suitable;
–
– Tightening torque or die reference, if applicable
8.0 Type Test and other testing Requirements for accessories for covered conductors
Type tests as per EN 50397-2 standard and specification shall be conducted from NABL accredited
laboratory of India / from the International Laboratory Accreditation Corporation, Mutual
Recognitions Arrangement (ILAC, MRA) signatory Laboratory.
Important note: Type Test with NFC 33041 / NFC33020 / NFC 3040 are not allowed as it is only for
low voltage accessories (upto 1.1KV)
Please refer below table for test requirements:

TYPICAL DRAWINGS
Manufacturer has to submit his own drawing for approval conforming to TS and standard requirements
ANNEXURE I : - TYPICAL GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DIAGRAM AND DRAWINGS
Tension Assembly (TA) with Anchoring clamp and one Tracking protection IPC
Insulator Clamp / Tie (IC)
Suspension Clamp (SC)
Full Tension Automatic Joints (TJ)

Insulation Piercing Connector for Bare to Covered interconnection
Tension insulator with arc protection devise
Tension Assembly (TA) with arc protection device (PAD)

Power arc devices are not dependent on the direction of power feed, and can be installed on either side of
the cross arm. Power arc devices for different phases can be installed on different sides of the cross
arm. The spark gap L should be adjusted to 100...150 mm.
Suspension clamp Assembly (SC) with arc protection devise (PAD)
These accessories provide the best conductor protection and eliminate radio interference. The covered conductor
need not be stripped.
Power arc devices – (PAD)

With small short-circuit currents, an arc will move slowly and stress the insulator for a prolonged period. To
avoid damage to the insulator, the arc must be ignited directly in the spark gap (1), so that the short circuit
occurs through the crossarm (2) and trips the circuit breakers.
The spark gap can also withstand the stresses of high short-circuit currents (Ik = 10 kA/1 sec). Power arc
devices are not dependent on the direction of power feed and therefore can be installed on either side of the
insulator.
Power arc devices can also be installed on different sides of the pole. Power arc devices can be used with
tension and suspension insulators.
Current limiting devices (CLD)
The economical way to protect a conductor is to use a current limiting device rather than only a surge
arrester. The advantage is based on selecting a smaller surge arrester. Under normal operating conditions
the smaller surge arrester is not stressed at line voltage, as its other end is in the air.
This protection method also provides consumers with an uninterrupted electricity supply, because the arc
protection does not cause high-speed auto-recloser operations.
A lightning discharge to a covered conductor is directed via a metal oxide protection device and spark
gap past the insulator, but supply voltage can no longer pass through the protection device.
13. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WEDGE CONNECTOR FOR MVCC
1.0 SCOPE:
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing & supply of FIRED wedge type connectors which are
to be used for line jumpers, cut-points, T-connections, making connection tothe equipment‘s like isolators, circuit
breakers, CTs and PTs, Lightning Arresters, Busbars etc.
The connectors shall have maximum surface contact with the conductor, extremely low and stable contact
resistance, resulting in a proven minimum power loss. These connectors shall maintain constant force within the
connection for the life of the connector while compensating for thermal expansion.
2.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the rating as well as performance and testing of the
HT & LT overhead line connectors shall conform to the latest revisions available at the time of placement of
order of all the relevant standards as listed below:-
1) ANSI C 119.4 and2) IS 5561-2018.

3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS OF THE INSTALLATION:
The service conditions shall be as follows:
1. Maximum altitude above sea level 1,000m

2. Maximum ambient air temperature 50°C
3. Maximum daily average ambient air temperature 35°C
4. Minimum ambient air temperature 0°C
5. Maximum relative humidity 95%
6. Average number of thunderstorm days per annum (isokeraunic level) 70
7. Average number of rainy days per annum 120
8. Average annual rainfall 150cm
9. Earthquakes of an intensity in horizontal direction - equivalent to seismic acceleration of 0.3g
10. Earthquakes of an intensity in vertical direction - equivalent to seismic acceleration of 0.15g (gbeing
acceleration due to gravity)
Wind velocity: 300 km/hr, 200 km/hr and 160 km/hr. environmentally, some of the regions, where the work will
take place includes coastal areas, subject to high relative humidity, which can give rise to condensation. Onshore
winds will frequently be salt laden. On occasions, the combination of salt and condensation may create pollution
conditions for outdoor insulators. Some places are in heavily industrial polluted areas. Therefore, Outdoor material and
equipment shall be designed and protected for use in exposed, heavily polluted, salty, corrosive and humid coastal
atmosphere. The design of equipment and accessories shall be suitable to withstand seismic forces corresponding to
an acceleration of 0.1 g.
4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMNTS:
Specification of HT Wedge Connectors, Plam and paddle connector shall be as per following
A. C-type Wedge Connector
SL NO DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENT
1 Product designation C-type Wedge connector
2 Applicable standard IS:5561 1970
3 Metallic Material of connector
a. ‗C‘ Member AL. Alloy
b. Wedge Member AL Alloy
c. Hardware NA
4 Non-Metallic Material of connector Anti Corrosion
inhibitor contain
metallic abrasive grit
5 Suitable Conductor for Main & Tap Main: 80, 100, 148 sq mm
Tap: 80, 100, 148 sq mm
7 Rated voltage in KV Upto 33 kv
8 Rated Tensile strength in kgf 110
9 Current carrying capacity As per conductor size
5.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS:
WEDGE CONNECTOR:
The connector shall confirm to Heavy Duty, Class A as per International Standard - ANSI C
It also shall confirm to Indian Standard - IS 5561. It consists of a spring 'C' member and a Wedge, both made from a
special tin plated copper alloy and heat treatment which results in spring action. Both members shall be factory
coated
with a conductive inhibitor containing abrasive particles to help in cleaning the contact surface during installation.
They shall connect conductors of Aluminium, Copper and their alloys regardless of the combination (i.e. Al to Al, Al
to Cu, Cu to Cu). These connectors shall provide a non-corrosive connection and that is protected against temperature
variation and overloading. Also, connector shall provide a reliable electrical as well as mechanical connection for solid,
stranded or compacted conductor combinations including AAC, AAAC and ACSR. A good connection shall be easily
verified by visual inspection.
All the connectors shall be removed without damaging the conductor and the conductor as well asthe connector can be
used again.
i) The connector shall be useful for the conductor size of service connections.
This shall be formed from a special Copper alloy so that the grain (extrusion direction) runs perpendicular to the
conductor. This orientation of grain direction provides for lower rates of stressrelaxation in the metal and will maintain
the level of contact pressure at or near the value at initial installation for the life of connection. The material used shall
be specially designed with close tolerances on the chemical composition to ensure consistency of the C- member
production regarding dimensions & mechanical properties
This also made up of special Cu alloy which is manufactured to close tolerances to ensure repeatability and reliability
of the connection.
An oxidation inhibitor shall be applied to the surface there by elimination of oxidation of metallic surface. The
chemical composition of the inhibitor shall be synthetic and compatible with the rubbergloves used by the utilities. This
inhibitor shall contain special conducting abrasive particles, optimized in size and quantity, to ensure repeatability and
reliability of the electrical contact madein every connection.
FREEDOM FROM DEFECTS: -
The wedge type connectors shall be smooth and free from cavities, blowholes, and such other defects, which
would likely cause them to be unsatisfactory in service.
The wedge type connectors shall be so designed and proportioned that they are capable of safely withstanding stresses
to which they may be subjected (including those due to short circuit and climatic conditions) and that the effects of
vibration both on conductor and connector itself areminimized.
They shall be designed, manufactured, and finished so as to avoid sharp radius of curvature, ridges and excrescences,
which might lead to, localized pressure on or damage to the conductor in service.
The joint should be such that the pressure is maintained within this range under all conditions of service.
6. TESTS:
TYPE TESTS :
The following Type Tests shall be carried out on any one size of wedge connector from therange of manufacturing
above 30mm size from any national/ international lab.
1. Current Cycle test (CCT) or Current Cycle Submersion Test (CCST)

2. Thermal Shock Test
Also Tests as per IS 5561
1) Tensile Test.
2) Resistance Test
3) Temperature Rise Test.
4) Short Time Current Test (for Raccoon conductor & higher sizes).
- For Raccoon & Dog conductors: 25KA for 1 secs.
- For higher sizes: as per electrical fault system requirements
7. SPECIAL TESTS
Below tests shall be carried out to prove product performance in System applications, reportshall be submitted for any
wedge connector from manufacturing range.
- CORONA /RIV Test
- Salt Spray Test as per ASTM B117
TEST CERTIFICATE
Type tests specified in above clause should have been carried out as per relevant standardsand should not be older than 5
years.
ACCEPTANCE TEST
a) Tensile Test.
b) Resistance Test.
c) Dimensional check
The acceptance tests are to be carried out in presence of Company's representative. The supplier shall, therefore, give
sufficient advance notice to the Company for arranging witnessing of the tests.
ROUTINE TESTS
a) Visual inspection.
b) Dimensional Check.
TESTING FACILITIES AND DETAILS OF EQUIPMENTS
The supplier / tenderer shall clearly state as to what testing facilities are available in the works of
manufacturer and whether the facilities are adequate to carry out type, routine and acceptance tests as
per specification. The bidder shall provide the facilities to purchaser‘s representative for witnessing
the tests in the manufacturer‘s works.
DRAWING
The bidders shall supply the material as per drawing approved by customer.
PRE- DESPATCH INSPECTION
The successful bidder shall submit two prototype samples for further testing and compliance as per
specifications and getting approval before mass manufacturing. Equipment shall be subject to inspection by a
duly authorized representative of the Purchaser. Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture at
the option of the purchaser and the equipment if found unsatisfactory as to workmanship or material, the same
is liable to rejection. Bidder shall grant free access to the places of manufacture to the Purchaser‘s
representatives at all times when the work is in progress. Inspection by the Purchaser or its authorized
representatives shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the
specifications. Material shall be dispatched after specific MDCC (Material Dispatch Clearance Certificate) is
issued by the Purchaser.
Following documents shall be sent along with material:
a) Test reports
b) MDCC issued by Purchaser
c) Invoice in duplicate
d) Packing list
e) Drawings & catalogue
f) Guarantee / Warrantee card
g) Delivery Challan
h) Other Documents (as applicable)
MARKING
Each C- member and wedge is marked with distinct identification code. This identification code is
also marked on the packaging to ensure that the correct parts are used for the application. The
installer can make a quick visual check before installing.
PACKING
For packing, Polythene Bags, Corrugated Boxes or Wooden Boxes shall be used. The packing shall be fit to
withstand rough handling during transit and storage at destination. The heads and threaded portion of fasteners
fitting should be properly protected against damage. The gross weight of the packing shall not normally
exceed 50 kg per box or case. All different fitting components shall be packed in different cases and shall be
completed with minor accessories fitted in places. The tenderer should be approved the packing list before
dispatching the material.
INSPECTION AFTER RECEIPT AT STORE:
The material received at the Purchaser store shall be inspected for acceptance and shall be liable for rejection, if
found different from the reports of the pre-dispatch inspection and one copy of the report shall be sent to Project
Engineering department.
The successful bidder shall submit two extra boxes (unpaid) per lot delivered, with serial nos. in continuation to
the lot (lot size shall be 15,000 numbers or as defined in the order) to the Purchaser for further testing and
confirmation in line with the specifications and the material shall be liable for rejection, if test results are found
different from the reports of the pre-dispatch inspection and one copy of the report shall be sent to Project
Engineering department.
GUARANTEE:
Bidder shall stand guarantee towards design, materials, workmanship & quality of process/ manufacturing of
items under the contract for due and intended performance of the same, as an integrated product delivered under
this contract. In the event any defect is found by the Purchaser up to a period of 12 months from the date of
commissioning or 18 months from the date of last supplies made under the contract, whichever is earlier.
Bidder shall be liable to undertake to replace/rectify such defects at his own costs. within mutually agreed
timeframe, and to the entire satisfaction of the Purchaser, failing which the Purchaser will be at liberty to get it
replaced/rectified at Bidder‘s risks and costs and recover all such expenses plus the Purchaser‘s own charges (@
20% of expenses incurred), from the Bidder or from the ― Securitycum Performance Deposit‖ as the case may be.
In case of product fails within the guarantee period the purchaser will immediately inform the bidder who shall
take back the defective product within 15 days from the date of intimation at his own cost and replace product
within forty five days of date of intimation with a roll over guarantee.
The outage period i.e. period from the date of failure till unit is repaired / replaced shall not be counted for
arriving at the guarantee period.
Bidder shall further be responsible for ‗free replacement‘ for another period of THREE years from the end of the
guarantee period for any ‗Latent Defects‘ if noticed and reported by the Purchaser.
TENDER SAMPLE:
Bidder should submit sample of connector to Purchaser lab for the approval of the product before
manufacturing of the Lot.
QUALITY CONTROL:
The bidder shall submit with the offer Quality assurance plan indicating the various stages of inspection, the
tests and checks which will be carried out on the material of construction, components during manufacture and
bought out items and fully assembled component and equipment after finishing. As part of the plan, a schedule
for stage and final inspection within the parameters of the delivery schedule shall be furnished. The Purchaser's
engineer or its nominated representative shall have free access to the manufacturer‘s/sub-supplier's works to
carry out inspections.
DRAWING AND DOCUMENTS:
Following drawings and documents shall be prepared based on Purchaser specifications andstatutory
requirements and shall be submitted with the bid:
a) Completely filled in Technical Particulars

b) General description of the equipment and all components including brochures.
c) General arrangement for connectors
d) Experience List
e) Type test certificates
After the award of the contract, four (4) copies of following drawings, drawn to scale,describing the
equipment in detail shall be forwarded for approval.
Sr. No. Description For Approval For Review Final

Information Submission
1 Technical Parameters √ √
2 GA Drawing of Connectors √ √
3 Installation Instruction √
4 Manual/Catalogues √
5 QA & QC Plan √ √
6 Test Certificates √ √ √
All the documents & drawings shall be in English language.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR WEDGE CONNECTOR
Bidder has to submit GTP as per following format

A. Wedge Connector
Sl. No. DESCRIPTION Bidders offer
1 Product designation
3 Metallic Material of connector
a. ‗C‘ Member
b. Wedge Member
c. Hardware
4 Non-Metallic Material of connector
5 Suitable Conductor for Main & Tap
6 Installation & Application tooling
7 Rated voltage in KV
8 Rated Tensile strength in kgf
9 Rated voltage in KV
14. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ACSR CONDUCTORS
A. ACSR CONDUCTOR
1. SCOPE
This section covers design, manufacture, testing before dispatch, packing, supply and delivery for destination of
Kms of ―WEASEL‖ " RABBIT", "RACOON", "DOG", ―WOLF‖ and "PANTHER" ACSR Conductor of size
6/1/2.59mm, 6/1/3.35mm, 6/1/4.09 mm, 6/4.72mm, 7/1.57mm, 30/7/2.59 mm and 30/7/3.00mm respectively.
2. STANDARDS
The Conductor shall also comply in all respects with the IS: 398 (Part-II) - 1996 with latest amendments unless
otherwise stipulated in this specification or any other International Standards which ensure equal or higher
quality material.
Sl. No. IS Title International
1 IS:209-1979 Specification for Zinc BS-3436-1961

2 IS:398-1996 Specification for Aluminum conductors for overhead transmission
purposes.
Part-II Aluminum conductors IEC-209-1966
Galvanized steel reinforced BS-215(Part-II)
3 IS:1521-1972 Method of Tensile Testing of ISO/R89-1959
4 IS:1778-1980 Steel wire
Reels and Drums for Bare BS-1559-1949
5 IS:1841-1978 conductors
E.C. Grade Aluminum rod produced by rolling
6 IS:2629-1966 Recommended practice for Hot Dip Galvanizing of iron and steel
7 IS:2633-1986 Method of testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles.
8 IS:4826-1968 Galvanized coatings on round steel wires. ASTM A472-729
9 IS:5484-1978 E.C. Grade Aluminum rod produced by continuous casting and
10 IS:6745-1972 rolling. of determination of weight of zinc-coating of zinc coated
Methods BS-443-1969
iron and steel articles
The ACSR Conductor shall also conform to the following standards: Offer Conforming to standards
other than IS-398 shall be accompanied by the English version of relevant standards in support of the
guaranteed technical particulars to be furnished as per format enclosed.

The General Technical Requirements are given in Section-II. The Conductor shall conform to these
technical requirements. The Bidder shall furnish guaranteed technical particulars in Section-III.
3.1. MATERIALS/WORKMANSHIP
3.1.1. The material offered shall be of best quality and workmanship. The steel cored Aluminum
conductor strands shall consist of hard drawn Aluminum wire manufactured from not less than
99.5% pure electrolytic Aluminum rods of E.C. grade and copper content not exceeding 0.04%.
They shall have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC: 889-1987. The steel
wire shall be made from material produced either by the acid or basic open-hearth process or by
electric furnace process or basic oxygen process. Steel wire drawn from Bessemer process shall not
be used.
3.1.2. The steel wires shall be evenly and uniformly coated with electrolytic high grade, 99.95%
purity zinc complying with the latest issue of IS-209 for zinc. The uniformity of zinc coating and the
weight of coating shall be in accordance with Section-II and shall be tested and determined
according to the latest
IS-2633 or any other authoritative standard.
3.1.3. The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have a minimum zinc coating of 250
gm/sq.m after stranding. The coating shall be smooth, continuous, and of uniform thickness, free
from imperfections and shall withstand minimum three dips after stranding in standard price test.
The steel strands shall be performed and post-formed in order to prevent spreading of strands in the
event of cutting of composite core wire. The properties and characteristics of finished strands and
individual wires shall be as prescribed in IEC: 888-1987.
4. CONDUCTOR PARAMETERS
4.1 The Parameters of individual strands and composite steel cored aluminium conductor, shall be
in accordance with the values given in Section-II.
4.2 Creep in a conductor is attributed partly due to settlement of strands and partly due to non-
elastic elongation of metal when subjected to load. The manufacturer of conductor shall furnish the
amount of creep which will take place in 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50 years along with the supporting
calculations. The calculations shall be based on everyday temperature of 32 ºC and everyday
tension of 25% of UTS of conductor of 11/33 KV Lines.
5. TOLERANCES
5.1 The tolerances on standard diameter of Aluminium and Steel wires shall be as detailed in
specific technical requirements.
5.2 The cross-section of any wire shall not depart from circularity by more than an amount
corresponding to the tolerance on the standard diameter.
5.3 The details of diameters, lay ratios of Aluminium and steel wires shall be in accordance with the
Section-II "Technical Requirements".
6. SURFACE CONDITIONS
6.1 All Aluminum and steel strands shall be smooth, and free from all imperfections, spills/and splits.
The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact, uniform and free from all imperfections including
spills and splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions, scuff marks, kinks (protrusion of wires), dents,
pressmarks, cut marks, wire cross-over, over-riding looseness, pressure and/or unusual bangle noise
on tapping, material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spots (on account of reaction
with trapped rain water etc.), dirt, grit, etc.
The surface of conductor shall be free from points, sharp edges, abrasions or other departures from
smoothness or uniformity of surface contour that would increase radio interference and corona losses.
When subjected to tension upto 50% of the ultimate strength of the conductor, the surface shall not
depart from the cylindrical form nor any part of the component parts or strands move relative to each
other in such a way as to get out of place and disturb the longitudinal smoothness of the conductor.
7. JOINTS IN WIRES
7.1. Aluminum wires
During stranding, no Aluminum wire welds shall be made for the purpose of achieving the required
conductor length. No joint shall be permitted in the individual Aluminum wires in the outer most layer
of the finished Conductor. However, joints in the 12 wire & 18 wire inner layer of the conductor are
permitted but these joints shall be made by the cold pressure butt welding and shall be such that no
two such joints shall be within 15 meters of each other in the complete stranded conductor.
7.2. Steel wires
There shall be no joints in finished steel wires forming the core of the steel reinforced Aluminium
conductor.
8. STRANDING
The wires used in construction of the stranded conductor, shall, before stranding, satisfy all
requirements of IS-398 (Part-II) 1996.
In all constructions, the successive layers shall be stranded in opposite directions. The wires in each
layer shall be evenly and closely stranded round the underlying wire or wires. The outer most layer of
wires shall have a right hand lay. The lay ratio of the different layers shall be within the limits given
under Section-II.
. 9. PACKING
9.1. The conductor shall be supplied in non-returnable strong wooden drums provided with lagging of
adequate strength constructed to protect the conductor against any damage and displacement during
transit, storage and subsequent handling and stringing operations in the field. The drums shall
generally conform to IS-1778-1980 and latest version except as otherwise specified hereinafter. The
conductor drums shall be adequate to wind one standard length of 2500 meters of
WEASEL/RABIT/RACOON/DOG/PANTHERACSR conductor.
9.2. The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for letting off the conductor under a
minimum controlled tension of the order of 5KN. The conductor drums shall be provided with
necessary clamping arrangements so as to be suitable for tension stringing of power conductor.
9.3. The bidders shall submit their drawings of the conductor drums along with the bid. After
placement of letter of intent the Manufacturer shall submit four copies of fully dimensioned drawing
of the drum for Employer's approval. After getting approval from the Employer, Manufacturer shall
submit 30 more copies of the approved drawings for further distribution and field use.
9.4. All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned soft wood free from defects that
may materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative treatment for anti-termite/anti
fungus shall be applied to the entire drum with preservatives of a quality which is not harmful to the
conductor.
9.5. All flanges shall be 2-ply construction with 64 mm thickness. Each ply shall be nailed and
clenched together at approximately 90 degrees. Nails shall be driven from the inside face of the
flange, punched and then clenched on the outer face. Flange boards shall not be less than the nominal
thickness by more than 2 mm. There shall not be less than 2 nails per board in each circle.
9.6. The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the conductor shall be of segmental type.
These shall be nailed to the barrel supports with at least two nails. The battens shall be closely butted
and shall provide a round barrel with smooth external surface. The edges of the battens shall be
rounded or chamfered to avoid damage to the conductor.
9.7. Barrel studs shall be used for construction of drums. The flanges shall be holed and the barrel
supports slotted to receive them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a length on either end,
sufficient to accommodate washers, spindle plates and nuts for fixing flanges at the required spacing.
9.8. Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand protruded of the flanges. All the nails used on the inner
surface of the flanges and the drum barrel shall be countersunk. The ends of the barrel shall generally
be flushed with the top of the nuts.
9.9. The inner cheek of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall be painted with bitumen based
paint.
9.10. Before reeling, card board or double corrugated or thick bituminized waterproof bamboo paper
shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges of the drum by means of a suitable
commercial adhesive material. The paper shall be dried before use. Medium grade craft paper shall be
used in between the layers of the conductor. After reeling the conductor the exposed surface of the
outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped with thin polythene sheet across the flanges to preserve the
conductor from dirt, grit and damage during transportation and handling and also to prevent ingress of
rain water during storage/transport.
9.11. A minimum space of 75 mm shall be provided between the inner surface of the external
protective lagging and outer layer of the conductor. Outside the protective lagging, there shall be
minimum of two binders consisting of hoop iron/galvanized steel wire. Each protective lagging shall
have two recesses to accommodate the binders.
9.12. Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as possible to the flange edges with at
least 2 nails per end. The length of the nails shall not be less than twice the thickness of the battens.
The nail shall not protrude above the general surface and shall not have exposed sharp edges or allow
the battens to be released due to corrosion.
9.13. The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured with the help of U-nails on one side of
the flanges.
9.14. Only one standard length of conductor shall be wound on each drum. The method of lagging to
be employed shall be clearly stated in the tender.
9.15. As an alternative to wooden drum Bidder may also supply the conductors in non-returnable
painted steel drums. The painting shall conform to IS:9954-1981, reaffirmed in 1992. Wooden/ steel
drum will be treated at par for evaluation purpose and accordingly the Bidder shall quote the package.
10. LABELLING AND MARKING
The drum number shall be branded or gauged or stencilled into the flange. An arrow shall be marked
on the sides of the drum, together with the words "Roll this way". Each drum shall have the following
information provided on the outside of the flange stencilled with indelible ink.
i) Manufacturer's name and address.

ii) Contract/Specification number.

iii) Size and type of conductor.
iv) Net weight of the conductor.
v) Gross weight of the conductor and drum.
vi) Length of the conductor.
vii) Position of the conductor end.
viii) Drum and lot number.
ix) Name and address of the consignee.
x) Month and year of manufacture.
xi) The drum may also be marked with standard specification as per which the conductor is
manufactured.
11.0 STANDARD LENGTHS
11.1. The standard length of the conductor shall be 2500 meters. Bidder shall indicate the standard
length of the conductor to be offered by them. A tolerance of plus or minus 5% on the standard
length offered by the bidder shall be permitted. All lengths outside this limit of tolerance shall be
treated as random lengths.
11.2. Random lengths will be accepted provided no length is less than 70% of the standard length
and total quantity of such random length shall not be more than 10% of the total quantity order. When
one number random length has been manufactured at any time, five (5) more individual lengths, each
equivalent to the above random length with a tolerance of +/-5% shall also be manufactured and all
above six random lengths shall be dispatched in the same shipment. At any point, the cumulative
quantity supplied including such random lengths shall not be more than 12.5% of the total cumulative
quantity supplied including such random lengths. However, the last 20% of the quantity ordered shall
be supplied only in standard length as specified.
11.3. Bidder shall also indicate the maximum single length, above the standard length, he can
manufacture in the guaranteed technical particulars of offer. This is required for special stretches like
river crossing etc. The Employer reserves the right to place orders for the above lengths on the same
terms and conditions applicable for the standard lengths during the pendency of the Contract.
12. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
A Quality Assurance Plan including customer hold points covering the manufacturing activities of the
material shall be required to be submitted by the tenderer to the Employer along with the tender. The
Quality Assurance Plan after the same is found acceptable, will be approved by the Employer.
The contractor shall follow the approved Quality Assurance Plan in true spirit. If desired by the
Employer, he shall give access to all the documents and materials to satisfy the Employer that the
Quality Assurance Plan is being properly followed.
SECTION - II
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. SCOPE:
This section of the specification covers climatic and isoceraunic conditions, specific technical
particulars, schedule of requirements & desired deliveries, for conductor for 11/33 kV lines.
2. CLIMATIC & ISOCERAUNIC CONDITIONS:
2.1 Maximum Temperature

a) Conductor ºC.
2.2 Minimum Temperature ºC.
2.3 i) Max. ambient temperature ºC
ii) Mean annual / every day temperature ºC
2.4 Basic wind speed m/s
2.5 Relative humidity
i) Maximum %
ii) Minimum %
2.6 Average Rainfall (Max.) mm per annum
2.7 a) Rainy months May to Sept.
CONDUCTOR 1. Conductor: 15Raccoon ACSR

Rainy days in a year (days)
2. IS applicable: IS-398 (part-II) 1996 latest revision
3. Wire Diameter Raccoon
Aluminium (mm) 6/4.09
Steel(mm) 1/4.09
4. Number of strands:
Steel center 1
1st steel layer
1st Aluminium layer 6
2nd Aluminium layer
5. Sectional Area of Aluminium (sq. mm.) 78.83
6. Total Sectional Area(sq.mm.) 91.97
7. Overall diameter(mm) 12.27
8. Approximate weight(Kg./Km.) 319
9. Calculated D.C resistance at 20 degrees C., 0.371
maximum. (Ohms/Km)
10. Ultimate tensile strength (KN) 26.91
11. Final modulas of elasticity (GN/sq.m) 79
12. Coefficient of linear expansion x 10-6 per◦C 19.1
13. Lay ratio Max /Min
Steel core 6 wire layer
Aluminium Ist layer 14
nd
2 layer
14. Technical Particulars
10
a. Diameter-mm Al Steel
Standard(mm) 4.09 4.09
Maximum (mm) 4.17 4.17
Minimum (mm) 4.01 4.01

b. Cross-sectional area of nominal diameter wire (mm2) 13.14 13.14
c. Weight (Kg./Km) 102.48 35.51
d. Min. breaking load (KN)
Before stranding 17.27 2.08
After Stranding 16.4 1.98
e. D.C resistance at 20C min. (Ohm/Km) 0.371
15. Zinc coating of steel core:

(i) Number of 1 minute dips:3
(ii) Minimum weight of Zinc: 260 gms/sqm Coating
(iii) Process of Galvanizing: Hot dip.
(iv) Quality of Zinc: IS-209/1979 or latest edition.
16. Joints in strands
16.1 Steel: Not permitted
16.2 Aluminium: No joint shall be permitted in the Aluminium wires in the outer most layer of the
ACSR conductor. But permitted in the inner layers such that no two such joints are within 15
meters of each other in the complete stranded conductor.
17.0 Chemical composition of high carbon steel wire:
Element % Composition
i) Carbon 0.5 to 0.85

ii) Manganese 0.5 to 1.10
iii) Phosphorus Not more than 0.035
iv) Sulphur Not more than 0.045
v) Silicon 0.10 to 0.35
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR ACSR RACCOON CONDUCTOR:

CONDUCTOR
1. Conductor:
2. IS applicable:
3. Wire Diameter
Aluminum (mm)
Steel(mm)
4. Number of strands:
Steel center
1st steel layer
1st Aluminium layer
2nd Aluminium layer
5. Sectional Area of Aluminium (sq. mm.)
6. Total Sectional Area(sq.mm.)
7. Overall diameter(mm)
8. Approximate weight (Kg./Km.)
9. Calculated D.C resistance at 20 degrees C.,
maximum. (Ohms/Km)
10. Ultimate tensile strength (KN)
11. Final modulas of elasticity (GN/sq.m)
12. Coefficient of linear expansion x 10-6 per◦C
13. Lay ratio
Steel core 6 wire layer
Aluminium Ist layer
2nd layer
14. Technical Particulars
a. Diameter-mm
Standard(mm)
Maximum (mm)
Minimum (mm)
b. Cross-sectional area of nominal diameter wire (mm2)
c. Weight (Kg./Km)
d. Min. breaking load (KN)
Before stranding
After Stranding
e. D.C resistance at 20C min. (Ohm/Km)
15. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PSC POLES [9.75 METER]
1.0 SCOPE
This covers design manufacturing, testing at works, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and
commissioning of PSC poles shall be of solid rectangular with an overall length of 9.75M suitable for use in
overhead 11 KV lines.
2.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

The pre-stressed concrete (PSC) pole shall comply with the relevant provisions mentioned' in the' following
Indian Standards or the latest versions thereof :
IS: 1678, Specification for pre-stressed concrete poles for overhead power, traction and telecommunication
lines.
IS: 2905, Method of test for concrete poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines.
IS: 7321, Code of Practice for selection, handling and erection of concrete poles for overhead power and
telecommunication lines.
REQUIRED TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR 9.75 M PSC POLES:
3.0 Terminology
For the purpose of this specification, following definitions shall apply:
3.1Average Permanent Load

That fraction of the working load which may be considered of long duration over a period of one year.
3.2 Load Factor

The ratio of ultimate transverse load to the transverse load at first crack.
3.3 Transverse
The direction of the line bisecting the angle contained by the conductor at the pole. In the case of a straight
run, this will be normal to the run of the line.
3.4 Transverse Load at First Crack

For design, the transverse load at first crack shall be taken as not less than the value of the working load.
3.5 Working Load

The maximum load in the transverse direction, that is ever likely to occur, including the wind pressure on the
pole. This load is assumed to act at a point· 600 mm below the top with the butt end of the pole planted to the
required depth as intended in the design.
3.6 Ultimate Failure

The condition existing when the pole ceases to sustain a load increment owing to either crushing of concrete,
or snapping of the pre-stressing tendon or permanent stretching of the steel in any part of the pole.
3.7 Ultimate Transverse Load

The load at which failure occurs, when it is applied at a point 600 mm below the top and perpendicular to the
axis of the pole along the transverse direction with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth as
intended in the design.
4.0 Application (9.75 meter PSC pole)

These poles shall be used for 33 kV lines, and for special locations in 11 kV lines, such as road crossings, etc.
5.0 Material
1. Cement
The cement used in the manufacture of pre-stressed concrete poles shall be ordinary or rapid hardening
Portland cement conforming to IS: 269 (Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement) or IS: 8041
E (Specification for rapid hardening Portland cement), or high strength ordinary Portland cement conforming
to IS: 8112 (Specification of high strength ordinary Portland cement).
2. Aggregates
Aggregates used for the manufacture of pre-stressed concrete poles shall confirm to IS: 383 (Specification for
coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete). The nominal maximum size of aggregates shall
in no case exceed 10 mm (for poles above 9.0 M) and 12 mm (for 7.5 and 8.0 M poles).
Water should be free from chlorides, sulphates, other salts and organic matter; Potable water will be
generally suitable.
3. Admixture
Admixture should not contain Calcium Chloride or other chlorides and salts which are likely to promote
corrosion of pre-stressing steel.
4. Pre-stressing Steel
The pre-stressing steel wires including those used as un-tensioned wires (See Annexure. I, II &III), should
conform to IS: 1785 (part-I) (Specification for plain hard-drawn steel wire for pre-stressed concrete. Part-I
cold drawn stress relieved wire), IS: 1785 (part-II) (Specification for plain hard-drawn steel wire) or IS: 6003
(Specification for indented wire for pre-stressed concrete). The type designs given in Annexure-I, II and III
are for plain wires of 4 mm diameter with a guaranteed ultimate strength of 175 kg/mm2.
The concrete mix shall be designed to the requirements laid down for controlled concrete (also called design
mix concrete) in IS: 1343 (Code of practice for pre-stressed concrete) and IS: 456 (Code of practice for plain
and reinforced concrete), subject to the following special conditions:
a. Maximum works cube strength at 28 days should be at least 400 kg/cm2 (for poles above 9.0 M) and 420
kg/cm2 (for 7.5 and 8.0 M poles).
b. The concrete strength at transfer should be at least 200 kg/cm2 (for poles above 9.0 M) ·and 210 kg/cm2
(for 7.5 and 8.0 M poles).
c. The mix should contain at least 380 kg of cement per cubic meter of concrete.
d. The mix should contain as low a water content as is consistent with adequate workability. If it becomes
necessary to add water to increase the workability, the cement content also should be raised in such a way that
the original value of water cement ratio is maintained.
5. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The poles shall be designed for the following requirement:
a. The poles shall be planted directly in the ground with a planting depth as per IS: 1678.
b. The working load on the poles should correspond to those that are likely to come on the pole during their
service life. Designs given in Annexure I, II and III are for 140 kg, 200 kg, 300 kg, and 400 kg., applied at 0.6
M from top.
c. The factor of safety for all poles above 9.5 M shall not be less than 2.0. For 7.5 M and 8.5 M poles, the
factor of safety shall not be less than 2.5.
d. The average permanent load shall be 40% of the working load.
e. The F.O.S. against first load shall be 1.0.
f. At average permanent load, permissible tensile stress in concrete shall be 30 kg/cm2.
g. At the design value of first crack load, the modulus of rupture shall not exceed 53.0 kg/cm2 for M-400
concrete and 55.2 kg/cm2 for M-420 concrete.
h. At the design value of first crack load, the modulus of rupture shall not exceed 53.0 kg/cm2 for M-400
concrete.
i. The ultimate moment capacity in the longitudinal direction should be at least one fourth of that il1 the
transverse direction.
j. The maximum compressive stress in concrete at the time of transfer of pre-stress should not exceed 0.8
times the cube strength.
k. The concrete strength at transfer shall not be less than half the 28 days strength ensured in the design, i.e.,
400 x 0.5 = 200 kg/cm2 or 420 x 0.5 = 210 kg/cm2.
7. Service Conditions
PSC poles have to be designed to suit the following climatic conditions:
a) Maximum temperature of air in shade 40°C
b) Minimum temperature of air in shade 2°C
c) Maximum temperature of air in sun 45°C
d) Maximum humidity 93%
e) Average number of thunder storm days per 45 Days
annum
f) Maximum rainfall per annum 3500 mm
g) Average rainfall per annum 2200 mm
h) Wind pressure 97.8 Kg/m2
i) Altitude above MSL to 1000 M
8. Dimensions and Reinforcements
The cross-sectional dimensions and the details of pre-stressing wires should conform to the particulars given
in Annexure-I, II and III. The provisions of holes for fixing cross-arms and other fixtures should conform to
the REC standards.
9. Manufacture
9.1 Attire--stressing wires and reinforcements shall be accurately fixed as shown in drawings and maintained
in position during manufacture. The un-tensioned reinforcement, as indicated in the drawings, should be held
in position by the use of stirrups which should go round all the wires.
9.2 All wires shall be accurately stretched with uniform pre-stress in each wire. Each wire or a group of wires
shall be anchored positively during casing. Care should be taken to see that the anchorages do not yield before
the concrete attains the necessary strength.
10. Cover
The cover of concrete measured from the outside of pre-stressing tendon shall be normally 20 Nm.
11. Welding and Lapping of Steel

The high tensile steel wire shall be continuous over the entire length of the tendon. Welding shall not be
allowed in any case. However, jointing or coupling may be permitted provided the strength of the joint or
coupling is not less than the strength of each individual wire.
12. Compacting
Concrete shall be compacted by spinning, vibrating, shocking or other suitable mechanical means. Hand
compaction shall not be permitted.
13. Curing
13.1 The concrete shall be covered with a layer of sacking, canvass, Hessian or similar absorbent material and
kept constantly wet up to the time when the strength of concrete is at least equal to the minimum strength of
concrete at transfer of pre-stress. Thereafter, the pole may be removed from the mould and watered at
intervals to prevent surface cracking of the unit, the interval should depend on the atmospheric humidity and
temperature.
13.2 The pre-stressing wires shall be de-tensioned only after the concrete has attained the specified strength at
transfer (i.e., 200 or 210 kg/cm2 as applicable). The cubes cast for the purpose of determining the strength at
transfer should be cured, as far as possible, under conditions similar to those under which the poles are cured.
The transfer stage shall be determined based on the daily tests carried out on concrete cubes till the specified
strength indicated above is reached. Thereafter the test on concrete shall be carried out as detailed in IS: 1343
(Code of pr3ctice for pre-stressed concrete). The manufacturer shall supply, when required by the owner or
his representative, result of compressive test conducted in accordance with IS: 456 (Code of practice for plain
and reinforced concrete) on concrete cubes made from the concrete used for the poles. If the owner so desired,
the manufacturer shall supply cubes for test purposes and such cubes shall be tested in accordance with IS:
456 (Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete).
13.3 The de-tensioning shall be done by slowly releasing the wires, without imparting shock or sudden load to
the poles. The rate of de-tensioning may be controlled by any suitable means either mechanical (screw type)
or hydraulic.
13.4 The poles shall not be de-tensioned or released by cutting the pre-stressing wires using flames or bar
croppers while the wires are still under tension.
13.5 Separate eye-hooks or holes shall be provided for handling the transport, one each at a distance of 0.15
times the overall length, from either end of the pole. Eye-hooks, if provided, should be properly anchored and
should be on the face that has the shorter dimension of the cross-section. Holes, if provided for lifting
purposes, should be perpendicular to the broad face of the pole.
13.6 Stacking should be done in such a manner that the broad side of the pole is vertical. Each tier in the stack
should be supported on timber sleeper located as 0.15 times the overall length, measured from the end. The
timber supported in the stack should be aligned in a vertical line.
13.7 Poles should be transported with their broad faces placed vertically and, in such a manner that the shocks
are avoided. Supports should be so arranged that they are located approximately at a distance equal to 0.15
times the overall length from the ends. The erection of the pole should be carried out in such a way that the
erection loads are applied so as to cause moment with respect to the major axis, i.e., the rope used for hoisting
the pole should be parallel to the broader face of the pole.
14. Earthing
14.1 Earthing shall be provided by having length of 8 SWG GI wire embedded in concrete during
manufacture and the ends of the wires left projecting from the pole to a length of 100 mm at 250 mm from top
and 150 mm below ground level.
14.2 Earth wire shall not be allowed to come in contract with the pre-stressing wires.
15. Transverse Strength Test
15.1 Poles made from ordinary Portland cement shall be tested only on the completion of 28 days and poles
made from rapid hardening cement only on the completion of 14 days, after the day of manufacture.
15.2 The poles may be tested in either horizontal or vertical position. If tested in horizontal position,
provisions shall be made to compensate for the overhanging weight of the pole, for this purposed, the
overhanging portion of the pole may be supported on a movable trolley or similar device.
15.3 The pole shall be rigidly supported at the butt end for a distance equal to the agreed depth of planting.
Load shall be applied at a point 600 mm from the top of the pole and shall be steadily and gradually increased
to the design value of the transverse load at first crack. The deflection at this load shall be measured. A pre-
stressed concrete pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if visible cracks appear at a stage prior to
the application of the design transverse load for the first crack.
15.4 The load shall then be reduced to zero and increased gradually to a load equal to the first crack load plus
10% of the minimum ultimate transverse load, and held up for 2 minutes. This procedure shall be repeated
until the load reaches the value of 80 per cent of the minimum ultimate transverse load and thereafter
increased by 5 per cent of the minimum ultimate transverse load until failure occurs. Each time the load is
applied, it shall be held for 2 minutes. The load applied to pre-stressed concrete pole at the point of failure
shall be measured to the nearest five kilograms. The pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the
observed ultimate transverse load is less than the design ultimate transverse load.
16. Measurement of Cover
After completion of the transverse strength test, the sample pole shall be taken and checked for cover. The
cover of the pole shall be measured at 3 points, one within 1.8 meter from the butt end of the pole. the ·second
within 0.6 meters from the top and the third at an intermediate point and the mean value compared with the
specified value. The mean value of the measured cover should not differ by more than (±) 1 mrn from the
specified cover. The individual values should not differ by more than (±) 3 mm from the specified value.
If these requirements are not met, the workmanship with reference to aligning of the end plates and pre-
stressing wires and assembly of moulds should be improved and inspection at pre-production stage tightened
suitably.
17. Marking
The pole shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the following particulars either during or after
manufacture but before testing at a position so as to be easily read after erection in position.
 Month and year of manufacture.
 Transverse strength of pole in Kg.
 Maker's serial no. and mark and Project.
18. Inspection
Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of manufacture. The
supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third party nominee at a reasonable time
when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the
purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.
Sl. No. ITEM SPECIFICATION

1 Type of Pole 9.75 M PSC pole
3 Length of pole 9.75 Mts.
4 Depth of Plantation 1.8 Mts.
5 Bottom Depth 350 mm
6 Top Depth 175 mm

7 Breath 120 mm
8 Diameter of pre-stressing wire 4 mm
9 No. of tensioned wire per pole 22 Nos. of 4mm dia.
10 Minimum Ultimate Tensile strength of 4 175 KG / SQMM
mm. HT wire
11 Minimum initial pull of 4 mm wire 1865 kg / wire
12 Spacing HT wires As per IS : 1343 /1960
13 Quantity of HT wire/ pole 21.45 KG
14 Link & spiral 3.540 KG ( 4 nos., 5 mm in bottom & 4 nos., 5
mm in top
15 M.S spiral 3 mm dia of 150 c/c
16 Maximum Aggregate size 12 mm
17 Total weight per pole 750 KG
18 Minimum clear cover 20 mm
19 Factor of safety 2.5
20 Concrete grade M-420
21 Ultimate Load 675 KG
22 Earthing shall be provided by 4 MM dia. Projecting from the pole at length of 50 MM at
Galvanized iron wire embedded in concrete. 215 from top & 150 MM below ground level
23 one marks to be provided at ground level at 1.8 M
24 28 days cube strength of concrete (min) 420 Kg / sq.cm.
as per IS : 456/2000.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR 11 kV PSC POLE [9.75M]
REQUIRED TECHNICAL BIDDERS

SL. NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT
SPECS. OFFER
Name of the bidder
2 Address of manufacture
3 Country in origin
4 IS Standards Application IS 1343-1960
5 Type of Pole PSC
6 Total length Mtrs. 9.75
7 Depth of Plantation Mtrs. 1.8
A Bottom Depth mm 350
B Top depth Mm 175

C Breadth Mm 120
8 Dia of Pre Stressing wire Mm 4
9 No. of tension wire per pole 22 nos. of 4 mm dia

Min. ultimate tensile Kg/sq
10 175
strength 4 mm HT Wire mm
11 Min initial of 4 mm wire Kg/Wire 1865
12 Spacing HT Wires As per IS

Quantity of HT Wire Per
13 Kg 21.45
Pole
3.54[ 4 nos. 5 mm in botton and
14 Link and Spiral Kg
4 nos. 5 mm in top]
15 MS Spiral 3 mm Dia of 150 c/c
16 Maximum Aggregate Size 12 mm
17 Total Weight per Pole Kg 750
18 Min. Clear Cover Mm 20
19 Factor of Safety 2.5
20 Concrete grade M - 20
21 Ultimate Load Kg 675

Earthing shall be provided
Projecting from the pole at the
by 4 mm dia. Galvanized
22 length of 50 mm at 215 from top
iron wire embedded in
and 150 mm below ground level
concrete
One mark to be provided at
23 Mtr. 1.8
ground level
28 Days cube strength of
24 the concrete [Min] as per IS Kg/sq. cm 420
456-2000
16. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GALVANIZED CHANNEL CROSS ARMS
1. Scope
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer's works, transport to site,
insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of Galvanized Cross Arm and channel used for 33KV, 11
KV line complete with all accessories as specified
2. Standard
2.1 The M.S Cross Arm and channel supplied under this specification shall conform the latest issue of the relevant
Indian Standards IS – 226:1975, Regulations etc. except where specified otherwise.
2.2 The rolling and cutting tolerance for steel product conforming to IS: 266 shall be those specified in the
IS: 1852-1973 with latest revision
2.3 Galvanization conforming to latest version of 1S:2629
2.4 In the event of conforming to any standards other than the Indian Standards, the salient features of
comparison shall be clearly set out separately
3. General requirements:
i. The cross arm shall be fabricated grade of mild steel of channel section as per requirement.
ii. All steel members and other parts of fabricated material as delivered shall be free of warps, local
deformation, unauthorized splices, or unauthorized bends.
iii. Bending of flat strap shall be carried out cold. Straightening shall be carried out by pressure and
not by hammering. Straightness is of particular importance if the alignment of bolt holes along a member is
referred to its edges.
iv. Holes and other provisions for field assembly shall be properly marked and cross referenced.
Where required, either by notations on the drawing or by the necessity of proper identification and fittings
for field assembly, the connection shall be match marked.
v. A tolerance of not more than 1mm shall be permitted in the distance between the center lines of
bolt holes. The holes may be either drilled or punched and, unless otherwise stated, shall be not more than
2mm greater in diameter than the bolts.
vi. When assembling the components force may be used to bring the bolt holes together (provided
neither members nor holes are thereby distorted) but all force must be removed before the bolt is inserted.
Otherwise strain shall be deemed to be present and the structure may be rejected even though it may be, in
all other respects, in conformity with the specification.
vii. The back of the inner angle irons of lap joints shall be chamfered and the ends of the members cut
where necessary and such other measures taken as will ensure that all members can be bolted together
without strain or distortion. In particular, steps shall be taken to relieve stress in cold worked steel so as to
prevent the onset of embitterment during galvanizing.
viii. Similar parts shall be interchangeable.
ix. Shapes and plates shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the greatest extent practicable.
Shearing flame cutting and chipping shall be done carefully, neatly and accurately. Holes shall be cut,
drilled or punched at right angles to the surface and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall
be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges, and burrs resulting from drilling or reaming operations shall be
removed with the proper tool.
x. Shapes and plates shall be fabricated to the tolerance that will permit field erection within
tolerance, except as otherwise specified. All fabrication shall be carried out in a neat and workmanlike
manner so as to facilitate cleaning, painting, galvanizing and inspection and to avoid areas in which water
and other matter can lodge.
xi. Contact surfaces at all connections shall be free of loose scale, dirt, burrs, oil and other foreign
materials that might prevent solid seating of the parts.
xii. Welded joints not permissible.
xiii. The rolling and cutting tolerance for steel product conforming to IS: 266 shall be those specified in
the IS: 1852-1973 with latest revision.
all dimensions are subject to the following tolerances:
a) dimensions up to and including 50mm:+1mm: and
b) dimensions greater than 50mm: +2%
xiv. The channel cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free from rust.
xv. For galvanized channel:
All ferrous parts including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and spring washers, support channels, structures,
shall; be hot dip galvanized conforming to latest version of 1S:2629 or any other equivalent authoritative
standard. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous and uniform. It shall be free from acid spot and
shall not scale, blister or be removable by handling or packing. There shall be no impurities in the zinc or
additives to the galvanic bath which could have a detrimental effect on the durability of the zinc coating.
Before picking, all welding, drilling, cutting, grinding and other finishing operations must be completed
and all grease, paints, varnish, oil, welding slag and other foreign matter completely removed. All
protuberances, which would affect the life of galvanizing shall also be removed.
The weight of zinc deposited shall be in accordance with that stated in Standard IS 2629 and shall
not less than 0.61kg/m² with a minimum thickness of 86 microns for items of thickness more than
5mm, 0.46kg/m² (64 microns) for items of thickness between 2mm and 5mm and 0.33kg/m² (47
microns) for items less than 2mm thick.
xvi. The raw materials and fabrication thereof in respect of cross arm shall be furnished along with dimension.
xvii. The hole for fixing of insulator and pole clamp shall be provided as per requirement.
xviii. One copy of the drawing of cross arm for each size shall be furnished along with the technical bid.
A. REQUIRED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GI CHANNEL CROSS ARM

[SIZE: 100 x 50 x 6 x 3200 mm]
Sl. No. Description Particular

1 Type of cross arm G.I Channel cross arm
2 Size 100 x 50x 6 x 3200 mm
3 Material Mild Steel channel

4 Length 3200 mm
5 Breadth 100 mm
6 Width 50 mm
7 Thickness 6 mm
8 Hole for fixing of 26 mm

insulator
9 Center to center 1525 mm
distance of hole
10 Hole for pole clamp 18 mm
11 Weight 29.5 kg (approx.)

12 Galvanization The cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free
from rust and hot dip galvanized confirming to IS: 2629.
13 Standard applicable IS: 266; IS: 1852-1973:
17. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I CHANNEL CROSS ARM
[SIZE: 75 x 40 x 40x6 x 2200 mm]
1 Type of cross arm GI Channel cross arm

2 Size 75 x 40x 40x6 x 2200 mm
3 Material Mild Steel channel (galvanized)
4 Length 2200 mm
5 Breath 75 mm
6 Width 40 mm
7 Thickness 6 mm
8 Hole for foxing of insulator 20 mm
9 Center to center distance for hole 1070mm
10 Weight 16 kg (approx.)
The cross arm shall be properly brushed
to make it free from rust and hot dip
11 Galvanization galvanized confirming to IS: 2629.
Sl No. Description Particular

1 Type of cross arm GI Channel cross arm
2 Size 100 x 50x 50x6 x 2200 mm
3 Material Mild Steel channel( galvanized)
4 Length 2200 mm
5 Breath 100 mm
6 Width 50 mm
7 Thickness 6 mm
Center to center distance
9 1070mm
for hole
10 Weight 20.5 kg (approx)
The cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it
11 Galvanization free from rust and hot dip galvanized confirming to
IS: 2629 or equivalent international specifications.
Sl No. Description Particular

1 Type of cross arm GI Angle cross arm
2 Size 50x 50x6 mm
3 Material Mild Steel channel( galvanized)
4 Length 2200 mm
5 Breath 50 mm
6 Width 50 mm
7 Thickness 6 mm
Center to center distance
9 1070mm
for hole
10 Weight 20.5 kg (approx)
The cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it
11 Galvanization free from rust and hot dip galvanized confirming to
IS: 2629 or equivalent international specifications.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR GI CHANNEL CROSS ARM

[100 x 50x 50x6 x 3200]
(To be filled in by the bidder)

1 Type of cross arm
2 Size
3 Material
4 Length
5 Breath
6 Width
7 Thickness
8 Hole for foxing of insulator
Center to center distance for
9
hole
10 Weight
11 Galvanization

[100 x 50x6 x 2200]

1 Type of cross arm
2 Size
3 Material
4 Length
5 Breath
6 Width
7 Thickness
9
hole
10 Weight
11 Galvanization

[75 x 40x6 x 2200]
1 Type of cross arm

2 Size
3 Material
4 Length
5 Breath
6 Width
7 Thickness
9
hole
10 Weight
11 Galvanization
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR GI ANGLE CROSS ARM
1.1.1.1.1.1 [50x50x6]

1 Type of cross arm
2 Size
3 Material
4 Length
5 Breath
6 Width
7 Thickness
9
hole
10 Weight
11 Galvanization
18. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 25 KVA 3-PHASE L.T. DISTRIBUTION BOX (WITH MCCB)
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection, testing at manufacturer place and supply of
L.T. Distribution Box with energy meter. Distribution Boxes shall be used for controlling the L.T. feeders
from the L.T. side of Distribution Transformers. The system shall be A.C. 3phase, 4 wires, 433V or AC
single phase 2 wire, 230V, 50 Hz with effectively grounded neutral.
The equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous
operation under the climatic conditions of the State.
3. SYSTEM DETAIL
Distribution Boxes are meant for metering, control and protection of DistributionTransformers with
relevant parameters as under:
Full
Transformer Incoming Circuit Outgoing Circuits
S. No. Current
Capacity kVA Configuration Configuration
Amps
25 KVA (3-Ph)
1 34 Amp 40 A TPN MCCB 6 x 25A SP MCCB
Each Distribution box shall have provision for fixing of three phase tri-vector energy meter/single phase
meter for DT metering depending upon capacity and type of transformer, 1No. single pole Neutral
(SPN)/Three Pole Neutral (TPN) MCCB at incoming and 2 & 6 Nos. single pole MCCB at outgoing
circuit as per above table. Incoming and Outgoing MCCB shall be connected through insulated connectors.
Cable from the Distribution Transformer shall be connected to the incoming MCCB through energy meter.
Cables from the outgoing terminals of the incoming MCCB shall be connected respectively to the R-Y-B
Phase and Neutral terminals of the insulated bus bars or insulated Multiple Outgoing Connectors. Cables
from insulated bus bars or insulated Multiple Outgoing Connectors shall be connected to the outgoing
MCB.
Aluminium cable of 16mm2 for 10 KVA / 16KVA and 35mm2 for 25KVA transformer shall be
used. Cable shall be fixed with bus bar or connectors with minimum two screws of size not less
than M6. Insulation provided shall be such that no live part including the screws for holding the
cable shall be accessible by hand/finger.
4. MCCB
MCCB shall be of reputed make and shall confirm to latest IS. MCCB shall be of fixed rating
type. MCCB shall have rated service short circuit breaking capacity of 10 KA at 0.4 P.F. (lag)
with rated insulation voltage of 660 V. The time current characteristics of MCCB shall be as per
the following details:
Multiple of normal Current Setting Tripping Time
1.05 More than 2.5 hrs.

1.2 More than 10 minutes and less than 2 hrs.
1.3 Less than 30 minutes
Multiple of normal Current Setting Tripping Time
2.5 Less than 1 minute
6.0 Less than 5 Seconds
For above test, the reference calibration temperature of the MCCB shall be 500C.
7. Acceptance Tests:
Following acceptance tests shall be carried out while inspecting lot of material offered.
1) Visual Examination:
The Distribution box shall be inspected visually, externally and internally for proper Powder Coating
layer, fitting of all the components in accordance with technical Specification.
2) Verification of Dimensions:
Verification of dimensions, external / internal clearances will be carried out as per technical
specifications.
3) Verification of fittings:
Components like insulated bus bars, MCCBs, Hinges, Rubber Glands etc. will be verified as per
technical specification.
4) High voltage withstand test at 2.5KV:
The A.C. voltage of 2.5KV, 50HZ shall be applied for one minute as follows:
i) Between Live Parts of each insulated bus bar
ii) Between each insulated bus bar and earthing Screw/bolts
iii) On bus bar insulation.
iv) On PVC coating of PVC cables.
There shall not be any puncture or flash over during this test.
5. MCCB:
Time current characteristics of each rating of MCCB shall be checked as per the requirement of the
specifications.
6. Current Carrying Capacity:
The current of 200 Amp shall be applied for 30 minutes through high current source on each
insulated bus bar. There shall not be overheating of the insulated bus bars during this test.
7. Testing & Manufacturing Facilities:
The Tenderer must clearly indicate what testing and manufacturing facilities are available in the works of
manufacturer and whether the facilities are adequate to carry out all Routine & Acceptance Tests. These
facilities should be available to inspection Engineers, if deputed to carry out or witness the tests in the
manufacturer's works. The tenderer must have all the in-house testing facilities to carry out the acceptance
tests onthe Box.
8.Tests:
The Distribution box shall comply with the requirement of IP33. Each type of LV Switchboard shall be
completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested at the factory as per the relevant standards and during
manufacture and on completion.
i) Routine Test
The tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS 13947 and 8623 includeincluding but not
necessarily limited to the following:
(a) Visual Check
(b) Verification of Component Rating
(c) Other Checks
i) Easy Accessibility and Maintenance
ii) Color Coding provided by colored tapes.
iii) Bus bar dimensions
iv) Degree of Protection check by paper.
(d) Dimension check
(e) Insulation Resistance Tests
(f) Mechanical Operation Tests
(g) Bus bar support and clearances
(h) Continuity of circuits and Function
(i) Powder Coating
(j) Overload Release setting of the Circuit Breakers
ii) Type Test
The box shall be fully type tested as per the requirement of IS 13947 (Part- 1):1993 with latest
amendment. The type test shall be carried out from the Govt. approved laboratories duly accredited by
National Board of Testing &Calibration Laboratories (NABL) of Govt. of India
9. Proto type & Drawings:

The manufacturer has to manufacturer the prototype Unit for each rating as per this specification before
bulk manufacturing. The manufacturer should intimate the readiness of prototype to employer. The
Project Manager will inspect the prototype for approval. The manufacturer should submit the final
drawings in line with this specification and prototype to employer for approval before bulk
manufacturing. The approval of prototype & drawings shall be a responsibility of
manufacturer/Contractor.
GAURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 3-Ph, LT DISTRIBUTION BOX OF 25

KVA DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
Sl. No. Description Bidder‘s offer
1 Client
2 Contractor
3 Scheme
4 Project
5 LOA No.
A MCCB
i) System Voltage
ii) MCCB
iii) Make of MCCB
iv) Overload Release
v) Rated Short Circuit Breaking Capacity
vi) Utilization Category
vii) Multiple Outgoing Connector/Busbar
B Porcelain KITKAT
i) Make
ii) Rating
C Enclosure
i) Material
ii) Thickness
iii) Manufacturing process
iv) Overall Dimension
v) Degree of Protection
vi) Type, Size & Material of Hinges provided to

Doors
vii) Sets of Louvers Provided to the Box
viii) U-Latch Arrangement
ix) Earthing Arrangement
x) Nut, Bolts & Washer
xi) Gland Plate
xii) Viewing window
xiii) Size of viewing window
xiv) Size of acrylic/glass
xv) Box fixing arrangement
xvi) Danger Plate
xvii) Manufacturer & scheme name
xviii) Detail of Name Plate
xix) Surface Treatment
xx) Powder Coating
xxi) Packing
D Energy Meter / Provision for 3-Ph Energy Meter
i) Make
ii) Type of Meter
iii) Rating
E CTs
i) Make
ii) Insulation
iii) Ratio
iv) VA Burden
v) No. of CT
vi) Accuracy
18. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 63, 100, 200 & 315 KVA L.T. DISTRIBUTION BOX
1. SCOPE:
This Specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at works and supply of Distribution Boxes made
out of CRCA MS for controlling the L.T. feeders from the L.T. side of Distribution Transformers. The
system shall be A.C. 3 phase, 4 wire, 433V, 50 HZ with effectively grounded neutral
The equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactorycontinuous operation
under the tropical conditions as specified by employer which is as hereunder;
2.1 Maximum ambient temperature (Degree C)
2.2 Maximum temperature in shade (Degree C)
2.3 Minimum Temperature (Degree C)
2.4 Relative Humidity (percent)
2.6 Maximum wind pressure (kg/sq.m)
2.7 Maximum altitude above mean sea level ( Meter)
2.8 Isoceranic level (days per year)
2.9 Siesmic level (Horizontal Acceleration)
Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conductive to rust and fungus growth ….
3. SYSTEM DETAILS:
Distribution Boxes are meant for control and protection of Distribution Transformers with relevant parameters
as under:-
S. No. Particulars Details

1. KVA rating 63 KVA 100 KVA 200 KVA 315
KVA
2. Voltage 433 V, 3 Ph, ( 3x 250 V)
3. Frequency 50 HZ
4. Phases 3 phase, solidly grounded neutral
5. Approximate full load current 84A 133A 270A 440A
of transformer
6. No. of Outgoing Circuits 2 nos. 3 nos. 4 nos.
3.5 MANUFACTURE/CONSTRUCTION OF BOXES:
Distribution Boxes shall have Isolator (Switch Disconnector) and HRC fuse base with links
on incoming circuit and single pole MCCBs & Link Disconnector on outgoing circuits with
necessary interconnecting Bus Bars/ Links.
Standard General Arrangement of Isolators, HRC fuse base with links, MCCBs, Link
Disconnector, Neutral Links, Bus Bars, connecting links, Cable termination arrangement etc.
inside the Box is shown in the enclosed drawings.
3.6 INCOMING CIRCUIT:
a) Isolator (Switch Disconnector) -
Each distribution box shall have one triple pole Isolator (Switch Disconnector), conforming
to relevant latest IS. The supplier shall indicate makes and types of offered isolator in GTP.
The supplier shall submit Type Test Report of the Isolator as specified in Cl. No. 12.3 (II) for
approval of Employer before commencement of supply. The Switch disconnector to be
provided in the Distribution Box will be as per Employer specification.
The Isolator should be front operated triple pole type. The casing of Isolator shall be of non-
tracking, heat resistant insulating material of Dough Moulding Compound (DMC) of D3
Grade as per IS:13411 (amended upto date), no separate enclosure is required. Isolator Base
should withstand the breaking capacity of 80 kA. To extinguish the arc immediately in
isolators, in each phase arc-chutes with minimum12 strips shall be provided.
The isolator should be front operated triple pole type. The isolator shall be robust in
construction and easy for operation. The handle of the isolator should be detachable easily for
security purpose while working on L.T. circuits
The characteristics of Isolator shall be as follows:
Rating
S.N. Characteristics 63 KVA 100 KVA 200 KVA 315
KVA
1. Basic uninterrupted duty 200 A 600A
2. Mechanism Manual quick make quick break
3. Standard applicable IS : 13947 amended upto date
4. Utilization category AC –23 A
5. Mechanical Endurance As per IS 13497 amended upto date
6. Electrical Endurance As per IS: 13947 amended upto date
7. Rated Duty Uninterrupted
8 Making /Breaking capacity Not less than requirement of AC –23 A category
9. Two seconds rating 4 KA 8 KA

10. Rated insulation voltage 660 V
The terminal connector strips of the isolator shall be projecting out of isolator of 80 mm
(minimum) in length on cable connection side and 60mm (minimum) on HRC fuse base side
as shown in the drawings. In 63 /100/200/315 KVA distribution box, the cross section of the
strips on outside of the isolator shall be provided as below:
63/100 KVA - 25X5 mm.
200 KVA- 50X 6 mm
315 KVA- 50X 6 mm
The material of isolator strips shall be EC grade tin-plated copper. The terminal strips shall
be continuous from the point of contact separation inside the Isolator with cross section as
mentioned above throughout the length. Gap of 50mm shall be maintained between each
terminal throughout the length.
b. HRC FUSE
HRC Fuse of suitable capacity shall be provided between outgoing terminal of Switch
Disconnector (Isolator) and incoming Busbar to facilitate electrical breaking of the circuit.
Each Distribution Box shall have 3 Nos. of HRC Fuse Base with HRC Fuse Links (Blade
type Contacts).The supplier shall indicate in GTP, the make, type and capacity of HRC Fuse
Base and Fuse Links offered.
c) HRC FUSE BASE
The base of the HRC Fuse shall be of non-tracking, heat resistant insulating material of
Dough Moulding Compound (DMC) of D3 Grade as per IS:13411/1992. The Fuse Base shall
be sturdy in construction.
The extension terminal connector strips of the Fuse Base shall be projecting out on both sides,
made with two pieces ( half portion of the terminal contact and extension strip should be
continuous in one piece), as shown in the drawing. The dimensions shall beas shown in the
drawing. The material for both strips shall be tin plated EC Grade copper. HRC Fuse Base &
fuse link should have withstand the breaking capacity of 80 kA.
HRC Fuse base shall be suitable for fuse of 200A for 63/100 KVA distribution box and 400
A for 200 KVA and 630A for 315 kVA distribution box.
d) HRC FUSE LINK
The HRC Fuse Links shall be sturdy in construction of ―Din Type‖. Breaking Capacity shall
be 80 kA. For fault indication red pop up indicator should come out instantly on fusing.
Manufacturer‗s name, current rating, breaking capacity and type shall be marked on HRC fuse
link.
HRC Fuse link Current rating for 63/100 /200/315 KVA distribution box shall be as follows:
63 KVA - 100 A
100 KVA - 160 A

200 KVA - 315 A.
315 KVA - 500 A
The supplier shall submit Type Test Report of the HRC fuse base and HRC fuse link as
specified in Cl. No. 12.3 (III) for approval of Employer before commencement of supply. The
HRC fuse base with links to be provided in the Distribution Box will be as per Employer
approval given in the detailed purchase order.
3.7 OUTGOING CIRCUITS:
(i) MCCBs
Each distribution box shall have 6 nos. of single-pole MCCBs in 63 KVA /100 KVA Box, 9
nos. of single-pole MCCBs in 200 KVA box and 12 nos of single-pole MCCBs in 315 KVA
box to protect outgoing circuits. MCCB shall be of reputed make and shall confirm to latest
IS. The supplier shall indicate the makes and types of MCCBs offered in GTP. The supplier
shall submit Type Test Report of the MCCB as specified in Cl. No. 12.3 (IV) for approval of
Employer before commencement of supply. The MCCBs to be provided in the Distribution
Box will be as per Employer approval as given in the detailed purchase order.
MCCB shall have quick make quick break mechanism. Making of MCCB shall onlybe
manual but breaking of MCCBs shall be electrical as well as manual.
The detailed specification for MCCBs shall be as under.
1. KVA rating 63 KVA 100 KVA 200 KVA 315 KVA
2. Rated current 150 A 200 A
3. Fixed overload release setting (A) 60 A 90 A 120 A 120 A
4. No. of poles Single pole
5. Rated Insulated Voltage 660 V
6 Utilization Category A
7. Rated service short circuit 10 KA at 0.4 p.f ( lag)
Breaking capacity (kA)
which is equal to ultimate
breaking IS 13947 (amended)
8. The sequence of operation for this test shall be, O - t - CO - t - CO, and t = 3 min.).
The test shall be done at 250V at 0.4 p.f. (lag). Voltage rating phase to phase 433 V
and phase to earth 250V.
9. Power factor for short circuit – 0.4 lag

The Busbar dropper and Terminal connection strip of Link Disconnector shall be placed
in contact terminal of MCCB as shown in the drawing.
The rated service short circuit breaking capacity as specified above, shall be based on the
rated service short circuit test carried out at specified power factors.
To extinguish the arc immediately in MCCBs, arc-chutes with minimum 8 strips shall be
provided.
While the above stipulation regarding the test power factor and the sequence of operation
shall be binding, the other procedure for making the short circuit test and circuit etc. shall
generally be in accordance with the Indian Standard applicable to the type of circuit
breakers under test.
3.8 TIME CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS of MCCBs: The L.T. MCCBs shall have
time current characteristics as follows
Multiple of normal Current setting Tripping time
1.05 More than 2.5 hrs.
1.2 More than 10 minutes and less than 2 hrs.
2.5 Less than 1 minute
4.0 Not less than 2 seconds
6.0 Less than 5 seconds
12.0 Instantaneous (less than 40 milli seconds.)
For above time/current characteristic, the reference calibration temperature of thebreaker shall
be 50°C. Deration, if any, up to 60°C. Ambient temperature shall not exceed 10% of the
current setting indicated above.
C. LINK DISCONNECTOR:
Link Disconnector of 200 A capacity shall be provided between outgoing terminal of MCCB
& cable connection to facilitate mechanical breaking (manual isolation) of the circuit. 63 /100
kVA Distribution Box shall have 6 Nos. of link Disconnectors, 200 kVA distribution box
shall have 9 nos. of link Disconnectors and 315 kVA distribution box shall have 12 nos. of
link Disconnectors.
The supplier has to indicate the makes and types of Link Disconnector offered in GTP. The
supplier shall submit Type Test Report of Link Disconnector as specified in Cl. No. 12.3 (V)
for approval of Employer before commencement of supply. The link Disconnectors to be
provided in the Distribution Box will be as per EMPLOYER‗s approval as given in the
detailed purchase order.
The base of the Link Disconnector shall be of non-tracking, heat resistant insulating material
of Dough Moulding Compound (DMC) of D3 Grade as per IS:13411 (amended upto date).
The Link Disconnector shall be sturdy in construction and easyin operation.
The link of Link Disconnector shall be of Tin-plated E.C. grade copper. The construction of
the Link Disconnector shall be such that it shall be hinged type on cable connection end
and disconnect able at the MCCB end. The disconnection will be with the help of special
handle/puller. One handle/puller shall be supplied along with each Distribution Box. The
terminal connector strips of the Link Disconnector of 25 x3 mm cross section shall be
projecting out of Link disconnector for minimum length of 80 mm. on cable connection side
and 40 mm on MCCB outgoing side. The cross section of knife edge link shall be 20 x 5
mm. The material for both the strips andlinks shall be tin-plated E.C. grade copper. The size
of bimetallic lugs hole & the hole on the disconnectors strip on cable side should be same.
3.9 BUSBARS AND CONNECTIONS:
The Incomer feeder should be on right side of the distribution box and all outgoing feeders
will be on left side of the distribution box, with phase sequence RYB to be maintained. The
phase busbars, incoming droppers and feeder droppers from busbars shall be of EC Grade
Aluminium. The phase busbar strips shall be of size 25X8 mm for 63 KVA/100 KVA and
40X10 mm for 200 and 40X15 for 315 KVA box. Feeder droppers shall be 25X8 mm.
Incomer dropper of 25 x 8 mm cross section for 63 /100 KVA box and 40 x 10 mm cross
section for 200KVA box and 40X15 for 315 KVA box be provided. All busbars and
droppers shall be properly drilled and de-burred. Each bus bar shall be of one single strip
without any joint.
Busbars shall be provided with durable PVC insulating sleeves of standard colour codefor
different phases. Corrugated/Spring & Plain washers shall be used for Nut-Bolt connections.
Busbars shall be mounted on suitable size support insulators which should be tightened from
inside. i.e. once fitted, should not be able to removed.
Minimum clearances, wherever shown, shall be as per General Arrangement Drawing

enclosed with this specification. Other clearances shall be as per requirement of IS:
4237amended upto date.
4.0 ENCLOSURE:
The Box & Doors shall be made up of CRCA MS sheet of 2mm thickness.
The manufacturing process of Box shall be Deep Drawn / Sheet Bending Process
(Amendment issued vide letter No. REC/DDUGJY/SBD/2017-18/1122 dated 15.05.2017)
In case of distribution boxes, the rounding of corners and slope on top shall be as shown in
the drawing.
The welding process of distribution boxes shall be done by MIG (Metal Inert Gas) welding
and workmanship/finishing should be good enough.
For Deep Drawn/ Sheet Bending Process (Amendment issued vide letter No.
REC/DDUGJY/SBD/2017-18/1122 dated 15.05.2017) Box: the general clear dimensions of
63 / 100 KVA Distribution Box shall be 1000 x 1010 x 325 (LXHXW) mm. The center
height of distribution box on front side shall be 1000 mm The general clear dimensions of 200
kVA distribution box shall be 1305 x 1050 x 325 (LXHXW) mm and for 315 kVA
distribution box shall be 1545 x 1050 x 325 (LXHXW) mm. The center height of the
distribution box on front side shall be 1050 mm
The Base and doors of enclosure shall be individually in one piece without any welding,
except for fixing of the accessories like hinges, clamps, mounting clamps, bolts etc.
63/100 kVA boxes shall have two doors as shown in the drawing fixed on right & left side of
the box with four hinges provided from inside of box. On closing of doors, right door shall
rest on the left door. Hinges shall not be visible and approachable after closing the box.
200/315 kVA boxes shall have two doors as shown in drawing fixed on right side & left
side of the box with four hinges on both sides shall be provided from inside of box. On
closing of doors, right door shall rest on the left door. Hinges shall not be visible and
approachable after closing the box.
Base and doors shall have flange / collars as shown in drawing. Collar of Base and doors shall
overlap by 10mm. Rubber gasket of suitable size shall be provided in between base and
doors, such that it provides proper sealing between the door and base of box to avoid
penetration of dust & ingress of water. Degree of protection shall be IP- 33 as per IS-8623
(amended up to date). Rubber Gasket shall be fixed with suitable adhesive. Four hinges on
each side shall be provided from inside of the box to fix the doors. Hinges shall be minimum
50 mm in length & made from 2mm thick sheet. Hinge stainless steel pin diameter shall be
4mm. The hinges shall not be visible from outside.
The MCCBs, Link Disconnector, Isolator and HRC fuse base with link shall be housed inside
the enclosure. Isolator operating handle shall be accessible only after opening of the doors.
Four set of Louvers (two sets on each side) of suitable size shall be provided as shown in
drawing. The louvers shall be provided such that heat dissipation is proper. The perforated
sheet of 20 SWG with 2.5 mm holes shall be welded from inside of the louvers.
Mounting of components inside the enclosure shall allow free air circulation keeping the
clearances as per drawings attached with specification.
Locking Arrangement to the Box:
The doors shall be closed with a push fit locking arrangement such that on pressing/pushing
the right door, the distribution box gets locked from inside from top & bottom. This
arrangement shall be operational for opening of the door with a handle provided outside the
door. Handle shall be removable type only. A Nylon washer shall be provided between the
handle and door to avoid penetration of water. One central lock with brass levers shall be
provided inside the door. Key way shall be provided on the door for operating the central lock
from outside. Key way shall be provided with cover.
A suitable cable termination arrangement with support insulators shall be provided on

Isolators and Link Disconnectors. The bimetallic lugs of adequate size, as per enclosed
specification & drawing, shall be provided. Clearances, Creepages and convenience in
making connections shall be ensured.
EC grade Aluminium Neutral Busbar of 300 x 25 x 8 mm for 63/100 KVA box and525 x
40 x 10 mm for 200 KVA and 40 x 15mm for 315 KVA Box capable of carrying for full
load current. Neutral Busbar shall be isolated with respect to body. The bimetallic lugs of
adequate size, as per enclosed specification & drawing, shall be provided. Neutral Busbar
shall be as shown in the drawing attached with the specifications.
Bolts of M10 mm and 35 mm length with 2 Nos. plain washer and two Nos. nut are to be
provided on both the sides for earthing of the distribution box. Earthing bolt is to be fixed on
U-structure (Earth Clamp) welded on both sides of the distribution box. Thickness of earth
clamp shall be 2mm. The top surface of the earth clamp shall be properly Zinc plated.
Earthing nut bolt and washer should be zinc plated. There should be no powder coating on top
surface of the earthing clamps.
Three bottom plates for 63/100 KVA and 4 bottom plates for 200 KVA and 5 bottom Plates
for 315 KVA shall be provided for incoming and outgoing cables as shown in the drawing.
Bottom plate of size 125mm x 125mm fixed with four screws from inside shall be provided
for incoming and outgoing cables. Bottom plates shall be provided with suitable holes and
rubber glands for the cables. Rubber glands shall be made such that internal diameter of
glands provided for cables should be closed with the rubber film of minimum 1mm thickness.
Cable will go through the glands by cutting the film of the glands. Bottom plates shall also be
provided with cable clamps as shown in drawing.
Necessary fixing arrangement shall be provided at the back of the enclosure to ensure proper
fixing on double pole structure by means of suitable clamps at 4 places.
Danger marking shall be provided in red colour on the right door of the distribution box.
Marking shall be scratch proof and properly readable.
All the components inside the Box shall be mounted on CRCA MS strips of 2mm thickness.
The mounting strips shall be provided with required bends or ribs to give the extra strength
and shall be powder coated or zinc plated.
All joints of current carrying parts shall be bolted with 8.8 grade High Tensile MS Nuts &
Bolts, Corrugated/spring & Plain Washers. The nuts & bolts should be of hexagonal type. All
the nuts, bolts & washers should be properly zinc plated.
Each distribution box shall be supplied with proper packing in five ply - corrugated box.
Name plate having details such as Month & year of manufacturing, Sr. No, and rating of
Distribution box, XXXXX‖Name of Employer‖ shall be riveted on the Distribution box door.
Name of Manufacturer shall be duly embossed on the door of the distribution box. The name
plate should be of stainless steel of thickness 1 mm.
Incoming and outgoing circuit should be duly highlighted with paint by stencil printing.
Adequate slope on the top of box shall be provided to drain out rainwater from the top.
3 Nos. MCCBs and 3 Nos. HRC fuse links in spare should be invariably provided with each
box.
Good-quality plastic sticker leaflet should be pasted inside of distribution box door. The
matter of instruction leaflet shall be provided by the employer. All the instructions in leaflet
should be in Hindi/English/Local language.
FINISHING OF DISTRIBUTION BOX:
The outer side and inside surface of the box shall be properly Pre-treated/
Phosphated in seven tank process as per IS: 6005 and shall be applied powder coating of
minimum 40 micron thickness. The Colour shade of light Admiralty gray (as per employer
requirement) for 63, 100, 200 and 315 KVA box as per IS: 5/2007 (Colours of Ready Mixed
paints and Enamels) shall be applied inside & outside surface of the box or as per state
practice. Powder coating shall be suitable for outdoor use, conforming IS: 13871 (amended
upto date) – Powder coatings. The process facility shall be in-house to ensure proper
quality for outdoor application.
TESTS & TEST CERTIFICATES:
In case of bought out items, routine and acceptance tests as per relevant IS and this
specification shall be carried out at the original manufacturers' works.
Routine Test (Carried out on all boxes):
Overall Dimensions Checking.
Insulation Resistance Tests.
High Voltage Test at 2500 V, 50 Hz AC for one minute.
Operation Test on MCCB/Isolator/Link Disconnector / HRC fuse base andfuse links.
Acceptance Tests (on complete Distribution Box):
Following tests shall be carried out as per acceptance tests in addition to routine tests on one
random sample of each rating out of the lot offered for inspection:
Temperature rise test on one sample of each rating.
Temperature rise test will be carried out as per the procedure given below:
For temperature rise test, a distribution box with all assembly of MCCBs / Link
Disconnectors / Isolator / HRC fuse base with link shall be kept in an enclosure such that the
temperature outside the box shall be maintained at 50 ° C.
20% more current than transformer secondary capacity i.e. for 63 KVA Distribution
Transformers full load current 84A, 20 % more is 100 A shall be kept in incoming circuit
keeping outgoing circuits short, till the temperature stabilizes and maximum temperature rise
should be recorded.
Time-Current Characteristics
The MCCB should be tested for time current characteristics at 1.05 & 1.2 times of overload
release setting current and should pass the requirement given in clause- 7.
TYPE TESTS :
ON COMPLETE BOX:
a. Temperature rise test:- The temperature rise test should be carried out as per IS:8623
High voltage test shall be carried out as per IS:8623 amended upto date.
Short Time Withstand Current Test on Distribution Box shall be carried out as per IS 8623 or
latest version.
The Distribution Box should be subjected to Short Time Withstand Current Test for 4KA for
2 seconds for 63/100 KVA Box and 8 KA for 2 second for 200/315 KVA box) all the circuits
independently. The test should be carried out after by-passing MCCBs.
Degree of protection for IP- 33 on complete box shall be carried out as per IS:
13947/1993 or the latest version thereof.
Time /current characteristic test on MCCBs shall be carried out as per clause 7.2 of this
specification as stated above.
ON ISOLATOR (SWITCH DISCONNECTOR):
All type tests on Isolator (Switch Disconnector) as per IS: 13947 (Part III) amended up to date
shall be carried out.
ON HRC fuses base and HRC fuse links :
All type tests on HRC fuses and HRC fuse links IS 13703 ( Part I & II amended upto date)
for HRC Fuse Base and HRC fuse link shall be carried out.
ON MCCB:
All type tests on MCCB as per IS-13947 amended upto date shall be carried out.
ON Link Disconnector
Following tests shall be carried out on link disconnector as per IS: Short Circuit Withstand
Strength
Temperature rise LimitsMechanical Operations
6. TYPE - TEST CERTIFICATES:
The Distribution Box, Isolator (Switch Disconnector), HRC fuse, HRC Fuse Link and MCCB
offered shall be fully type tested as per relevant IS and this specification. The Supplier shall
furnish detailed type test reports before commencement of supply. The detailed Type Test
Reports shall be furnished with relevant oscillogram and certified Drawings of the equipment
tested. The purchaser reserves the right to demand repetition of some or all the Type Tests in
presence of purchaser‗s representative at purchaser‗s cost.
All the type tests shall be carried out from laboratories accredited by National Accreditation
Board of Testing And Calibration Laboratories (NABL), Department of science & technology
, Govt. of India to prove that the complete Box, Isolator, HRC fuse, Link Disconnector &
MCCB meet the requirements of the specification. The Manufacturer should also furnish
certificate from laboratories that laboratories are having all the requisite test facility available
in house. The type test Reports conducted in manufacturers own laboratory and certified by
testing institute shall not be acceptable.
The Supplier should furnish the particulars giving specific required details of Distribution
Boxes, MCCBs, Isolator and Link Disconnector.
7.TESTING & MANUFACTURING FACILITIES:
Supplier must be an indigenous manufacturer. The Supplier must clearly indicate what testing
facilities are available in the works of manufacturer and whether the facilities are adequate to
carry out all Routine & Acceptance Tests. These facilities should be available to Employer‗s
Engineers, if deputed to carry out or witness the tests in the manufacturer's works. The
supplier must have all the in-house testing facilities to carry out the acceptance tests on the
Box.
The supplier shall furnish detailed process of manufacturing & Powder coating.
8.PROTOTYPE & DRAWINGS:-
The manufacturer has to manufacturer the prototype Unit for each rating as per this
specification before bulk manufacturing. The manufacturer should intimate the readiness of
prototype to employer. The Project Manager will inspect the prototype for approval. The
manufacturer should submit the final drawings in line with this specification and prototype to
employer for approval before bulk manufacturing. The approval of prototype & drawings
shall be a responsibility of manufacturer/Contractor.
GAURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 3-Ph, LT DISTRIBUTION BOX

OF 63/100 KVA DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
Sl. No. Description Bidder‟s offer
1 Client
2 Contractor
3 Scheme
4 Project
5 LOA No.
A MCCB
System Voltage
MCCB
Make of MCCB
Overload Release
Rated Short Circuit Breaking Capacity
Utilization Category
Multiple Outgoing Connector/Busbar
B Porcelain KITKAT
Make
Rating
C Enclosure
Material
Thickness
Manufacturing process
Overall Dimension
Degree of Protection
Type, Size & Material of Hinges provided to
Doors
Sets of Louvers Provided to the Box
U-Latch Arrangement
Earthing Arrangement
Nut, Bolts & Washer
Gland Plate
Box fixing arrangement
Danger Plate
Manufacturer & scheme name
Detail of Name Plate
Surface Treatment
Powder Coating
Dimensions Tolerance
Packing
18 (A).TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF LTCT METER CABINET SMART METER

BOX
(1) SCOPE:
1.1 The specification cover the manufacture, testing, and supply of moulded Meter Box of excellent
weather ability so as to house LT CT operated three phase four wire smart energy meter and LT
CT‘s to offer protection against harsh weather, external hazards and internal hazards having anti
corrosive, dust proof, shock proof, rust proof, vermin and water proof and fire proof, UV stabilized
and pilfer proof. The Boxes should be suitable for indoor and outdoor installations, weather proof
and confirm to ingress protection level IP-65 and shall not deform or melt when exposed to fire.
1.2 It should also conform as per the technical requirements.

1.3 It shall consist of 2 compartments. The upper compartment is meant for housing 1 No. Static
Three phase four wire smart meter and the lower compartment are for housing 4 Nos.
Current Transformers (CTs.).
1.4 Bidder shall also provide four no. Epoxy Resin Cast CTs, control cables, clamps, terminal
block, etc. as mentioned in BoQ.
(2) MATERIAL OF CABINET BOX:

2.1 The Cabinet Boxes must be weather proof made out of Thermo setting Plastic i.e. glass
reinforced polyester sheet moulding compound (SMC) confirming to IS: 13410: 1992 with flame
retardant properties, mechanical and corrosion resistant properties and also conform to self-
extinguishing properties as per IS-4249 & requirements of this specification. The overall
dimension of double compartment Box to accommodate a L.T. C.T Operated three phase four
wire Static Energy Smart Meter in upper compartment and four CTs. in lower compartment
should be as below:-
Height (H) Minimum Width (W) Minimum Depth (D)

Upper Compartment for
housing meter.
420 mm. 350 mm. 230 mm.
Minimum
Lower Compartment for
housing CTs.
430 mm. 350 mm. 230 mm.
Overall dimension 850 mm. 350 mm. 230 mm.
2.2 These should be capable of withstanding temperatures of boiling water for 5 minutes
continuously without distortion or softening. The thickness of the box shall not be less than 2.5 mm
on all sides including door. The Box shall have 4 mm thickness on the tongue and groove area. The
Meter Box cover shall have a groove to hold minimum of 2.5 mm. Neoprene gasket. The tongue of
the base shall ensure tongue, Groove and sealing arrangement against rainwater and dust entering
inside the Box. Other better arrangement can also be offered subject to purchaser‘s approval. The
Box shall have its roof tapering down for easy flow of water.
2.3 The enclosures should be suitable for outdoor use, Pole mounting and should not soften, bend
or melt at high temperature. It should have flame retardant properties and material of it should not
Type of DTR Approximate full load current (Amps) Sizes of cable (sq mm)
generate burning droplets in the event of fire.

2.4 The Boxes shall generally comply with the provision of IS: 14772: 2000. The Boxes shall be
suitable for outdoor/indoor application. The Box shall be with good workmanship. There should
be a minimum of 50 mm. clearances on all sides and 25 mm. clearances on the front and 10 mm.
clearances on the back of the meter.
2.5 Soft rubber gaskets shall be provided all rounds wherever required protection against entry
of dust and water as per required IP protection of IP65.
2.6 The Cabinet Box shall be off white.

(3) CONSTRUCTION:
The contents of the box are as follow:
(i) Viewing Window: The viewing window made up of a scratch and break resistant, UV resistant,
transparent polycarbonate and shall be provided on the door for reading the meter without
inconvenience. The minimum thickness of the viewing window shall be 2.0 mm. The window shall
be ultra-sonically welded with meter box from inside. There should not be any ingress of moisture
through this window into the box.
(ii) Internal Hinges: A minimum of 2 Nos. Brass internal hinges on each door well protected
against corrosion shall be provided. The hinges of the door should be concealed and they shall be
fixed to flanges provided to the base and cover of the box in such a manner that the door opened
by minimum 120 degrees.
(iii) Earthing Bolt: 8 mm. dia G.I. Bolt 20 mm lengths with 2 Nos. nuts and 2 nos. washers for
earthing all metal parts used for fixing the meter shall be provided.
(iv) Fixing arrangement: The top compartment of the box should be used for the three phase four
wire energy meter, modem and antenna. The meter shall be mounted on SMC sheet of 4 mm.
thickness with suitable metallic screws and the screws shall not be protrude outside of the box.
The meter base supports inside the box are raised by minimum 10 mm. in the box for ease of
wiring. While fixing the meter, Screws should not protrude outside. The meter box shall have 4
Nos. of wall mounting bracket made out of SMC with proper screw to fix with the bottom base and
provision and provision for 6 mm. dia-hole for mounting the SMC Cabinet Box on a Pole with
suitable screws. The fixing shall not be complex and shall be easily approachable for connections
when the door(s) in open condition and is completely tamper proof once it is sealed.
(v) Similarly SMC shall be provided for mounting four no. of LT CT‘s in lower compartment
box. Separate doors for each compartment should be provided. Suitable handle/ knobs shall be
provided on both the doors.
(vi) Latch: The door shall be provided with G.I latch or ‗U‘ clamp to secure with the base of the
box.
(vii) Sealing arrangement: The box shall have provision for minimum 2 Nos. seals in a manner
that makes it fully tamper proof.
(viii) Inlet and Outlet: 4 Nos. holes with superior quality rubber cable glands shall be provided on
both sides of the lower compartment of the box for cable entry. Internal diameter for incoming /
outgoing gland shall be suitable for following power cable as below. Sizes of cable with
transformer capacity
100 150 120

250 440 240
Similarly, 4 Nos. holes with superior quality rubber cable glands shall be provided in the Partition
sheet of upper & lower compartments of the cubicle for entry of secondary wires of CTs. Internal
diameter for gland used in partition sheet shall be 15mm.Glands shall be made such that internal
diameter of glands provided for cables should be closed with the film of minimum 1mm thickness.
Cable will go through the cable glands by piercing the film of the glands. Cable glands shall be
fixed with suitable adhesive so that the same does not get removed.
(ix) Printing:
Name plate: printed metallic/Laser engraved name plate shall have details of Purchase order No &
Date. It shall be fixed with rivet such that it cannot be removed easily. In addition to this the plate
should have following engraving:
1. Manufacturer name / Trade mark / Place of origin

2. Manufacturer Serial no of the meter'
3. Purchaser Order No
4. Property of APDCL
5. APDCL Logo"
6. Name of Project specifying RDSS:
A blank sticker shall also be fixed on the meter box for use of field staff to indicate the CT ratio,
Multiplying Factor (MF) etc.
(x) Sample Cabinet Box: One sample of meter box as per specification and drawing should be
submitted with the offer.
(xi) Tests: The double compartment LT CT meter box and material of meter box shall be subject to
type test confirming to relevant IS: 13410: 1992, IS: 14772 , IS : 4249 and IS: 11000 (Part -2 Section-
1).
(4) General technical specifications of L.T. current transformer for use in connection with L.T. C.T
operated energy metering are as follows:
i. The Current Transformers shall be used with smart poly phase energy meters for measuring
energy
ii. C.T. shall confirm to IS:2705/1992 or its latest version thereof.
iii. Current transformer should be resin cast, ring type construction. Construction shall be
single phase single core type. The internal diameters of the C.T. shall be approved by
APDCL.
iv. Current ratio:400/5A and 150/5A.
v. Suitable mounting robust clamp as per manufacturer design shall be provided.
vi. Secondary terminal shall be of brass stud type. The size shall be minimum 6.0 mm dia. 20
mm outside length with spring washer and double nuts.
vii. The Current Transformer will have to be suitable for continuous working at system
voltage up to 660Volts and frequency 50Hz.
viii. Accuracy class of 0.5s at 0.8 pf (lag) as per IS.
ix. Rated burden shall be of 5 VA (minimum).

x. The instrument security factor shall be less than or equal to 5.
xi. Rated continuous thermal current temperature rise over ambient: 1.2 times rated
primary current with maximum temp. rise limit of 50 deg C.
xii. Rated short time current of 5 KA for 1 sec. corresponding to rated dynamic peak
current of 2.5x 5 KA (peak).
xiii. One minute withstand of power frequency Voltage between primary & secondary:3KV.
xiv. The ratio, name of manufacture / monogram and year of manufacturing shall be engraved
on the body of C.T. In addition name plate of anodized aluminium indicating the
necessary details, year of manufacture etc. engraved on it shall be provided in such
a manner that the information is clearly visible after mounting.
xv. The secondary and primary terminals shall be clearly marked as S1 & S2. These
markings should be permanent in nature
xvi. The bidders should submit the drawings of offered CTs.

19. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR POLYMERIC 33 KV AND 11 KV PIN

INSULATOR
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer‘s works, transport to site,
storage, insurance, erection and commissioning of polymeric 33 kV pin insulator for 33 kV lines.
2.0 STANDARD
Polymeric compact insulator with suitable groove in upper pin and long threads in lower part of the pin
with nuts, suitable for 33 KV lines shall be conforming to IEC: 1109 with its latest amendments and
revision and having minimum mechanical failing load of 10 K.N. Insulators conforming to any other
internationally accepted standards which ensure equal or higher quality than the standard mentioned
would also be acceptable. A high-class quality, corrosion resistant, fiberglass reinforced rod is the core
of every insulator with ultimate mechanical strength at least twice the maximum working load.
3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0 The composite polymer insulator should be uni-body design and injection molded directly to the rod
and sealed to the end fittings with bead of silicon to give the insulator high dielectric strength and
protect it from all environmental conditions. The design of the insulator shall be such that stress due to
expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
5.0 THE INSULATOR SHALL BE IN ONE PIECE:

The dimensions of the pins insulator shall be as follows:
33 KV 11KV
a) Composite insulator length 310 mm 210 MM

b) Failing minimum load 10 KN 5 KN
c) Creepage distance (min) mm 925 mm 580 mm
d) Dry power frequency 1 min withstand voltage 70 kV (RMS) 70 KV (RMS)
e) Wet power frequency 1 min withstand voltage 70 kV (RMS) 70 KV(RMS)
f) Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage 170 Kvp 145 Kvp
6.0 TESTS:
Pin shall comply with the following tests.
6.1 TYPE TEST:
a) Visual examination test

b) Verification of dimensions
c) Checking of threads
d) Galvanizing test
e) Mechanical strength tests
6.2 ROUTINE TEST:

a) Visual examination test
6.3 ACCEPTANCE TEST:
a) Galvanizing test
b) Mechanical test
7.0 INSPECTION:
All tests and inspections or shall be carried out at the place of manufacturers unless otherwise agreed by
the purchaser and the manufacturers at the time of purchase. A manufacturer shall afford the inspector or
third-party nominee representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy that the
materials are being purchased as per specification. The purchaser reserved the right to have the test
carried out at his co.st by an independent agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of the
materials supplied.
8.0 MARKING:
The pins shall be marked with name of manufacturer, year and name of project.
9.0 The temperature withstanding capacity as per IS for general electrical equipment.
Guaranteed technical particulars of 11 KV composite polymer pin insulators [5 KN]:

2 Address:
(a) Registered Office
(b) Factory
3 Type of Insulators
Standard specification to which the insulators
4 manufactured and tested
Name of Material used in manufacture of the Insulator
5 (With class/ Grade)
(a) Material of core rod
Material of Housing & Weather sheds (silicon content
(b) by weight)
(c) Material of end fittings: tongue/ clevis
(d) Sealing compound for end fitting
6 Colour Glaze of Insulator
7 Electrical Characteristics:
(a) Nominal System Voltage (kV RMS)
(b) Highest System voltage (kV RMS)
(c) Dry power frequency withstand (kV RMS)
(d) Wet power frequency withstand (kV RMS)
(e) Dry flash over voltage (kV RMS)
(f) Wet flash over voltage kV RMS)
(g) Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage
(a) Positive (kV Peak)

(b) Negative (kV Peak)
(h) Dry lightening impulse flashover voltage
(a) Positive (kV Peak)
(b) Negative (kV Peak)
RIV at 1MHz when energized at 10kV/30kV(rms)
(i) under dry condition(microvolt)
(j) Creepage distance (min) mm
8 Mechanical Characteristics:
Minimum failing load (KN)
9 dimensions of insulator:
(i) Weight(kg)
(ii) dia of FRP rod(mm)
(iii) Length of ERP rod (MM)
(iv) dia of weather sheds (mm)
(v) Thickness of housing (mm)
(vi) Dry arc distance(mm)
Dimensioned drawings of Insulator (including weight
10 with tolerances in weight) enclosed
Method of fixing of sheds to housing specify): Single
mould or modular construction (injection moulding/
11 compression moulding)
12 No. of weather sheds
13 Type of sheds
(i) Aerodynamic
(ii) With under ribs
14 Packing details
(a) Type of packing
(b) No. of Insulators in each pack
(c) Gross weight of package
20. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 11 KV/22 KV/33 KV COMPOSITE

INSULATORS
1.0 SCOPE:
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing and supply of 11KV / 22KV / 33 KV
Composite Insulators. The composite insulators shall be of the following type:
 Long rod insulators for conductors in tension application at angle / cut points the insulators shall
be of tongue & clevis type.
 Line post insulators or pin insulators for straight line locations.
2.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:
The insulators to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous
operation under the following tropical conditions.
Maximum ambient temperature (Degree C) … 50

Minimum ambient temperature (Degree C) … 3.5
Relative Humidity (%) … 10 to 100
Maximum Annual Rainfall (mm) … 1450
Maximum Wind pressure (kg/m.sq.) … 150
Maximum wind velocity (km/hour) … 45
Maximum altitude above mean sea level (meter) … 1000
Isoceraunic level (days/year) … 50
Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration) … 0.3 g
Moderately hot and humid tropical climate Conductive
to rust and fungus growth
3.0 SYSTEM PARTICULARS:
a) Nominal System Voltage 11 kV 22 kV 33 kV

b) Corresponding highest system Voltage 12 kV 24kV 36 kV

c) Frequency 50 Hz with 3% tolerance
d) Number of phase 3 3 3
e) Neutral earthing effectively grounded.
4.0 STANDARDS:
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the specifications insulators shall confirm to the latest revisions
of all relevant standards available at the time of placement of the order. The standards are listed in
Annexure ‗A‘.
5.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The composite insulators shall generally conform to latest Standards as listed in Annexure ‗A‘
The Composite Insulators will be used on lines on which the conductors will be A.A.A. Conductor of
size up to 200 sq. mm. and ACSR of any size up to Panther (0.2 sq. inch copper equivalent). The
insulators should withstand the conductor tension, the reversible wind load as well as the high frequency
vibrations due to wind.
Supplier must be an indigenous manufacturer and manufacturer of composite insulators of rating 33 kV

or above OR must have developed proven in house technology and manufacturing process for composite
insulators of above rating OR possess technical collaboration /association with a manufacturer of
composite insulators of rating 33kV or above. The Manufacturer shall furnish necessary evidence in
support of the above, which can be in the form of certification from the utilities concerned, or any other
documents to the satisfaction of the Employer.
Insulator shall be suitable for both the suspension and strain type of load & shall be of tongue & clevis
type. The diameter of Composite Insulator shall be less than 200 mm. The center-to-center distance
between tongue & clevis shall be max. 300 mm for 11 kV, 450 mm for 22 kV & 550 mm for 33 kV
composite Insulator.
Insulators shall have sheds with good self-cleaning properties. Insulator shed profile, spacing, projection
etc. and selection in respect of polluted conditions shall be generally in accordance with the
recommendation of IEC-60815/IS: 13134.
The size of Composite insulator, minimum creepage distance and mechanical strength along with
hardware fittings shall be as follows:
Sr. No. Type of Nominal Highest Visible Wet Power Impulse Minimum Creepage Center to Min. Failing Shed
Composite System System Discharge Frequency Withstand Distance (mm) Center load KN Diameter
insulators Voltage kV Voltage Test Voltage Withstand voltage (Heavily Polluted Distance (mm)
(rms) KV (rms) kV(rms) Voltage kV(rms) 25mm/kV) Between
kV(rms) Tongue & (min)
Clevis (mm)
i. Long Rod 11 12 9 35 75 320 300 45 100

insulator
22 24 18 55 125 600 450 70 100
33 36 27 75 170 900 550 70 100
ii. Post/Pin 11 12 9 35 75 320 5

Insulator
22 24 18 55 125 560 10
33 36 27 75 170 900 10
6.0 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE OF COMPOSITE INSULATORS:

The tolerances on all dimensions e.g. diameter, length and creepage distance shall be allowed as
follows in line with-IEC 61109:
(0.04d+1.5) mm when d≤300mm. (0.025d+6) mm when d>300 mm.
Where, d being the dimensions in millimeters for diameter, length or creepage distance as the case
may be. However no negative tolerance shall be applicable to creepage distance.
7.0 INTERCHANGEABILITY:
The composite insulator together with the tongue & clevis fittings shall be of standard design
suitable for use with the hardware of any other indigenous make conforming to relevant standards
referred above.
8.0 CORONA AND RI PERFORMANCE:

All surfaces shall be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projections. No part shall be subjected
to excessive localized pressure. The insulator and metal parts shall be so designed and manufactured
that it shall avoid local corona formation and not generate any radio interference beyond specified
limit under the operating conditions.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF COMPOSITE INSULATORS
Polymeric Insulators shall be designed to meet the high quality, safety and reliability and are
capable of withstanding a wide range of environmental conditions.
Polymeric Insulators shall consist of three parts, at least two of which are insulating parts:
 Core- the internal insulating part

 Housing- the external insulating part
 Metal end fittings.
1.0 CORE:
It shall be a glass-fiber reinforced epoxy resin rod of high strength (FRP rod). Glass fibers and resin
shall be optimized in the FRP rod. Glass fibers shall be Boron free electrically corrosion resistant
(ECR) glass fiber or Boron free E-Glass and shall exhibit both high electrical integrity and high
resistance to acid corrosion. The matrix of the FRP rod shall be Hydrolysis resistant. The FRP rod shall
be manufactured through Pultrusion process. The FRP rod shall be void free.
2.0 HOUSING:
The FRP rod shall be covered by a seamless sheath of a silicone elastometric compound or silicone
alloy compound of a thickness of 3mm minimum. It shall be one-piece housing using Injection
Molding Principle to cover the core. The elastomer housing shall be designed to provide the necessary
creepage distance and protection against environmental influences. Housing shall conform to the
requirements of IEC 61109/92-93 with latest amendments
3.0 WEATHER SHEDS:
The composite polymer weather sheds made of a silicone elastometric compound or silicone alloy
compound shall be firmly bonded to the sheath, vulcanized to the sheath or molded as part of the
sheath and shall be free from imperfections It should protect the FRP rod against environmental
influences, external pollution and humidity. The weather sheds should have silicon content of
minimum 30% by weight. The strength of the weather shed to sheath interface shall be greater than the
tearing strength of the polymer. The interface, if any, between sheds and sheath (housing) shall be free
from voids.
4.0 METAL END FITTINGS:
End fitting transmit the mechanical load to the core. They shall be made of spheroidal graphite cast
iron, malleable cast iron or forged steel or aluminum alloy. They shall be connected to the rod by
means of a controlled compression technique. Metal end fittings shall be suitable for tongue & clevis
hard wares of respective specified mechanical load and shall be hot dip galvanized after, all fittings
have been completed. The material used in fittings shall be corrosion resistant. As the main duty of the
end fittings is the transfer of mechanical loads to the core the fittings should be properly attached to the
core by a coaxial or hexagonal compression process & should not damage the individual fibers or
crack the core. The gap between fitting and sheath shall be sealed by a flexible silicone elastomeric
compound or silicone alloy compound sealant. System of attachment of end fitting to the rod shall
provide superior sealing performance between housing, i.e. seamless sheath and metal connection. The
sealing must be moisture proof. The dimensions of end fittings of insulators shall be in accordance
with the standard dimensions stated in IEC: 60120/ IS: 2486 - Part-II /1989.
5.0 WORKMANSHIP:
All the materials shall be of latest design and conform to the best engineering practices adopted in the
high voltage field. Manufacturers shall offer only such insulators as are guaranteed by them to be
satisfactory and suitable for continued good service in power transmission lines.
The design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages shall be such as to give
maximum working load, highest mobility, best resistance to corrosion, good finish and elimination of
sharp edges and corners.
The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of
the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
The core shall be sound and free of cracks and voids that may adversely affect the insulators.
Weather sheds shall be uniform in quality. They shall be clean, sound, smooth and shall be free from
defects and excessive flashing at parting lines.
End fittings shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes and rough edges. End fittings should be
effectively sealed to prevent moisture ingress; effectiveness of sealing system must be supported by
test documents. All surfaces of the metal parts shall be perfectly smooth without projecting points or
irregularities, which may cause corona.
All load bearing surfaces shall be sooth and uniform so as to distribute the loading stresses uniformly.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized to give a minimum average coating of zinc equivalent to
610 gm/sq.m. or 87 microm thickness and shall be in accordance with the requirement of IS:4759. the
zinc used for galvanizing shall be of purity 99.5% as per IS:4699. The zinc coating shall be uniform,
adherent, smooth, reasonably bright continuous and free from imperfections such as flux, ash rust
stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The galvanized metal parts shall be guaranteed to withstand at
least four successive dips each lasting for one (1) minute duration under the standard preece test. The
galvanizing shall be carried out only after any machining.
6.0 TESTS AND STANDARDS:

Insulators offered shall be manufactured with the same configuration & raw materials as used in the
insulators for which design & type test reports are submitted. The manufacturer shall submit a
certificate for the same. The design & type test reports submitted shall not be more than five years old.
7.0 DESIGN TESTS:

For polymeric insulators it is essential to carry out design test as per clause 4.1 of IEC 61109 / 92-93
with latest amendments. The design tests are intended to verify the suitability of the design, materials
and method of manufacture (technology). When a composite insulator is submitted to the design tests,
the result shall be considered valid for the whole class of insulators, which are represented by the one
tested and having the following characteristics:
 Same materials for the core, and sheds and same manufacturing method;
 Same material of the fittings, the same design, the same method of attachment;
 Same or greater layer thickness of the shed material over the core (including a sheath where
used);
 Same or smaller ratio of the highest system voltage to insulation length;
 Same or smaller ratio of all mechanical loads to the smallest core diameter between fittings
 Same or greater diameter of the core.
The tested composite insulators shall be identified by a drawing giving all the dimensions with the
manufacturing tolerances.
Manufacturer should submit test reports for Design Tests as per IEC – 61109 (clause – 5). Additionally
following tests shall be carried out or reports for the tests shall be submitted after award of contract:
UV test: the test shall be carried out in line with clause 7.2 of ANSI C29.13.
8.0 TYPE TESTS:
The type tests are intended to verify the main characteristics of a composite insulator. The type tests
shall be applied to composite insulators, the class of which has passed the design tests.
Following Type test shall be conducted on a suitable number of individual insulator units, components,
materials or complete strings:
SI. No. Description of type test Test procedure / standard
1 Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage test As per IEC 61109(Clause 6.1)
2 Wet power frequency test As per IEC 61109(Clause 6.2)
3 Mechanical load-time test As per IEC 61109(Clause 6.4)
4 Radio interference test As per IEC 61109(Clause 6.5) revised
5 Recovery of Hydrophobicity test Annexure – B This test may be repeated every

3yrs by the manufacturer
6 Chemical composition test for silicon Annexure – B Or any other test method
content acceptable to the Employer
7 Brittle fracture resistance test Annexure – B
The Manufacturer shall submit type test reports as per IEC 61109. Additional type tests required if any
shall be carried out by the manufacturer, after award of contract for which no additional charges shall
be payable. In case, the tests have already been carried out, the manufacturer shall submit reports for
the same.
10.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The test samples after having withstood the routine test shall be subject to the following acceptance
tests in order indicated below:
(a) Verification of dimensions : Clause 7.2 IEC: 61109,

(b) Verification of the locking system : Clause 7.3 IEC: 61109,
(if applicable)
(c) Verification of tightness of the interface : Clause 7.4 IEC: 61109
Between end fittings & Insulator housing amendment 1of 1995
(d) Verification of the specified : Clause 7.4 IEC: 61109,
mechanical loadamendment 1of 1995
(e) Galvanizing test : IS:2633/IS:6745
11.0 ROUTINE TESTS:
Sr. No. Description Standard

1 Identification of marking As per IEC: 61109 Clause 8.1
2 Visual Inspection As per IEC: 61109 Clause 8.2
3 Mechanical routine test As per IEC: 61109 Clause 8.3
Every polymeric insulator shall withstand mechanical routine test at ambient temperature
tensile load at RTL corresponding to at least 50 % of the SML for at least 10 sec.
12.0 TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE:

Following tests shall also be carried out on all components as applicable:
 Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanizing
 Chemical analysis, mechanical, metallographic test and magnetic particle inspection for
malleable castings.
 Chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings.
13.0 SAMPLE BATCH FOR TYPE TESTING:
The Manufacturer shall offer material for sample selection for type testing only after getting Quality
Assurance Plan approved by Employer. The sample for type testing will be manufactured strictly in
accordance with the approved Quality Assurance Plan.
14.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:
The Manufacturer shall submit following information:
 Test certificates of the raw materials and bought out accessories.

 Statement giving list of important raw material, their grades along with names of sub-
Manufacturers for raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are
tested. List of tests normally carried out on raw materials in presence of Manufacturer‘s
representative.
 List of manufacturing facilities available.
 Level of automation achieved and lists of areas where manual processing exists.
 List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally carried out for
quality control and details of such tests and inspections.
 List of testing equipments available with the Manufacturer for final testing of equipment along
with valid calibration reports.
 The manufacturer shall submit Manufacturing Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for approval &
the same shall be followed during manufacture and testing.
 The Manufacturer shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out raw
materials/accessories and central excise passes for raw material at the time of inspection.
 The Employer‘s representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works and all
places of manufacture, where insulator, and its component parts shall be manufactured and the
representatives shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Manufacturer‘s and
sub-Manufacturer‘s works, raw materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting
necessary test as detailed herein.
 The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Manufacturer only under packed
condition. The Employer shall select samples at random from the packed lot for carrying out
acceptance tests. The lot offered for inspection shall be homogeneous and shall contain
insulators manufactured in 3-4 consecutive weeks.
 The Manufacturer shall keep the Employer informed in advance of the time of starting and the
progress of manufacture of material in their various stages so that arrangements could be made
for inspection.
 No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily
inspected and tested unless the Employer in writing waives off the inspection. In the later case
also the material shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing specified herein has been
completed.
 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Manufacturer of his
responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection, if such material are later found to be defective
15.0 TEST CERTIFICATE:
The manufacturer shall furnish detailed type test reports of the offered composite Insulators as per
clause 8.2 of the Technical Specifications at the NABL approved laboratories to prove that the
composite Insulators offered meet the requirements of the specification. These Type Tests should have
been carried out within five years prior to the date of opening of this manufacturer.
The Employer reserves right to demand repetition of some or all the Type Test in presence of
Employer‘s representative. For this purpose, the manufacturer shall quote unit rates for carrying out
each Type Test. However, such unit rates will not be considered for evaluation of the offer. In case the
unit fails in the Type Tests, the complete supply shall be rejected.
16.0 TESTING FACILITIES:
The manufacturer must clearly indicate what testing facilities are available in the works of the
manufacturer and whether facilities are adequate to carry out all Routine & acceptance Tests. These
facilities should be available to Employer's Engineers if deputed or carry out or witness the tests in the
manufacturer works. The insulators shall be tested in accordance with the procedure detailed in IEC
61109 / 92-93 with latest amendments.
17.0 DRAWINGS:
The Manufacturer shall furnish full description and illustration of the material offered.
The Manufacturer shall furnish the outline drawing (3 copies) of each insulator unit including a cross
sectional view of the long rod insulator unit. The drawing shall include but not be limited to the
following information:
 Long rod diameter with manufacturing tolerances Minimum Creepage distance with positive
tolerance Protected creepage distance.
 Eccentricity of the long rod unit Axial run out Radial run out.
 Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics.
 Size and weight of ball and socket/tongue & clevis Weight of composite long rod units.
 Materials Identification mark.
 Manufacturer‘s catalogue number.
 After placement of award the Manufacturer shall submit fully dimensioned insulator crate
drawing for different type of insulators for approval of the Employer.
18.0 RETEST AND REJECTION:
Sample Procedure for testing of insulators shall be as per clause 7.1 to 7.6 of IEC 61109 for
Acceptance & Routine Tests. For the sampling tests, two samples are used, E1and E2. The sizes of
these samples are indicated in the table below.
Sample Size
Lot Size (N) E1 E2
N < 300 Subject to agreement
300 < N < 2000 4 3
2000< N < 5000 8 4
5000< N < 10000 12 6

If more than 10000 insulators are concerned, they shall be divided into an optimum number of lots
comprising between 2000 and 10000 insulators. The results of the tests shall be evaluated separately for
each lot.
The insulators shall be selected by the Employer‘s representative from the lot at random. The samples shall
be subjected to the applicable sampling tests.
18.1 The sampling tests are:
Verification of dimensions - (E1 + E2)

Verification of the locking system - (E2)
Verification of tightness of the interface between - (E2)
end fittings & Insulator housing
Verification of the specified mechanical load SML - (E1)
Galvanizing test - (E2)
In the event of a failure of the sample to satisfy a test, the retesting procedure shall be as follows:
If only one insulator or metal part fails to comply with the sampling tests, a new sample equal to twice the
quantity originally submitted to the tests shall be subjected to retesting. The retesting shall comprise the
test in which failure occurs. If two or more insulator or metal parts fail to comply with any of the sampling
tests or if any failure occurs during the retesting, the complete lot is considered as not complying with this
standard and shall be withdrawn by the manufacturer.
Provided the cause of the failure can be clearly identified, the manufacturer may sort the lot to eliminate all
the insulators with these defects. The sorted lot then be resubmitted for testing. The number then selected
shall be three times the first chosen quantity for tests. If any insulators fail during this retesting, the
complete lot is considered as not complying with this standard and shall be withdrawn by the
manufacturer.
18.2 Verification of dimensions (E1 + E2)
The dimensions given in the drawings shall be verified. The tolerances given in the drawing are valid. If no
tolerances are given in the drawings the values mentioned in this specification shall hold good.
18.3 Verification of the locking system (E2)
This test applies only to the insulators equipped with socket coupling as specified by IEC 120 and is
performed according to IEC 383.
18.4 Verification of tightness of the interface between end fittings & Insulator housing (E2)
One insulator selected randomly from the sample E2, shall be subjected to crack indication by dye
penetration, in accordance with ISO 3452, on the housing in the zone embracing the complete length of the
interface between the housing and metal fitting and including an additional area, sufficiently extended
beyond the end of the metal part.
 The indication shall be performed in the following way.

 the surface shall be properly pre-cleaned with the cleaner.
 the penetrant, which shall act during 20 minutes, shall be applied on the cleaned surface.
 within 5 minutes after the application of the penetrant, the insulator shall be subjected, at the
ambient temperature, to a tensile load of 70 % of the SML, applied between the metal fittings; the
tensile load shall be increased rapidly but smoothly from zero up to 70 % of the SML, and then
maintained at this value for 1 minute.
 the surface shall be cleaned with the excess penetrant removed, and dried.
 the developer shall be applied if necessary.
 The surface shall be inspected.
 Some housing materials may be penetrated by the penetrant. In such cases evidence shall be
provided to validate the interpretation of the results.
 After the 1 min. test at 70 % of the SML, if any cracks occur, the housing and, if necessary, the
metal fittings and the core shall be cut, perpendicularly to the crack in the middle of the widest of
the indicated cracks, into two halves. The surface of the two halves shall then be investigated for
the depth of the cracks.
 Verification of the specified mechanical load SML
 The insulators of the sample E1 shall be subjected at ambient temperature to a tensile load, applied
between the couplings. The tensile load shall be increased rapidly but smoothly from zero to
approximately 75 % of the SML, and then be gradually increased to the SML in a time between 30
sec. to 90 sec.
 If 100 % of the SML is reached in less than 90 s, the load (100 % of the SML) shall be maintained
for the remainder of the 90 s. (This test is considered to be equivalent to a 1min withstand test at
the SML.) The insulators have passed the test at 13.4 & 13.5 above if:
 No failure (breakage or complete pull out of the core, or fracture of the metal fitting) occurs either
during the 1 min. 70 % withstand test (a) or during the 1 min.100 % withstand test (b).
 No cracks are indicated after the dye penetration method described in 13.4 above.
 The investigation of the halves described in 13.4 above shows clearly that the cracks do not reach
the core.
18.5 Galvanizing test:
This test shall be performed according to IS: 2633/IS: 6745 on galvanized parts.
19.0 MARKINGS:
Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the following details as per IEC- 61109:
 Name or trademark of the manufacturer.

 Voltage & Type
 Month and year of manufacturing.
 Min. failing load/guaranteed mechanical strength in kilo Newton followed by the word ‗KN‘ to
facilitate easy identification.
 ‗Employer Name‘.
 One 10 mm thick ring or 20 mm thick spot of suitable quality of paint shall be marked on the
end fitting of each composite long rod of particular strength for easy identification. The paint
shall not have any deteriorating effect on the insulator performance.
Following codes shall be used as identification mark:
For 45 KN long rod units : Blue

For 70 KN long rod units : Red
20.0 PACKING:
All insulators shall be packed in strong corrugated box of min. 7 ply duly paletted or wooden crates.
The gross weight of the crates along with the material shall not normally exceed 100 Kg to avoid
hackling problem. The crates shall be suitable for outdoor storage under wet climate during rainy
season.
 The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit, storage at site
and subsequent handling in the field.
 Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or Dunn age or spacers shall be provided to prevent damage
or deformation during transit and handling.
 All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at their destination
and to avoid the possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched on account of faulty packing
and faulty or illegible markings. Each wooden case /crate /corrugated box shall have all the markings
stencilled on it in indelible ink.
 The Manufacturer shall provide instructions regarding handling and storage precautions to be taken at
site.
21.0 GUARANTEE
The Manufacturer of insulators shall guarantee overall satisfactory performance of the insulators. The
manufacturer shall furnish in the form attached (Schedule 'A') all the guaranteed technical particulars.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS COMPOSITE INSULATOR UNIT 11KV (45KN)

/ 11KV (70KN)
(To be filled separately for each type mentioned above)
Sl. No. Parameter Name Parameter Type

1. Type of insulator Text
2. Standard according to which the insulators manufactured and tested Text
Name of material used in manufacture of the insulator with
3.
class/grade
Material of core (FRP rod)
3.1 E-glass or ECR-glass Text
Boron content
Material of housing & weather sheds Text
3.2
(Silicon content by weight)
3.3 Material of end fittings Text
3.4 Sealing compound for end fitting Text
4.0 Colour Text
5.0 Electrical characteristics
5.1. Nominal system voltage KV (rms) Numeric
5.2 Highest system voltage KV (rms) Numeric
5.3 Dry Power frequency withstand voltage KV (rms) Numeric
5.4 Wet Power frequency withstand voltage KV (rms) Numeric
5.5 Dry flashover voltage KV (rms) Numeric
5.6 Wet flash over voltage KV (rms) Numeric
Dry lighting impulse withstand voltage Numeric
5.7 Positive KV (peak) KV (peak)
Negative
Dry lighting impulse flashover voltage Numeric
5.8 Positive KV (peak) KV (peak)
Negative
RIV at 1 MHz when energized at Numeric
5.9
10 kV/ 30 kV (rms) under dry condition Micro volts
6.0 Creepage distance (Min.) (320mm) (mm) Numeric
6.1 Center to center distance between tongue & clevis) (300mm) (mm) Numeric
6.2 Shed diameter (100mm) (mm) Numeric
7.0 Mechanical characteristics: KN Numeric

Minimum failing load
8.0 Dimensions of insulator
8.1 Weight Kg Numeric
Method of fixing of sheds to housing
(Specify): Single mould or Text
9.0. Modular construction (Injection molding /
compression molding)
10.0 No of weather sheds Text
11.0 Type of sheds
11.1 Aerodynamic Text
11.2 With under ribs Text
12. Packing details
12.1 Type of packing Text
12.2 No. of insulators in each pack Text
12.3 Gross weight of package Text
13.0 Design Test Report, Type Test Report of Boolean

insulator enclosed.
14.0 Any other particulars which the File
Manufacturer may like to give
22.0 STANDARDS TO BE ADOPTED FOR COMPOSITE INSULATORS
Sl. Indian Title International

No. Standard Standard
Definition, test methods and acceptance criteria for IEC: 61109
1 - composite insulators for
A.C. overhead lines above 1000V
Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines with a IEC: 60383
2 IS: 731 nominal voltage greater
than 1000V
3 IS: 2071 Methods of High Voltage Testing IEC: 60060-1
Specification for Insulator fittings for Overhead power IEC: 60120 IEC:
Lines with a nominal 60372
4 IS: 2486 voltage greater than 1000V General Requirements and
Tests Dimensional Requirements Locking Devices
Thermal Mechanical Performance test and mechanical IEC: 60575
5. - performance test on
string insulator units
Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted IEC: 60815
6. IS: 13134
condition
7. - Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type IEC: 60433
8. - Hydrophobicity Classification Guide STRI guide1.92/1
Radio interference characteristics of overhead power lines CISPR: 18-2 Part 2

9. -
and high-voltage equipment.
10. IS: 8263 Methods of RI Test of HV insulators IEC: 60437
Standard for Insulators- Composite- ANSI C29.13-2000
11.
Distribution Dead-end Type
Hot dip zinc coatings on structural steel & other allied ISO: 1459 ISO:1461
12. IS: 4759
products
Recommended Practice for Hot, Dip Galvanization for iron ISO: 1461 (E)
13. IS: 2629
and steel
Determination of Weight of Zinc Coating on Zinc coated ISO: 1460
14. IS: 6745
iron and steel articles
Methods of testing of local thickness of electroplated ISO: 2173
15. IS: 3203
coatings
16. IS: 2633 Testing of Uniformity of Coating of zinc coated articles
17. - Standard specification for glass fiber strands ASTM D 578-05
Standard test method for compositional analysis by ASTM E 1131-03
18. -
Thermogravimetry
19. IS:4699 Specification for refined secondary Zinc
23.0 Annexure-B
Tests on Insulator units
23.1 RIV Test (Dry)

The insulator string along with complete hardware fittings shall have a radio interference voltage level
below 100 micro volts at one MHz when subjected to 50 Hz AC voltage of 10kV & 30 kV for 11 kV &
33 kV class insulators respectively under dry condition. The test procedure shall be in accordance with
IS:8263 /IEC:437/CISPR 18-2.
23.2 Brittle Fracture Resistance Test
Brittle fracture test shall be carried out on naked rod along with end fitting by applying ―1n HNO3 acid‖
(63 g conc. HNO3 added to 937 g water) to the rod. The rod should be held 80% of SML for the duration
of the test. The rod should not fail within the 96-hour test duration. Test arrangement should ensure
continuous wetting of the rod with Nitric acid.
23.3 Recovery of Hydrophobicity & Corona test
 The test shall be carried out on 4mm thick samples of 5cm X 7cm.
 The surface of selected samples shall be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol. Allow the surface to dry and
spray with water. Record the Hydrophobicity classification in line with STRI guide for Hydrophobicity
classification. Dry the sample surface.
 The sample shall be subjected to mechanical stress by bending the sample over a ground electrode.
Corona is continuously generated by applying 12 kV to a needle like electrode placed 1mm above the
sample surface. The test shall be done for 100 hrs.
 Immediately after the corona treatment, spray the surface with water and record the HC classification. Dry
the surface and repeat the corona treatment as at clause 2 above. Note HC classification. Repeat the cycle
for 1000 hrs. or until an HC of 6 or 7 is obtained. Dry the sample surface.
 Allow the sample to recover and repeat hydrophobicity measurement at several time intervals. Silicone
rubber should recover to HC 1 – HC 2 within 24 to 48 hours, depending on the material and the intensity
of the corona treatment.
23.4 Chemical composition test for Silicon content
The content of silicon in the composite polymer shall be evaluated by EDX (Energy Dispersion X- ray)
Analysis or Thermo-gravimetric analysis. The test may be carried out at CPRI or any other NABL
accredited laboratory.
21. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TENSION HARDWARE FITTINGS FOR T & C

TYPE DISC INSULATOR FOR ACSR CONDUCTOR
1.0 Scope:
The Specification covers the design, manufacture, testing (preferably at manufacturer's works before
supply) and delivery of the combined unit of Cross Arm Strap bolted type Tension Clamp including
loading, unloading anywhere in Assam.
The combined units offered shall be complete with all components which are necessary (excepting disc
insulator) or usual for their effective performance and easy maintenance and inter changeability at site.
Such parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of contract.
2.0 General requirements:
 Ball diameter should be 16 mm.

 Hardware Fittings with ultimate tensile strength of 70 KN should be used for ASCR Wolf conductors.
 The Fittings shall be free from defects, corrosion protected and shall meet the requirements of
Galvanizing Test etc. as per IS.
 All forging and casting shall be of good finish and free from flaws and other defects. The edges of the
fittings such as the tongue, clevis and holes shall be rounded.
 All parts of different fittings which provide the interconnection shall be made such that sufficient
clearance is provided at the connection point to ensure free movement. All tongue and clevis connection
shall be free in this manner but care shall be taken that too much clearance for the tongue & clevis is
avoided.
 Spring washer should be electro galvanized- Coating thickness as per IS: 1573-1986.
 U bolt, Hexagonal Bolt, Nut, Plain Washer and all other ferrous parts shall be Hot dip Galvanized. In case
of Hot Dip Galvanization, minimum Value of Mass of zinc coating should be 610 g/m2.
 The split pin to be used on the cotter pin shall be of Humpback type & shall be made of Stainless Steel
conforming to IS: 5522-1992 with a minimum hardness of 160 HV.
3.0 Standard:
The Combined units shall conform to the provisions of Indian Standards relevant to each individual
component except where specified otherwise
The following I.S. amended up to date shall be the guideline for manufacture & testing.
IS 2486 (Part 1): 1993 Specification for metal fittings of insulators for overhead
i) :
power lines with nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.
IS 2486 (Part 2): 1989 Specification for Insulator fittings for overhead power
ii) : lines with nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.
IS 2486 (Part III) - 1989
IS 4759: 1996 Specification for hot-dip zinc coatings on structural steel

iii) :
and other allied products .
IS: 6745 - 1872 Determination of mass of zinc coating on zinc coated

iv) :
iron and steel articles.
v) IS : 2633 - 1986 : Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated.

IS:1573 - 1986 Specification for electroplated coatings of zinc on iron

vi) :
and steel.
4.0 Materials and other requirements:

Cross-Arm Straps (fig-2):
Cross-arm straps shall be manufactured from MS Flat hot dip galvanized and to connect the cross-
arm/bracket of the structure at one end and the Ball Clevis at the other end.
It should be complete with three hexagonal bolts, nuts, spring washers and Cotter pin at the threaded end
to lock the unit. Minimum Threaded portion of the bolt shall be 30mm.
Cross-Arm Straps to be used for Minimum Ultimate strength (Tensile strength)
ACSR Wolf Conductor 70 KN

ACSR Dog Conductor 70 KN
Dimensions shall be in accordance with IS: 2486 (Part-2) unless otherwise specified.
Tongue and Clevis (fig-4):
All forgings shall be of good finish and free from any flaws and any other defects which may cause
decrement of efficiency while in operation. Connection/attachment with other component of the unit shall
provide reasonable clearance/ensure free movement at the connecting/attaching point. Care should be
taken to avoid too much clearance while used with insulators.
5.0 Bolted type Tension Clamp (fig-3):
All forgings & castings shall be of good finish and free from flaws or any other defects which may cause
decrement of efficiency while in operation. The edges on the outside of the fittings and the grooves shall
be smooth & rounded. Sharp radius of curvature, ridges etc. which may lead to localized pressure or cause
damage to the conductors in service shall be avoided. The clamp shall permit the conductor to slip before
the failure of conductor occurs.
Tension clamps for ACSR Wolf/Dog conductor shall be three bolted type with minimum one no. keeper.
Ultimate tensile strength of Tension clamps should not be less than 70 KN. The material for Tension
clamps & keeper should be high strength Aluminum Alloy. The slip strength should not be less than 95%
UTS of the respective conductor.
Tension clamps shall be fitted with rivet, flat washer, cotter pin, 'U' bolts & nuts, flat washers & spring
washers.
6.0 Marking:
Tension Hardware Fittings suitable for ACSR Wolf/Dog Conductor should be supplied in a string.
Tension Clamp shall be legibly & indelibly marked with Name or Trade mark of manufacturer, year of
manufacture, 70 KN and suitable identification marking of the property.
The marking should be engraved/embossed.
7.0 Tests and test certificates: Type Test

Along with the bid, the bidder has to submit Type Test Reports on same fittings carried out within last five
years from the date of opening of techno-commercial bid of the tender from any NABL accredited
Laboratory having NABL logo. Otherwise the tender may be rejected.
The following shall constitute the Type Test for Tension Clamps:
 Visual Examination
 Verification of dimensions
 Mechanical Test (Slip Strength Test)
 Ultimate Tensile Strength Test
 Chemical Composition Test
 Galvanizing/Electroplating Test (for ferrous parts)
 The following shall constitute Type Tests on tension hardware fittings except Clamp:
 Visual Examination
 Verification of dimensions
 Mechanical Test
 Galvanizing Test
 Chemical Composition Test
8.0 Tolerance:
Tolerance shall be as per IS: 2486 (Part-I).
9.0 Guarantee:
In the event of any defect in the equipment/materials arising out of faulty design, materials,
workmanship within a period of 12 (twelve) months of commissioning or 18 (eighteen) months from
the date of last dispatch of any integral part of the equipment/materials whichever is earlier the
supplier shall guarantee to replace or repair the same to the satisfaction of the purchaser. If the
supplier fail to do so within a reasonable time, APDCL reserves the right to effect repair or
replacement by any other agency and recover charges for repair or replacement from the supplier.
Guaranteed technical particulars for T & C type disc insulator
1. Name & Address of the Firm
2. Type of Insulator Fittings

3. Diameter of Ball
4. Ultimate Tensile Strength
a) Bolted Type Tension Clamp
b) Complete Fittings
5. Whether dimension other than specified are in
accordance to IS:2486 (Part-II)-1989
6. Material used
a) Cross arm Strap
b) Ball Clevis
c) Tongue Clevis
d) Bolted type Tension Clamp & keeper
g) U-Bolts & Nut
h) Hexagonal Bolt & Nut
i) Spring Washer
j) Plain Washer
k) Split Pin, R-type Cotter pin
7 Zinc conforming to grade
8 Weight and Dimension (per set)
a) Gross weight of complete fittings
b) Weight of Clamp & keeper
c) Weight of Cross Arm Strap
d) Weight of Ball Clevis
e) Weight of Tongue Clevis
f) Weight of Nut, Bolts, Rivet, U-Bolt & accessories
g) Weight of nonferrous parts
h) Minimum Guaranteed weight of Fittings
i) Whether galvanizing conform to IS-2633/1964
9. Packing details
a) Net Weight
b) Gross Weight
c) Contents of each Pack
d) Type of Packing
9. Tolerance in dimension, if any
10. Marking
11. Guarantee
22. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LT SHACKLE INSULATORS
SCOPE:
This specification covers the details of the LT Shackle White glazed/brown glazed insulators for use on
230/440V overhead lines.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
IS-1445/1977 (Second revision including Amendment Nos. 1,2,3,4 &5) and its latest amendment if any.
GENERAL REQUIREMENT:
The porcelain shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed.
The glaze, unless otherwise specified shall be brown in colour. Except the parts on which the porcelain is
supported during firing, which may please be left unglazed, all other surface of the insulators shall be
effectively glazed.
The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the
insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
The insulator shall be in one piece.
INSULATOR CHARACTERISTICS:
The insulators shall have the electrical and mechanical characteristics given in Table-I of IS-1445/1977
as under:
Dry P.F. Wet P.F. P.F. Puncture withstand Min. Failing

voltage load
Sr. No Type of Withstand Withstand
Insulator voltage KV voltage KV (rms) KN
(rms) KV (rms)
1 Shackle 23 10 1.3 x the actual dry flash 11.5

over voltage.
(Type-1)
N.B.: Size of shackle 90 x 75 mm as per Fig. 3 Type-I of IS: 1445/1977.
TESTS:
The Insulator shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 1445/1977 (Second revision including
Amendment Nos. 1,2,3,4 &5)
ROUTINE TEST:
The following test shall be carried out as routine test. Visual Examination: - This test shall apply to all
insulators.
TYPE TESTS: (IS: Cl no. 8.1)
The firm shall submit the type test report from Govt. approved laboratory not more than Seven (07) years old
along with offer .The following type tests are to be carried out on Two (02) nos. of samples in the order
mentioned below as per IS: 1445/1977.
Tests on the Both Insulators:
Visual examination (8.4)
Verification of dimensions (8.5)
Dry power frequency Voltage withstand test (8.6)
Wet power frequency voltage withstand test (8.7)
Temperature Cycle test (8.8)
Tests on First Insulator:
Mechanical failing load test (8.9)
Porosity test (8.11)
Test on Second Insulator:
Power frequency puncture withstand test (8.10)
NOTE: - The identification marks of Firm provided on the insulator should be invariably mentioned in
the Type Test Certificate.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The test samples after having withstood the routine test shall be subjected to the following Acceptance
Tests in the order indicated below:
Visual examination (8.4)
Verification of dimensions (8.5)
Temperature Cycle test (8.8)
Mechanical failing load test (8.9)
SAMPLE SIZE- ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION NUMBERS
Lot Size First Sample Second Sample Acceptance First Rejection Second
size size Number Number Rejection
Number
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Upto 500 8 8
501 to 1000 13 13
1001 to 3000 20 20
3001 to 10000 32 32
10001 to 35000 50 50
35001 and 80 80 13
above
As per IS 1445:1977 Ammendment-5 January 1993 (Table-3, Clause-B-1.1)
The criteria for conformity should be as per IS 1445:1977 Ammendment-5, B-2
MARKING:
Each Insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following.
Name and Trade Mark of the manufacturer.
Year of manufacturing.
Word 'Name of DISCOM'.
Minimum failing load in KN
Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.
PACKING:
Each Insulator should be wrapped with dry grass. This shall be then packed in either crates/boxes/polythene or
double gunny bags suitable for rough handling. No. of insulator should not be more than 50 in one bag.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (GTP)
Technical information and Guaranteed Technical Information for supply of LT Shackle Insulators
PART-„A‟
Bidder has to confirm following important requirements.
Sr. No Particulars Confirmation
1 Insulator shall be manufactured as per IS: 1445/1977 (Second revision Including Yes
2 Size of Insulator 90 x 75 mm. Type-I, Fig-3 of IS: 1445/1977 Yes
3 Dry power frequency withstand voltage 23 KV rms Yes
4 Wet power frequency withstand voltage 10 KV rms Yes
5 Power frequency puncture withstand voltage KV rms i.e. 1.3 x the actual dry Yes
flashover voltage
6 Mechanical failing load 11.5 KN (Min) Yes
7 Tolerance in dimension as per relevant IS-1445/1977 (Second revision Including Yes
8 Marking on insulator as per Clause No.6 Yes
9 Packing of insulators as per Clause No.7 Yes
PART-„B‟
Bidder has to furnish below details about material.
Colour of glaze of LT Shackle Insulator
Type of firing the insulator
Details of test conducted on raw material
Quality assurance plan which are being implemented.
PART-„C‟
ENCLOSURES:
Bidder has to enclose following documents and has to confirm for the same.
Sr. No Particulars Confirmation
1 2 nos. (Two) of samples for LT Shackle Insulators to be sent with tender Yes
Type test certificate covering all the tests as per Cl. No. 5.2 of Tender
2 specification from NABL accredited/ Govt. approved Yes
laboratory
3 List of Plant and Machinery Yes
4 List of Testing Equipment Yes
List of Orders pending / executed at least for past Three (03) years for the
item offered:
5 Yes
With APDCL and their subsidiary companies
With the purchase other then GUVNL and their subsidiary Companies
PART-‗D‘
Bidder has to mention below deviation if any, quoting relevant clause of Technical Specification.
23. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 33 KV AND 11 KV GANG OPERATED AB SWITCH
1.0 SCOPE
1.1. This specification is intended to cover design manufacture, testing at manufacturer‘s works, transport
to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of 33 KV and11 KV gang operated switch
(Isolators) with all fittings and accessories.
1.2. The Gang operated air break switch/ isolator/ disconnector are for outdoor installation suitable for
both vertically and horizontally mounting on mounting structures or M.S. Channel and for use at
sectionalizing/tapping points of 33 KV lines, 11KV line and at 33/11 KV sub-stations.
1.3. The successful bidders shall supply the necessary drawings and instructions for installation and
commission of the Isolators.
2.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
2.1. The vertically mounted gang switches shall be manually operated triple pole type with single
break operation. The operation of the equipment shall be through forward and backward motion of the mid-
pole post insulator. The contacts shall be made of silver faced hard drawn copper.
2.2. The horizontally mounted switches, with or without earth switches shall have rotating blade features
and pressure reliving features. Such isolators are required to be double break; three posts per phase, single
through, gang operated three phase type. All isolators with/without earth switch shall operate through 900
from their fully closed position to fully open position
2.3. The switch shall be fitted with arcing horns and the horns shall be easily replaceable. All isolators shall
be provided with suitably rated terminal connectors to directly receive ACSR conductor of required size.
The termination shall have at least 3 pairs of holes to hold the conductor tight with nuts & bolts The
terminals shall conform to all the test requirements of IS: 5561 and shall be designed as to avoid bimetallic
corrosion.
2.4. The operating rod shall comprise of not less than 40 mm (nominal bore) Galvanized steel pipe as per
IS 1161-1979. The length of the operating rod shall be suitable for operation as per installation methods.
The rod shall be so threaded that the length can be adjusted.
2.5. The horizontal operation shaft shall be of solid Galvanized steel of square section suitable for fitting
the insulator base of the switch. Length of the rod shall be such as to maintain the phase clearance as per
I.S.
2.6. The operating handle shall have OFF/ON locking arrangement and provision for earthing the
equipment.
2.7. The gang operating switch shall be provided with three post insulators per phase conforming to IS
5350 (Pt- III)-1971. The cast iron post shall be embedded in the insulators with sulphur cement. For
embedded components, pull out strength shall be such as to result in breakings of the porcelain insulators,
the beam strength shall be as per relevant T.S. Creepage distance shall not be less than 900 mm and 300
mm for 33KV and 11 KV isolators respectively.
2.8. All similar materials and removable parts of similar equipments shall be interchangeable with each
other.
3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARD
3.1. Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification, the Gang operated switch shall conform to IS. 9920
(Pt-I to Pt-IV).
4.0 Failure to meet guarantees and requirement of specification
4.1. If after installation, the operation of the switch proven to be unsatisfactory, to the purchaser, the
tenderer shall have to take back or replace.
5.0 TEST AND INSPECTION
5.1. The switches shall be subjected to the following type test in accordance to with IS: 9920.
I) Dielectric test (impulse and one minute) power frequency withstands voltage. II) Temperature rise
test
III) Rated off load breaking current capacity
IV) Rated active load breaking capacity
V) Rated line charging breaking capacity
VI) Rated short time current
VII) Rated peak withstand current
VIII) Mechanical and Electrical Endurance
5.2. The equipment shall be subjected to the following routine test.

I) Power frequency voltage dry test
II) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit
III) Operating test.
5.3. The porcelain will have pull out test for embedded component and beam strength of porcelain base.
5.4. The manufacturer shall afford the inspection representing the purchaser or third party nominee
all reasonable facilities, with charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with
this specification.
The purchaser has the right to have the test carried out at his own cost by an independent agency whenever
there is dispute regarding the quality of supply.
6.0 GUARANTEE
The Bidder shall offer equipment performance guarantee for a minimum period of 18 months from the date
of commissioning.
Any damaged part or defective part of the equipment, the bidder has to replace at his cos
7.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Sl. No. Particular 33 KV GOAB 11 KV GOAB
1 Nominal system voltage, KV 33 KV 11 KV
2 Highest system voltage, KV 36 KV 12 KV
3 Nominal frequency, Hz 50HZ 50HZ
4 Rated normal current, Amp 400A, 630A 400A
5 Short time current rating & 25 KA for 3sec 16KA for 3 sec
duration
6 Power frequency one minute

withstand voltage,
i To earth and between pole, 70 28

KV (RMS)
ii Across the isolating distance, 80 28

KV (RMS)
7 Rated lightning impulse

withstand voltage
i To earth and between pole, 170 KV 75

KV (Peak)
ii Across the isolating distance, 190KV 85

KV (Peak)
8 Minimum Clearance Between 1350 mm 750 mm

phase to phase
Minimum insulator creepage 900 mm 320mm

distance, mm
Electrical endurance 200 operation 200 operation
Mechanical endurance 1000 operation 1000 operation
Temperature rise
Applicable Standard IS: 9921, IS;2544 IS: 9921, IS;2544

&5350 &5350
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 11 KV 400 Amp GOAB Switch
Sl. No. Particulars Bidder‟s offer
1 Type, Make & Country of Origin
2 Maximum permissive continuous service

voltage (kv)
3 Length of break/phase (min)
4 Phase to Phase spacing
5 Power frequency withstand test voltage

for completely assembled switches
Against ground
Dry kV
Wet kV
Across open contacts

Dry kV
Wet kV
6 Impulse withstand test voltage with

positive and negative polarity across
isolating distance
7 Impulse withstand test voltage with

positive and negative polarity between
earth and pole
8 Particulars of main contacts i.e. fixed

contact and moving contact
Type
Material
Moving blade
Fixed blade
Surface treatment & thickness of Tin

coating
Contact pressure
10 Short time current rating kA (rms)
11 Rated peak short circuit kA (Peak)
12 No. of operations which the switch can

withstand without deterioration of
contacts
13 Type of mounting
14 Type & Material used in connector
15 Location and type of bush bearing
16 Particulars of Post Insulators
Make
Type
Strength
Weight
No. of units per stack
No. of insulators per stack

Height of stack mm
Puncture voltage
Creepage distance mm
One minute Dry power frequency

withstand voltage kV (rms)
Power frequency flashover voltage kV

(rms)
Impulse flashover voltage kV
Impulse withstand voltage kV
17 Down pipe
18 Coupler pipe
‗
24. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV DROP OUT TYPE FUSE
Scope
This specification covers the design, manufacture and testing, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and
commissioning of outdoor type dropout type expulsion fuse disconnects suitable for use on 11K.V. power system
conforming to 155:2692 of 1956 and 15 : 5792/1970 with upto date amendments and revisions.
Design Considerations
11 kV, 150 Amps, 50 Cycles, A.C.3 Phase.
Type
The D.O. should be of Bracket type for 11 KV, 150 Amps, and should be suitable for vertical mounting the fuse
barrel being in an angle of 30 degree to vertical when closed and opening downwards. The fuse shall be opened
and closed by a hook- stick.
Insulators
There should be 2 (two) nos. of Insulators/ insulators stacks for pole. The insulators used should be manufactured
as per ISS: 2544/63 with upto date amendments and revisions and it should be easily, replaceable in the event of
any damage to it. The post insulators should be 320 m creepage Distance only and tested quality.
The post insulator should be procured from reputed insulator manufacturers only and should bear the
manufacturers monogram on the insulators. A certificate supported by drawing should be furnished from the
manufacturers. The following Insulator manufacturers are preferable:-
The caps and the posts should be made of Galvanised Cast Iron. It should be integrally cast by the manufacturers.
Contacts
Top side contact of the D.O.'s shall be lift off type with suitable guides to place the moving contacts in the
position and guides should be provided with sufficiently strong Phosphor Bronze Springs, one set for holding
the barrel in position and another type and set for electrical contacts. The contact Phosphor Bronze Springs
shall be leaf type and number of leaves (which should be seven pieces) should be clearly stated.
The bottom side contact should be trunion type, provided with leaf springs (7 numbers) to obtain sufficient
electric contact. Adequate facilities forinsertion and removal of the fuse barrel in service should be provided.
All the contacts, contact springs and the current carrying paths should be made of suitable non-ferrous metal
alloy such as Bronze, Gunmetal, Brass etc. which should be clearly indicated.
Fuse Barrels
The D.O. Units shall be completed with synthetic resin bonded paper tubes fitted with metal contacts at each end.
These fuses should be manufactured strictly as per ISS: 1314 (Part I) of 1946 and test reports in respects of them
to from the manufacturer shall invariably be furnished along with the offer.
The following manufacturer who claims to manufacture SRBP tube as per BSS: 1314/26 is preferable: VIZ.,
I) M/S Bakelite Hylam Ltd.
II) M/S Bengal Laminate Industries
The SRBP tubes should be sufficiently strong mechanically, Fire and Moisture resistant and should be of the
following sizes:
a) For 11 KV Class -outside dia 25 mm, thickness 7 mm and length39 cm.
The metallic fixtures of the tubes should be made of suitable non-ferrous alloys like Brass, Gunmetal, Bronze etc.
and should be of sufficient sections to carry the rated current continuously. The name of alloy used should be
indicated clearly.' The fuse barrel shall be capable of swiveling in a vertical plane on hinges mounted on the lower
of the two insulators which hold the barrel in position. Both contacts of the barrel shall be fitted with eye rings
into which hooked operating rod or Hook stick can be inserted from ground level. By pulling the upper eye ring it
shall be possible to pull the fuse barrel out of the top insulator contact' in the manner of an isolating switch. In the
isolated' position, the lower eye ring shall be accessible, so that the fuse barrel can be removed with hook stick by
giving a sharp upward jerk,' for rewiring purposes.
Terminal Connections
The D.O. fuse units be provided with detachable 6 (six) bolts plan type 100cm length terminal connectors
smoothly grooved to accommodate conductors upto 12.5 mm dia. The connectors including the fixing nuts and
bolts should be with a pair of grass washer with proper tin plating suitable ferrous metal such as bronze,
gunmetal, brass etc. The name of the metal used should clearly be indicated.
Climatic Conditions
The equipment shall be designed for satisfactory operations under the following climatic conditions.
maximum temperature of air in shade 40° C
minimum temperature of air in shade 2° C
maximum humidity 93%
sic wind pressure 150 Kg/M2
Iceraumic level 60
Altitude above MSL 100 M to 1000 M
General
The D.O. units should be supplied complete with mounting brackets etc. so as to fix them on mounting
structures and with nuts and bolts. Double bolted fixture arrangements with flexible adjustments in a slot or
hole is preferable all ferrous parts should be hot dip galvanised as per the relevant Indian Standard
Specification.
Tests
The offers for the' 0.0/5 should invariably be 0upported by type test certificates from National Test Housel
CPRI or any other recognised Public Institutions as per ISS: 2692/56 with upto date amendments and as
given in ANNEXURE -II. The D.O. fuse disconnects also shall be subjected to milivolt drop test temperature
rise test and all other electrical and mechanical tests as per relevant ISS or BSS. Test certificate as per
relevant ISS or BSS in respect of each of the component parts such as insulators, barrels etc. should also be
submitted. The manufacturer should have the necessary facilities for carrying out the laboratory tests, as per
ISS or BSS on the product. They should furnish the detailed specification along with the make and capacity
of testing equipments at their disposal along with tender.
The D.O. offered must be supported by a Short Circuit Withstand capacity (not less than 25 KV) cost
certificate from competent authorities like CPR I. In absence of such a test certificate the offer may not be
considered.
INSPECTION
Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of manufacture. The
supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third party nominee at a reasonable
time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification
by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance
with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

11 KV DROP OUT FUSE SET
1 Manufacturer name and address
2 Type
3 Installation
4 Application
6 Normal system voltage
7 Highest system voltage
9 Frequency
10 One minute power frequency withstand

voltage
a) To earth & between poles
b) Across Isolating distance
11 One minute Lightning impulse withstand

voltage
a) To earth & between poles
b) Across Isolating distance
12 Puncture withstand test voltage

13 Temperature rise unit
a) Contact silver plated
b) Terminals
14 Base Insulation value
15 Rated Breaking Capacity
16 Particulars of main contacts
a) Type
b) Material
c) Surface Treatment
17 Material used in connector
18 Fuse carrier
19 Type of fuse link
20 Mounting arrangement
21 Insulators
a) Type
b) Make
c) Rated Voltage
d) Total height
e) Creepage distance
f) Visible discharge voltage
g) Cantilever load
h) Tensile Strength
i) Torsional strength
j) Compression strength
k) Flashover voltage
l) Minimum beam strength
22 Number of insulators
23 Drawing no.
25. TECHNICAL SPECIFICTAION FOR 11kV VOLTAGE CLASS SURGE ARRESTORS
Introduction
This section covers the specification of 11kV voltage station Surge Arrestors for installation on outdoor type
11kV switchgear, transmission lines, transformers etc. 11kV side of which is not enclosed in a cable box.
Station class surge arrestors shall be complete with fasteners for stacking units.
Standards
The design, manufacture and performance of Surge Arrestors shall comply with IS: 3070 Part-3 and other
specific requirements stipulated in the specification. Unless otherwise specified, the equipment, material &
processes shall conform to the latest amendments of the following:
IS:2071- 1993 (Part-1) Methods of High Voltage Testing General Definitions & Test Requirements.
IS:2071-1974 (Part-2) Test Procedures.
IS: 2629-1985 Recommended Practice for hot dip galvanizing on Iron & Steel.
IS: 2633-1986 Method for Testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated Articles.
IS:3070-1993 (Part – 3) Specification for surge arrestor for alternating current systems. Metal-Oxide
lightening Arrestors without gaps.
IS: 4759-1996 Specification for hot dip zinc coating on structural steel and other allied
products.
IS: 5621-1980 Hollow Insulators for use in Electrical Equipment.
IS: 6209-1982 Methods of Partial discharge measurement.
IS: 6745 Method for determination of mass of zinc coating on zinc coated iron and steel
articles.
ANSI/IEEE-C.62.11 Metal oxide, Surge Arrestor for AC Power Circuits.
IEC –60099-4 Surge Arrestors.
The equipment complying with any other internationally accepted standards shall also be considered if it
ensures performance equivalent to or superior to the Indian Standards.
General requirement:
The metal oxide gap less Surge Arrestor without any series or shunt gap shall be suitable for protection of 11 kV
side of power transformers, associated equipment and 11kV lines from voltage surges resulting from natural
disturbance like lightning as well as system disturbances. The surge arrestor shall draw negligible current at
operating voltage and at the same time offer least resistance during the flow of surge current. The surge
arrestor shall consist of non-linear resistor elements placed in series and housed in electrical grade porcelain
housing / silicon polymeric of specified Creepage distance. The assembly shall be hermetically sealed with
suitable rubber gaskets with effective sealing system arrangement to prevent ingress of moisture.
The surge arrestor shall be provided with line and earth terminals of suitable size. The ground side terminal of
surge arrestor shall be connected with 25x6 mm galvanized strip, one end connected to the surge
arrestor and second end to a separate ground electrode. The bidder shall also recommend the procedure
which shall be followed in providing the earthing system to the Surge Arrestor. The surge arrestor shall not
operate under power frequency and temporary over voltage conditions but under surge conditions, the surge
arrestor shall change over to the conducting mode.
The surge arrestor shall be suitable for circuit breaker performing 0-0.3 min-CO-3 min-CO- duty in the system.
Surge arrestors shall have a suitable pressure relief system to avoid damage to the porcelain/ silicon
polymeric housing and providing path for flow of rated fault currents in the event of arrestor failure.
The reference current of the arrestor shall be high enough to eliminate the influence of grading and stray
capacitance on the measured reference voltage. The Surge Arrestor shall be thermally stable and the bidder shall
furnish a copy of thermal stability test with the bid. The arrestor shall be capable of handling terminal energy for
high surges, external pollution and transient over voltage and have low losses at operating voltages. The surge
arrestor shall be provided with line and earth terminals of suitable size.
Arrestor housing
The arrestor housing shall be made up of silicon polymeric housing and shall be homogenous, free from
laminations, cavities and other flaws of imperfections that might affect the mechanical and dielectric quality. The
housing shall be of uniform Grey (for silicon polymeric) colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar
defects.
Arrestors shall be complete with fasteners for stacking units together and terminal connectors.
The housing shall be so coordinated that external flashover shall not occur due to application of any impulse or
switching surge voltage upto the maximum design value for arrestor. The arrestors shall not fail due to
contamination. The 11kV arrestors housing shall be designed for pressure relief class as given in Technical
Parameters of the specification.
Sealed housings shall exhibit no measurable leakage.
Surge monitor:
A self-contained discharge counter suitably enclosed for outdoor use and requiring no auxiliary or battery supply
for operation shall be provided for each single pole unit. Leakage current meter with suitable scale range to
measure leakage current of surge of surge arrestor shall also be supplied within the same enclosure. The number
of operations performed by the arrestor shall be recorded by the suitable cyclometric counter and surge monitor
shall be provided within the inspection window. There shall be a provision for putting ammeter to record the
current/alarm contacts in the control room if the leakage current exceeds the permitted value. Similar provision
shall be considered for the surge counter also. Surge monitor shall be mounted on the support structure at a
suitable height so that the reading can be taken from the ground level through the inspection window and length
connecting leads up to grounding point for 11kV class only.
Arrestor mounting:
The arrestors shall be suitable for mounting on 4 pole/2 pole structure used for pole/plinth mounted transformer
and for incoming and outgoing lines. Arrestor may also be required to be mounted on a bracket provided in the
Transformers.
Fittings & accessories
The surge arrestor shall be complete with fasteners and terminal connectors.
The terminals shall be non-magnetic, corrosion proof, robust and of adequate size and shall be so located that
incoming and outgoing connections are made with minimum possible bends. The top metal cap and base of surge
arrestor shall be galvanized. The line terminal shall have a built in clamping device which can be adjusted for
both horizontal and vertical take-off.
Tests
Test on Surge Arrestors

The Surge Arrestors offered shall be type tested and shall be subjected to routine and acceptance tests in
accordance with IS : 3070 (Part-3)-/IEC:600994. In addition, the suitability of the surge arresters shall also be
established for the following:
Acceptance tests:
Measurement of power frequency reference voltage of arrester units.
Lightning impulse residual voltage on arrester units (IEC clause 6.3.2).
Internal ionization or partial discharge test
Special Acceptance tests :
Thermal stability test (IEC clause 7.2.2).
Watt loss test.
Routine tests:
Measurement of reference voltage.

Residual voltage test of arrester unit.
Internal ionization or partial discharge test.
Sealing test.
Verticality check on completely assembled surge arresters as a sample test on each lot if applicable.
Type Tests:
Following shall be type test as per IS 3070 (Part 3): 1993 or its latest amendment:
1. Insulation Withstand test

a) Lightning Impulse
b) Power Frequency (Dry/Wet)
2. Residual Voltage Test
a) Steep current impulse residual voltage test
b) Lightning impulse residual voltage test
c) Switching Impulse Residual voltage test
3. Long duration current impulse withstand test
4. Switching surge operating duty test
5. Power frequency voltage Vs. Time characteristics
Accelerated Ageing test
6.
7. Pressure relief test
High Current
Low Current
8. Artificial pollution test (for porcelain housing)
9. Seismic Test
10. Partial Discharge test
11. Bending test
12. a) Temperature cycle test (for porcelain housing)
b) Porosity test (for porcelain housing)
13. Galvanising test on metal parts
14. Seal Leakage test (for porcelain housing)
15. Seal leak test and operation tests ( for surge monitor)
16. Weather ageing test (for polymer housing)
The maximum residual voltages corresponding to nominal discharge current of 10 kA for steep
current, impulse residual voltage test, lightning impulse protection level and switching impulse level
shall generally conform to Annex-K of IEC-99-4.
The contractor shall furnish the copies of the type tests and the characteristics curves between the
residual voltage and nominal discharge current of the offered surge arrestor and power
frequency voltage v/s time characteristic of the surge arrestor subsequent to impulse energy
consumption as per clause 6.6 of IS:3070 (Part-3) offered alongwith the bid.
The surge arrestor housing shall also be type tested and shall be subjected to routine and acceptance
tests in accordance with IS :5621.
Galvanization Test:
All Ferrous parts exposed to atmospheric condition shall have passed the type tests and be subjected to
routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IS:2633 & IS 6745.
Name plate:
The name plate attached to the arrestor shall carry the following information:
o Rated Voltage
o Continuous Operation Voltage
o Normal discharge current
o Pressure relief rated current
o Manufacturers Trade Mark
o Name of Sub-station
o Year of Manufacturer
o Name of the manufacture
o Name of Client
o Purchase Order Number along with date
Drawings and instruction manuals:
Within 15 days of receipt of the order, the successful tenderer shall furnish to the purchaser, the
following drawings and literature for approval:
o Outline dimensional drawings of Surge Arrestor and all accessories.

o Assembly drawings and weights of main component parts.
o Drawings of terminal clamps.
o Arrangement of earthing lead.
o Minimum air clearance to be maintained of line components to ground.
o Name plate.
o Surge monitor, if applicable.
o Instructions manual.
o Drawing showing details of pressure relief valve.
o Volt-time characteristics of surge arrestors.
o Detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing/Silicon polymeric i.e. internal diameter, external
diameter, thickness, height, profile, creepage distance, dry arcing distance etc.
Technical particulars:
The surge arrestors shall conform to the following standard technical requirements. The Insulation values
shall be enhanced considering the altitude of operation & other atmospheric conditions.
System Parameters:
Nominal system voltage 11kV
Highest system voltage 12 kV
System earthing Effectively earthed system
Frequency (Hz) 50
Lightning Impulse withstand 75 Voltage (kVP)
Power frequency withstand 28 Voltage (kV rms)
Arrestor duty
-- Connection to system Phase to earth
-- Type of equipment to be protected transformers & switchgear
Surge Arrestors:
o Type Gapless Metal oxide outdoor

o Arrestor rating (kV rms) 9
o Continuous Operating voltage 7.65 (kV rms)
o Standard Nominal Discharge Current 10 Rating (kA)
(8x20 micro impulse shape)
o Degree of protection IP 67
o Line discharge Class 2
o Steep current at 10 kA 45
o Lightning Impulse at 10 kA 40
o Energy capability corresponding to
o Arrestor rating (kj/kV) 4.5
o COV (kj/kV) 4.9
o Peak current for high current impulse operating 100
o duty of Standard TS for arrestor classification 10 kA
Insulator Housing:
Power frequency withstand test voltage (Wet) (kV rms) 28

Lightning impulse withstand/tests voltage (kVP) 75
Galvanization:
i) Fabricated Steel Aticles
a) 5 mm thick cover 610 g/m2

b) Under 5 mm but not less than 2 mm thickness 460 g/m2
c) Under 2 mm but not less than 1.2 mm thickness 340 g/m2
Castings :
Grey Iron, malleable iron 610 g/m2
Threaded works other than tubes & tube fittings:

a) Under 10 mm dia 270 g/m2
b) 10 mm dia & above 300 g/m2

Note: Surge Monitor shall have to be provided if covered in BPS.
26. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF DISTRIBUTION CLASS SURGE ARRESTORS:
Distribution class surge arrestors are generally used in distribution Transformer Substations only.
Introduction:
This section covers the specification of Distribution class Surge Arrestor for 11kV transmission lines,
transformers etc.
Standards:
The design, manufacture and performance of Surge Arrestors shall comply with IS: 3070 Part-3 and
other specific requirements stipulated in the specification. Unless otherwise specified, the equipment,
material and processes shall conform to the latest applicable Indian/International Standards as listed
hereunder:
IS:2071- 1993 (Part- Methods of High Voltage Testing General Definitions & Test
1)
IS:2071-1974 (part-2) Test Procedures
IS:2629-1985 Recommended Practice for hot dip galvanizing on Iron & Steel
Requirements.
IS:2633-1986 Method for Testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated Articles.
IS3070-1993 (Part–3) Specification for surge arrestor for alternating current systems. Metal-Oxide
lightening arrestors without gaps
IS:4759-1996 Specification for hot dip zinc coating on Structural Steel and Other allied products.
IS:5621-1980 Hollow Insulators for use in Electrical Equipment.
IS:6209-1982 Methods of Partial discharge measurement.
IS:6745 Method for determination of mass of zinc coating on zinc coated iron and steel
ANSI/IEEE-C.62.11: articles
Metal oxide, Surge Arrestor for AC Power (1982) Circuits.
IEC –60099-4 Surge Arrestors
The equipment complying with any other internationally accepted standards shall also be
considered if it ensures performance equivalent to or superior to the Indian Standards.
General requirement:
The metal oxide gap less Surge Arrestor without any series or shunt gap shall be suitable for
protection of 11 kV side of Distribution Transformers, associated equipment and 11 kV lines from
voltage surges resulting from natural disturbance like lightning as well as system disturbances.
The surge arrestor shall draw negligible current at operating voltage and at the same time
offer least resistance during the flow of surge current.
The surge arrestor shall consist of non-linear metal oxide resistor elements placed in series and
housed in electrical grade porcelain housing / silicon polymeric of specified Creepage distance.
The assembly shall be hermetically sealed with suitable rubber gaskets with effective sealing system
arrangement to prevent ingress of moisture. The surge arrestor shall be provided with line and earth
terminals of suitable size. The ground side terminal of surge arrestor shall be connected with
25x6 mm galvanized strip, one end connected to the surge arrestor and second end to a
separate ground electrode. The contractor shall also recommend the procedure which shall be
followed in providing the earthing/system to the Surge Arrestor. The surge arrestor shall not
operate under power frequency and temporary over voltage conditions but under surge conditions,
the surge arrestor shall change over to the conducting mode. The surge arrestor shall be suitable for
circuit breaker performing 0-0.3 min-CO-3 min-CO- duty in the system. The reference current of the
arrestor shall be high enough to eliminate the influence of grading and stray capacitance on the
measured reference voltage. The Surge Arrestor shall be thermally stable and the contractor shall
furnish a copy of thermal stability test with the bid.
The arrestor shall be capable of handling terminal energy for high surges, external pollution and
transient over voltage and have low losses at operating voltages.
Arrestor housing:
The arrestor housing shall be made up of silicon polymeric housing and shall be homogenous, free
from laminations, cavities and other flaws of imperfections that might affect the mechanical and
dielectric quality. The housing shall be of uniform Grey (for silicon polymeric) colour, free from
blisters, burrs and other similar defects.
The housing shall be so coordinated that external flashover shall not occur due to application of any
impulse or switching surge voltage up to the maximum design value for arrestor. The arrestors shall
not fail due to contamination.
Sealed housings shall exhibit no measurable leakage.
Arrestor mounting:
The arrestors shall be suitable for mounting on 4 pole/2 pole structure used for pole mounted
transformer and for incoming and outgoing lines.
Fittings & accessories:

The surge arrestor shall be complete with disconnector and terminal connectors and all other
accessories.
The terminals shall be non-magnetic, corrosion proof, robust and of adequate size and shall be so
located that incoming and outgoing connections are made with minimum possible bends. The top
metal cap and base of surge arrestor shall be galvanized. The line terminal shall have a built in
clamping device which can be adjusted for both horizontal and vertical take off.
Tests:
Test on Surge Arrestors
The Surge Arrestors offered shall be type tested and shall be subjected to routine and acceptance tests
in accordance with IS : 3070 (Part-3)-1993. In addition, the suitability of the surge arresters shall also be
established for the following:
Acceptance tests:
Measurement of power frequency reference voltage of arrester units.

Lightning impulse residual voltage on arrester units (IEC clause 6.3.2).
Special Acceptance tests:
Thermal stability test (IEC clause 7.2.2)

Routine tests:
Measurement of reference voltage
Residual voltage test of arrester unit.
Sealing test.
Verticality check on completely assembled surge arresters as a sample test on each lot if applicable.
Type tests: Following shall be type test As per IS 3070 (Part 3)-/IEC;60094 or its latest amendment:
1. Insulation Withstand test

Lightning Impulse voltage test
Power Frequency (Dry & Wet)
2. Residual Voltage Test
Steep current impulse residual voltage test
Lightning Impulse Residual Voltage Test
3. Long duration current impulse withstand test
4. High current impulse operating duty test
5. Power frequency voltage Vs. Time characteristics
6. Accelerated Ageing test
7. Artificial pollution test (for porcelain housing)
8. Partial discharge test
9. Visual Examination (for porcelain housing)
10. a) Temperature cycle test (for porcelain housing)
11. Mechanical Failing Load test (Bending Strength test)
12. Uniformity of Zinc coating, Mass of zinc coating
13. Time versus current curve (for disconnector)
14. Weather ageing test (for polymer housing)
The maximum residual b) voltages

Porosity corresponding to housing)
test (for porcelain nominal discharge current of 5 kA for steep
current, impulse residual voltage test, lightning impulse protection level and switching impulse
level shall generally conform to Annex-K of IEC-99-4. The contractor shall furnish the copies of
the type tests and the characteristics curves between the residual voltage and nominal discharge
current of the offered surge arrestor and power frequency voltage v/s time characteristic
of the surge arrestor subsequent to impulse energy consumption as per clause 6.6.7 of IS:3070
(Part-3) offered alongwith the GTP. The surge arrestor housing shall also be type tested and shall be
subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IS: 5621
Galvanization test:
All Ferrous parts exposed to atmospheric condition shall have passed the type tests and be
subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IS:2633 & IS 6745.
Test on surge arrestor disconnectors:
The test shall be performed on surge arrestors which are fitted with arrestor disconnector or on the
disconnector assembly alone if its design is such as to be un-affected by the heating of adjacent parts
of the arrestor in its normally installed portion in accordance with IS:3070 (Part-3).
Name plate:
The name plate attached to the arrestor shall carry the following information :
 Rated Voltage
 Continuous Operation Voltage
 Normal discharge current
 Pressure relief rated current
 Manufacturers Trade Mark
 Name of Sub-station
 Year of Manufacturer
 Name of the manufacture
 Name of Client
 Purchase Order Number along with date
Drawings and instruction manuals:
The successful bidder shall furnish to the purchaser the following drawings and literature for approval:
 Outline dimensional drawings of Surge Arrestor and all accessories.

 Assembly drawings and weights of main component parts.
 Drawings of terminal clamps.
 Arrangement of earthing lead.
 Minimum air clearance to be maintained of line components to ground.
 Name plate
 Instructions manual
 Drawing showing details of pressure relief valve
 Volt-time characteristics of surge arrestors
 Detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing/Silicon polymeric i.e. internal diameter,
external diameter, thickness, height, profile, creepage distance, dry arcing distance etc.
Technical particulars:
The surge arrestors shall conform to the following standard technical requirements. The Insulation values
shall be enhanced considering the altitude of operation & other atmospheric conditions.
System Parameters:
i) Nominal system voltage 11kV
ii) Highest system voltage 12 kV
iii) System earthing Solidly earthed system
iv) Frequency (Hz) 50
v) Lightning Impulse withstand 75 Voltage (kVP)
vi) Power frequency withstand 28 Voltage (kV rms)
vii) Arrestor duty
-- Connection to system Phase to earth
-- Type of equipment to be protected 11 kV transformers & switchgear

Surge Arrestors:
i) Type Gapless Metal oxide outdoor

ii) Arrestor rating (kV rms) 9
iii) Continuous Operating voltage (kV rms) 7.65
iv) Nominal Discharge Current 5 Rating (kA) (8x20 micro
(impulse shape)
v) Long Duration discharge class Distribution class
vi) Maximum residual voltage (kV peak)
a) At 5 kA 27
vii) Partial discharge at 1.05 COV not greater than 50 (PC)
viii) High current impulse withstand voltage at 5 kA (kVp) 65
Insulator housing:
i) Power frequency withstand test voltage (Wet) (kV rms) 28

ii) Lightning impulse withstand/tests voltage (kVP) 75
iii) Creepage distance not less than (mm) 300
Galvanization:
Fabricated Steel Articles
a) 5 mm thick cover 610 g/m2

b) Under 5 mm but not less than 2 mm thickness 460 g/m2
c) Under 2 mm but not less than 1.2 mm thickness 340 g/m2
Castings:
Grey Iron, malleable iron 610 g/m2
Threaded works other than tubes & tube fittings:
a) Under 10 mm dia 270 g/m2

b) 10 mm dia & above 300 g/m2
Guaranteed technical particulars of 11kv 10 KA lightning (surge) arrestor:
Bidder's
Sl. No. Description Unit
Offer
A
1 Name & Address of the manufacture
2 Type & Model
3 Catalogue Number
4 Standards with which it complies
1 Frequency Hz
B
2 Rate Voltage KV ms
3 Continuous operating voltage KV ms

4 Nominal discharge current, 8/20 µs KA ms
5 Long duration discharge class Class
6 Temporary over voltage capability
a) 1 second KV Peak
b) 10 Seconds KV Peak
c) 3 Hours KV Peak
Release voltage KV ms
Maximum lightening impulse residual voltage
7
with:
a) 1.5 KA, 8/20 μs KV Peak
b) 5.0 KA, 8/20 μs wave form KV Peak
c) 10 KA, 8/20 μs wave form KV Peak
8 Steep current impulse residual voltage, 1/20 μs KV Peak
9 Long duration impulse withstand capability:
a) Peak KA As per Type Test KA ms
b) Virtual Duration μs
10 High current impulse withstand value, 4/10 μs KA Peak
11 Leakage current through arrester:
100% of rated voltage mA
12 Partial Discharge Level pC
13 Energy Absorption capacity KJ/KV
C
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs wave-
1 KV Peak
peak)
One minute power frequency withstand voltage
2 KV Peak
(Wet)
Power frequency voltage vs Time curve (Attach
3
Curve)
4 Creepage distance mm
5 Type of materials & Grade of Housing Porcelain
D
1 Type of materials & Grade of MOV Discs
2 Filling medium
3 Pressure relief class
4 Type of mounting arrangement
5 Type of moisture sealing
6 Cantilever strength of lightning arrester KN/m
7 Colour of Insulator
8 Height of Lightning arrestor mm
9 Weight of lightning arrester in service Kg
E
1 Type of materials & grade of terminals
2 Type of terminal corrosion protection
3 Range of conductor type & size it suits mm²
4 Bi-metallic or not Yes/No

5 Material of earth terminal
6 Size of earth terminal mm²
F
Recommended minimum clearances of arresters,
1 mm
center to center
Recommended minimum clearances from center
2 mm
to arrester to nearest earthed object
3 Clearance from live parts to earth mm
1 Method to be adopted for seal leakage test
H
1 Surface preparation
2 Rust inhibition
3 Galvanization - Weight deposited Kg/m²
4 Treatment of fasteners
27. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GI EARTHING PIPE
Earthing pipe should be made of 40 mm diameter ISI marked B class GI Pipe. 12 mm dia suitable holes
on its circumference shall be made as per approved drawing. The pipe should be in one piece. No joints
or welding would be allowed on its length. Clamps made of 50x6mm GI flat duly drilled with 12 mm
size holes should be welded at the top end for connection of earth conductor.
Pipe used shall be 40 mm NB diameter, ISI marked Galvanized Mild Steel Tubes continuously welded
Electric Resistance Welded ERW/High Frequency Induction welded (HFIW)/Hot finished welded
(HFW) type, conforming to IS-554-1985 with latest amendment of MEDIUM quality (Class B).
Manufacture:
GI earth pipe (40 mm diameter & 3 meter long) shall be made of tubes which shall be made from
tested quality steel manufactured by any approved process as follows:
 Electric Resistance Welded (ERW).

 High Frequency Induction Welded (HFIW) and
 Hot finished Welded (HFW).
 Tubes made by manual welding are not acceptable.
Dimensions:
The dimensions and weights of tubes shall be in accordance with Table-I and Table-II of IS: 1239 (Part-
I)/1990 with latest amendments, subject to tolerance permitted therein. Necessary 12 mm diameter holes
across the circumference shall be provided as per approved drawing. Drawings shall be approved by the
owner before start of the manufacturing work. The tube, earthing pipe shall be provided with 50x6mm
GS clamps on one end, one clamp is to be welded with the pipe and another is removable to enable
measurement of earth resistance of the pit. Other end of the earth pipe should be cut half in slop to make
it a sharp.
Galvanizing:
Tubes shall be galvanized in accordance with IS-4736-1986 with latest amendment for not dip zinc
coating of Mild Steel Tubes. The minimum mass of zinc coating on the tubes shall be in accordance
with clause 5.1 of IS-4736-1986 (specification for hot dip zinc) and when determined on a 100mm long
test piece in accordance with IS: 6745:1972 shall be 400 g/m2. The zinc coating shall be uniform
adherent reasonably smooth and free from such imperfections as flux, ash and dross inclusions, bare
patches, black spots, pimples, lumpiness, rust, stains, bulky white deposits and blisters.
Hydraulic test:
(Before applying holes) Each tube shall withstand a test pressure of 5 M Pa maintained for at least 3
seconds without showing defects of any kind. The pressure shall be applied by approved means and
maintained sufficiently long for proof and inspection. The testing apparatus shall be fitted with an
accurate pressure indicator.
Test on finished tubes and sockets:

The following tests shall be conducted by the manufacturer of finished tubes and sockets.
The tensile strength of length of strip cut from selected tubes when tested in accordance with IS-1894-
1972, (Method for tensile testing of steel tubes), shall be at least 320 N/mm2. The elongation
percentage on a gauge length of 5.65/so (where so is the original cross- sectional area of test specimen)
shall not be less than 20%.
When tested in accordance with IS-2329-1985 (Method for Bend test on Metallic tubes) the finished
tube shall be capable of withstanding the bend test without showing any sign of fracture or failure.
Welded tubes shall be bent with the weld at 90 degree to the plane of bending. The tubes shall not be
filled for this test. Galvanized tubes shall be capable of being bent cold without cracking of the steel,
through 90 degree round a former having a radius at the bottom of the groove equal to 8 times the
outside diameter of tube. Flattening Test on Tubes above 50 mm Nominal Bore: Rings not less than 40
mm in length cut from the ends of selected tubes shall be flattered between parallel plates with the
weld, if any, at 90 degree (point of maximum bending) in accordance with IS-2328-1983. No opening
should occur by fracture in the weld unless the distance between the plate is less than 75 percent of the
original outside diameter of the pipe and no cracks or breaks in the metal elsewhere than in the weld
shall occur, unless the distance between the plates is less than 60% of the original outside diameter. The
test rings may have the inner and outer edges rounded.
Galvanizing test:
Weight of zinc Coating: For tubes thickness upto 6 mm the minimum weight of zinc coating, when
determined on a 100 mm long test piece in accordance with IS-4736-1986 shall be 400 grm/m2. The
weight of the coating expressed in gram/m2 shall be calculated by dividing the total weight of the zinc
(inside plus outside) by the total area (inside plus outside) of the coated surface. Test specimen for this
test shall be cut approximately 100 mm in length from opposite ends of the length of tubes selected for
testing. Before cutting the test specimen, 50 mm from both ends of the samples shall be discarded.
Free Bore Test: A rod 230mm long and of appropriate diameter shall be passed through relevant
nominal bore of the sample tubes to ensure a free bore.
Uniformity of Galvanized Coating: The galvanized coating when determined on a 100 mm long test
piece [see V (a) (iii)] in accordance with IS-2633-1986 (Method for testing uniformity of coating on
zinc coated articles) shall with stand 4 one minute dips.
Workmanship:
The tubes shall be cleanly finished and reasonably free from injurious defects. They shall be reasonably
straight, free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, and other defects, both internally and externally.
The screw tubes and sockets shall be clean and well-cut. The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with
the axis of tube.
Marking:
The medium class of tubes shall be distinguished by Blue colour bands which shall be applied before
the tubes leaves the manufacturers‘ works. Tubes shall be marked with the standard mark.
28. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CAST IRON EARTH PIPE
Scope
This specification covers design, manufacture, testing, transport to site, insurance, storage,
erection and commissioning of the cast iron earth pipe for use on line &substation as earthing pipe.
Standard
The Earth pipe shall comply with the Indian Standard specification IS: 1729/1964 and as amended from
time to time except where they conflict with the specific requirements in this specification.
Manufacture
Metal used for the manufacture of pipes shall be good quality cast iron.
Casting shall be stripped with all precautions necessary to avoid wrapping and shrinkage defects. They
shall be free from defects which effect the use of castings. By agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer, minor defects may be rectified.
Pipes shall be such that they could be cut, drilled or machines.
Bolts, buts &washers shall be made of Steel and well galvanized. The bolts shall be of 200 mm length, 16
mm diameter with 2(two) nos. plain washers, one locknut &one check nut. Threaded length of the bolts
should be 50 mm.
Sizes:
Dimensions of pipe &socket shall be conform to the sizes shown below and as per drawing enclosed:
Nominal length of the pipe with socket 1800 mm

Nominal diameter of pipe 100 mm
External diameter of pipe 110 mm
Thickness of pipe 5 mm
Projection of spigot bead 3 mm
Width of spigot bead 15 mm
Internal dia of socket 129 mm
Thickness of socket 6 mm
Internal depth of socket 70 mm
Internal Radius of socket 5 mm
Width of grooves of socket 10 mm
External dia of grooves socket 155 mm

Depth of grooves of socket 5 mm
Nominal weight of pipe (Exclusive of ear) 21.67 Kg
Tolerance:
The Tolerance of the 100 mm nominal diameter pipe shall be ±3.5 mm
The Tolerance of pipe thickness shall be - 15 percent

The Tolerance of length of the pipe shall be - ± 20mm
The Tolerance of weight of the pipe shall be - 10 Percent
Pipes weighing more than the nominal weight may be accepted provided they comply in every other
respect with the requirements of this standard.
Test
Hammer Test: Each pipe when tested for soundness by striking with a light hand hammer shall emit a
clear ringing sound.
Hydraulic Test: If so required by the purchaser, pipe shall be tested hydraulically at a pressure of 0.4
kg/cm2without showing any sign of leakage, sweating or other defect of any kind. The pressure shall be
applied internally and shall be maintained for not less than 15 seconds. The tests shall be conducted
before coating of pipe.
Inspection:
All tests and inspection shall be carried out at the place of manufacturers unless otherwise agreed by the
purchaser and the manufacturer at the time of purchase. A manufacturer shall afford the inspector
representing the purchaser or third party nominee all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy that
the materials are being purchased as per specification. The purchaser reserves the right to have the test
carried out at his cost by an independent agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of
materials supplied. All incoming consignment shall be checked at stores.
Coating
Normally pipes, unless specially ordered, shall be supplied free of coating on surfaces.
Marking
Each pipe shall have the Trade mark of the manufacturer and nominal size suitably marked on it. The
pipe marked with the ISI certificate mark, shall be preferred. The equipments shall be marked with
name of manufacturer, year and name of project.
Guaranteed technical particulars for C.I. pipe (earth)

Sl. No. Description Required Technical Bidder‟s offer

Specification
1 Name of the manufacturer -
2 Address of the -
manufacturer
3 Length of Pipe 1.8 Mtr
4 Diameter of Pipe 100 mm
5 External Dia of Pipe As per TS
6 Thickness of Pipe As per TS
7 Internal Dia of Socket As per TS
8 Thickness of Socket As per TS
9 Internal Depth of Socket As per TS
10 Internal Radius of Socket As per TS
11 Width of Grooves of As per TS
Socket
12 External Dia of Grooves As per TS
Socket
13 Weight of Pipe As per TS
14 Hydraulic Test As per TS
15 Guarantee As per TS
29. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR STAY SET (HT)
Scope:
This specification covers the design, manufacture testing at manufacturer's works, transport to site,
insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of the Stay Sets (HT) required from the distribution
lines at designated locations.
Standard:
All the materials of stay sets shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the latest edition of
the relevant Indian or British Standard specification except in so far as they are modified this
specification.
Design Consideration:
Stay Rods shall be Galvanized and shall be of circular Cross-section with bow, thimble, nuts and bolts.
The Rods shall be threaded at one end up to a minimum of 30 cm length and shall be complete with
Galvanized M.S. Anchor Plates with all necessary accessories. All parts shall be heavily galvanized.
Testing:
Type and Routine Tests should be carried on different components of each stay sets as per relevant
Indian Standard specification and certified copies of the above should be submitted along with the
tender.
Schedule Requirement:
Stay sets complete with Thimble bow stay Rod/Anchor plate with nuts etc. and made of Rolled mild
Steel Rod and plates as per detailed given below:
Anchor Plate:
Thickness not below 5 mm.

Size not below 300 mmX300 mm with smooth edges (for HT)
Well galvanized
Materials M.S. Rolled plate
About 20 mm square hole at center for locking the plate with the Anchor Rod (for HT)
Anchor Rod:
Length 1800 mm or above

Threaded length 30 cm or above
Diameter 18 mm or above (for HT)
Anchor plate and head: square size 30mm X 30mm with thickness 25 mm having matching square size
shank for locking the Anchor plate.
One ratched lock nuts, grooves must match the grooves at bow flange.
One check nut.
Materials H.S.
Component well galvanized with extra care for the threaded portion.
Both lock and check nuts should be matching to the Anchor Rod thread such that punching of thread
after assembly at site safeguards them against removal.
Thimble: The match bow diameter and bend should be well galvanized.
Bow: Rod diameter 12mm/16mm or above overall length 35cm/40cm or above. Flange with well
formed locking grooves matching the locking nut, bow ends will be riveted securely with the flange.
All items to be galvanized.
Inspection:
All tests and inspections shall be carried out at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise agreed by the
purchaser and the manufacturers at the time of purchase. A manufacturer shall afford the inspector
representing the purchaser or third party nominee, all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy that
the materials are being purchased as per specification. The purchaser reserves the right to have the test
carried out at his cost by an independent agency, whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of the
materials supplied. Marking The equipments shall be marked with name of manufacturer, year and
name of project.
Guaranteed technical particulars 11 KV Stay set (HT) (Hot Dip Galvanized)
Sl. No. Description Bidder‘s offer
1 Name of Bidder
2 Manufacturer Name & address
3 Anchor Rod
Overall length of Anchor rod
Length of threaded portion
Pitch of Thread
Size of MS Nut Bolt, Square MS Washers conforming to

IS 1367 (1967) and IS 1363 (1967)
Inner dia of round eye made at other end of the rod
4 Anchor Plate
Size of the MS anchor plate
Dia of the hole made at the center of the plate
5 Turn Buckle
Eye Bolt
Dia of the eye bolt
Length of the eye bolt
Length of the threaded portion
Pitch of HT thread
Size of MS Nut Bolt, Conforming to IS 1367 (1967) and

IS 1363 (1967)
Inner dia of Circular eye made at other end of the bolt
Bow with welded channel
Dia of the MS rod used for bow
Overall length and height of the bow
Magnitude of the angle in radians by which bow is

bended at the top
Length and size of the MS channel welded at the order

end of the bow
Number of holes made in the MS channel /Angle
Dia of the holes
(C) Thimble
Thickness of the MS sheet used for thimble
Size of the thimble
6 Breaking Strength
7 Average weight of finished Guy/Stay sets including nuts

thimble and washers
Minimum
Maximum
8 Drawing No.
9 Galvanization
30. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. STAY WIRE
1. Scope:
The specification covers design, manufacturing and testing, transporting to site, insurance, storage,
erection and commissioning of G.I. Stay Wire 7/10SWG and 7/14SWG.
2. Materials:
The wire shall be manufactured from steel, made by any suitable process and shall not contain sulphur
and phosphorus exceeding 0.065 percent each. The wires shall be coated with Zinc Grade Zn 98 of
IS:209-1966. The general requirements for the supply of Galvanized stay strand shall be in accordance
with IS:1387-1967
3. Construction:
Grades: The wire shall be of Grade-I and tensile strength range 45 up to and including Kg/mm. The
Galvanized stay strand shall be of 7/2 mm and 7/3.15 mm. the lay of the strands shall be of the length
of 7/2 mm and Tables-I of IS: 2141-1963. the wires shall be so stranded together that when and evenly
distributed pull is applied at the end of the completed strand each wire will take equal share of the
pull.
The length of the strand which may be supplied without joints in the individual wires comprising it,
depend on the length of wire which may be carried by the bobbin in a normal stranding machine. The
normal lengths of strand which shall be supplied without joints in the individual wires, excluding
welds made in the rod before drawing shall be as given below. The lengths may be exceeded by
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Diameter of wire in strand Normal length without joints of weld

3.15 mm 1000 M
2.0 mm 3000 M
In cases where joints are permitted, they shall be made by welding of brazing joints in the same wire
shall be separated by a length of not less than that shown in 3.3 and joints in different wires in a
strand shall not be less than 20 M apart.
4. Freedom from Defects:
Each coil shall be warranted to contain no weld joint or splice other than in the rod before it is drawn
and those permitted in 3.4. The wire shall be circular and shall be free scale, irregularities
imperfections flaws splits and other defects. The Zinc coating shall be smooth, even the bright.
5.Tests:
Chemical Analysis: Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, the
chemical analysis be carried out.
Tensile Test: The wire when tested in accordance with IS: 1521-1960, on gauge length of 100 mm shall
have the minimum tensile strength specified in Tables 1 of IS: 2141/1968 according to the grade of the
wire.
The tensile strength of the finalized strand shall be not less than 93% of the aggregate of the single wires.
Delivery test: The wire shall be subjected to the wrapping test in accordance with IS: 1755/1961. When
wrapped eight times round its own diameter and on being subsequently strengthened the wire shall not
break or split.
Coating test: The uniformity of Zinc coating shall be tested by the method specified in IS: 2633/1964.
The wire shall withstand the number or dips as specified in IS: 4826-1968.
Marking:
Each coil shall be provided with a label, fixed firmly on the inner part of the coil, bearing the following
information.
 Manufacturer's name or trade mark.
 Lot number and coil number.
 A brief description and quality of the materials.
 Weight and
 Any other particulars specified by the purchaser.
 Name of the project.
 The label may also be marked with the ISI certification mark.
Inspection: The test should be carried out in presence of the inspecting officer deputed by purchaser or
third party nominee and the test should be in conformity with relevant IS.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULAR OF GI STAY WIRE (7/10 & 7/14 SWG)
1 Name & Address
Steel Wire/Rod
Zinc
Complete GSS wire
2 Name Manufacturer
3 Single wire before stranding
Dia in mm.
Tolerence in diameter (%)
Minimum break load in KN
4 Chemical Composition maximum percentage of

sulphur and Phosphorous
Length of Lay in mm.
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum elongation in 600 mm
Overall diameter of stranded wire in mm
Sectional area of stranded wire in mm2
Tensile strength of stranded wire in Kgf/mm2
Minimum break load in KN
6 Coating tests
Type of Zinc coating
Mass of coating in gm/mm2
No. of dips
1 Min.
½ Min.
7 Length of wire in each coil in meter
Tolerance
8 Weight of each coil in Kg
9 Weight of wire in Kg/Km
Tolerance
10 Standard according to which the stranded wire

shall be manufactured and tested.
11 Details of packing
12 Details of Marking
31. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF HT GUY INSULATOR
Scope
This specification covers design, manufacture, testing, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and
commissioning of the strain type porcelain Guy Insulator used in distribution overhead power lines.
General Requirements
This porcelain shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified and smooth glazed.
The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses to expansion and contraction at any part of the
insulator shall not load to its deterioration.
The glaze, unless otherwise specified, shall be brown in colour. The glaze shall cover the entire
porcelain surface parts except those areas that serves as supports during firing or area otherwise
required to be left unglazed.
Insulator Characteristics
The Guy Strain Insulators shall have the electrical and mechanical characteristics as shown below:
H.T. Strain Type Porcelain Guy Insulator
Length 140 mm
Diameter 85 mm
Cable hole dia 25 mm + 1.5 `
Minimum failing load 88 KN
Creepage distance 48 mm
Dry one minute power frequency withstand 27 KV (rms) voltage
Wet one minute power frequency withstand 13 KV (rms) voltage
Test
All insulators shall comply the following test as per IS: 5300
A) Routine test:
The following shall be carried out as routine test.
Visual Examination
Every insulators shall be visually examined. The insulators shall be free from physical distortion of
shape and defects, and thoroughly verified and smoothly glazed. They should be free from cracks or
any other defects likely to be prejudicial to the satisfactory performance in service.
Type test:
The following shall constitute the type test and those shall be conducted in the order given below:
Visual examination
Verification of dimensions
Temperature cycle test
Dry one minute power frequency voltage withstand test
Wet one minute power frequency voltage withstand test
Mechanical strength test
Porosity test.
The number of samples for type test are to be agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.
Acceptance Test (to be conducted in the following order)

Verification of Dimensions
Temperature cycle test
Mechanical strength test
Porosity test
The number of samples for acceptance test shall be in accordance to IS: 5300.
Type test certificate from National Test House/ Govt. recognized institutions/ Govt. recognized public
Testing Laboratories are also to be submitted along with the offer, failing which the offer is liable for
rejection.
Marking
Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to shown the following:
Name of trade mark of the manufacturer
Year of manufacture and name of project shall be applied before firing. Insulators may also be
marked with the ISI certification mark.
Inspection
All tests and inspections shall be carried out at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise agreed by the
purchaser and the manufacturer at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector
representing the purchaser or the third party nominee, all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy
that materials are being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser reserves the right
to have the test carried out at his own cost by an independent agency whenever there is dispute regarding
the quality of materials supplied.
Drawing
Drawing specifically showing all dimensions is to be submitted along with technical bid.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF H.T. GUY INSULATOR

Sl. No. Parameter Guaranteed value
1 Manufacturer‘s Name & Address
2 Type of insulator
3 Standards to which insulator will conform
4 Dimensions
5 Hole diameter (mm)
6 Color of glaze
7 Dry Power Frequency withstand Voltage (kV)
8 Wet Power Frequency withstand Voltage (kV)
9 Minimum failing load (Newton)
10 Minimum Creepage distance (mm)
11 Weight per piece (Kg)
12 Temperature cycle test (as per ISS)
13 Porosity test (as per ISS)
14 Tolerance, if any (as per ISS)
15 Performance guarantee
32. TECHNICAL S32. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. WIRE
1.0 Scope:
This specification covers the manufacturing, testing at works, transport to site, insurance, storage,
erection and commissioning of Galvanized Iron Wire of sizes 4 mm and 5 mm diameter.
2.0 General requirements:
It relating to the supply of mild steel wire shall be as per IS: 1387/1967 and the wire shall be drawn
from the wire rods conforming to IS:7887/1975. The requirements for chemical composition for the
wires shall conform to IS:7887/1975. Mild steel wire for General Engineering purpose shall be of
following sizes:
4mm - diameter (8SWG)
5mm - diameter (6SWG)
Tolerance permitted on the diameter of wire shall be as per Table -1 of IS:280/1978.
3.0 Climatic Conditions:
The cross arms shall be suitable for the climatic condition mentioned in these bidding documents:
4.0 Mechanical Properties: in accordance with IS: 1521-1972, shall be within the limits given in
Table-2 of IS:280/1978.
5.0 Wrapping Test: Wires shall be subjected wrapping test in accordance with IS: 1755-1961. The
wire shall withstand without breaking or splitting. being wrapped eight times round its own diameter
and subsequently straightened.
6.0 Surface finish
a. The wire shall have galvanized finishes. The galvanized coating of steel wire shall conform to the
requirements for anyone of the types of coatings given in IS: 4826-1968 as per agreement with the
purchaser.
b. The coating test for finishes other than galvanized, copper coated or tinned shall be subject to
between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
c. Unless otherwise agreed to the method of drawing representative samples of the material and the
criteria for conforming shall be as prescribed in Appendix (A) of IS:280/1978.
d. All finished wires shall be well and cleanly drawn to the dimensions specified. The wire shall be
sound, free from splits, surface flaws, rough jagged and imperfect edges and other harmful surface
defects.
e. Each coil of wire shall be suitably bound and fastened compactly and shall be protected by suitably
wrapped.
7.0 Marking Each coil of wire shall be marked legibly with the finish size of wire, lot number and
trade mark of the name of the manufacturer. The material may also be marked with the ISI certification
mark and name of the project.
8.0 Inspection: Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third-party nominee at any stage of
manufacture. The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third-party
nominee at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment
under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing
equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the
equipment is found defective.
Guaranteed Technical Particulars For G.I. wire

S. No Description Required Technical Bidder‟s Offer

Specification
1 Name of the Manufacturer
2 Address of the manufacturer
Is the manufacture has ISO 9001-2000
certification
A. G.I. Wire (4 mm dia)

1 Size of Wire
2 Tolerance in size of wire
3 Tensile strength
4 Wrapping list
5 Galvanizing conforming to IS: 4826 –
1968
6 Guarantee
B. G.I. Wire (5 mm dia)
1 Size of Wire
2 Tolerance in size of wire
3 Tensile strength
4 Wrapping list
5 Galvanizing conforming to IS: 4826 –
1968
6 Performance guarantee
33. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF MCCB
The MCCBs provided in these boxes shall conform in all respects to the relevant IS: 2516 (Pt-I&II)/
1977 or its latest revision as applicable.
REQUIREMENT OF MCCBs:
The moulded case circuit breakers should comprise of a switching mechanism, an effective
extinguishing device and a tripping unit contained in a compact moulded case cover made of high
strength, heat resistance and flame retardant thermo-insulating materials. They should comprise of a
spring assisted quick make/quick break type independent manual trip free mechanism rendering it
easy to manually operate the MCCBs and capable of clearly indicating ―TRIPPED‖, ―ON‖ AND
―OFF‖ positions from the position of the operating handle. The contact tips should be made of a
suitable alloy having high arc resistance and a long electrical and mechanical life needing no
replacement. The breakers should be designed with a common trip bar to break and make all the three
phase together even when fault occurs on any of the phases. The breakers should provide protection
against sustained overloads and short circuits through thermal-magnetic/fully magnetic releases. These
MCCBs along with terminal blocks are intended to be housed in the distribution boxes made out of
sheet steel of 2mm gauge. The assembly of the MCCBs and the terminal blocks should be compact,
reliable from operation point of view and safe to the operating personnel. As already mentioned
earlier, the MCCBs should be fully maintenance free.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF MCCBs:

The LT MCCBs should have inverse current/time characteristics suitable for protection of 63KVA,
100KVA, 200KVA & 315KVA 11.0.4KV Distribution Transformers against sustained over-loads and
short circuits for following operating conditions:
i Rated Operating Voltage 3 Phase 415 Volts AC 50 cycles with

neutral solidly grounded system
ii Standard rated current ratings for MCCBs to be used with different sizes of
transformers will be as follows:-
a) For 63KVA 11/0.4KV Dist. 90 Amps
Transformer
b) For 100KVA 11/0.4KV Dist. 140 Amps
Transformer
c) For 200KVA 11/0.4KV Dist. 300 Amps
Transformer
d) For 315KVA 11/0.4KV Dist. 450 Amps
Transformer
iii No. of Poles 3
iv Duty Un-interrupted
v Maximum ambient temperature 47oC in shade
vi Minimum ambient temperature 4oC in shade
vii Average altitude A maximum of 1000 meter
viii Maximum humidity Frequently approaches saturation point
TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS:
The circuit breakers shall have time/current characteristics suitable for following operating conditions
Multiple of normal current rating Tripping time

1.1 times After 4 hours
1.2 times Less than 50 minutes
2.5 times Less than 1 minute
6 times Less than 40 mili-seconds
12 times Less than 40 mili-seconds
Time/Current characteristic of the Circuit Breaker (MCCB) shall be tested in accordance with Clause-
7.7.2.3 (b) (2) of IS: 2516-(Pt-I&II) Sec.I/1977 and the test shall be made with all the three phases
loaded.
For time/current characteristic, the reference calibration temperature of the MCCBs shall be 40oC and
durance, if any; upto 50oC operating temperature in the enclosure shall not exceed 10% of the value
indicated above in Clause (I) above.
The MCCBs shall be calibrated and adjusted in the factory itself for the desired time/current
characteristic.
The MCCB should have the following maximum resetting time under overload & short circuit
conditions: -
Overload conditions - 3 minutes

Short Circuit conditions - Instantaneous
Rated short circuit breaking capacity:
The rated short circuit breaking capacity of the MCCBs shall be as follows: -
Transformer Rated short circuit breaking capacity of

Rating (KVA) the breaker in Kilo-Amps
63 KVA A minimum of 3 Kilo-Amps
100 KVA A minimum of 5 Kilo-Amps
200KVA A minimum of 10 Kilo-Amps
315KVA A minimum of 15 Kilo-Amps
The short circuit breaking capacity test as specified above shall be based on short circuit tests carried
out at 0.4 Power Factor (lagging). For the purpose of these tests, the following operating sequence shall
be followed: -
Break-3 minutes interval-Make-Break-3 minutes interval-Make-Break
34. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CLAMPS & CONNECTORS
CLAMPS & CONNECTORS: Clamps & connectors shall conform to IS: 5561. The clamps and
connectors shall be made of materials listed below:
For connecting ACSR conductors Aluminum alloy casting, conforming to designation A6 of IS:
617 and shall be tested for all tests as per IS: 617
For connecting equipment terminals Bimetallic connectors made from aluminum alloy casting
made of copper with ACSR conforming to designation A6 of IS:617 with 2mm thick
conductor Bimetallic liner and shall be tested as per IS:617
For connecting GS shield wire Galvanized mild steel
Bolts, Nuts & plain washers Hot dip galvanized mild steel for sizes M12 and above, and
electro-galvanized for sizes below M12
Spring washers for items ‗a‘ to ‗c‘ Electro-galvanized mild steel suitable for at least service
condition 4 as per IS:1573
All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges and
corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
No current carrying part of a clamp or connector shall be less than 10 mm thick. They shall be
designed and manufactured to have minimum contact resistance.
For Bimetallic clamps or connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm thickness shall be
provided.
Flexible connectors, braids or laminated strips made up of copper/ aluminum for the terminal clamps
for equipment shall be suitable for both expansion or through (fixed/ sliding) type connection of IPS
Aluminum tube as required. In both the cases the clamp height (top of the mounting pad to center line
of the tube) should be same.
Size of the terminal/conductor for which the clamp/connector is suitable shall be embossed/punched
(i.e., indelibly marked) on each component of the clamp/ connector, except on the hardware.
Clamp shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor and the temperature rise shall be
equal or less than that of the conductor at the specified ambient temperature. The rated current for
which the clamp/ connector is designed with respect to the specified reference ambient temperature,
shall also be indelibly marked on each component of the clamp/connector, except on the hardware.
Clamps and connector shall be designed corona controlled.
Clamps & connectors shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine and acceptance tests
on minimum 3 samples per lot as per IS: 5561. Type tests report for all clamps and connectors for
temperature rise test, tensile test, shall be furnished by the Contractor.
Mild Steel Channel, Angle and Flat
Applicable standards:
The mild steel shall conform to IS: 2062 grade ‗a‘ modified upto date or equivalent international
standard for steel materials, documents for which shall be made available at the time of inspection to the
owner‘s representative.
General requirements:
Material shall be supplied as per the following sizes:
100x50 ISMC channel conforming to IS: 2062 grade ‗a‘ modified up to date or its equivalent
International Standard having length ranging from 5.5 to 13.5 meters. 75x40 ISMC channel conforming
to IS: 2062 grade ‗a‘ modified up to date or its equivalent International Standard having length ranging
from 5.5 to 135 meters.
50x50x8 mm or 6 mm ISA angles conforming to IS: 2062 grade ‗a‘ modified up to date or its equivalent
international standard having length ranging from 5.5 to 13.5 meters.
45X45X5 mm ISA angles conforming to IS: 2062 grade ‗a‘ modified up to date or its equivalent
60x65x6 mm ISA angles conforming to IS: 2062 grade ‗a‘ modified up to date or its equivalent
25X3mm, 50X6mm, 50x8mm, 75X8mm and 80X8 flats conforming to IS: 2062 grade ‗a‘ modified up
to date or its equivalent international standard having length ranging from 5.5 to 9.5 meters.
Galvanization
All above steel members shall be fabricated as per approved drawing having smooth edge, drilled
circular/elliptical holes of suitable measurements.
All structural steel members and bolts shall be galvanized as per IS:4759 and zinc coating shall not be
less than 610gm/sq. meter for all structural steel members. All weld shall be 6mm filled weld unless
specified otherwise. All nuts and bolt shall be of property class 5.6 of IS 1367. Plain washers shall be as
per IS 2016 and spring washers shall be IS: 3063
Inspection:
All inspection/test will be carried out by representative of owner.

All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise specially agreed
upon by the manufacturer and the owner. The manufacturer shall provide all reasonable facilities,
without charge to satisfy him that the material is being supplied in accordance with the specification:
35. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 11 KV DANGER BOARD
Scope
This Specification covers Danger Notice Plates to be displayed in accordance with rule No. 35 of Indian
Electricity Rules, 2003.
Applicable standards
Unless otherwise modified in this specification, the Danger Notice Plates shall comply with IS:2551-
1982 or the latest version thereof.
Dimensions
Two sizes of Danger Notice Plates as follows are recommended:
For display at 415 V installations - 200x150mm
For display at 11 KV (or higher voltages) installations - 250x200mm
The corners of the plate shall be rounded off.
The location of fixing holes as shown in Figs. 1 to 4 is provisional and can be modified to suit the
requirements of the purchaser.
Letterings
All letterings shall be centrally spaced. The dimensions of the letters, figures and their respective
position shall be as shown in figs. 1 to 4. The size of letters in the words in each language and spacing
between them shall be so chosen that these are uniformly written in the space earmarked for them.
Languages
Under Rule No. 35 of Indian Electricity Rules, 2003, the owner of every medium, high and extra high
voltage installation is required to affix permanently in a conspicuous position a danger notice in Hindi
or English and, in addition, in the local language, with the sign of skull and bones.
The type and size of lettering to be done in Hindi is indicated in the specimen danger notice plates
shown in Fig. 2 and 4 and those in English are shown in Figs. 1 and 3.
Adequate space has been provided in the specimen danger notice plates for having the letterings in local
language for the equivalent of' Danger',' 415' '11000' and 'Volts'.
Material and finish
The plate shall be made from mild steel sheet of at least 1.6mm thick and vitreous enamelled white,
with letters, figures and the conventional skull and cross-bones in signal red colour (refer IS:5-1978) on
the front side. The rear side of the plate shall also be enamelled.
Tests
The following tests shall be carried out:

Visual examination as per IS:2551-1982
Dimensional check as per IS:2551-1982

Test for weather proofness as per IS:8709-1977 (or its latest version)
Marking
Maker's name and trade mark and the purchaser's name shall be marked in such a manner and
position on the plates that it does not interfere with the other information.
Packing
The plates shall be packed in wooden crates suitable for rough handling and acceptable for
rail/road transport.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 KV DANGER BOARD

1 Maker‘s Name & Address
2 Standard
3 Dimensions
4 Material
5 Thickness
6 Colour
7 Testing for weather Proofness:
8 Details of Packing
9 Drawing No.
Part -2: Employer‘s Requirements 326
36. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR P.G CLAMP FOR ACSR RACCON & WOLF
CONDUCTOR
1.0 Scope:
The scope covers design, manufacturing, testing at work, and transport at site, insurance, storage, and
erection and commissioning of P.G. Clamp suitable for Conductor size Raccoon/Weasel/3 Bolt type
strictly conforming to IS: 2121 and Galvanizing conforming to IS: 2633 as per the following:
2.0 Standards:
 P.G. Clamps suitable for conductor size, raccoon/weasel 3 bolt types strictly conforming to IS:
2121 and galvanizing conforming to IS: 2633 as per the following:
 P.G. clamp body to be made from aluminium alloy.
 Clamps nuts and bolt and washer should be made of hot deep galvanized steel.
 Spring washer be made of electro-galvanize special steel.
Style No. Conductor Maximum Dimensions No. of Approx.

conductor diameter m m m m m Bolts Weight
in mm (Kg.)
A-83 Wolf 20.78 40 6 2 8 3 0.51
A-81 Raccoon 14.45 5 7 0 2 2 0.18
3.0 Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of manufacture.
The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or third party nominee at a reasonable
time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by
the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with
the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR P.G CLAMP
1. Type of clamp
2. Manufacturer‘s Name and Address
3. Place of Inspection
4. Type of design
5. Material of clamp
6. Dimension (mm)
7. Weight (kg/Set) (Minimum)

37. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ANTI-CLIMBING DEVICES (BARBED WIRE)
In order to prevent unauthorized persons from climbing any of the supports of HT lines without the aid of a
ladder or special appliance, certain anti-climbing devices are provided to the supports. Barbed wire binding is
to be adopted for this purpose at a distance of 30 to 40 cm at a height of 3.5 to 4 m from ground level. The
barbed wire shall conform to IS – 278 (Grade A1). The barbed wired shall be given chromatin dip as per
procedure laid down in IS: 1340. At-least 3.5 kg barbed wire is to be used per pole for the purpose.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF G.I. BARBED WIRE
1 Manufacturer‘s Name & Address
2 Name of Manufacturer of:
Steel Wire/Rods
Zinc
Complete G.I. wire
3 Diameter of Line wire
Diameter of Point wire
Tolerance on Diameter (line wire)
Tolerance on Diameter (Point wire)
4 Barb Length
5 Distance between Two barbs
6 Tensile Properties
Tensile Strength of line wire
Tensile Strength of complete barbed wire
7 Wrapping
8 No. of lays between two consecutive barbs
9 Zinc Coating
Weight of coating
No. of Dips
10 Chemical Composition
Carbon
Maganese
Sulphur
Phosphorus
11 Weight of each coil
12 Standard according to which the wire are

manufactured and tested
13 Mass of complete barbed wire
14 Other, if any
38. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ISI MARK HOT DIP GALVANISED MILD STEEL
HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLTS AND NUTS
All bolts and nuts shall conform to IS: 6639 and shall be galvanized as per IS: 1367 – Part 13)/IS-2629. All
bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads, the heads being forged out of solid truly concentric, and square
with the shank, which must be perfectly straight.
Bolts upto M16 and having length upto 10 times the diameter of the bolt should be manufactured by cold
forging and thread rolling process to obtain good and reliable mechanical properties and effective
dimensional control. The shear strength of bolt for 5.6 grade should be 310 MPA minimum as per IS –
12427. Bolts should be provided with washer face in accordance with IS: 1363 Part – I to ensure proper
bearing.
Nuts should be double chamfered as per the requirement of IS: 1363 Part – III 1984. The manufacturer
should ensure that nuts should not be over tapped beyond 0.4 mm oversize on effective diameter for size
upto M16.Fully threaded bolts shall not be used. The length of the bolt shall be such that the threaded
portion shall not extend into the place of contact of the component parts.
All bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nuts and threaded enough to permit the firm gripping
of the component parts but no further. It shall be ensured that the threaded portion of the bolt protruded not
less than 3 mm and not more than 8 mm when fully tightened.
All nuts shall fit and tight to the point where shank of the bolt connects to the head. Flat washers and spring
washers shall be provided wherever necessary and shall be of positive lock type. Spring washers shall be
electro-galvanized. The thickness of washers shall conform to IS: 2016.
The Bidder shall furnish bolt schedules giving thickness of components connected the nut and the washer
and the length of shank and the threaded portion of bolts and size of holes and any other special details of
this nature.
To obviate bending stress in bolt, it shall not connect aggregate thickness more than three time its diameter.
Bolts at the joints shall be so staggered that nuts may be tightened with spanners without fouling.
To ensure effective in-process Quality control it is essential that the manufacturer should have all the
testing facilities for tests like weight of zinc coating, shear strength, other testing facilities etc, in-house.
The agency should also have proper Quality Assurance system which should be in line with the
requirement of this specification and IS –14000 services Quality System standard.
Fasteners of grade higher than 8.8 are not to be used.
RAW MATERIALS
MS round 16mm / 12mm used shall be tested for quality as per IS: 2062 Gr. ―A‖.
GALVANISATION
The bolts & Nuts shall be ISI Marked Mild Steel of Black Grade ―B‖ and shall be round with hexagonal
head. The finished product shall be hot dip galvanized. The mass of zinc coating on pins shall be as per
Clause-4 of IS: 4759-1979 and in case of Nuts shall be as per Clause No.‖4‖ of IS: 1367 (Part-XIII)-1983
having zinc coating not be less than 610 gm/sq meter.
OTHER
The Bolts and Nuts shall be manufactured by Hot/Cold forging process neatly and cleanly finished and
shall have metric threads as per IS: 4218/1967 with its latest amendments.
The dimensions of the bolts & nuts and tolerances should conform to IS: 1363 with their latest
amendments in all respect. The eccentricity and angular errors of various elements shall be within specified
limits as per IS: 1367/1967 with its latest amendments. The bolts & nuts shall be free from forging and
threading defects such as cuts, splits, burns, bulging, taper, eccentricity, loose fill etc. which may affect
their serviceability.
The bolt heads and nuts shall be chamfered on one face only and other face shall be machined made.
Mechanical property requirement of tester shall conform to IS: 1367 (Part-III) 1979 property class 4.6 for
bolts & property class-5 for nuts as per IS: 1367 (Part VI) – 1980.
The bolts & nuts shall be supplied in well-cleaned conditions and suitably protected against corrosion in
individual bags of 50 kgs.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The tenderer should furnish test certificate from his own/recognized Govt. Laboratory giving the results of
tests as per IS: 1367 (Part-III) –1979 & IS: 1367 (Part-VI) 1980 witnessed by Board‘s inspecting officer
for each lot under inspection. The test certificate shall be in respect of the following for all sizes of both
bolts & nuts as applicable given below:
Galvanizing Test: The uniformity of zinc coating and Wt. of zinc coating for pins and nuts shall be verified
as per requirements of IS: 2633/1972.
Dimensional particulars (Sampling in accordance with IS: 2614 for both bolts & nuts (tolerance as per
drawing).
Tensile strength test on full size (for bolts min. 400 N/ Sq.mm and for Nuts. Proof Stress (Min 610 N/Sq.
mm).
Power load test on full size bolts and M-12-51400 N for 15 Sec.(with Head soundness tests for bolts (no
fracture).
Brinell hardness tests or Rockwell Hardness or Vicker‘s Hardness tests for bolts min-114 & max. 209 or
min. 67 & max. 95 or min. 120 & max. 220 respectively. For nuts Vicker‘s Hardness min. 130 & max. 302.
PRE-DESPATCH INSPECTION AND TEST
The contactor shall arrange to carryout acceptance tests in presence of Board‘s inspecting officer in his
own laboratory. In case testing facilities are not available at his works he will make necessary
arrangements for carrying out these tests at a Govt. recognized lab at his own expense(s) and will provide
all testing arrangement for Board‘s representative to witness the tests.
MARKINGS
On the bolt head, there shall be identification marking of the manufacturer as well as property class ―4.6‖.
If possible property class ―5‖ shall be marked on Nuts also. Further ―ISI Mark‖ shall be marked on Sunny
Bags for proper identifications.
39. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INSULATION PIERCING CONNECTORS
SUITABLE FOR 11 KV COVERED CONDUCTORS:
1.0 Insulation Piercing Connector having 320 AMP Current Carrying capacity with maximum Outline size
in mm: 97 x 63 x 54 for 50 sq. mm & 393 AMP Cu Carrying capacity with maximum Outline size in mm
131 x 82 x 57 for 99 sq. mm Covered Conductor.
2.0 Bodies of Insulation Piercing Connector shall made of glass fibre reinforced polymer having Insulated
and Waterproof seals where Insulation material should be Weather, UV and Corrosion resistant.
3.0 Insulation Piercing Connector should have Blades made of special tinned copper with End cup Design
suitable for Covered Conductor.
4.0 Insulation Piercing Connector should have Shear-head with one screw design to ensure good contact
properties and avoid damaging cables.
5.0 Insulation Piercing Connector should have Lowest Torque, easy to install & no special tools necessary
to operate.
6.0 Piercing of Insulation Piercing Connector should have structural design.
7.0 Insulation Piercing Connector should have a design such that there is no stripping of insulation on the
covered conductor. It shall be able to get the Lowest contact resistance& Superior insulation as well as
sealing performance.
8.0 Material of Insulation Piercing Connector should withstand for all routine & acceptance test as per
NFC 33 020-1998 listed below:
a. Flashover - 15 kV for 1 min in water.
b. Short circuit test,
c. Mechanical test
d. Heat cycle test
9.0 The superior material and process technology ensure operation regularity in corrosive environment.
10.0 Insulators, hardware fittings and other accessories.
Since the covered conductor shall be suitable for stringing overhead supported by poles / tower, the
insulators such as tension, suspension and pole top types shall be of capacity and polymeric type. They
should also have enough mechanical strength, even though the conductor span is proposed to be made
somewhat loose and having shorter span length. The insulators designed for covered conductor shall have
heat & moisture resistance properties. These shall be of type & design with proven record.
The Insulator & Hardware must have Ball & Socket or Tongue & clevis coupling as per IS: 2486 (Part-II) /
IEC-60120 / IEC 60471. The Hardware materials must be confirming as per IS: 2486 and must be made of
forged steel / mild steel, casting will not be accepted. The Tension & Suspension Clamps must be of Bolted
type and made of Aluminium alloy casting conforming to A6 of IS: 617. All the ferrous parts must be hot
dip galvanized except for spring washer which must be electro galvanized. The hardware fittings to be used
along with the covered conductor should have an exclusive design in such a manner that it should never
destruct the outer insulation of covered conductor while it is strung.
It shall be clearly specified how each type of the above insulators and hardware can be fixed rigidly on pole
/ tower. The necessary drawings which depict the same should also be furnished.
Plastic insulator clamps/ties
The Clamps / ties shall be designed suitably to hold the MVCC in its position on top of the insulator. The
Clamps is preferred to be made of Insulating Plastic materials or protected with Insulating Plastic material
to ensure tracking resistance and to avoid any insulation damage to covered conductor due abrasion while
mechanical or wind induce vibration. For attachment of Covered Conductors (35 - 240 mm²) to pin or
spool type insulators. Fixing of insulator Top use temperature: - 30º C to + 40º C.
S. No. Description Unit Required TS Bidder's Offer
1 Name of the manufacturer

2 Address of manufacturer
IS the manufacturer of the
3 accessories certified as ISO 9001-
2000 Company Yes/No
a Copies of certificate enclosed Yes/No
b Are GA Drawing enclosed IS 2486
4 Product designation IPC
As per NFC 33
5 Applicable Standard 020-1998
6 Range of the cable size: Main & Tap
a Main 50-90 Sq. mm
b Tap 50-90 Sq. mm
7 Material Composition
Weather & UV
Resistant Glass
fibre Reinforce
a Body Polymer
b Contact Plates Tinner Copper
c Bolts Galvanized Steel
d Seals & end Elastomer
Is any metallic part carrying potential
in operation exposed during
8 installation
9 Are end caps of branch cable

Yes/No
a Slide on Tap Yes/No
b Rigid Yes/No
Are torque limiting shear heads Yes/No
10 provided to tightening bolts
11 Marking
a Make
b Main Range
c Tap Range
12 System Frequency in Hz Hz 50
Voltage withstand under water Min 15 Kv for 1

13 emersion in KV min
14 Min & Max. Torque defined in Nm
(a) Min. Nm 19
(b) Max. Nm 25
15 Rated Tightening torque in Nm Nm 22
As per Drawing
16 Dimensions C-AJA4030134
Cable Ties:
The ties shall be designed suitably to hold the MVCC in its position on top of the insulator and shall
confirm to EN 50397-2. The Ties shall be Non-metallic Helical type to ensure tracking resistance and to
avoid any insulation damage to covered conductor due abrasion while mechanical or wind induce
vibration. These non-metallic helical ties should be manufactured from rigid, high impact polyvinyl
chloride having excellent chemical properties which retain good physical characteristics without
deteriorating in function from the effects of severe weather conditions and industrial fumes.
40. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF HOT ROLLED STEEL BEAMS (JOISTS)
1. SCOPE:
Specification covers the manufacture, testing at works and supply of various sizes of Hot rolled steel beams.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
The Mild shall be conforming to IS:2062 – 1992 GRADE ‗ A ‗ modified upto date or its equivalent
international standard for steel materials, document for which shall be made available at the time of
inspection to the Employer‘s representative. The dimensions of Hot Rolled Steel Beams shall be
conforming to IS: 808 / 1989 amended upto date and tolerance as per IS: 1852 modified upto date.
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
Material shall be supplied as per the sizes and technical details as per following requirements and drawing.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS RSJ POLE/HDG RSJ POLE
Sr. No. Particulars Employer‟s Requirement/ To be offered by the Bidder
1. Designation (DxB) (mm x mm) 116x100 MB 125x70 MB 175x85 SC 152x152 UC 152x152

2. Length of joist-Meter 9m/10m/ 8m/9m 9m 11m/13m 11m/13m
with±100 mm tolerance 11m/13m
3. Weight (kg/M) 23.0 13.3 19.6 37.1 37.0
4. Sectional area (A) (Sq.cm.) 29.3 17.0 25.0 47.4 47.11
5. Depth of section (D) (mm) 116 125 175 152 161.8
6. Width of flange (B) (mm) 100 70 85 152 154.4
7. Thickness of flange (Tf) (mm) 10 8 9 11.9 11.5
8. Thickness of Web (Tw) (mm) 8.5 5 5.8 7.9 8.0
9. Radius of fillet or root (R1)(mm) 15 9 10 11.7 7.6
10. Radius of tow (R2) (mm) 3 4.5 5 3 --
11. Moment of Inertia I xx 643.8 445 1260 1970 2210
(cm4) Iyy (cm4)
143.5 38.5 76.7 700 706.2
12. Radius of Gyration GR xx (cm) 4.69 5.16 7.13 6.45 6.85
13. Modulus of Section 111 71.2 144 259 273.2
(i) Z xx (cm3) 28.7 11 18 91.9 91.48
(ii) Z yy (cm3)
14. Tolerance in dimensions ---------------- As per IS: 1852 Updated ---------------------
and weight
41. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE)

PIPE
SCOPE
This specification covers the manufacturing, testing at works, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection
and commissioning of the high-density polyethylene (PE 63, 6.0 Meter (ductile iron pipe size O.D) pressure
pipe primarily intended for the pressure pipe primarily intended for buried for underground cable and
Railway/Highway Track Crossing works etc. as per IS: 4984 or equivalent international standard with latest
amendment.
This section covers design, manufacture, testing before dispatch, packing, transportation at site, insurance,
supply and laying of ISI Marked DWC (Double Wall Corrugated) HDPE pipes -For laying of XLPE Power
Cable 1/3/3.5 core up to 630 sq. mm.
DETAILS OF REQUIREMENT OF THE HDPE PIPE
TYPE
The HDPE pipe shall be double wall corrugated of standard make suitable for laying 1 core 630 sq mm and
3- core 300 sq. mm XLPE.
The HDPE pipe shall be ISI marked and complying with technical requirement of IS-14930.
SIZE:
The HDPE pipe shall have OD/ED (mm) as 110 and have standard length of 6 meters.
Fitting and Assembly.
The scope of work shall include all fittings and accessories namely End Caps, Bends, Tees etc. required for
the successful execution of laying work of the HDPE pipe.
Non-flame propagating properties.
The HDPE pipe shall be of non-flame propagating type as per IS-14930 (Part-II).
Antirodancy
The HDPE pipe shall have antirodancy property to prevent damage caused due to rodants.
Pipes shall be designated according to the grade (PE 63) of material nominal diameter of as follows:
Material Grade: PE -63 MRS –Minimum Required strength of materials: 6.3 MPa at 200 deg. C Maximum
allowable Hydrostatic design stress: 5.0 MPa at 200 deg. C
Size Material Grade Outer Diameter Tolerance Ovality
110 mm diameter HDPE pipe (PE-63) x 6.0 Mtr. 110 mm 1.0 2.2
GENERAL:
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipes/fittings: All material used in the production shall be
approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). The pipe shall be designed, constructed and
installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications.
The pipes are recommended for maximum water temperature of +45 degree C‘. The pipe may also be
used Up to the ambient temperature of – 40 -degree C. As the creep rupture strength of the pipe varies
with the change in water temperature, the maximum working pressure and should modify as per IS:
4984.
COLOUR:
The colour of the pipe shall be black.
For the purpose of identification of the pipes covered in this standard, each pipe shall contain
minimum three equispaced longitudinal stripes of width 3 mm (Min) in blue colour. These stripes shall
be coextruded during pipe manufacturing and shall not be more than 0.2 mm in depth. The material of
the stripes shall be of the same type of resin, as used in the base compound for the pipe.
MATERIAL:
The-material used for the manufacture of pipes should not constitute toxic hazard, should not support
microbial growth and should not give rise to unpleasant taste or odour, cloudiness or discoloration of,
water. Pipe manufacturers shall obtain a certificate to this effect from the manufacturers of raw
material.
High density polyethylene (HDPE) used for the manufacture of pipes shall conform to designation
PEEWA-45-T-006 of IS 7328: 1992. HDPE conforming to designation PEEWA-45-T-012 of IS 7328:
1992 may also be used with the exception that melt flow rating (MFR) shall not exceed 1.10 g/10
minutes. III addition the material shall also conform to 5.6.2 of IS 7328: 1992
The MFR of the material shall be between 0.41 and 1.10 (both inclusive) when tested at 190 UC with
nominal load of 5 kgf as determined by method prescribed in 7 of IS 2530: 1963. The MFR of the
material shall also be within + 20 percent of the value declared by the manufacturer.
The resin shall be compounded with carbon black. The carbon black content in the material shall be
within 2.5 + 0.5% and the dispersion of carbon black shall be satisfactory when tested according to the
procedure described in IS 2530: 1963.
ANTI-OXIDANT
The percentage of anti-oxidant used shall not be more than 0.3 percent by mass of finished resin. The
anti-oxidant used shall be physiologically harmless and shall be selected from the list given in IS
10141: 1982
REWORKED MATERIAL
The addition of not more than 10 percent of the A-2). manufacturer‘s own rework material resulting from
the manufacture of pipes is permissible. No other reworked or recycled material shall be used.
WALL THICKNESS
The minimum and maximum wall thickness of pipes for the grades of materials, namely, PE 63, shall
be as given in Tables 3, respectively as per IS: 4984
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
The outside diameter of the pipe shall be taken as the average of‘ two measurements taken at right
angles for pipes up to 110 mm diameter. Alternatively, and for higher sizes, the diameter shall be
measured preferably by using a Flexibly Pi tape or a circometer, having an accuracy of IIO~ less than
0.1 mm. The wall thickness shall be measured by a dial vernier or ball ended micrometer. The
resulting dimension shall be expressed to the nearest 0.mm.
NOTES:
The outside diameter shall be measured at a distance of at least 300 mm from the end of the pipe.
In the case of dispute, the dimension of pipes shall be measured after conditioning at room temperature
for 4 hours.
Ovality shall be measured as the difference between maximum outside diameter and minimum outside
diameter measured at the same cross section of the pipe, at 300 mm away from the cut end. For pipes
to be coiled, the ovality shall be measured prior to coiling. For coiled pipes, however, re-rounding of
pipes shall be carried out prior to the measurement of ovality.
LENGTH OF STRAIGHT PIPE
The length of straight pipe shall be 6.0 m.
INSPECTION & TEST
The HDPE pipes shall be offered for inspection at manufactured work before dispatch and test as per
relevant IS shall be conducted by the authority representative of purchaser.
VISUAL APPEARANCE
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth, clean and free from grooving and other
defects. The cuds shall be cleanly cut and shall be square with axis of the pipes. Slight shallow
longitudinal grooves or irregularities in the wall thickness shall be permissible, provided that the wall
thickness remains within the permissible limits.
MARKING
Each straight length of pipe shall be clearly marked in indelible ink/paints on either end and for coil at
both ends or hot embossed on white base every meter throughout the length of pipe/coil with the
following information:
Manufacturer‘s name/Trade-mark,
Designation of pipe and
Lot number/Batch number.
BIS Certification Marking
Each pipe may also be marked with Standard Mark.

TESTING:
All the type tests, Routine test and Acceptance to be done as per IS: 4984
42. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CI SPUN PIPE
(Class-I, A type, 300 mm dia, 5.5 Meter Length)
1.0 STANDARD:
The standard covers the requirements for centrifugally cast (Spun) iron pipes for pressure main lines for
water, gas and sewage, manufactured in metal (lined or unlined) or sand moulds and also applicable to cast
iron pipes having socket/spigot (both lead caulked or push on flexible) or flanges.
2.0 REFERENCES:
IS: 1536:2001 with latest amendment-for centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and
sewage
IS 1387:1993- General Requirements for the supply of metallurgical materials.
IS 1608:1995- Mechanical Testing for metals- Tensile Testing
IS 11606:1986- Method of sampling of Cast Iron Pipes
3.0 PURPOSE:
The materials will be used for Underground Railway Track/ NH Highway crossings for 33 KV and 11 KV
Transmission/Distribution Lines. CI spun pipe of 300 mm Dia, 5.5 length will be used underneath the
Railway Track/ NH Highway portion for protection of the 33 KV and 11 KV armoured XLPE cables (for
Single core-multiple run of cables). The Pipes will be extended end to end to obtain the required length of
underground cover for the XLPE cables as per site requirement under the Railway track and adjoining
portions on the side of the track.
4.0 SIZES and DIMENSIONS:
The Sizes and Dimensions are per Clause 13.5- ―Table 7 Socket Spigot Pipes- Class A‖ of the relevant IS
1536: 2001.
Tolerances on Dimensions should be as per Clause 14.0 and its sub Clauses of the relevant IS 1536: 2001,
as attached below.
5.0 TOLERANCE ON OVALITY (Push – on Joint)
In case of oval spigot ends (DE) the minor axis is permitted to be less than the minimum allowable
diameter by value given below provided the mean diameter DE measured by circumferential tape comes
within the minimum allowable dimensions of DE (Table 4) after applying tolerance:
Nominal Diameter (DN) Allowable Difference between Minor Axis and DE, (Min)
80-300 1.0
350-600 1.75
700 2.00
750-800 2.4
900-1000 3.5
6.0 TOLERANCE ON THICKNESS:
The tolerance on the pipe wall thickness ―e‖ shall be as follows:
Dimensions Tolerance (mm)
Wall Thickness - (1 + 0.05 e)
Flange thickness ± ( 2 = 0.05 b)
e = thickness of the pipe wall in mm, and b= thickness of the flange in mm.
7.0 TOLERANCE ON LENGTH:
The tolerance on length of pipes shall be as follows:
Type of Casting Tolerance (mm)
Socket and spigot and plain ± 100

ended pipes
Flanged Pipes ± 10
8.0 PERMISSIBLE DEVIATION FROM A STRAIGHT LINE:
The pipes shall be straight. When rolled along two gantries separated by approximately two-thirds the
length of the pipe to be checked, the maximum deviation from a straight line in mm shall not be greater
than 1.25 times the length ‗L‘ in meters of the pipe, thus fn <1.25 L
9.0 TOLERANCE ON MASS:
The permissible tolerances on standard mass of pipe shall be ±5 percent.
The pipes of the heavier mass than the maximum shall be accepted provided they comply in e v e r y other
respect with the requirements of this standard.
10.0 COATING:
Coating of each Pipe should be as per Clause 15.0 and its sub Clauses of the relevant IS 1536: 2001.
Coating shall not be applied to any pipe unless its surfaces are clean, dry and free from rust. Unless
otherwise agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer all pipes shall be coated externally and
internally with the same material by dipping in a tar or suitable base bath. The pipes may be either
preheated before dipping or the bath may be uniformly heated. Alternatively, if mutually agreed between
the purchaser and the manufacturer, the pipes may be coated by spraying or brush painting. The coating
material shall set rapidly with good adherence and shall not scale off.
11.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Should be as per Clause 16.0 and its sub Clauses of the relevant IS 1536: 2001.
12.0 MARKING:
Should be as per Clause 17.0 and its sub Clauses of the relevant IS 1536: 2001.
13.0 TESTS:
The Materials should be tested as per Clause 11.0 & 12.0 and its Sub Clauses of the Relevant IS 1536:2001.
Tests to be performed are as below.
14.0 MECHANICAL TESTS:

Ring Test for Pipes centrifugally cast in metal moulds (as detailed in Annex A, of IS 1536:2001)
Hydrostatic Test Pressure and Hydraulic Working Pressure (as detailed in Annex B, of IS 1536:2001)
43. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV AND 11 KV XLPE INSULATED POWER

CABLES:
SCOPE:
The specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supply and delivery to site in proper packed
condition, storage, laying, testing and commissioning of different grades of 1 or 3 core, Aluminium
Conductor, Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, PVC sheathed, Armoured, Screened Power
Cables suitable for use in non- effectively earthed 33 kV system and effectively earthed 11 kV systems.
LOCATION:
The Cables may be laid buried directly in ground at a depth of one meter in average, anywhere in Assam
and terminate for outdoor connection to a power transformer or to overhead lines, Underground Railway
Track, NH Crossings etc.
The Cables may also be laid within covered cable trenches, in cable racks or open-air ladder trays etc. for
certain portions of lengths.
SYSTEM DETAILS:
Voltage grade (KV) of cable 19/33 6.35/11
required
33 KV 11 KV
Service Voltage
36 KV 12 KV
Highest Voltage
Delta connected system Solidly earthed
Earthing System
170 KV for 33 KV Grade 75 KV for 11 KV Grade
B.I.L. For Cable
See Clause 5.06
Fault Level (Max.)
50 C./S 50 C/S
Frequency
STANDARDS:
The Cable shall conform to the following standards to the extent of APDCL‘s requirement is fulfilled.
Sl. No. Standard Name Details
1 IS: 7098 (Part-II) (Latest) Specification for cross-linked polyethylene Insulated PVC
sheathed Cables for working Voltages from 3.3 KV up to and
including 33 KV.
2 IS:8130-1984 Specification for Conductors for insulated electric cables and
flexible cords
3 IS:5831-1984 PVC insulation & sheath of electric cables
4 IS: 3961-1967 For Recommended Current Rating
5 IS: 10810-1984 Methods of test for Cables
6 IS: 10418-1982 Cable Drums for Electric Cables
7 All other applicable As per relevance

standards as per ASTM,
NEMA IEEE, IEC.
The cable, joints, outdoor termination and their accessories and fittings may conform to other Indian and/or
equivalent Standards or important publications to improve upon their performance, but shall not fall short
of the requirement of this specification. The tenderer shall clearly indicate such standards in their offers.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS & PERFORMANCE:
Description of Cable:
19/33 KV Grade: Standard compacted circular Aluminium (H4 Grade) Conductor, shielded with black
extruded semi- conducting compound XLPE insulated, core shielded with black extruded semi-
conducting compound, black semi- conducting tape and a copper tape, coloured strips having Red,
Yellow & Blue for core identification, shielded cores laid up with fillers, binder taped and Black
extruded PVC (Type ST-2) inner sheath, single layer of round galvanized steel wire armoured and black
extruded PVC (Type ST-2), overall sheathed, conforming generally to IS: 7098(Part- II). Method of
curing for 33 kV cable shall be "Dry curing/gas curing‖ only, whereas for 11 kV and 3.3 kV cables it
shall be "Dry curing/ gas curing / Steam curing". The XLPE cable shall be designed in a manner that
cable is Water retardant.
6.35/11KV Grade: Same as above but insulation shielding with black semi-conducting tape not necessary.
Inner sheath to be wrapped not extruded and strip armoured not wire armoured. The design shall fully
confirm to IS: 7098 (Part-II)
Voltage Grade:19/33KV (For 33 KV System) 6.36/11KV (For 11 KV System)
Size of Cable:
300 sq.mm. 185 sq.mm.
400 sq.mm. 240 sq.mm.
630 sq mm 300 sq.mm.
400 sq. mm
630 sq.mm
Service Voltage: 33 KV 11 KV
Maximum. Conductor temp.: 90 degree C at maximum continuous current.
Clause Parameter 33 K.V System 11 K.V. System
5.06 Short circuit Current 1) 59.22 KA for 1 Sec for 1) 59.22 KA for 1 sec for 11 KV
33 KV 630 sq.mm 630 sq mm
2) 37.6 KA for 1 Sec for 33 2) 37.6 KA for 1 sec for 11 KV

KV 400 sq.mm 400 sq mm
3) 28.2 KA for 1 Sec for 33 3) 28.2 KA for 1 Sec for 11KV

KV 300 Sq mm 300 Sq mm
4) 22.6 KA for 1 Sec for 11KV

240 Sq mm
5) 17.39 KA for 1 Sec for 11KV

Sq mm
Short circuit. Current Combine Earth Fault Current of Screen & Armour (2 kA for 3
Single phase to Earth sec.)
5.07 Maximum Permissible 130 degree C for one hour

emergency overload
temp. at 25% overload
to 100
hrs. per year or 500

hrs. in life of Cable
5.08 Maximum Permissible : 250 degree C for one second

short circuit
Temperature
5.09 Conductor Material : Material to IS: 8130, H4 Grade Aluminium Conductor,

stranded compacted circular
5.10 Conductor screening : Extruded, cross linked, semi-conducting compound of 1.0

mm. thickness for 33 KV and 0.5 mm. thickness for 11 KV
5.11 Insulation : XLPE of thickness, 8.8 (Minimum) for 33 KV and 3.6 mm.
(Nominal) for 11 KV
5.12 Insulation Screening: : Combination of black extruded semi-conducting compound &

For 33 KV semi- conducting tape as the non-metallic part and annealed
copper 0.06 mm (minimum) thick tape lapping as metallic
part. For 1 Core Cable, the non-magnetic metal armour will
act as metallic part insulation screening.
: It is same but semi-conducting tape is not required
5.13 Inner Sheathing : Black extruded PVC Type ST-2 compound for 33 KV and
wrapped PVC tape for 11 KV as per ISS. For 1 Core there
will be no inner sheath.
5.14 Armouring : Single layer of round galvanized steel wires/strip for 33 KV

and galvanized steel strips/wire for 11 KV (3 core) as per IS.
For 1 core, there will be non-magnetic metal armour.
5.15 Overall Sheathing : Coloured PVC Type ST-2 compound to IS: 5831, extruded for
both 33 KV and 11 KV thicknesses shall be as per ISS.
5.16 Approx length of : 250 meters with a tolerance of + 5% (for 3-Core). 500 Meters
Cable in a Drum + 5% (for 1 Core)
5.17 End Sealing : H.S. Caps (See Clause 8.11) (Heat Shrinkable)
5.18 Max. tan-delta at room : 0.004

temp., at nominal
a) Phase to Neutral
Voltage (Uo)
b) Maxm. Increment of : 0.002

tandelta between 0.5
Uo to 2 Uo at room
temp
5.19 Partial Discharge : 20 Pc (Maxm.) at 1.6 Uo

Value
5.20 Impulse Tests : 170 KV for 33 KV and 75 KV for 11 KV as per ISS
5.21 H.V. Tests between : 48 KV (rms) for 33 KV for 5 minutes and as per ISS for 11
KV
Conductors & Screen/
Armour
5.22 Maximum D.C : As per relevant I.S.S
Resistance per KM
N.B.: The above parameters are applicable for 3-Core and 1-Core Cable, if not otherwise specified.
CABLE CONSTRUCTION:
XLPE Underground Cable is to be manufactured in continuous catenary process at controlled elevated

temperature and pressure in inert atmosphere with use of suitable materials for XLPE main insulation and
XLPE semi-conducting Insulation & XLPE screen. The inner and outer semi- conducting sheaths and
main polyethylene insulation between the sheaths are to be simultaneously extruded during the Tripple
extrusion process of manufacturing and main insulation of the Cable is to be extruded unfilled. The
XLPE Cable in this specification does not have any metal sheath and the short circuit rating of the cable
will depend on the conductivity and continuity of the strands of the armour wires which shall be ensured
by guarding against corrosion.
CONDUCTOR SCREEING:
A semi-conducting cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) screening shall be extruded over the conductor to
act as an electrical shield which together with the elimination of the so called ―Strand Effect‖ prevents to
great extent air ionization on the surface of the conductor.
INSULATION:
The main insulation of the Cable shall be extruded unfilled, chemically cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)
inert gas cured satisfying the requirement of IS: 7098(Part-II).
INSULATING SCREEN:
The screen shall be made up as given in 5.12. The metal screen eliminates tangential stress of rotating
electrostatic field surrounding the conductor and uniform electrical stress in the insulation.
The semi-conducting polyethylene (XLPE) screen shall be extruded over the main polyethylene insulating
wall to prevent partial discharge at the surface of the insulation. The copper tape shall be wrapped over the
semi conducting tape or extrusion as mentioned earlier for 3 core cables. The metal screen so formed
around the cores shall be in contact with one another as the cores are laid up at triangular configuration.
For single core cable, Aluminium wire armouring shall constitute the metallic part of insulation screen.
Conductor screening, insulation and insulation screening shall be extruded in triple extrusion processes so
as to obtain continuously smooth interfaces.
The mechanical and chemical properties of the materials for semi conducting screens are much more
important than their electrical properties, but for obtaining the high overall degree of electrical properties
of an E.H.V. cable, the inner and outer semi conducting screens and the main polyethylene insulation
between the screens shall be simultaneously extruded during the manufacturing process known as ―tripple
extrusion‖. The advantages are:-
The partial discharge level at the surface of the insulation is brought to a minimum.
There will be no displacement of the semi conducting screen and insulation during expansion and
contraction due to load cycles and bending.
The semi conducting screens are easily removable during jointing and termination operations.
FRLS PROPERTIES:
All cable shall be Flame Retardant, Low Smoke (FRLS) type. Outer sheath shall have the following
properties –
Acid Gas Generation – Max 20% (as per IEC 754-1)
Smoke density rating: 60% (As per ASTMD 2843)
Flammability test - As per Swedish chimney test F3 as per SEN 4241475
As per IEC 332 part-3 (Category B)
Minimum bending radius shall be 15D
Repaired cables shall not be acceptable.
LAYING UP:
The phase identification of the cores shall be either by colour or numerals as per I.S.S. for 3 core cables
only
Core Colour Numeral
Red 1
Yellow 2
Blue 3
The screened cores shall be laid up with interstices filled with PVC fillers and taped with a binder tape as
to obtain a reasonably circular cable.
INNER SHEATH
The cable core shall be supplied with bedding of PVC (inner sheath) in the form of extruded PVC sheath
for 33KV cables. Wrapped PVC tapes shall be used for 11 KV thickness as per Para 5.13 and as per ISS.
ARMOUR:
The Armouring shall be of Single layer of round galvanized steel wires/strip for 33 KV and galvanized
steel strips/wire for 11 KV (3 core) as per IS. The Steel Wires/Aluminium Wires of required size in
requisite number as per para 5.14 shall be laid closely in the spiral formation to protect the
circumference of the cable fully and to provide adequate cross- sectional area for flow of maximum
fault current within limits of specified temperature rise and duration of fault. The direction of the lay of
the armour shall be opposite to that of the cable cores. In case of Single Core Cable the armour should
be of non-magnetic material.
OUTER SEATH:
A reliable serving shall be necessary for maintaining conductivity of the armour particularly under
corrosive condition in the form of jacket. The cable shall therefore be finished with an extruded PVC over
sheath of thickness as per para 5.15.
The quality of PVC over sheath (Jacket) shall be ensured for service reliability against moisture intrusion
and shall conform to type ST-2 of IS: 5831.
The colour of the outer sheath shall be as follows:
For 33 KV Cable: GREEN & For 11 KV Cable: BLUE
The s heaths shall be protected against white ants, vermin and termites by suitable, reliable and durable
measures.
The supplier shall suggest suitable materials for use, in the event of damage to the over sheath to prevent
passage of moisture along the cable.
CABLE IDENTIFICATION:
The following shall be embossed on the outer sheath for the identification.
Manufacturer‘s Name or Trade Mark.

Voltage Grade.
Nominal section & Material of conductor and number of crores.
Year of manufacture.
Inscription for length of cables at 1.0 meter interval.
Name of the purchaser: APDCL (AIIB Project)
Marking ―Electric‖ shall be embossed throughout the length of the Cable at 10 meters spacing.
Type of insulation i.e. XLPE.
SEALING OF CABLE ENDS:
The cable ends of cable in the wooden drum for delivery shall be sealed with heat shrinkable caps.
WOODEN DRUMS:
The Cable shall be packed in wooden drums which should be taken back by turnkey contractor after erection
works without imposing any extra cost.
The following information shall be marked on each drum.
Drum identification No.

Manufacturer‘s Name, Trade Name/Trade Mark, if any.
Nominal sectional area of the conductor of the cable.
No. of Cores.
Type of Cable and Voltage Grade with Cable Code.
Length of the Cable in Cable Drum.
Direction of rotation of Drum (by means of an arrow)
Approximate Weight: Tare: Gross
Year and Country of Manufacture.
Purchase Order No.
Date of Delivery.
Name of the Purchaser: APDCL (AIIB Project)
Drums shall be proofed against attack by white ants or termite conforming to IS: 10418.
The Drums may also be marked with ISI Certificate Mark, if applicable.
a. Safe Pulling Force: 30 N/mm2 (for Conductor)
TESTS:
All tests are to be performed as per IS: 7098 (Part-II)
TYPE TEST:
All the tests mentioned below are to be made as per details given in IS: 10810. Type test certificates not later
than 10 (ten) years from the date of submission shall be enclosed along with the bid.
Tests on conductor
Tensile Test (for aluminium)
Wrapping Test (for aluminium)
Resistance Test.
Tests for armouring.
Test for thickness of insulation and sheath
Physical test for insulation.
Tensile strength and elongation at break.
Ageing in air oven.
Hot test.
Shrinkage test
Water absorption (Gravimetric)
Physical tests for outer sheath
Tensile strength and elongation at break.
Ageing in air oven.
Shrinkage test.
Hot deformation.
Heat shock.
Loss of mass in air oven.
Thermal stability.
Partial discharge test.
Bending test.
Dielectric power factor test.
As a function voltage.
ii) As a function of temperature.
Insulation resistance (Volume resistivity) Test.
Heating cycle test.

Impulse with stand test.
High voltage test.
Flammability test.
The following tests on screened cable shall be performed successively on the same test sample of completed
cable, not less than 10m. in length between the test accessories.
P.D. Test.
Bending Test followed by P.D. Test.

Dielectric power factor as a function of voltage.
Dielectric power factor as a function of temperature.
Heating cycle test followed by dielectric power factor as a function of voltage and P.D. tests.
Impulse withstand test and
High voltage test as per Para 5.21.
ACCEPTANCE TEST:
The following shall constitute Acceptance Tests:
Tensile test (for aluminium)

Wrapping test (for aluminium)
Conductor resistance test.
Test for thickness of insulation and sheath.
Hot set test for insulation.
Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and outer sheath.
P.D. test (for screened cables) only on full drum length.
High Voltage test, and
Insulation resistance (VOLUME RESISTIVITY) TEST
ROUTINE TESTS:
The routine test shall be carried out on all cables manufactured in accordance with this specification.
The following routine tests shall be made on cable length as specified in the ISS.
Conductor resistance test.
Partial discharge test on full drum length.
High voltage test as per Para 5.21
TEST WITNESS:
All Tests shall be performed in presence of Purchaser‘s representative if so desired by the Purchaser.
TEST CERTIFICATE:
Certified copies of all routine tests carried out at Works shall be furnished.
Type Test Certificates of the offered Cable from CPRI/ERDA or equivalent International Standard
laboratory shall be furnished. Otherwise the cable shall have to be type tested on similar rating, free of any
charges to prove the design.
44. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HEAT SHRINKABLE CABLE TERMINATIONS

AND JOINTS SUITABLE FOR XLPE CABLES.
1.0 SCOPE:
The scope covers supply, jointing, testing and commissioning of Heat Shrinkable Termination Kits,
suitable for 11 KV & 33 KV XLPE cables, shall be designed, manufacture, tested, packed, delivered &
installed by the Vendor, as per Purchaser‘s requirements.
The term heat shrink refers to extruded or moulded polymeric materials which are cross linked to develop
elastic memory and supplied in expanded or deformed size or shape.
2.0 QUALIFYING EXPERIENCE:
The kits should have satisfactory performance record in India in excess of 5 years supported with proof of
customers having satisfactorily used these kits in excess of 5 years.
3.0 TYPE TEST REPORTS:
The Joints and terminations should have been type tested and type test reports should be submitted by the
bidder along with the offer.
4.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
Standard Number Title
IS - 13573: 2011 Joints & Terminations of Polymeric Cables for working voltages from 6.6
kV up to and including 33 kV Performance Requirements and Type Tests
IS -7098 Part 2 :1985 Cross-linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Insulated PVC sheathed cables: Part 2 :
For working voltages from 3.3 kV upto and including 33 kV
IS - 692: 1994 Paper insulated lead-sheathed cables (PILC) for rated voltages up to and
including 33 kV specification
IS - 10810: 1984 Methods of test for cables
EA TS - 09 - 13 Electricity Association - Technical Specification -09-13 Material

component for use in Electric Power Cable Termination & Joints for
System voltage above 1000 V up to 36kV
IEEE - 48 Standards Test Procedures and requirements for high voltage alternating
current cable termination
IEC - 60183 Guide to the selection of high voltage cables
IEC - 885 Part 1-3 Electric test methods for electric cables
IEC - 60840 Power cable with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltage above 30 kV (Um=36 KV) up to 150 KV (Um=170KV) - test
methods and requirements.
TECHNICAL PARAMETERS:
FOR HEAT SHRINK TERMINATION KIT SUITABLE FOR 11KV XLPE CABLE
SL.NO. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS UNIT GUARANTEED VALUES
a) Nominal Phase to Phase System Voltage KV 11 KV
b) Maximum System Voltage KV 12 KV
c) A.C withstand Dry (Phase/Ground), Time KV 40 KV

Duration Mins 1 Min
d) A.C withstand Wet (Phase/Ground), Time KV 35 KV
Duration Mins 1 Min
e) Partial Discharge at 2 Uo Pc 20 Pc
f) Impulse withstand 1.2/50/Us KV 75 KV
g) Load Cycle Test
i) Each cycle heating duration Hrs 5
Temperature Deg C 100
Cooling Duration Hrs 3
ii) No. of cycles As per IS:13573
iii) Continuous phase to ground voltage KV 2.5 Uo

withstand
h) Leak tightness test As per IS:13573
i) Thermal withstand short circuit current for KA As per IS:13573

1 sec
j) Dynamic short circuit withstand KA Peak 2.55xls as per IS:13573
k) DC Voltage KV 48 KV for 30 mins
l) Operating temperature for continuous Deg C 90

current rating
m) Operating temperature for short circuit Deg C 250
current rating
KIT PARTICULARS
a) Material of the tubing / moulded parts Polyolefin
b) Method of stress control High Permittivity Materials
c) Method of environmental seal H.S Anti-tracking Tubes
d) Allowable kit storage temperature Deg C H.S Anti-tracking Tubes
e) Self-life for H.S components Years More than 5 Years

FOR HEAT SHRINK TERMINATION KIT SUITABLE FOR 33 KV XLPE CABLE
SL. NO. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS UNIT GUARANTEED VALUES
a) Nominal Phase to Phase System Voltage KV 33 KV
b) Maximum System Voltage KV 36 KV
c) A.C withstand Dry (Phase/Ground), Time KV 75 KV

Duration
Mins 1 Min
d) A.C withstand Wet (Phase/Ground), Time KV 70 KV

Duration
Mins 1 Min
e) Partial Discharge at 2 Uo Pc < 20 Pc
f) Impulse withstand. 1.2/50/Us KV 170 KV
g) Load Cycle Test
i) Each cycle heating duration Hrs 5
Temperature Deg C 100
Cooling Duration Hrs 3
ii) No. of cycles As per IS:13573
iii) Continuous phase to ground voltage KV 2.5 Uo

withstand
h) Leak tightness test As per IS:13573
i) Thermal withstand short circuit current for 1 sec KA As per IS:13573
j) Dynamic short circuit withstand KA Peak 2.55xls as per IS:13573
k) DC Voltage KV 144 KV for 30 mins
l) Operating temperature for continuous current Deg C 90

rating
m) Operating temperature for short circuit current Deg C 250

rating
KEY PARTICULARS
a) Material of the tubing / moulded parts Polyolefin
b) Method of stress control High Permittivity Materials
c) Method of environmental seal H.S Anti-tracking Tubes
d) Allowable kit storage temperature Deg C H.S Anti-tracking Tubes
e) Self-life for H.S components Years More than 5 Years
INDOOR TYPE
Sl. No. Description Unit Value
1 Applicable standards As per IS:13573
2 For the nominal(phase to phase) System voltages kV 33

Maximum system voltage
3 A.C. withstand voltage Dry (ph/ground) 5 min kV 85.5

OUTDOOR TYPE:
Sl. No. Description Unit Value
1 Applicable standards As per IS:13573
2 For the nominal (phase to phase) System voltages kV 33

Maximum system voltage
3 A.C. withstand voltage Dry (ph/ground) 5 min kV 85.5
4 Partial Discharge at 2 Vo pC Less than 10

5 Impulse withstand,1.2/50/Us KVp 170
6 Load cycle Test
6.1 Temperature of conducor during heating cycle OC For XLPE cable 95OC-100OC
6.2 Total duration of cycle Hrs 2
6.3 Duration of cooling Hrs 3
6.4 Duration of cycle No. 60
6.5 Continuous phase to ground withstand voltage kV 47.5
7 Thermal Withstand Short circuit current 1Sec. kA As per cable conductor
size/material
8 Dynamic short circuit Withstand kA peak 2.55xIs As per IS-13573
9 Leak Tightness 10 cycle
10 Salt fog test (Conductivity of salt solution kV 1000 hrs at 24kV
=1600mS/m)
11 Material of the tubing/molded parts Polyolefin based
12 Method of stress control High permittivity
13 Method of environmental seal Sealing mastic and heat shrink
breakout boot/ tube for crutch
sealing and lug sealing.
Heat shrink for core
insulation.
14 Allowable Kit storage Temperature OC Indoor , Ambient temperature
50OC
15 Type of Lug Crimping
16 Material of Lug Same as cable conductor
material
17 Shelf life of H.S. components To be filled by bidder
18 Cable Termination Instruction Manuals To be provided by bidder
19 Creepage distance mm/kV 31mm/kV
KIT‟S CONTENTS:
The kits should generally consist of

Heat shrinkable clear insulating tubes.
Stress control tubing where necessary.
Ferrule insulating tubing for joints.
Conductive cable breaks outs for terminations, non-tracking, erosion and weather resistant tubing both outer
/ inner.
Non tracking erosions and weather resistant outdoor sheds in case of terminations.
High permittivity mastic wedge.
Insulating mastic.
Aluminium crimping lugs of ISI specification.
Tinned copper braids.
Wrap around mechanical protection for joints.
Cleaning solvents, abrasive strips. Plumbing metal.
Binding wire etc. adequate in quantity and dimensions to meet the service and test conditions.
The kit shall have installation instructions and shall be properly packed with shelf life of over 5 years.
TEST ON TERMINATION KIT/ JOINTS AS PER IS: 13573.
Conductor Resistance Test
Impact Test
AC High Voltage Test (Dry)
Partial Discharge Test
Impulse with stand test
AC Voltage life test with cyclic current loading
Partial Discharge Test
AC Voltage life test with cyclic current loading
Thermal Short circuit test
MARKING AND LABELING
As per the IS 13573 (Part-I&II):2011 all kits shall be marked and labeled suitably for identification.
Manufacturer‘s name or logo and the name of components wherever feasible;
Type of jointing materials, the application;

Batch number(s), where relevant;
Product reference;
Defined storage conditions and expiry date, if any;
If relevant, the manufacturing date;
Health and safety marking and handling instructions, where relevant; and
Reference to compliance with this standard.
ROUTINE AND ACCEPTANCE TEST:
Visual Examination
Condition of selected items / components, as per sampling method, shall be recorded. Some of the normal
check-points can be as follows:
Every component shall be verified in quantity and description as per KCT.
All items shall be free from any defects, pin holes, cracks, etc.
Metallic components to be free from sharp edges.
Measurements of Dimensions
(Required / observed dimension — length, diameter, etc.)
Supplied dimensions
Recovered dimensions
Destructive Testing
On various heat-shrinkable / moulded components of ready Kits (Items 3 and 4 are applicable only for heat-
shrinkable components)
Tensile Strength
Wall Thickness Ratio
Heat Shock
Longitudinal Change, after full recovery
Ultimate Elongation
Low Temperature Flexibility
Dielectric Strength
Volume Resistivity
LT CABLE TERMINATION:
The LT cable terminations will be done with the help of high conductivity aluminium cable lug to be bolted
with the bus bar or link.
The cable to be terminated shall be dressed properly. The outer sheath & insulation shall be removed &
proper care shall be taken to ensure that the cable connector is not damaged.
For terminating LT cable, the ring terminal insulated lug shall be used & the exposed cable shall crimp with
hydraulic crimping tool.
The portion of the cable conductor which remains exposed shall be covered with moisture resistant tap of
2kV grade.
The cable lug shall be bolted with the help of stainless-steel bolt or bronze bolt with the bus bar or
connecting link.
45. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CABLE GLANDS AND LUGS
Cable glands shall be Double compression type, tinned/Nickel plated (coating thickness not less than 20 microns
in case of tin and 10 to 15 microns in case of nickel) brass cable glands for all power and control cables. They
shall provide dust and weather proof terminations. They shall comprise of heavy duty brass casting, machine
finished and tinned to avoid corrosion and oxidation. Rubber components used in cable glands shall be neoprene
and of tested quality. Required number of packing glands to close unused openings in gland plates shall also be
provided.
The cable glands shall be tested as per BS: 6121. The cable glands shall also be duly tested for dust proof and
weather proof termination.
Cables lugs shall be tinned copper solder less crimping type conforming to IS: 8309 and 8394 suitable for
aluminum or copper conductor (as applicable). The cable lugs shall suit the type of terminals provided. The cable
lugs shall be of Dowell make or equivalent.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF BIMETTALIC LUGS

Adequate size of bimetallic lugs shall be provided for 3½ cores, LT XLPE cable on incoming side and outgoing side
for 63/100/200/315 KVA boxes as below:
Incoming side Outgoing Side
63 KVA 70 sq.mm 50/ 70 sq.mm
100 KVA 150 sq.mm 50/70 sq.mm
200 KVA 300 sq.mm 150 sq.mm.
315 KVA 300 sq.mm 150 sq.mm.
LUG: Bimetallic lug should be made for electrolytic grade aluminum. Each lug should be copper coated by
electrolytic process and rich layer of tin should be mounted throughout the lug to protect from Galvanic
Corrosion. The lugs shall be such that the rich layer of tin should not peel of during operation. Individual lot
should be pre filled with conductive inhibition compound and lug should be duly capped to prevent oozing of
compound. The ductility of material should be such that flow ability of material be adequate to flow in to the
strand of the conductor and withstand on crimping pressure of 8500 PSI. The cut cross section of the joints shall
be homogeneous.
46. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LAYING, TERMINATION OF CABLES, TAGS AND

MARKERS
GENERAL
Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the cables and conduit schedule.
The tag shall be of Aluminium with the number punched on it and securely attached to the cable conduit by not
less than two turns of 20 swg. GI wire conforming to IS: 280. Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for
power cables and of circular shape for control cables.
Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with cable marker made of galvanized
iron plate.
Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with an additional inscription ―Cable
Joint‖. The marker shall project 150 mm above ground and shall be spaced at analysis interval 30 meters and at
every change in direction. They shall also be located on both sides of road and drain crossings.
Regarding termination of Control Cables of various equipments, the cables are to be routed through required
size of PVC pipes up to the entry of the nearby cable trench. The cost of PVC pipes should be included in the
erection/termination cost for the respective equipments.
Cable tags shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering the equipment enclosure), on both
sides of a wall or floor crossing and on each duct/ conduit entry. Cable tags shall be provided inside the
switchgear, motor control centers, control and relay panels, etc., wherever required for cable identification,
such as where a number of cables enter together through a gland plate.
The price of Lugs, Ferrules, cable tags and markers shall be included in the installation rates for
cables/conduits/termination quoted by the contractor.
Specific requirements for cabling for cabling, wiring, ferrules as covered in respective equipment section shall also
be complied with.
CABLE GLANDS
Double compression type cable glands shall be provided by the Contractor for all power and control cables to
provide dust and weather proof termination. Required number of packing glands to close unused openings in
gland plates shall also be provided.
CABLE LUGS
Solder less crimping of terminals shall be done by using corrosion inhibitory compound. The cable lugs shall suit
the type of terminals provided. Crimping tool used shall be of approved design and make.
STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CABLE DRUMS:
Cable drums shall be unloaded, handled and stored in an approved manner. Rolling of drums shall be avoided
as far as practicable. For short distances, the drums may be rolled provided they are rolled slowly and in
proper direction as marked on the drum. In absence of any indication the drums may be rolled in the same
direction it was rolled during taking up the cables.
CABLE SUPPORTS AND CABLE TRAY MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
Cable trenches in the control room are normally provided with embedded steel inserts on concrete floors/
walls. The Contractor shall secure supports by welding to these inserts or available building steel structures.
Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 600 mm wherever cables are to be supported without the use of
cable trays, while at all other places these will be at an interval of 2000 mm.
CABLE TERMINATIONS AND CONNECTIONS

The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly in accordance with cable and termination
kit manufacturer‘s instructions, drawing and/ or as directed by the Owner. The work shall include all clamping,
fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, drilling, cutting, taping, heat shrinking (where applicable), connecting to
cable terminal, shorting and grounding as required to complete the job.
The equipment will be generally provided with un-drilled gland plates for cables/ conduit entry. The Contractor
shall be responsible for drilling of gland plates, painting, and touching up. Holes shall not be made by gas
cutting.
The Contractor shall tag/ferrule the control cable cores at all terminations, as instructed by the Owner. In panels
where a large number of cables are to be terminated and cable identification may be difficult, each core ferrule
may include the complete cable number as well. Spare cores shall be similarly tagged with cable numbers and
coiled up.
Control cables shall have stranded copper conductor. Bare portion of the solid conductors shall be tinned after
removing the insulation and shall be terminated directly without using cable lugs.
All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused openings shall be effectively
closed.
If the cable-end box or terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is found unsuitable and requires
modification, the same shall be carried out by the Contractor with the approval of the Owner.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES:
Power and control cables shall be laid in separate tiers. The order of laying of various cables shall as per
applicable Indian or international standard.
Single core cable in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of three times the diameter of cables
between trefoil center lines. All power cables shall be laid with a minimum center to center distance
equal to twice the diameter of the cable.
Power and control cables shall be securely fixed to the trays/ supports. Trefoil clamps for single core
cables shall be pressure die-cast Aluminium (LM-6). Nylon-6 or fiber glass and shall include necessary
fixing nuts, bolts, washer, etc. These are required at every 2 meter of cable run. Vertical and inclined
cable runs shall be secured with 25 mm wide and 2 mm thick Aluminium strip clamps at every 2 m
Horizontal runs in cable trays and trenches shall be secured using 4 mm nylon cord at every 2 m.
Where cables cross roads, drains and rail tracks, the cables shall be laid in reinforced spun concrete (
Class NP-4) or steel pipes ( Class-B), buried at not less than one meter depth.
Wherever cables pass through floor or through wall openings or other partitions, wall sleeves with
bushes having a smooth curved internal surface so as not to damage the cables shall be supplied,
installed and properly sealed at no extra charges. Ends of pipes shall be sealed with silicon sealant to
prevent entering of rodents etc.
Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the station, wherever
required.
Rollers shall be used at intervals of about 2.0 meters, while pulling cables. All due care shall be taken
during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to avoid damage due to twist, kink, sharp bends, etc.
Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage.
Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in accordance with IS: 1255
and other Indian Standard codes or practices.
installed and properly sealed at no extra charges.
The erection work shall be carried out in a neat workmanlike manner and the areas of work shall be
cleaned of all scrap materials after the completion of work in each area every day. Contractor shall
remove the RCC / steel trench covers before taking up the work and shall replace all the trench covers
after the erection work in that particular area is completed or when further work is not likely to be taken
up for some time. Contractor shall furnish three copies of the report on work carried out in a particular
week, such as cable numbers and a date on which laid, actual length and route, testing carried out,
terminations carried out, along with the marked up copy of the cable schedule and interconnection
drawing wherever the modifications are made.
In case the outer sheath of a cable is damaged during handling/ installation, the Contractor shall repair it
at his own cost, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge. In case any other part of a cable is
damaged, the same shall be replaced by a healthy cable, at no extra cost i.e. the Contractor shall not be
paid for supply, installation and removal of the damaged cable.
All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and reliable connections. The
Contractor shall cover the exposed part of all cable lugs whether supplied by him or not with insulating
type, sleeve or paint.
LAYING OF CABLE DIRECTLY IN GROUND:
This method shall be adopted where specified in the schedule of works. Normally this method shall be
adopted when the cable route is through open ground, along roads, lanes, etc. and where no frequent
excavations are likely to be encountered and where re-excavation is easily possible without affecting
other services.
Trenching:
Width and depth of the trench shall be as shown in the drawing. When more than one tier of cables is
unavoidable and vertical formation of laying is adopted, the depth of the trench shall be increased by 30
cm for each additional tier to be formed
The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever there is a change in the direction,
a suitable curvature shall be adopted complying with the minimum bending radius specified where
gradients and changes in depth are unavoidable, these shall be gradual. The bottom of the trench shall be
level and free from stones, brick bats etc.
Minimum bending radius – XLPE cables
System Minimum bending radius

voltage
Single Core Multicore - Armoured Multicore- Un-armoured
33 KV 25D 15D 20D
Excavation should be done by suitable means – manual or mechanical. The excavated soil shall be
stacked firmly by the side of the trench such that it may not fall back into the trench.
Adequate precautions should be taken not to damage any existing cable (s), pipes or any other such
installations in the route during excavation. Wherever bricks, tiles or protective covers or bare cables are
encountered, further excavation shall not be carried out without the approval of the Employer. Existing
property, if any, exposed during trenching shall be temporarily supported adequately as directed by the
Engineer -in-Charge. The trenching in such cases shall be done in short lengths, necessary pipes laid for
passing cables therein, if required.
If there is any danger of a trench collapsing or endangering adjacent structures, the sides should be well
shored up with sheeting as the excavation proceeds. Where necessary, these may even be left in place when
backfilling the trench.
Excavation through lawns shall be done in consultation with the department concerned.
LAYING OF CABLE IN TRENCH
Sand cushioning:
The excavated trench shall be provided with a layer of clean, dry sand cushion of not less than 75 mm
below and above cable i.e., before and after laying the cables therein. However, sand cushioning may not
be provided for MV cables, where there is no possibility of any mechanical damage to the cables due to
heavy or shock loading on the soil above if so specified in the tender document and as per approval of
the Employer. Sand cushioning shall however be invariably provided in the case of HV cables.
The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks, or on a cable wheel at a suitable location, making
sure that the spindle, jack etc. are strong enough to carry the weight of the drum without failure and that
the spindle is horizontal in the bearings so as to prevent the drum creeping to one side while rotating.
The cable shall be pulled over in rollers in the trench steadily and uniformly without jerks and strain. The
entire cable length shall be far as possible laid off in one stretch. PVC / XLPE cables less than 120
sq.mm size may be removed by ―Flaking‖ i.e. by making one long loop in the reverse direction. For short
runs and sizes up to 50 sq.mm of MV cables, any other suitable method of direct handling and laying can
be adopted without strain or excess bending of the cables.
After the cable has been so uncoiled, it shall be lifted slightly over the rollers beginning from one end
by helpers standing about 10 m apart and drawn straight. The cable shall then be lifted off the rollers
and laid in a reasonably straight line.
Testing before covering
The cables shall be tested in presence of the Employer for continuity of cores and insulation resistance
and the cable length shall be measured, before closing the trench.
Sand covering
Cables laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have a covering of dry sand of not less than
75mm above the top of the laid up cable before the protective covers laid.
In the case of vertical multi-tier formation, after the first cable has been laid, a sand cushion of 30 mm
shall be provided over the base cushion before the second tier is laid. If additional tiers are formed, each
of the subsequent tiers also shall have a sand cushion of 30 mm as stated above. Cables in the top most
tier shall have a final sand covering not less than 15 mm before the protective cover is laid. Sand
covering as stated above need not be provided for MV cables where a decision is taken by the Employer
as per sub clause (iii-a) above, but theater tier spacing should be maintained with soft soil instead of
sand between tiers and for covering. Sand cushioning shall however be invariably provided in the case
of HV cables.
Extra Loop Cable

At the time of original installation, approximately 3 m of surplus cable shall be left on each terminal
end of the cable and on each side of the underground joints. The surplus cable shall be left in the form
of a loop. Where there are long runs of cables such loose cable may be left at suitable intervals as
specified by the employer, Where it may not be practically possible to provide separation between
cables when forming loops of a number of cables as in the case of cable emanating from a substation,
measurement shall be made only to the extent of actual volume of excavation, sand filling etc. and paid
for accordingly.
Mechanical protection over the covering
Mechanical protection to cables shall be laid over the covering to provide warning to future excavators of
the present of the cable and also to protect the cable against accidental mechanical damage by pick-axe
blows etc. as follows:
Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall be protected by a 60-75 mm layer of factory precast,
interlocked concrete blocks (to be approved by the employer) placed on top of the sand (or, soil as the
case may be). The blocks shall be placed breadth wise for the full length of the cable. Where more than
one cable is to be laid in the same trench, this protective covering shall cove all the cables and projects at
least 5 cm over the sides of the end cables.
Backfilling
The trenches shall be then backfilled with excavated earth, free from stones or other shall edged debris
and shall be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive layers not exceeding 30 cm depth.
Unless otherwise specified, a crown of earth not less than 50 mm and not exceeding 100 mm in the center
and tapering towards the sides of the trench shall be left to allow for subsidence. The crown of the earth,
however, should not exceed 10 cms so as not to be a hazard to vehicular traffic.
Route markers
Location: Route markers shall be provided along with the runs of cable allocations approved by the
employer and generally at intervals not exceeding 100m. Markers shall also be provided to identify
change in the direction of the cable route and locations of underground joints.
Plate type marker: Route markers shall be made out of 100 mm x 5 mm G.I. /aluminum plate welded /
bolted on 35 mm x 35 mm x 6 mm angel iron, 60 cm long. Such plate markers shall be mounted parallel
to and at about 0.5 m away from the edge of the trench.
CC marker: Alternatively, cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate of
20 mm in size) shall be laid flat and centered over the cable. The concrete markers, unless otherwise
instructed by the employer, shall project over the surrounding surface so as to make the cable route easily
identifiable.
LAYING IN PIPES / CLOSED DUCTS
In locations such as road crossing, entry in to buildings, paved areas etc., and cables shall be laid in pipes or
closed ducts. Hume pipe NP4 class for road crossing and CI/DI pipe for trenchless works shall be used.
Following guide of the pipe fill shall be used for sizing the pipe size:
1 cable in pipe 53% full
2 cables in pipe 31% full
3 or more cables 43% full
Multiple cables 40% full
Where cables pass through foundation walls or other underground structures, the necessary ducts or
openings will be provided in advance for the same. However, should it become necessary to cut holes in
existing foundations or structures, the electrical contractor shall determine their location and obtain approval
of the Engineer-in-Charge before cutting is done.
At road crossing and other places where cables enter pipe sleeves adequate bed of sand shall be given so that
the cables do not slack and get damaged by pipe ends.
At road crossings, the top surface of pipes shall be at a minimum depth of 1 m from the pavement level.
When pipes are laid cutting existing road, care shall be taken so that the soil filled up after laying the pipes is
rammed well in layers with watering as required to ensure proper compaction. A crown of earth not
exceeding 10 cm should be left at the top. After the subsidence has ceased, the top of the filled-up trenches
in road ways or other paved areas shall be restored to the same density and material as the surrounding area
in accordance with the direction of the employer up to his satisfaction.
All pipes shall be laid as per layout drawings and site requirements. Before fabrication of various
profiles of pipe by hydraulically operated bending machine (which is to be arranged by the Contractor),
all the burrs from the pipes shall be removed. D.I pipes with bends shall be buried in soil / concrete in
such a way that the bends shall be totally concealed. For DI pipes buried in soil, bitumen coating shall be
applied on the buried lengths. Installation of DI pipes shall be undertaken well before paving is
completed and necessary coordination with paving agency shall be the responsibility of Electrical
Contractor. The open ends of pipes shall be suitably plugged with DI plugs after they are laid in final
position. DI plugs shall be supplied by the Contractor at no extra cost.
TESTING
Testing before laying all cables, before laying, shall be tested with a 500 V megger for cables of 1.1 KV
grade, or with a 2500 / 5000 V megger for cables of higher voltage. The cable cores shall be tested for
continuity, absence of cross phasing, and insulation resistance from conductors to earth / armour and
between conductors.
Testing before backfilling
All cables shall be subjected to the above-mentioned tests, before covering the cables by protective
covers and backfilling and also before taking up any jointing operation.
Testing after laying
After laying and jointing, the cable shall be subjected to a 15 minutes pressure test. DC pressure testing
may normally be preferred compared to AC pressure testing.
In the absence of facilities for pressure testing as above, it is sufficient to test for one minute with 1,000
V megger for cables of 1.1 KV grade and with 2500 / 5000 V megger for cables of higher voltages.
WARNING TAPE
Underground warning tape (UWT) is a non-adhesive LDPE plastic tape printed with a warning text warn
future excavators of the danger of the cable or pipe below.
Underground warning tapes should be installed within the trench half way between the cable or pipe
and the surfaces.
Underground warning tapes shall be manufactured with yellow color as and APDCL printed and
supplied on rolls of 150mm wide x 365m long with thickness of P 100 microns (0.1mm)
Material – linear low-density polyethylene
Lead free pigments with virgin grade film
Soil tolerance from pH 2.5 to pH 11.0 inclusive
100-micron grade is manufactured in accordance with ENATS 12-23 specification
INSTALLATION OF CABLES
Power and control cables shall be laid in separate tiers. The order of laying of various cables shall as per
applicable Indian or international standard.
Single core cable in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of three times the diameter of cables
between trefoil center lines. All power cables shall be laid with a minimum center to center distance
equal to twice the diameter of the cable.
Power and control cables shall be securely fixed to the trays/ supports. Trefoil clamps for single core
cables shall be pressure die-cast Aluminium (LM-6). Nylon-6 or fiber glass and shall include necessary
fixing nuts, bolts, washer, etc. These are required at every 2 meter of cable run. Vertical and inclined
cable runs shall be secured with 25 mm wide and 2 mm thick Aluminium strip clamps at every 2 m
Horizontal runs in cable trays and trenches shall be secured using 4 mm nylon cord at every 2 m.
Cables shall not be bent below the minimum permissible limit. The minimum bending radius of power
cables shall be 12D and that of control cables shall be 10D, where D is overall diameter of cable.
Where cables cross roads, drains and rail tracks, the cables shall be laid in reinforced spun concrete or
steel pipes, buried at not less than one meter depth.
In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable one (for LT Cables) or two
(for H.T. cables) straight through joints to be made, should the cable develop fault at a later date.
Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to avoid using straight through joints. Cable
splices will not be permitted except where called for by the drawings, unavoidable or where permitted by
the Owner.
Control cable terminations inside equipment enclosures shall have sufficient lengths so that switching
of termination in terminal blocks can be done without requiring any splicing.
Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the station, wherever
required.
Rollers shall be used at intervals of about 2.0 meters, while pulling cables. All due care shall be taken
during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to avoid damage due to twist, kink, sharp bends, etc.
Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage.
Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in accordance with IS: 1255
and other Indian Standard codes or practices.
installed and properly sealed at no extra charges.
The erection work shall be carried out in a neat workmanlike manner and the areas of work shall be
cleaned of all scrap materials after the completion of work in each area every day. Contractor shall
remove the RCC / steel trench covers before taking up the work and shall replace all the trench covers
after the erection work in that particular area is completed or when further work is not likely to be
taken up for some time. Contractor shall furnish three copies of the report on work carried out in a
particular week, such as cable numbers and a date on which laid, actual length and route, testing
carried out, terminations carried out, along with the marked up copy of the cable schedule and
interconnection drawing wherever the modifications are made. In case the outer sheath of a cable is
damaged during handling/ installation, the Contractor shall repair it at his own cost, and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge.
In case any other part of a cable is damaged, the same shall be replaced by a healthy cable, at no extra
cost i.e. the Contractor shall not be paid for supply, installation and removal of the damaged cable.
All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and reliable connections. The
Contractor shall cover the exposed part of all cable lugs whether supplied by him or not with
insulating type, sleeve or paint.
47. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CROSSINGS FOR LINES:
SCOPE:
The specification covers Crossings for various 33 KV and 11 KV Lines to be constructed under the scope of work if
it requires any underground crossing of Railway Track, NH highway etc. and River Span where it could not be
crossed with Tubular/PSC Pole.
For river crossings, the Contractor shall prepare the crossing plan and profile and shall carry out soil investigations.
Based on this information Contractor shall propose an optimum location for the crossing and dimensions for its sub-
spans, which shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval prior to further work being carried out.
For non-navigable rivers the clearances shall be measured over highest flood level as stipulated in this section
Electrical Clearances in this specification. The crossing angle shall be as near as possible to 90° but in any case,
shall not be less than 60°.
The Turnkey contractor has to design for special foundation as per site requirement if it is required to install tower
on River bed and to submit for approval of APDCL prior to start of any works.
The structural members of the tower structures and foundation for River crossing shall be designed by a reputed
structural design organization or research institute for earthquake in zone V. The details will be approved by a third
party engaged by the bidder. The costs of engaging these consultants shall be included in the relevant items.
RAILWAY/NATIONAL HIGHWAY CROSSING BY UG CABLE
The Scope Covers Supply and installation of all materials with labour including boring works (HDD or as per
requirement of Railway authority), termination of cables, fittings, fixing, cable laying, grouting of poles, marking,
earthings etc. required for completion of track crossing work in all respect as per the site condition and approved
design and drawing.
PLANNING REQUIREMENTS
Before commencing any works associated with railway/National Highway property, it is essential that all necessary
applications are made and approvals obtained from the Railway/Highway Authority as per the prevailing
regulations.
The contractor needs to apply to the competent authorities seeking permission from the same with all relevant
documents.
Necessary Joint Survey for finalization of Route alignment etc. needs to be carried out with all concerned
authorities for getting the approval etc.
The contractor needs to prepare and submit all required drawings etc. as required by approving authorities for
necessary approval.
The contractor needs to liaison with all concerned authorities for getting necessary approval/permission for the
crossings. Statutory Charges if any for the same will be reimbursed by APDCL at actual.
APDCL will facilitate the Contractor in getting the permission from the concerned authorities.
The approval process can take several months, so appropriate planning for the works is recommended. All
works are to be carries out as per directive of the approving authorities.
ERECTION OF POLES FOR RAILWAY CROSSING
The minimum distance of the crossing Pole shall be at least equal to the height of the Pole plus 6 meters away
measured from the center of the nearest railway track
No crossing shall be located over a booster transformer, traction switching station, traction sub-station or a track
cabin location in an electrified area.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES AND CONDUITS
As per site condition, the installation shall be by boring or directional drilling for the portion under the Railway
tracks, High way etc. The process of boring may be as per directives of the approving authority.
(Please refer to the sample sketch map of Underground Railway track crossing attached with this document for
necessary reference).
RIVER CROSSING BY TOWER LINE:
The Scope of work includes the work of crossing of overhead 33 KV Line which needs crossing of River span
where crossing is not possible with Steel tubular/PSC Pole. The scope includes both supply of all required materials
and labour for installation/erection and commissioning of the Crossing in all respect as per approved design and
drawing.
The scope includes the following minimum activities.
Soil Testing of the Tower Locations and Design of complete foundation suitable for Submersible soil as well as
special foundation if the tower is to be installed on river bed, for B Type Double Circuit Transmission Tower with 6
Meter Extension (B+6) and supply of Foundation materials.
Design supply and erection of B Type circuit Transmission Tower with 6 Meter Extension (B+6).
Setting of studs (sets of four) including transportation and distribution of studs and accessories complete including
excavation, concreting, back filling for B+6 type tower.
Erection of super structure including transportation of structure and accessories to the site including supply & fixing
of Danger Plate, Number plate, Phase Plate, Anti climbing device but excluding hoisting of insulators, painting etc.
(2X8.56=17.12 MT) complete as per approved drawing.
Grounding of tower with 1.8 Meter long 40 mm Dia GI Pipe including cost of all materials, such as GI Pipe, GI
bolts and Nuts and washer, Salt, Coke etc. as per specifications.
Painting of towers with bituminous paints of approved quality up to 3 meters from ground level including the cost
of paints.
Welding of Nuts & Bolts up to the bottom cross arm level including all charges of transportations, materials etc.
(For B+6 type)
Stringing of Double Circuit Lines on Conductor (as per BOQ) between the B+6 Towers including fitting and fixing
of insulators and accessories. The Stringing of the conductors in the river crossing portion should be done keeping
the requisite clearances for 132 KV as per BS and IE-1956, 1957 rules.
Stringing of each Circuit Conductor (as per BOQ) from the tower to the 4 pole structures (GI STP) on each
bank.
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE WORKS:
Providing and laying plain/reinforced cement concrete works cement, coarse sand & 20mm downgraded stone
aggregate including dewatering if necessary, and curing complete.
Using Mixer Machine (A) In substructure upto plinth level
MATERIALS
CEMENT:
The cement used by the contractor for the works shall be any of the following with the prior approval of the
Engineer- in charge.
Ordinary Portland cement or Low-heat Portland cement conforming to IS: 269
Rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS: 8041
Portland slag cement conforming to IS: 455
Portland Pozzolana cement conforming to IS: 1489
High strength ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 8112
Hydrophobic Portland cement conforming to IS: 8043
AGGREGATES:
The aggregates used by the contractor for the works shall be conform to IS: 383. Aggregates from natural sources
should be chemically inert, strong, hard, durable of limited porosity, true from adherent coating clay lumps, coal and
coal residues and should contain no organic or other admixtures that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or
impair the strength or durability of the concrete. Defective aggregates are liable to rejection by the Engineer-in-
charge at the risk and the cost of the contractor, methods of test aggregates in respect of the size, shape, soundness,
mechanical properties and other limitations as mentioned above shall be in accordance with the latest version of IS:
2386 (Pt-I to Pt-VII)
WATER:
Water is an important ingredient of concrete. Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious
amount of oils, acids, alkalis, salt, sugar, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or
reinforcement. Portable Water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing concrete.
In case of doubt regarding developed of strength, the suitability of water for making concrete shall ascertained by the
compressive strength and initial setting time tests.
The PH value of water shall not generally be less than 6.
Water found satisfactory for mixing is also suitable for curing concrete. However, water used for curing should not
produce any objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the concrete surface. The presence tannic acid or iron
compounds are objectionable.
Reinforcement:
The reinforcement used by the contractor for the work shall be consist of any of the following, in compliance with
the specifications of respective items of the schedule of work as per the structural design, and with prior approval of
the Engineer-in-charge.
Reinforcement shall be of Fe-415/Fe-500 conforming to IS 1786-2008
Detailing reinforcement shall be according to IS 13920-1993
Cold twisted bar conforming to Fe-415/ Fe-500 conforming to IS 1786-2008
All reinforcement should be free from loose mill scales, loose rust and coats of paints, oil, mud, or other coating which
may destroy or reduce bond. Such undesirable coatings shall remove before use for the works at the cost of the
contractor. Reinforcement shall be stored in such a manner as to minimize rusting.
48. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SIGN BOARD
Major infrastructures like new primary substation, new Distribution Transformer, new lines etc. developed under
RDSS needs to be clearly denoted by a signboard that should represent
About the Work

Date of Commissioning
Estimated cost
Scheme
Employer‘s details
Sl. No. Components Desired Specification
1 Iron Sheet MS Sheet 14 Gauge (1.6 mm thickness)
2 Size of Iron Sheet 4 Feet x3 Feet (Length x Breadth)
3 Painting on Boards Enamel paint with red oxide base coat whole structure be
painted with the Double coat using enamel base Paint
(shade –X 111 of IS: 5) with red oxide base coat after
proper cleaning of surface by rubbing with sand paper,
acid and alkaline.
4 Painting on Boards Digital vinyl colour printing on UV Resistant, Water

Resistant Laminated Vinyl sheet of thickness 120 Micron
(star, LG or Equivalent) and with peeling strength of 1200
gm/sq. inch and to be pasted on MS sheet of given
specification, Printing letter/contents is attached. Also this
digital vinyl printing should be unique and to be printed
separately for each and every village as per the village
name.
5 Height of Board from ground 5 Feet

level (Between ground level
and bottom part of board)
6 Support L type angle size 3‖x 3‘‘, 6mm Thickness
7 Length of angle to be buried in 2 feet with one feet hole pass inside
the ground
8 Foundation Concrete block of minimum M-15 of dimension 2.5 feet x

1.5 feet x 1.5 feet (2.5 feet below NGL)
49. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS OF SUB-STATIONS
1.0 GENERAL
The intent of the specification covers the following:
1.1 Design, engineering, and construction of all civil works at sub-station. All civil works shall also satisfy
the general technical requirements specified in other Section of this Specification and as detailed below.
They shall be designed to the required service conditions/loads as specified elsewhere in this
Specification or implied as per National/International Standards.
1.2 All civil works shall be carried out as per applicable Indian Laws, Standards and Codes. All materials
shall be of best quality conforming to relevant Indian Standards and Codes.
1.3 The Contractor shall furnish all design, drawings, labour, tools, equipment, materials, temporary works,
constructional plant and machinery, fuel supply, transportation and all other incidental items not shown
or specified but as may be required for complete performance of the Works in accordance with
regulations, approved drawings, specifications and direction of Employer.
1.4 The work shall be carried out according to the design/drawings to be developed by the Contractor and
approved by the owner based on Tender Drawings Supplied to the Contractor by the Owner. For all
buildings, structures, foundations, etc., necessary layout and details shall be developed by the Contractor
keeping in view the functional requirement of the substation facilities and providing enough space and
access for operation, use and maintenance based on the input provided by the Owner. Certain minimum
requirements are indicated in this specification for guidance purposes only. However, the Contractor
shall quote according to the complete requirements.
2.0 GEO-TECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
The Contractor shall perform a detailed soil investigation to arrive at sufficiently accurate, general as
well as specific information about the soil profile and the necessary soil parameters of the Site in order
that the foundation of the various structures can be designed and constructed safely and rationally.
A report to the effect will be submitted by the contractor for Owner's specific approval giving details
regarding data proposed to be utilized for civil structures design.
2.1 SCOPE OF WORK
This specification covers all the work required for detailed soil investigation and preparation of a
detailed report. The work shall include mobilization of necessary equipment, providing necessary
engineering supervision and technical personnel, skilled and unskilled labour, etc., as required to carry
out field investigation as well as, laboratory investigation, analysis and interpretation of data and results,
preparation of detailed Geo-Technical report including specific recommendations for the type of
foundations and the allowable safe bearing capacity for different sizes of foundations at different
founding strata for the various structures of the substation. The Contractor shall make his own
arrangement for locating the co-ordinates and various test positions in field as per the information
supplied to him and also for determining the reduced level of these locations with respect to the
benchmark indicated by the Owner.
All the work shall be carried out as per latest edition of the corresponding Indian Standard Codes.
2.2 BORE HOLES
2.2.1 Drilling of bore holes of 150 mm dia, in accordance with the provisions of IS: 1982 at the rate of
minimum two number of bore holes per bay to 15 m depth or to refusal which ever occur earlier. (By
refusal it shall mean that a standard penetration blow count (N) of 100 is recorded for 30 cm
penetration). However, in case deep pile foundations are envisaged the depths have to be regulated as
per codel provisions. In cases where rock is encountered, coring in one borehole per bay shall be carried
out to 3 M in bedrock and continuous core recovery is achieved.
2.2.2 Performing Standard Penetration Tests at approximately 1.5 m interval in the borehole starting from 1.5
m below ground level onwards and at every change of stratum. The disturbed samples from the standard
penetrometer shall also be collected for necessary tests.
2.2.3 Collecting undistributed samples of 100/75 mm diameter 450 mm long from the boreholes at intervals
of 2.5 m and every change of stratum starting from 1.0 m below ground level onwards in clayey strata.
2.2.4 The depth of Water Table shall be recorded in each borehole.
2.2.5 All samples, both disturbed and undisturbed, shall be identified properly with the borehole number and
depth from which they have been taken.
2.2.6 The sample shall be sealed at both ends of the sampling tubes with wax immediately after the sampling
and shall be packed properly and transported to the Contractor's laboratory without any damage or loss.
2.2.7 The logging of the boreholes shall be compiled immediately after the boring is completed and a copy of
the bolero shall be handed over to the Engineer-in - Charge,
2.3 DYNAMIC CONE PENETRATION TEST
Dynamic cone penetration tests of two numbers shall be carried out with the circulation of bentonite
slurry at specified locations and a continuous record of penetration resistance (NG) upto 15.0 meter
from natural ground level or the refusal shall be maintained by the Contractor IS: 4968 (Part-2) shall be
followed for carrying out the test and reporting results.
The location for tests shall be as directed by the Owner. On completion of the test, the results shall be
presented as a continuous record as the numbers of blows required for every 300 mm penetration of the
cone into the soil.
2.4 TRIAL PITS
Trial pits shall be carried at specified one location of per bay as directed by the Owner. The trial pits
shall be 2m x 2m in size extending to 4 m depths, or as specified by the Owner. Undisturbed samples
shall be taken from the trial pits as per the direction of the Owner.
2.5 ELECTRICAL RECEPTIVITY TEST
This test shall be conducted to determine the Electrical receptivity of soil required for designing safe
grounding system for the entire station area. The specifications for the equipments and other accessories
required for performing electrical receptivity test, the test procedure, and reporting of field observations
shall confirm to IS: 3043. The test shall be conducted using Wagner's four electrode method as specified
in IS: 1892, Appendix-B2. Unless otherwise specified at each test location, the test shall be conducted
along two perpendicular lines parallel to the co- ordinate axis. On each line a minimum of 8 to 10
readings shall be taken by changing the spacing of the electrodes from an initial small value of 0.5 m
upto a distance of 10.0 m.
2.6 PLATE LOAD TEST
Plate load test shall be conducted to determine the bearing capacity, modulus of sub-grade reaction and
load/settlement characteristics of soil at shallow depths by loading a plane and level steel plate kept at
the desired depth and measuring the settlement under different loads, until a desired settlement takes
place or failure occurs. The specification for the equipment and accessories required for conducting the
test, the test procedure, field observations and reporting of results shall conform to IS: 1888. Modulus of
sub-grade reaction shall be conducted as per IS: 9214. The location and depth of the test shall be as
given below:
1) One at Control Building location at the proposed foundation depth below finished ground level for
bearing capacity.
2) One test at Transformer foundation location at proposed foundation depth below FGL. Undisturbed tube
samples shall be collected at 1.0 m and 2.5 m depths from natural ground level for carrying out
laboratory tests.
The size of the pit in plate load test shall not be less than five times the plate size and shall be taken upto
the specified depth. All provisions regarding excavation and visual examination of pit shall apply here.
Unless otherwise specified the reaction method of loading shall be adopted. Settlement shall be recorded
from dial gauges placed at four diametrically opposite ends of the test plate.
The load shall be increased in stages. Under each loading stage, record of time Vs. Settlement shall be
kept as specified in IS: 1888.
Backfilling of the pit shall be carried out as per the directions of the Owner. Unless otherwise specified
the excavated soil shall be used for this purpose. In cases of gravel-boulder or rocky strata, respective
relevant codes shall be followed for tests.
2.7 WATER SAMPLE
Representative samples of ground water shall be taken when ground water is first encountered before
the addition of water to aid drilling of boreholes. The samples shall be of sufficient quantity for
chemical analysis to be carried out and shall be stored in airtight containers.
2.8 BACK FILLING BORE HOLES
On completion of each hole, the Contractor shall backfill all boreholes as directed by the Owner. The
backfill material can be the excavated material.
2.9 LABORATORY TEST
The laboratory tests shall be carried out progressively during the field work after sufficient number of
samples has reached the laboratory in order that the test results of the initial boreholes can be made use
of in planning the later stages of the field investigation and quantum of laboratory tests. All samples
brought from field, whether disturbed or undisturbed shall be extracted/prepared and examined by
competent technical personnel, and the test shall be carried out as per the procedures laid out in the
relevant I.S. Codes.
The following laboratory tests shall be carried out:
i) Visual and Engineering Classification.
ii) Liquid limit, plastic limit and shrinkage limit for cohesive soils.
iii) Natural moisture content, bulk density and specific gravity.
iv) Grain size distribution.
v) Swell pressure and free swell index determination.
vi) California bearing ratio.
vii) Consolidated un-drained test with pore pressure measurement.
viii) Chemical tests on soil and water to determine the carbonates, sulphates, nitrates, chlorides, Ph
value, and organic matter and any other chemicals harm to the concrete foundation.
ix) Rock quality designation (ROD), RMR in case of rock is encountered.

2.10 TEST RESULTS AND REPORTS
1. The Contractor shall submit the detailed report in two (2) copies wherein information regarding the
geological detail of the site, summarized observations and test data, bore logs, and conclusions and
recommendations on the type of foundations with supporting calculations for the recommendations.
Initially the report shall be submitted by the Contractor in draft form and after the draft report is
approved, the final report in four (4) copies shall be submitted. The test data shall bear the signatures of
the Investigation Agency, Vendor and also site representative of APDCL.
2. The report showing the locations of the exploration work i.e., bore holes, dynamic cone penetration
tests, trial pits. Plate load test, etc.
a) A plan showing the locations of the exploration work i.e., bore holes, dynamic cone penetration tests,
trial pits. Plate load test, etc.
b) Bore Logs: Bore logs of each bore holes clearly identifying the stratification and the type of soil stratum
with depth. The values of Standard Penetration Test (SPT) at the depths where the tests were conducted
on the samples collected at various depths shall be clearly shown against that particular stratum.
Test results of field and laboratory tests shall be summarized strata wise as well in combined tabular
form. All relevant graphs, charts tables, diagrams and photographs, if any, shall be submitted along with
report. Sample illustrative reference calculations for settlement, bearing capacity, pile capacity shall be
enclosed.
2.11 RECOMMENDATIONS
The report should contain specific recommendations for the type of foundation for the various structures
envisaged at site. The Contractor shall acquaint himself about the type of structures and their functions
from the Owner. The observations and recommendations shall include but not limited to the following:
a) Geological formation of the area, past observations or historical data, if available, for the area and for
the structures in the nearby area, fluctuations of water table, etc. slope stability characteristics and
landslide history of the area shall be specifically highlighted. Remedial measures to be adopted shall
also be given.
b) Recommended type of foundations for various structures. If piles are recommended the type, size and
capacity of pile and groups of piles shall be given after comparing different types and sizes of piles
andpile groups.
c) Allowable bearing pressure on the soil at various depths for different sizes of the foundations based on
shear strength and settlement characteristics of soil with supporting calculations. Minimum factor of
safety for calculating net safe bearing capacity shall be taken as 3.0 (three). Recommendation of
liquefaction characteristics of soil shall be provided.
d) Recommendations regarding slope of excavations and dewatering schemes, if required. Required

protection measures for slope stability for cut and fill slopes of switchyard and approach road with stone
pitching/retaining walls shall be clearly spelt out. Calculation shall also be provided for stability
adequacy.
e) Comments on the Chemical nature of soil and ground water with due regard to deleterious effect of the
same on concrete and steel and recommendations for protective measures.
f) If expensive soil is met with, recommendation on removal or retainment of the same under the structure,
road, drains, etc., shall be given. In the later case detailed specification of any special treatment required
including specification or materials to be used, construction method, equipments to be deployed, etc.,
shall be furnished. Illustrative diagram of a symbolic foundation showing details shall be furnished.
g) Recommendations for additional investigations beyond the scope of the present work, if considered such
investigation as necessary.
3.0 SITE PREPARATION:
The Contractor shall be responsible for proper leveling of switchyard site as per layout and levels of
switchyard finalized during detailed engineering stage. The Contractor at his own cost shall make the
layout and levels of all structure, etc., from the general grids of the plot and benchmarks set by the
Contractor and approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall give all help in instruments, materials and
personal to the Owner for checking the detailed layout and shall be solely responsible for the correctness
of the layout and levels. Site leveling shall be in the scope of the contractor. Bidder may decide the level
of the sites. However, the level shall be such that it is 300 mm higher than the highest flood level (HFL)
of the site or crown of the adjacent road or others as directed by the engineer in charge.
It is the responsibility of the contractor to collect the HFL of each sub-station site from the local
competent authority/District administration etc. for finalization of foundation level for Control
room building and other switchyard equipments and structures.
3.1. SCOPE OF WORKS
a) This clause covers the design and execution of the work for site preparation, such as clearing of the site,
the supply and compaction of fill material, slope protection by stone pitching/retaining walls depending
on the site location/ condition, excavation and compaction of backfill for foundation, road construction,
drainage, trenches and final topping by stone (broken hard stone).
b) Survey, Design, Engineering, Supply, Erection, Testing and Commissioning of 33/11 kV, Grid
sub-station including construction of Control Room Building & Approach road as well as other
Civil works.
3.1.1 GENERAL
a) The Contractor shall develop the site area to meet the requirement of the intended purpose. The site
preparation shall conform to the requirements of relevant sections of this specification or as per
stipulations of standard specifications. Necessary protection of slope of switchyard area and approach
road shall also be carried out by contractor.
b) If fill material is required, the fill material shall be suitable for the above requirement. The fill shall be
such a material and the site so designed as to prevent the erosion by wind and water of material from its
final compacted position or the in-site position of undisturbed soil.
c) When embankments are to be constructed on slopes of 15% or greater, benches or steps with horizontal
and vertical faces shall be cut in the original slope prior to placement of embankment material. Vertical
faces shall measure not more than 1 m in height.
d) Embankments adjacent to abutments, culverts, retaining walls and similar structures shall be constructed
by compacting the material in successive uniform horizontal layers not exceeding 15 cm in thickness.
(Of loose material before compaction). Each layer shall be compacted as required by means of
mechanical tampers approved by the Owner. Rocks larger than 10 cm in any direction shall not be
placed in embankment adjacent to structures.
e) Earth embankments of roadways and site areas adjacent to buildings shall be placed in successive
uniform horizontal layers not exceeding 20 cm in thickness in loose stage measurement and compacted
to the full width specified. The upper surface of the embankment shall be shaped so as to provide
complete drainage of surface water at all times.
f) The pitching shall be designed and provided for slope protection as per approved drawings. The stone
used shall be sound, hard, durable and fairly regular in shape. Stones subjected to marked deterioration
by water or weather shall not be used. Suitable measures shall be provided to prevent erosion by
seepage of water. Largest stone procurable shall be used as approved by owner for the work. Random
rubble masonry (1:6) retaining walls shall be provided wherever required as per site condition.
3.2.1 COMPACTION
a) The density to which fill materials shall be compacted shall be as per relevant IS and as per direction of
Owner. All compacted sand filling shall be confined as far as practicable. Backfilled earth shall be
compacted to minimum 95% of the Standard Proctor‘s density at OMC. The sub-grade for the roads and
embankment filling shall be compacted to 70% relative density (minimum).
b) At all times unfinished construction shall have adequate drainage. Upon completion of the road‘s
surface course, adjacent shoulders shall be given a final shaping, true alignment and grade.
c) Each layer of earth embankment when compacted shall be as close to optimum moisture content as
practicable. Embankment material, which does not contain sufficient moisture to obtain proper
compaction, shall be wetted. If the material contains any excess moisture then it shall be allowed to dry
before rolling. The rolling shall begin at the edges overlapping half the width of the roller each time and
progress to the center of the road or towards the building as applicable. Rolling will also be required on
rock fills. No compaction shall be carried out in rainy weather.
3.2. REQUIREMENT FOR FILL MATERIAL UNDER FOUNDATION
The thickness of fill material under the foundations shall be such that the maximum pressure from the
footing, transferred through the fill material and distributed onto the original undisturbed soil will not
exceed the allowable soil bearing pressure of the original undisturbed soil. For expansive soils the fill
materials and other protections, etc., to be used under the foundation is to be got approved by the
Owner.
4.0 ANTI-WEED TREATMENT AND STONE SPREADING
4.1 SCOPE OF WORKS
The Contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for complete performance of
the work in accordance with the drawings, specification and direction of the Owner. Stone spreading
shall be done in the areas of the switchyard wherever equipments and or structures are to be provided
under present scope of work. The stone spreading in future areas shall also be provided in case potential
without stone layer is not well within safer limits.
4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
The material required for site surfacing/stone filling shall be free from all types of organic materials and
shall be of standard quality, and as approved by the Owner.
The material to be used for stone filling/site surfacing shall be uncrushed/ crushed/broken stone of 20
mm nominal size (upgraded single size) conforming to Table 2 of IS:383-1970. Hardness, Flakiness
shall be as required for wearing courses are given below:
4.2.1 Sieve Analysis Limits (Gradation) As per IS: 383- Table-2
Sieve Size % passing by weight
40 mm 100
20 mm 85-100
10 mm 0-20
4.75 mm 0-5
4.2.2 Hardness
Abrasion value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) - not more than 40%
Impact value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) - not more than 30% and frequency shall be one test per 500 cum with a
minimum of one test per source,
4.2.3 Flakiness Index
One test shall be conducted per 500 cum of aggregate as per IS: 2386 Part-I and maximum value is
25%,
a) After all the structures/equipments are erected and anti-weed treatment is complete, the surface of the
switchyard area shall be maintained, rolled/ compacted to the lines and grades as decided by Engineer-
in-Charge. Deweeding including removal of roots shall be done before rolling is commenced, Engineer-
in-Charge shall decide final formation level so as to ensure that the site appears uniform devoid of
undulations, the final formation level shall however be very close to the formation level indicated in the
drawing using half ton roller with suitable water sprinkling arrangement to form a smooth and compact
surface.
b) A base layer of uncrushed/crushed/broken stone of 20 mm nominal size (ungraded single size) shall be
spread and rolled/compacted by using half ton roller with 4 to 5 passes and water sprinkling to form a
minimum 50 mm layer on the finished ground level of the specified switchyard area excluding roads,
drains, cable trench and tower and equipment foundations as indicated in the drawing.
c) Over the base layer of site surfacing material, a final surface course of minimum 50 mm thickness of 20
mm nominal size (single size ungraded) broken stone as specified above shall be spread and compacted
by light roller using half tones steel roller (width 30" and 24" diameter) with water. Sprinkling as
directed by the Engineer-in- Charge. The water shall be sprinkled in such a way that bulking does not
take place.
d) In areas that are considered by the Engineer-in-Charge to be too congested with foundations and
structures for proper rolling of the site surfacing material by normal rolling equipments, the material
shall be compacted by hand, if necessary. Due care shall be exercised so as not to damage any
foundation structures or equipment during rolling compaction.
e) Before taking up stone filling, anti-weed treatment shall be applied in the switchyard area wherever
gravel filling is to be done, and the area shall be thoroughly de-weeded including removal of roots. The
recommendation of local agriculture or horticulture department shall be sought wherever feasible while
choosing the type of chemical to be used. Never the less the effectiveness of the chemical shall be
demonstrated by the Contractor in a test area of 10M x 10M (approx.) and monitored over a period of
two to three weeks by the Engineer-in-Charge. The final approval shall be given by Engineer-in-Charge
and final approval given based on the results.
f) The anti-weed chemical shall be procured from reputed manufacturers. The dosage and application of
chemical shall be strictly followed as per manufacturer's recommendation. The contractor shall be
required to maintain the area free of weeds for a period of 1 year from the date of application of 1st dose
of anti-weed chemicals.
5.0 SITE DRAINAGE
5.1 Adequate site drainage system shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain rainfall
data and design the storm water drainage system, (culverts, ditches, drains, etc.) to accommodate run off
due to the most intense rainfall that is likely to occur over the catchment area in one-hour period on an
average of once in ten years. The surface of the site shall be sloped to prevent the ponding of water.
5.2 The maximum velocity for pipe drains and open drains shall be limited to 2.4m/sec and 1.8m/sec
respectively. However, minimum non-slitting velocity of 0.6 m/sec shall be ensured. Longitudinal bed
slope not milder than 1 in 1000 shall be provided.
5.3 For design of RCC pipes for drains and culverts, IS: 456 and IS:783 shall be followed.
5.4 The Contractor shall ensure that water drains are away from the site area and shall prevent damage to
adjacent property by this water. Adequate protection shall be given to site surfaces, roads, ditches,
culverts, etc., to prevent erosion of material by water.
5.5 The drainage system shall be adequate without the use of cable/pipe trenches. (Pipe drains shall be
provided in areas of switchyard where movement of crane will be necessary in operating phase of the
substation).
5.6 The open surface drain shall be of brick work in cement mortar in proportion 1:5 with half brick thick
side walls and 100mm thick C.C (1:3:6) base over one brick flat soling including 15mm thick cement
plastering in prop. 1:3 finished with a floating coat of cement slurry as directed with necessary
shuttering for sides and earth work in excavation of foundation trenches and refilling the sides after
completion of work etc. as specified. It should be of 300mm wide and average 250mm deep with bed
slope 1 in 150 with initial depth of 100mm.
5.7 Pipe drains shall be connected through manholes at an interval of max. 30m. Effluents shall be suitably
treated by the Contractor to meet all the prevalent statutory requirements and local pollution control
norms and treated effluents shall be conveyed to the storm water drainage system at a suitable location
for its final disposal.
5.8 Invert of the drainage system shall be decided in such a way that the water can easily be discharged
above the High Flood Level (HFL) outside substation boundary at suitable location upto a maximum 50
M beyond boundary wall of substation or actual whichever occurs earlier and approved by Owner.
Pumps for drainage of water (it required) shall be provided by Contractor.
5.9 All internal site drainage system, including the final connection/disposal to owner acceptance points
shall be part of Supplier's scope including all required civil work, mechanical and electrical systems.
The Contractor shall connect his drain(s) at one or more points to outfall points as feasible at site.
5.10 The drainage scheme and associated drawings shall be got approved.
6.0 ROADS AND CULVERTS:
6.1 APPROACH ROAD TO SUB-STATION:
6.1.1 The main approach road including modification of existing road to meet the site conditions, roads for
access to equipment and building within substation are in the scope of bidder. Layout of the roads shall
be based on General detail and Arrangement drawing for the substation.
6.1.2 5.5 mtr. Wide Interlocking Block Pavement/ Bituminous Pavement Approach Road from main road to
entry of PSS (upto 100 Mtr.)
6.1.3 Rolling and compacting to sub grade as per specification and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.1.4 Rolling and compacting of WBM of 200mm thick in 2 layers (each 100mm) as per specification and
direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.1.5 The approach roads are to be constructed so as to permit transportation of all heavy equipment like
Power TR. etc. The roads shall have min width of 3.75 Mtr with Paver Block including surface dressing,
water bound macadam preparation of site bern complete as per approved drawing and including supply
of all materials and labour.
6.1.6 Shoulder shall be provided on either side of the road. The width of the shoulder shall be as per approved
drawing depending upon the site conditions.
6.1.7 Road construction shall be as per IRC standards. Adequate provision shall be made for road drainage.
Protection of cut and embankment slopes of roads as per slope stability requirement shall be made.
6.1.8 All the culverts and its allied structure (required for road/rail, drain trench crossings, etc.) shall be
designed for Class- AA loading as per IRC standards code and should be checked for loading.
6.1.9 Reinforced Cement Concrete Pipe NPA for Culverts on First class bedding of granular material in single
row including fixing collar with cement mortar 1:2 including earth work in excavation, protection work
in excavation, protection work,
back filling concrete and full brick works in head wall and parapets upto height of 600 mm ( Pipe Size-
900 mm) complete with cost of all materials, and cost of all labours, cess, sundries, T&P & all other
machineries required for the work etc. complete in all respect as per latest specification & direction of
the Engineer in charge.
6.1.10 All roads shall be designed for Class-'E' of traffic as per IRC-37 Guidelines for the design of flexible
pavements.
6.1.11 While submitting the Design and drawing for Interlocking Block Pavement Road, the specification
should be taken into consideration:
Width of Road- 3.75 meter
Camber- 1.5% Maximum Super elevation, e= 7%
Thickness of Block- 80 mm (IRC: SP: 63-2004 recommended) Thickness of Sand Bed= 30 mm (IRC:
SP: 63-2004 recommended)
WBM Base=200 mm (IRC: SP: 63-2004 recommended, to be placed in two layers)
Edge Strip- 250x150 mm (Refer attached Drawing)
6.1.1 The Construction of Sub-grade and earthen shoulders with approved materials obtained from borrows
pits with all lifts and leads, transporting to site, spreading, grading to meet the job requirement.
6.2 ROADS WITHIN THE SUB-STATION:
6.2.1 Road within the sub-station should be of 150 mm thick plain cement concrete road with proportion 1:3:6
over a brick flat soiling within the sub-station area as per approved drawing and technical specification
including supply of all materials and labour.
6.2.2 Two nos. of 200 mm dia Ductile Iron (DI) Pipe as per IS 8329:2000 with required fittings and
accessories must be laid below the PCC Road at suitable locations as per finalization layout drawing for
provision of passing cables in future. The cost of Road quoted should be inclusive of the pipe, fittings,
accessories and labour.
7.0 TRANSFORMER FOUNDATION
The Contractor shall provide a road system integrated with the transformer foundation to enable
installation and the replacement of any failed unit by the spare unit located at the site. This system shall
enable the removal of any failed unit from its foundation to the nearest road. If trench/drain crossings
are required the suitable R.C.C. culverts shall be provided in accordance with I.R.C. Code & relevant IS.
8.0 FIRE PROTECTION WALLS
8.1 GENERAL
Fire protection walls shall be provided in accordance with Tariff Advisory Committee (TAC), CEA, and
NBC 2016 recommendations whichever is most stringent.
8.2 APPLICATION CRITERIA

A firewall shall be erected between the Transformer to protect each one from the effects of fire on
another as per TAC guidelines. Also, if the free distance between the transformer and auxiliary services
transformer is less.
8.3 FIRE RESISTANCE
The firewall shall have a minimum fire resistance of 3 hours. The partitions, which are made to reduce
the noise level, shall have the same fire resistance where the partitions are also used as firewalls. The
walls of the building, which are used as firewalls, shall also have a minimum fire resistance of 3 hours.
The firewall shall be designed in order to protect against the effect of radiant heat and flying debris from
an adjacent fire.
8.4 MECHANICAL RESISTANCE
The firewall shall have the mechanical resistance to withstand local atmospheric conditions. If this wall
shall serve as a support for equipment such as insulators, etc., its mechanical rigidity must be increased.
Connecting the walls by steel or other structures, which may produce a reversing torque if overheated,
shall be avoided.
8.5 DIMENSIONS
The firewall shall extend at least 2 m on each side of the transformer and at least 1 m above the
conservator tank or safety vent.
These dimensions might be reduced in special cases, and if TAC permits so, where there is lack of
space. A minimum of 2 meter clearance shall be provided between the equipments e.g., transformer and
fire walls.
The building walls, which act as firewalls, shall extend at least 1 m above the roof in order to protect it.
8.6 MATERIALS
The firewall may be made of reinforced concrete (M-20 grade), as per the system requirements.
Materials used must conform to the standards of the National Fire Prevention Association and TAC
norms.
The Bidder should submit detailed design and drawing for necessary approval of APDCL.
9.0 CABLE AND PIPE TRENCHES
9.1 The cable trenches should be RCC type with precast removable RCC cover (with lifting arrangement).
The cable trench wall shall be designed for the following loads.
i) Dead load of 155 Kg/m length of cable support + 75 Kg on one tier at the end.
ii) Triangular earth pressure + uniform surcharge pressure of 2 T/m2.
9.2 Cable trench covers shall be designed for self-weight of top slab + UDL of 2000 Kg/ m2 + concentrated
load of 200 Kg at centre of span on each panel.
9.3 Cable trench crossing the road/rails shall be designed for class AA. Loading of IRC/relevant IS Code
and should be checked for transformer loading.
9.4 Trenches shall be drained. Necessary sumps be constructed and sump pumps if necessary, shall be
supplied. Cable trenches shall not be used as storm water drains.
9.5 The top of trenches shall be kept at least 100 mm above the finished ground level. The top of cable
trench shall be such that the surface rainwater does not enter the trench.
9.6 All metal parts inside the trench shall be connected to the earthing system.
9.7 Cables from trench to equipments shall run in hard conduit pipes.
9.8 Trench wall shall not foul with the foundation. Suitable clear gap shall be provided.
9.9 The trench bed shall have a slope of 1/500 along the run and 1/250 perpendicular to the run.
9.10 All the construction joints of cable trenches i.e., between base slab to base slab and the junction of
vertical wall to base slab as well as from vertical wall to wall and all the expansion joints shall be
provided with approved quality PVC water stops of approx. 230 x 5 mm size for those sections where
the ground water table is expected to rise above the junction of base slab and vertical wall of cable
trenches.
9.11 Cable trenches shall be blocked at the ends if required with brick masonry in cement sand mortar 1:6
and plaster with 12 mm thick 1:6 cement sand mortar.
9.12 Cable trenches shall be provided with suitable hangers to support the running cables and should be fitted
with MS angle at the edge on inner side of the trench for better support of the RCC cover as showed in
the drawing.
(Refer attached drawings for different types of cable trenches)
10.0 FOUNDATION / RCC CONSTRUCTION
10.1. General
10.1.1 Work covered under this Clause of the Specification comprises the design and construction of
foundations and other RCC constructions for switchyard structures, equipment supports, trenches,
drains, jacking pad, control cubicles, bus supports, transformer, marshalling kiosks, auxiliary
equipments and systems, buildings, tanks, boundary wall or for any other equipment or service and any
other foundation required to complete the work. This clause is as well applicable to the other ECC
constructions.
10.1.2 Concrete shall conform to the requirements mentioned in IS: 456 and all the tests shall be conducted as
per relevant Indian Standard Codes as mentioned in Standard field quality plan appended with the
specification.
A minimum grade of M20 concrete (1:5:3 mix) shall be used for all structural/load bearing members as
per latest IS 456.
10.1.3 If the site is sloppy, the foundation height will be adjusted to maintain the exact level of the top of
structures to compensate such slopes.
10.1.4 The switchyard foundation's plinths shall be minimum 300 mm above finished ground level.
10.1.5 Minimum 75 mm thick lean concrete (1:4:8) shall be provided below all underground structures,
foundations, trenches, etc., to provide a base for construction.
10.1.6 Concrete made with Portland slag cement shall be carefully cured and special importance shall be given
during the placing of concrete and removal of shuttering.
10.1.7 The design and detailing of foundations shall be done based on the approved soil data and sub- soil
conditions as well as for all possible critical loads and the combinations thereof. The Spread footings
foundation or pile foundation as may be required based on soil/sub-soil conditions and superimposed
loads shall be provided.
10.1.8 If pile foundations are adopted, the same shall be case-in-situ driven/bored or precast or under- reamed
type as per relevant parts of IS Code 2911. Only RCC piles shall be provided. Suitability of the adopted
pile foundations shall be justified by way of full design calculations. Detailed design calculations shall
be submitted by the bidder showing complete details of piles/pile groups proposed to be used. Necessary
initial load test shall also be carried out by the 'bidder at their cost to establish the piles design capacity.
Only after the design capacity of piles has been established, the Contractor shall take up the job of
piling. Routine tests for the piles shall also be conducted. All the work (design & testing) shall be
planned in such a way that these shall not cause any delay in project completion.
10.2. DESIGN
10.2.1 All foundation shall be of reinforced cement concrete. The design and construction of RCC structures
shall be carried out as per IS: 456 and minimum grade of concrete shall be M-20. Higher grade of
concrete than specified above may be used at the discretion of Contractor without any additional
financial implication to the Owner.
10.2.2 Limit state method of design shall be adopted unless specified otherwise in the specification.
10.2.3 For detailing of reinforcement IS: 2502 and SP: 34 shall be followed. Cold twisted deformed bars
(Fe=415 N/mm2) conforming to IS: 1786 shall be used as reinforcement. However, in specific areas,
mild steel (Grade-I) conforming to IS: 432 can also be used. Two layers of reinforcement (on inner and
outer face) shall be provided for wall and slab sections having thickness of 150 mm and above. Clear
cover to reinforcement towards the earth face shall be minimum 40 mm.
10.2.4 RCC water retaining structures like storage tanks, etc., shall be designed as uncracked section in
accordance with IS: 3370 (Part I to IV) by working stress method. However, water channels shall be
designed as cracked section with limited steel stresses as per IS: 3370 (Part I to IV) by working stress
method.
10.2.5 The procedure used for the design of the foundations shall be the most critical loading combination of
the steel structure and or equipment and or superstructure and other conditions, which produces the
maximum stresses in the foundation or the foundation component and as per the relevant IS Codes of
foundation design. Detailed design calculations shall be submitted by the bidder showing complete
details of piles/pile groups proposed to be used.
10.2.6 Design shall consider any sub-soil water pressure that may be encountered following relevant standard
strictly.
10.2.7 Necessary protection to the foundation work, if required shall be provided to take care of any special
requirements for aggressive alkaline soil, black cotton soil or any other type of soil which is
detrimental/harmful to the concrete foundations.
10.2.8 RCC columns shall be provided with rigid connection at the base.
10.2.9 All sub-structures shall be checked for sliding and overturning stability during both construction and
operating conditions for various combinations of loads. Factors of safety for these cases shall be taken
as mentioned in relevant IS Codes or as stipulated elsewhere in the Specifications. For checking against
overturning, weight of soil vertically above footing shall be taken and inverted frustum of pyramid of
earth on the foundation should not be considered.
10.2.10 Earth pressure for all underground structures shall be calculated using coefficient of earth pressure at
rest, coefficient of active or passive earth pressure (whichever is applicable). However, for the design
of substructures of any underground enclosures, earth pressure at rest shall be considered.
10.2.11 ln addition to earth pressure and ground water pressure etc., a surcharge load of 2T/Sq.m shall also be
considered for the design of all underground structures including channels, sumps, tanks, trenches, sub-
structure of any underground hollow enclosure, etc., for the vehicular traffic in the vicinity of the
structure.
10.2.12 Following conditions shall be considered for the design of water tank in pumps house, channels, sumps,
trenches and other underground structures:
a) Full water pressure from inside and no earth pressure and ground water pressure and surcharge pressure
from outside (application only to structures, which are liable to be filled up with water or any other
liquid).
b) Full earth pressure, surcharge pressure and ground water pressure from outside and no water pressure
from inside.
c) Design shall also be checked against buoyancy due to the ground water during construction and
maintenance stages. Minimum factor of safety of 1.5 against buoyancy shall be ensured ignoring the
superimposed loadings.
10.2.13 The foundations shall be proportioned so that the estimated total and differential movements of the
foundations are not greater than the movements that the structure or equipment is designed to
accommodate.
10.2.14 The foundations of transformer and circuit breaker shall be of block type foundation. Minimum
reinforcement shall be governed by IS: 2974 and IS: 456.
10.2.15 The tower and equipment foundations shall be checked for a factor of safety of 2.2 for normal condition
and 1.65 for short circuit condition against sliding, overturning and pullout. The same factors shall be
used as partial safety factor overloads in limit st1te design also.
10.3. ADMIXTURES & ADDITIVES
10.3.1 Only approved admixtures shall be used in the concrete for the Works. When more than one admixture
is to be used, each admixture shall be batched in its own, batch and added to the mixing water separately
before discharging into the mixer. Admixtures shall be delivered in suitably labeled containers to enable
identification.
10.3.2 Admixtures in concrete shall conform to IS: 9103. The water proofing cement additives shall conform to
IS: 2645. Owner shall approve concrete Admixtures/Additives.
10.3.3 The Contractor may propose and the Owner may approve the use of a water-reducing set- retarding
admixture in some of the concrete. The use of such an admixture will not be approved to overcome
problems associated with inadequate concrete plant capacity or improperly planned placing operations
and shall only be approved as an aid to overcoming unusual circumstances and placing conditions.
10.3.4 The water reducing set-retarding admixture shall be an approved brand of Ligno-sulphonate type
admixture.
10.3.5 The water proofing cement additives shall be used as required/advised by the owner.
11.0 GATES AND BOUNDARY WALL
11.1 MAIN GATE:
11.1.1 The Gate frame shall be made of medium duty MS pipe conforming to relevant IS with welded joints.
Minimum Dia of Pipe of main frame should not be less than 50 mm.
11.1.2 The gates shall be fabricated with welded joints to achieve rigid connections. The gate frames shall be
painted with one coat of approved steel primmer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint. Gates shall be
fitted with approved quality iron hinges, latch and latch catch. Latch and latch catch shall be suitable for
attachment and operation of pad lock from
either side of gates. Hinges shall permit gates to swing through 180 degree back against fence. The
bottom portion of the gate (Upto to height of 0.5 Mtr) should be provided with MS Sheet of minimum
thickness 2.5 mm with painting as per standard mentioned above.
11.1.3 Gates shall be fitted with galvanized chain hook or gate hold back to hold gates open.
11.1.4 Double gates shall be fitted with centre rest and drop bolt to secure gates in closed position.
11.1.5 Gates shall be installed in locations shown on drawings. Next to the main gate, a men gate (1.25 m wide,
single leaf) shall also be provided.
11.1.6 Bottom of gates shall be set approximately 40 mm above ground surface and necessary guiding
mechanism shall be fitted.
11.1.7 Clear opening should be minimum 5.5 Mtr. Height of the Gate should minimum be 2.0 Mtr.
11.1.8 The Contractor shall submit the design and drawing for necessary approval of APDCL.
11.2 BOUNDARY WALL:
11.2.1 The Scope covers Construction of Boundary wall in Brick Masonry with First Class Brick. The Wall
should be supported by RCC Columns and tie beams of minimum M20 grade concrete and HYSD/TMT
bars of minimum grade Fe-415/ Fe- 500 conforming to IS 1786-2008. Due consideration to be given for
providing expansion joints at 15 Mtr intervals and weep at 3 m C/C in a staggered pattern
11.2.2 The Boundary wall should consist of RCC column and plinth beam arrangement, Brick Wall (cement
sand mortar 1:6), with 2000 mm height above finished ground level providing barbered wire 600 mm
height in ‗Y‘ cross arms (MS 65x65x6 mm) at the top of the wall, including fabrication, fixing, painting,
plastering both sides, all complete including supply of all materials and labour.
11.2.3 The boundary wall shall be plastered on both external and internal faces with cement and sand plaster
1:5 of thickness 20 mm and 15 mm respectively.
11.2.4 M8 grating shall be provided at required locations for drainage purposes. The boundary wall shall be
painted with minimum two coats of color wash over a base coat of white wash with line. The front
portion of boundary wall shall however be with a RC jail and 12 mm square MS bar top above brick
work and pebble dash plaster finish with colour pigment. The steel work shall be given two coats of
synthetic enamel paint of approved make over one coat of primer. A tentative drawing is enclosed for
guidance purpose.
11.2.5 In case of Boundary wall to be constructed on Random Rubble Masonry then it should conform to IS
1597 (Part 1):1992 with due consideration of stability against overturning, sliding, and soil bearing
pressure to prevent settlement. (Please refer attached drawing)
12.0 BUILDINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
12.1 GENERAL
The scope include the design, engineering and construction including anti-termite treatment, damp proof
coarse, plinth protection, DPC of Building including sanitary, water supply, electrification, false ceiling
etc., of control room building. The buildings shall be of RCC framed structure of concrete of M-20
grade (Min.).
12.2 CONTROL ROOM BUILDING
12.2.1 Minimum floor area requirements shall be 130 Sq. Meter which may be increased at the time of
detailed engineering to suit project requirements. The layout of the control room shall be finalized as per
detailed engineering to suit project requirements.
12.2.2 An open space of 1 m minimum shall be provided on the periphery of the rows of panel and equipment
generally in order to allow easy operator movement and access as well as maintenance.
12.2.3 Any future possibility of annexed building shall be taken care of while finalizing the layout of the
control room building.
12.2.4 Minimum head room of 3.6 M below soffit of beams/false ceiling shall be considered for rooms. The
roof shall have two side sloping roof.
12.2.5 An open space of 1 m minimum shall be provided on the periphery of the rows of panel and equipment
generally in order to allow easy operator movement and access as well as maintenance.
12.2.6 Any future possibility of annexed building shall be taken care of while finalizing the layout of the
control room building.
12.2.7 DESIGN
a) The buildings shall be designed:

i. To the requirements of the National Building Code of India 2016, and the standards quoted therein.
ii. For the specified climatic and loading conditions
iii. To adequately suit the requirements of the equipment and apparatus contained in the buildings and in all
respects to be compatible with the intended use and occupancy
iv. With a functional and economical space arrangement.
v. For a life expectancy of structure, systems and components not less than that of the equipment, which is
contained in the building, provided regular maintenance is carried out
vi. Be aesthetically pleasing. Different buildings shall show a uniformity and consistency in architectural
design.
vii. To allow for easy access to equipment and maintenance of the equipment.
viii. With, wherever required, fire retarding materials for walls, ceilings and doors, which would prevent
supporting or spreading of fire.
ix. With materials preventing dust accumulation.
b) Suitable expansion joints shall be provided in the longitudinal direction wherever necessary with
provision of twin columns.
c) Individual members of the buildings frame shall be designed for the worst combination of forces such as
bending moment, axial force, shear force, torsion, etc.
d) Permissible stresses for different load combinations shall be taken as per relevant IS Codes.
e) All cable vaults shall be located above ground levels i.e., cable vaults shall not be provided as
basements in the buildings.
f) The building lighting shall be designed in accordance with the requirements.
g) One emergency exit shall be provided in control room building.
12.2.8 DESIGN LOADS
a) Building structures shall be designed for the most critical combinations of dead loads, super-imposed
loads, equipment loads, crane load, wind loads, seismic loads, and temperature loads.
b) Dead loads shall include the weight of structures complete with finishes, fixtures and partitions and
should be taken as per IS: 1911.
c) Super-imposed loads in different areas shall include live loads, minor equipment loads, cable trays,
small pipe racks/hangers and erection, operation and maintenance loads. Equipment loads shall
constitute, if applicable, all load of equipments to be supported on the building frame.
d) For crane loads an impact factor of 30% and lateral crane surge of 10% (lifted weight + trolley) shall be
considered in the analysis of frame according to provisions of IS: 875.the horizontal surge shall be 5%
of the static wheel load.
e) The wind loads shall be computed as per IS 875, Seismic Coefficient method shall be used for the
seismic analysis as per IS 1893 with importance factor 1.5.
f) For temperature loading, the total temperature variation shall be considered as 2/3 of the average
maximum annual variation in temperature. The average maximum annual variation in temperature for
the purpose shall be taken as the difference between the mean of the daily minimum temperature during
the coldest month of the year and mean of daily maximum temperature during the hottest month of the
year. The structure shall be designed to withstand stresses due to 50% of the total temperature variation.
g) Wind and Seismic forces shall not be considered to act simultaneously.
h) Floors/slabs shall be designed to carry loads imposed by equipment, cables piping travel of maintenance
trucks and equipment and other loads associated with building. Floors shall be designed for live loads as
per relevant IS. Cable and piping loads shall also be considered additionally for floors where these loads
are expected.
i) In addition, beams shall be designed for any incidental point loads to be applied at any point along the
beams. The floor loads shall be subject to Owner's approval.
j) For consideration of loads on structures, IS: 875, the following minimum superimposed live loads shall,
however, be considered for the design.
RCC- Floor i) 5 KN/M 2 For offices
ii) 10 KN/M 2 For equipment floors or (Minimum) actual requirement, if

higher than 10 KN/M 2, based on if higher than 10 KN/M 2,
based on equipment component weight and layout plans
Toilet Room 2 KN/M 2
Chequered plate floor 4 KN/M 2
Walkways 3 KN/M 2
Any additional load coming in the structure shall be calculated as per IS: 875.
12.2.9 ROOF:
Roof of the C.R. Building shall consist of Cast-in-situ RCC slab treated with a water proofing system
which shall be an integral cement based treatment conforming to CPWD specification (item no. 25.8 of
DSR 2002). The water proofing treatment shall be of following operations:
i. Applying and grouting a slurry coat of neat cement using 2.75 kg/m2 of cement admixed with
proprietary water proofing compounds conforming to IS: 2645 over the RCC slab including cleaning the
surface before treatment.
ii. Laying cement concrete using broken bricks/brick bats 25mm to 100mm size with 50% of cement
mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to
IS: 2645 over 20mm thick layer of cement mortar of min 1:5 (Cement: 5 coarse sand) admixed with
proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 to required slope and treating similarly
the adjoining walls upto 300mm height including rounding of junctions of walls and slabs.
iii. After two days of proper curing applying a second coat of cement slurry admixed with proprietary water
proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645.
iv. Finishing the surface with 20mm thick joint less cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1 cement: 4 course sand)
admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 and finally finishing the
surface with trowel with neat cement slurry and making of 300 x 300 mm square.
v. The whole terrace so finished shall be ponded with water for a minimum period of two weeks for curing
and for final test. All above operations to be done in order and as directed and specified by the Project
Manager.
With average thickness of 120 mm and minimum thickness at khurra at 65 mm.
12.2.10 SUBMISSION:
The following information shall be submitted for review and approval to the Owner:
a) Design criteria shall comprise the codes and standards used, applicable climatic data including wind
loads, earthquake factors maximum and minimum temperatures applicable to the building locations,
assumptions of dead and live loads, including equipment loads, impact factors, safety factors and other
relevant information.
b) Structural design calculations and drawing (including constructions/fabrication) for all reinforced
concrete and structural steel structures.
c) Fully, dimensioned concept plan including floor plans, cross-sections, longitudinal sections, elevations
and perspective view of each building. These drawings shall be drawn at a scale not smaller than 1:50
and shall identify the major building components.
d) Fully dimensioned drawings showing details and sections drawn to scales of sufficient size to clearly
show sizes and configuration of the building components and the relationship between them.
e) Product information of building components and materials, including walls partitions flooring ceiling,
roofing, door and windows and building finishes.
f) A detailed schedule of building finishes including colour schemes.
g) A door and window schedule showing door types and locations, door lock sets and latch and other door
hardware.
h) Approval of the above information shall be obtained before ordering materials or starting fabrication or
construction as applicable.
12.2.11 FINISH SCHEDULE

The finishing schedule is given in subsequent clauses.
12.2.12.1 FLOORING
Anti-Termite treatment for the complete control room area and 25mm thick Damp proof course with
cement concrete in prop 1:1.5:3 with graded stone aggregate of 10 mm down nominal size including
providing approved damp proof admixture in proportion as recommended by the manufacturer including
curing etc must be done on the floor.
Flooring in various rooms of control room building shall be as for detailed schedules given in
Table-1.
12.2.12.2 WALLS
Control room buildings shall be of framed superstructure. All walls shall be non-load bearing walls.
Min. thickness of external walls shall be 230 mm (One brick) with 1:5 cement sand mortar.
12.2.12.3 PLASTERING
All internal walls shall have minimum 15 mm thick 1:5 cement sand plaster.
12.2.12.4 CEILING
The ceiling shall be of BPB Grid ceiling system with plain Gypboard Tiles 9.5 mm thick with, fitting,
fixing and painting where necessary (one coat primer and two coats of paint) pre-coated G.I. angle size
24mm x 24mm x 0.8 mm thick fixed to the brick wall/ partition at the perimeter of ceiling with nylon
sleeves and screws, at 610mm c/c. Then suspending main 'T' section (bottom pre-coated) size 24mm x
38mm x 0.7mm and 3600mm long from the soffit in one direction with the help of metal Rawl Plug.
Soffit cleat and G.I. Rod 4mm diameter with galvanized level clip 1220mm c/c G.I. cross.
12.2.12.5 FINISHING
All external surfaces shall have 18 mm cement plaster in two coats, under layer 12 mm thick cement
plaster 1:5 and finished with a top layer 6 mm thick cement plaster 1:6 with water proofing compound.
NTERNAL FINISH SCHEDULE IS GIVEN TABLE – 1
SI
No. Location Flooring & Skirting150 all Internal Ceiling Doors, Windows Ventilators
mm High
Control VITRIFIED floor tiles of Washable

Room & approved quality of specified distemper on
Relay room of 600 mm x 600mm size smooth surface
1
and above and thickness not applied with putty
less than 18
mm on floors
VITRIFIED floor tiles of Washable

Sub-Station approved quality of specified distemper on
incharge of 600 mm x 600mm size smooth surface
and above and applied with putty
2
thickness not less than18 BPB Grid Anodized aluminum framed doors,
mm on floors window and ventilators.
ceiling system
Acid Resistant Tiles 25 Acid resistant title with plain Rolling Shutter must be
mm thick upto 2.1 M high. Gypboard Tiles provided in the Control Room
9.5mm thick. building with necessary ramp.
3 Battery room Acid resistant paint
above 2.1 M high up (Preferred (Please refer attached
to ceiling Brand - Drawings for Size of
Armstrong or Shutters, doors and other
Antiskid vitrified Tiles of Glazed tile upto equivalent) relevant details)
normal range of Somany or 2.1 M high
equivalent make of size300 Washable
mm x 300 mm or above and distemper on smooth
4 Toilet
thickness not less than 18 surface applied with
mm on floor POP putty above 2.1
Mtr
upto ceiling
12.2.12.6 PAINTING
a) The paint shall be anti-fungal quality of reputed brand suitable for masonry surfaces for high rainfall
zone. White cement primer shall be used as per manufacturer's recommendation.
b) All remaining portion of walls (excluding covered by tiles) should be provided two coats of Birla White
Wall Care Putty (Water Resistant White Cement based putty for concrete/ mortar walls and ceiling both
internal and external) after removing all loosely adhering material from the wall surface with the help of
emery stone, putty blade or wire brush and moistening the wall with sufficient quantity of clean water as
specified and directed by the department. (Total thickness of two coats is maximum 1.5mm)
c) Painting of exterior wall should be with two coats of acrylic emulsion exterior coatings of reputed
brands as approved by APDCL of required shade by thinning 1ltr. of paint with 750ml of water to give
an even shade after thoroughly brooming the surfaces to remove all dirt and remains of loose powdered
materials as specified and directed by the department.
d) For new steel and other metal surface primary coat should be applied over 100m in width or girth after
preparing the surface by thoroughly cleaning oil, grease, dirt and other foreign matter and scoured with
wire brushes, fine steels, wood scrapers and sand paper and then Painting two coats (excluding priming
coat) on new steel and other metal surface with over 100mm in width enamel paint of reputed brands as
approved by APDCL to give an even shade including cleaning the surface of all dirt, dust and other
foreign matter.
12.2.12.7 GLAZING
Minimum thickness of glazing shall be 5.5 mm as per IS: 2835 sun film shall be provided for all
window/doors.
12.2.12.8 DOORS AND WINDOWS & ROLLING SHUTTERS

The details of doors and windows of the control room building shall be as per finish schedule Table-1
and tender drawing with the relevant IS, code. Rolling steel shutters and rolling steel grills shall be
provided as per layout and requirement of buildings. Specifications are to be as follows:
A. DOORS & WINDOWS:
a) The doors and windows of the control room building shall be of Ivory powder coated aluminium with
M.S grill and all the frames of doors and windows shall also be the same as per the relevant IS Codes.
Thickness of the aluminium section shall not be less than 2.0mm.
b) Size and shapes shall be adequate for entering in to the room. In the Air-conditioned area shall be
double glass
(toughened) and doors suitably made to have efficient air conditioning.
c) The windows shall be of sliding type. The window sill shall be of 20mm granite. Aluminium work for
doors and windows, ventilators and partitions shall be provided and fixed in the building with extruded
built up standard tubular and other sections approved make confirming to IS:733 and IS:1285,anodised
transparent or dyed to required shade according to IS:1868 (minimum anodic coating of grade AC 15)
fixed with rawl plugs and screws with fixing clips, or with expansion hold fasteners including necessary
filling up of gaps at junctions at top, bottom and sides with required PVC/neoprene felt etc. and joined
mechanically wherever required including cleat angle, Aluminium snap beading for
glazing/paneling,C.P brass/stainless steel screws including glazing and fittings as specified.
d) Minimum section for aluminium doors & windows: Main Outer Size- 127 mm X 38.10 mm X2 mm;
Horizontal & vertical four track- 122.2 mm X 31.75 mm X 2 mm; Sliding shutter Horizontal and
vertical -40 mm X 18 mm X 2 mm.
e) Necessary hardware like locking arrangement with pin cylinder locks, dead locks, mortised locks, SS
baby latch (occupied / vacant) SS push / pull or mortised handle, heavy quality hinges / pivot, concealed
tower bolts, etc., of approved make & design. Floor springs and door closer shall be provided.
f) Flush door shutters of the solid core type with plywood face panels shall conform to IS: 2202 (Part 1)
and with particle board/hard board face panels shall conform to IS: 2202 (Part 2).
g) Windows for all building shall be Ivory powder coated aluminum sliding windows and ventilators of
standard sections as required complete as specified and directed for all levels. All windows shall have
sliding panel of mosquito proof net made of carbon fiber.
h) The window grill shall be made of: outer frame and two (2) intermediate vertical frame made of
50X25X1.5 mm MS tube, horizontal member 16mm round bar @ 100 mm centre to centre. Finishing
with primer and enamel paint.
i) Proper locking arrangement with stoppers to be provided on the door and windows. Care should be
taken while designing the grill frame that the entering of cat should be restricted.
B. ROLLING SHUTTERS:
a) Rolling shutters shall be of an approved manufacturer, conforming to the requirements specified in IS:
6248:1979. The type of rolling shutter shall be gear operated type (mechanical). Mechanical type of
rolling shutters shall be suitable for operation from both inside and outside with the crank handle or
chain gear operating mechanism duly considering the size of wall/column.
b) Rolling shutters shall be supplied duly considering the type, specified clear width/height of the opening
and the location of fixing as indicated in the Drawings prepared by the Contractor.
c) Shutters shall be built up of interlocking laths 75 mm width between rolling centres formed from cold
rolled steel strips. The thickness of the steel strip shall not be less than 0.90 mm for shutters up to 3.50
m width and not less than 1.20 mm for shutters above 3.50 m width. Each lath section shall be
continuous single piece without any welded joint.
d) The guide channels out of mild steel sheets of thickness not less than 3.15 mm shall be of either rolled,
pressed or built up construction. The channel shall be of size as stipulated in IS: 6248 for various clear
widths of the shutters. Hood covers shall be of mild steel sheets not less than 0.90 mm thick and of
approved shape. Rolling shutters shall be provided with a central hasp and staple safety device in
addition to one pair of lever locks and sliding locks at the ends.
e) All component parts of the steel rolling shutter (excepting springs and insides of guide channels) shall
be provided with one coat of zinc chrome primer conformity to IS: 2074 at the shop before supply.
These surfaces shall be given an additional coat of primer after erection at the site along with the
number of coats and type of finish paint as specified in the respective items of works prepared by the
Contractor. In case of galvanised rolling shutter, the lath sections, guides, lock plate, bracket plates,
suspension shaft and the hood cover shall be hot dip galvanised with a zinc coating containing not less
than 97.5 percent pure zinc. The weight of the zinc coating shall be at least 610gms/sq.m.
f) Guide channels shall be installed truly plumb at the specified location. Bracket plate shall be rigidly
fixed with necessary bolts and holdfasts. Workmanship of erection shall ensure strength and rigidity of
rolling shutter for trouble free and smooth operation. The rolling shutter with handle gear operation shall
be provided.
12.2.12.9 PLUMBING & SANITATION
i) All plumbing and sanitation shall be executed to comply with the requirements of the appropriate bye-
laws, rules and regulations of the Local Authority having jurisdiction over such matters. The Contractor
shall arrange for all necessary formalities to be met in regard to inspection, testing, obtaining approval
and giving notices etc.
ii) PVC syntax or tank adequate capacity for 30 users for 24 hours storage shall be provided as defined in
NBC 2016. Minimum 1000 litres capacity shall be provided.
iii) UPVC pipes of 6 Kg/cm2 of required sizes shall be used for internal & external piping work.
iv) PVC pipes with all required fittings shall be used for sanitary works above ground level.
v) Each toilet shall have the following minimum fittings.
a) Anglo-Indian type W.C. pan 400mm high complete with flushing cistern, toilet paper roll holder and all
required fittings. The toilet should have suitable arrangement for use by differentially abled person as
defined in NBC 2016.
b) Urinal (430 x 260 x 350 mm size) with all fittings.
c) Wash basin (550 x 400 mm size) with all fittings.

d) Bathroom mirror (600 x 450 x 6 mm thick) with PVC frame and PVC backing.
e) CP brass towel rail (600 x 20 mm) with CP brass brackets.
f) Soap holder and liquid soap dispenser.
g) All fittings, fastener, grating shall be chromium plated. All sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be of
approved quality and type manufactured by well-known manufacturers like Hindware, Jaquar,
Parryware or equivalent. All items brought to site must bear identification marks of the type of the
manufacturer and should be approved by the engineer in charge.
h) Soil, waste and drain pipes, for underground works shall be stone ware for areas not subject to traffic
load. Heavy- duty UPVC pipes shall be used otherwise.
12.2.12.10 ELECTRIFICATION:
The scope of Control room internal electrification works will covers supply, installation and wiring through
conduits for all lights (Tubes/Bulbs/ surface lamps etc.), Holders, Sockets, Switches, Switchboards, Distribution
Boxes, MCCBs, ELCBs of rated capacity, Ceiling Fans (1400 mm Sweep) with regulators, Exhaust fans (150
mm sweep), Air Conditioners (1 complete set, non-ducted split type air conditioner, capacity-1.5 Ton, including
voltage stabilizer, starter etc. as per specification), Pump set (minimum 1 HP) etc. with all other required
housings, fixtures and fittings to complete the job.
1) Lighting arrangement should be made in each room, toilets, verandah etc and should be adequate
enough for illumination of the same.
2) Exhaust fan shall be supplied in however minimum quantity of building is as under Control Room –Two
Battery Room-one Toilet – one
3) Ceiling fan (1400 mm sweep) shall be supplied. However minimum quantity for the CR building is as
under Control room – 3 Nos
Store Room – 1 No Incharge Room- 1 No.
4) POWER POINT AND SOCKET:
Each room (excluding Battery Room) shall be provided with at least 1 No‘s 15 Ampere Switch socket
and 2 no‘s 5 ampere switch sockets. 2 nos. of additional 15 A sockets at separate location mustbe
provided on the wall beside the 11 KV indoor VCB panel.
5) Water Pump should be of suitable HP rating (minimum 1HP) and should be of single phase monoblock
pump set
(Crompton Greaves/Aquatic/CRI/V-Guard or equivalent make) with DOL Starter (Crompton

Greaves/Control & switch gear/ BCH/ L&T/ Siemens or equivalent make) as approved by the engineer
incharge.
6) Air Conditioner with all accessories, fixtures must be installed in the Room for Control room Incharge
as per following specification.
12.2.12.11 SPECIFICATION FOR HI-WALL SPLIT AIR CONDITIONERS:

A. CODES AND STANDARDS
The design, materials, construction, manufacture, inspection, testing and performance of window air
conditioners shall comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes in the
locality where the equipment is to be installed. The equipment shall also conform to the latest applicable
Indian or equivalent standards. Other international standards are also acceptable, if these are established
to be equal or superior to the listed standards. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve
the CONTRACTOR of this responsibility.
B. CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
a) CABINETS
The split air-conditioners shall comprise of two components viz. indoor unit (IDU) and
condensing/outdoor unit (ODU), interconnected with refrigerant piping. Indoor unit shall house air
handling fan, cooling coil, insulated drain tray and filter. The unit shall be of heavy gauge steel,
corrosion resistant, finished with synthetic enamel paint and acoustically insulated with resin bonded
fiber glass or equivalent material. Suitable drain connection shall be provided for removal of condensate
collected inside the drain tray under cooling coil. The front panel shall be decorative type with supply
air grille of adjustable type and having adequate return air passage. The front panel shall be made of
plastic or aluminium and shall be easily removable for cleaning of filter.
The unit shall be suitable for wall mounting and can also be ceiling suspended. Condensing/outdoor unit
shall house compressor and condenser and shall be of heavy gauge corrosion resistant carbon steel and
shall be suitable for mounting in open space (e.g. on terrace or on outside wall).
b) COMPRESSOR
The compressor shall be hermetic scroll or rotary and shall be mounted on vibration isolators. Necessary
crank case heaters shall be provided. The power supply to the heaters shall be from an auxiliary source
so as to keep the power available even while the unit is switched off for routine maintenance.
c) CONDENSER
The air-cooled condenser shall be with copper tubes and aluminium fins with low noise fan(s). Speed of
axial fan(s) shall not exceed 960 RPM for fan with impeller diameter above 450 mm and 1440 RPM for
fan with impeller diameter 450 mm and less. The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
Condenser coil shall have anti- corrosion treatment. The casing of the condensing unit shall be given
treatment to withstand harsh weather conditions of the ambient.
d) COOLING COIL AND FILTER
The cooling coil shall be of direct expansion type with copper tubes and aluminium fins. This shall be
minimum three
(3) rows deep and with minimum three (3) fins per centimetre. Anti-corrosive coating shall be provided
on coil.
e) FILTER
The air, before it enters the cooling coil, shall be filtered by dry and cleanable type filters. The filters
shall include (either one or more of) anti-dust, deodorization, anti- bacterial and/or ultraviolet types, as
Specified.
f) REFRIGERATION PIPING AND CONTROLS
The refrigeration piping shall be complete with externally equalized thermostatic expansion valve,
liquid line strainer, dehydrator with replaceable drying agent and liquid line shut-off valve.
Refrigerant piping, fittings and piping joints shall conform to the requirements ANSI B 31.5.
The piping shall be designed for an internal pressure representing the most severe condition of
coincident pressure and temperature expected in normal operation.
Vacuum testing shall be done for medium vacuum of around 40 mm Hg absolute and held with vacuum
pump in operation for at least 4 hours. Thereafter unit shall be sealed and vacuum held for at least 12
hours. Vacuum break shall be done using refrigerant and pressure raised to standing pressure in
refrigerant cylinder.
ON-OFF thermostat with adjustable setting shall be provided for temperature control. A selector switch
enabling the running of air handling fan alone or fan with cooling shall be provided. Interlock shall be
provided such that compressor can start only after starting air handling fan. Provision shall also be made
to interlock the compressor with air cooled condenser fan motor. Safety devices such as high/low
refrigerant pressures at (HP/LP) and compressor oil pressures at (OP), hermetic motor winding
thermostat etc. shall be provided. HP and OP cut out shall be manual reset while LP cut out shall be auto
reset type.
Refrigerant and oil shall be supplied along with the unit. The refrigerant and oil charging shall be
carried out at site. Exposed refrigerant piping shall have anti- corrosive coating.
g) ELECTRICAL
This controller shall facilitate automatic periodic switching of the units from working to standby mode
in a predefined sequence so that all the units shall be in operation for a defined period of time. This
system shall be required in (N+1) OR (N+2) type combination of working & standby units.
The unit shall be provided with single phase preventers for all motors. Each SAC shall be provided with
three pin Plug and cable.
The indoor and outdoor units shall be pre-wired at the factory and shall be complete with starters for all
motors. Wiring between indoor and outdoor units shall be carried out at site.
Cordless remote controller shall be provided. Remote controller shall have ON/OFF & temperature
control option.
12.2.12.12 ELECTRICAL WIRING OF CONTROL ROOM BUILDING
All Wiring should be with P.V.C. insulated single core unsheathed industrial (Multistrand) cable
FRconforming to IS- 694: 1990 with flexible bright annealed electrolytic copper conductor of adequate
size for voltage grade up to 1100 volts.
All Conduits used for wiring should be of heavy rigid PVC as per IS: 9537 Part – III.
The Contractor shall have to provide the layout drawing for necessary approval of APDCL.
All wires, Fittings, Sockets, Switches, MCCB, ELCBs, Fans and other items used in the electrification
works should be of reputed make like Havells, L&T, Legrand, ABB, Schneider MG or equivalent and
should be approved by the engineer incharge.
13.0 SWITCHYARD SECURITY FENCING:
The scope of construction of Security fencing should cover supply of all required materials and labour
to complete the job as per requirement. The work should be as per following minimum specification.
13.1 Security fencing shall be provided for 1.5 meter above the ground (FGL) at the switchyard 12 running
meter.
13.2 All structural steel shall conform to IS: 2062 and shall be painted with a coat of steel primer and two
coats of synthetic enamel paint.
13.3 Chain link mesh shall be as per IS: 2721. Mesh size 75x75 mm and nominal wire size shall be 4.0 mm
diameter and shall be galvanized as per TS.
13.4 Post (Size- 75x75x6 mm GI Angle) shall be placed as per drawing.
13.5 Corner Angle Post shall be provided with cleats in four sides suiting to requirement.
13.6 Bottom and top of the fence fabric shall be fixed with 75x6 GI flat.
13.7 Brick Masonry wall in cement Mortar (1:6) shall be provided over PCC base (75 mm thick-1:2:4). PCC
base should be 600 mm below the FGL and Brick Masonry work should be 600 mm below the FGL &
300 mm above the FGL and constructed as per attached drawing. Brick Masonry wall shall be minimum
230 mm thick below GL & 115 mm thick above the GL.
13.8 Grouting of Angler post should be done as per attached drawing.
13.9 All exposed surface of brick toe wall shall be provided with 20 mm thick. 1:6 cm plaster and coated
with two coats of colour wash with a base coat of white wash with lime.
13.10 All welds are 6 mm thick Continuous fillet welds unless otherwise specified.
13.11 All welded joints shall be confirming is 813.
13.12 The gate shall be made of 75x6 mm GI Flat conforming to IS: 1161 with weld joint. Gate shall be
painted with one coat of steel primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint (Refer attached drawing).
14.0 MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
14.1 Dense concrete with controlled water cement ratio as per IS-code shall be used for all underground
concrete structures such as pump-house, tanks, water retaining structures, cable and pipe trenches etc.
for achieving water tightness.
14.2 All joints including construction and expansion joints for the water retaining structures shall be made
water tight by using PVC ribbed water stops with central bulb. However, kicker type (externally placed)
PVC water stops shall be used for the base slab and in other areas where it is required to facilitate
concreting. The minimum thickness of PVC water stops shall be 5 mm and minimum width shall be 230
mm.
14.3 All steel sections and fabricated structures which are required to be transported on sea shall be provided
with anti- corrosive paint to take care of sea worthiness.
14.4 All mild steel parts used in the water retaining structures shall be hot-double dip galvanized. The
minimum coating of the zinc shall be 750 gm/sq. m for galvanized structures and shall comply with
IS:2629 and IS:2633. Galvanizing shall be checked and tested in accordance with IS: 2633. The
galvanizing shall be followed by the application of an etching primer and dipping in black bitumen in
accordance with B8:3416.
14.5 A screed concrete layer not less than 100 mm thick and of grade not weaker than M10 conforming to IS:
456-1978 shall be provided below all water retaining structures. A sliding layer of bitumen paper or
craft paper shall be provided over the screed layer to destroy the bond between the screed and the base
slab concrete of the water retaining structures.
14.6 Bricks having minimum 75 kg/cm2 compressive strength can only be used for masonry work.
Contractor shall ascertain himself at site regarding the availability of bricks of minimum 75 kg/cm2
compressive strength before submitting his offer.
14.7 Doors and windows on external walls of the building (other than areas provided, with insulated metal
claddings) shall be provided with RCC sun-shade over the openings with 3000 mm projection on either
side of the openings. Projection of sunshade from the wall shall be minimum 450 mm over window
openings and 750 mm over door openings.
14.8 All stairs shall have maximum riser height of 150 mm and a minimum tread width of 300 mm.
Minimum width of stairs shall be 1500 mm. Service ladder shall be provided for access to all roofs.
14.9 Angles 50 x 50 x 6 mm (minimum) with lugs shall be provided for edge protection all round cut
outs/openings in floor slab, edges of drains supporting grating covers, edges of RCC cable/pipe trenches
supporting covers, edges of manholes supporting covers, supporting edges of manhole precast cover and
any other place where breakage of corners of concrete is expected.
14.10 Anti-termite chemical treatment shall be given to column pits, wall trenches, foundations of buildings,
filling below the floors etc. as per IS: 6313 and other relevant Indian Standards.
14.11 Hand-railing shall be provided around all floor/roof openings, projections/balconies/verandah, walk
ways, platforms, steel stairs etc as applicable. All handrails shall be of Tubular type Stainless steel as
per approved design and drawing.
14.12 For all civil works covered under this specification, nominal mix by volume batching as per CPWD
specification is intended. The relationship of grade of concrete and ratio of ingredients shall be as
below:
Sl. No. Mix Cement Sand Coarse Aggregate of 20 mm
1. M 10 1 3 6
2. M 15 1 2 4
3. M 20 1 1.5 3
14.13 The material specification, workmanship and acceptance criteria shall be as per relevant clauses of
Assam PWD/CPWD specification and approved standard Field Quality Plan.
14.14 The details given in tender drawings shall be considered along with details available in this section of
the specification while deciding various components of the building.
14.15 Items/components of buildings not explicitly covered in the specification but required for completion of
the project shall be deemed to be included in the scope.
15.0 INTERFACING
The proper coordination & execution of all interfacing civil works activities like fixing of conduits in
roofs/walls/ceilings/floors, fixing of foundation bolts, fixing of lighting fixtures, fixing of
supports/embedment, provision of cutouts etc. shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. He shall
plan all such activities in advance and execute in such a manner that interfacing activities do not become
bottlenecks and dismantling, breakage etc. is reduced to minimum.
16.0 WATER SUPPLY
16.1 Contractor shall make its own arrangement for construction water.
16.2 The contractor shall carry out all the plumbing/erection works required for supply of water in control
room building.
16.3 A scheme shall be prepared by the contractor indicating the layout and details of water supply which
shall be got approved by the Owner before actual start of work including all other incidental items not
shown or specified but as may be required for complete performance of the works.
16.4 Bore wells with Min 75 mm dia casing pipe & submersible pump of Suitable HP (minimum being 1 HP)
to get a discharge of at least 1000 Liter/Hr. with iron removal filter to get iron free water. Water purifier
with UV mechanism is to be provided and pumps for water supply are in the scope of contractor
meeting the day-to-day requirement of the water supply. The depth of borewell should be as per site
requirement to get adequate and quality water flow, but should not be less than 200 feet.
16.5 PVC Syntax should be placed at a height of minimum 5.5 Mtr from FGL over a RCC pillar supported
platform. The design should be pre- approved by employer.
17.0 SEWERAGE SYSTEM
17.1 Sewerage system shall be provided for control room building.
17.2 The contractor shall construct septic tank and soak pit suitable for 30 users with minimum 3 months
storage.
17.3 The system shall be designed as per relevant IS Codes. Please refer attached drawing for Septic Tank,
Soak Pit etc.
18.0 STATUTORY RULES
18.1 Contactor shall comply with all the applicable statutory rules pertaining to factories act (as applicable
for the State). Fire Safety Rules of Tariff Advisory Committee. Water Act for pollution control etc.
18.2 Provisions for fire proof doors, no. of staircases, fire separation wall, plastering on structural members
(in fire prone areas) etc. shall be made according to the recommendations of Tariff Advisory Committee
(TAC), CEA and NBC 2016 recommendations, whichever is most stringent.
18.3 Statutory clearance and norms of State Pollution Control Board shall be followed as per Water Act for
effluent quality from plant.
18.4 Requirement of sulphate resistant cement (SRC) for sub-structural works shall be decided in accordance
with the Indian Standards based on the findings of the detailed soil investigation to be carried by the
bidder.
18.5 Foundation system adopted by the Bidder shall ensure that relative settlement and other criteria shall be
as per provision in IS: 1904 and other Indian Standard.
18.6 All water retaining structures designed as an un-cracked section shall also be tested for water tightness
at full water level in accordance with clause No. 10 of IS:3370 (part-I)
18.7 Construction joints shall be as per IS:456
18.8 All underground concrete structures like basements, pumps houses, water retaining structures etc. shall
have plasticizer cum water proofing cement additive conforming to IS: 9103. In addition, limit on
permeability as given in IS: 2645 shall also be met with. The concrete surface of these structures in
contact with earth shall also be provided with two coats of bituminous painting for water/damp
proofing. In case of water leakage in the above structures, Injection Method shall be applied for
requiring the leakage.
19.0. FURNITURES TOOLS AND PLANTS:
19.1. The furniture to be supplied under the scope shall be of good quality steel office furniture, preferably of
reputed make like Godrej/Tata/Onoma etc and design shall be pre-approved by APDCL prior to supply.
19.2. The tools and plants to be supplied under the scope shall be of good quality, preferably of reputed make
like Megger/Scope/Risabh/Taparia etc and shall be pre-approved by APDCL prior to supply.
50. MINIMUM GUARANTEE/WARRANTY REQUIRED FOR SUPPLIED MATERIALS
Notwithstanding any of the specifications above, the minimum Guarantee/Warranty

requirement for major materials shall be as per below table:
Sr. No.
Material Guarantee / Warranty
1 Power Transformers 60 months from Commissioning
2 Single Phase Oil Immersed Distribution Transformers 60 months from Commissioning

(Outdoor Type)
3 3-Phase Distribution Transformers 11 or 33 kV/433- 60 months from Commissioning
250V (Outdoor Type)
4 11 & 33 KV Outdoor Type Current Transformer 60 months from Commissioning
5 33 & 11 kV Outdoor Type Potential Transformer 60 months from Commissioning
6 11 kV AND 33 kV Vacuum Circuit Breakers 60 months from Commissioning
7 11 kV 350MVA 1250 AMP VCB Switchgear Panels 60 months from Commissioning

(MC VCB) – Indoor
8 Batteries and Charger 60 months from Commissioning
9 LT upto (1100 V) XLPE Insulated 36 months from Commissioning
10 LT Aerial Bunched Cables 36 months from Commissioning
11 XLPE Power Cables (11kV & 33 kV) 36 months from Commissioning

51. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF FOUNDATION / PAD FOR DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMER
1. General Requirement
The specification covers the technical requirements for foundation work, general description of work, quality
and workmanship. In every case, work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance
with the Technical Specifications and conform to location, lines, grades and cross sections shown on the
construction drawing or as directed by the Owner. The specifications are not, however, intended to cover all
the minute details and the work shall be executed according to the specified Indian Codes. In absence of the
IS Codes, work shall be executed according to the best prevailing local Public Works Department practice or
to the recommendations of the relevant International Standards or to the instructions of the Owner. This
specification shall have precedence in case anything contrary to this is stated anywhere in this Bid
Document. In case of conflict between the Specification and Codes, the former shall prevail.
2. Layout and Levels
Layout and levels of structures etc. shall be made by the Contractor, at his own cost, from the general grid of
the plot and the bench marks given by the Owner. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements, at his
own cost, for locating the co-ordinates and position of foundation as per approved drawings and for
determining the Reduced Level (R.L.) of the locations with respect to the single bench mark indicated by the
Owner. Two established reference lines in mutually perpendicular direction shall be indicated to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall provide at site all the required survey instruments, materials and men to
Owner for verification of the detailed layout and correctness of the layout and levels to the satisfaction of the
Owner so that the work can be carried out accurately according to specifications and drawings. The
contractor shall be solely responsible for the correctness of layout and levels.
Stone Soiling - 100 mm (-1200 mm)
Plain Cement Concrete - 75 mm (-1100 mm)
Depth of footing – 200 mm (-1025 mm)
Ground Level (00.00 mm)
Site Preparation
This section of the specification covers site preparation of the areas as indicated in the drawings.
3. Reference Points and Bench Marks
3.1 Permanent reference Column have been established and under no circumstances shall the Contractor
remove or disturb any permanent mark without the approval of the Owner. The Contractor shall carefully
maintain and protect all bench marks and reference points and shall layout all his work by accurate
reference thereto. The Contractor shall remove all vegetation, excluding trees, from the site areas as
directed by the Owner.
3.2 The area shall be stripped to remove roots of grass, rubbish and slush, shrubs or other organic
materials. Spoiled materials shall be burnt or removed to approve disposal areas on or near the job site as
directed by the Owner.
4. Properties of Construction Materials
This clause specifies the properties of common building materials unless otherwise mentioned in the
drawings or schedule of items.
All materials viz., cement, steel, aggregates, water etc. which are to be used for isolated foundation
construction are detailed below. However, aggregates more than 20mm shall not be used, except for lean
concrete.
4.1 Coarse aggregates/Stone
4.1.1 All coarse aggregates shall be as per IS:383 consisting of hard, strong, compact grained and durable
pieces of crushed stone having uniform in texture and Colour and free from decay, flaws, veins, cracks and
sand holes. Coarse aggregates should be of angular shape & rectangular surface and shall be free from
organic or clay coatings. The surface of a freshly broken stone shall be bright, clean, and free from any
dull, chalky or earthy appearance. Coarse aggregates with round surface shall not be used. A-coarse
aggregates shall not absorb more than 5% of its weight of water after 24 hours immersion. Samples shall
be submitted by the Contractor and approved samples shall be retained by the Owner for comparison of
bulk supply.
4.1.2 Sieving and washing of aggregates by approved method shall be carried out wherever required.
4.1.3 Grading of coarse aggregate shall generally conform to IS: 383 and shall be such as to produce a
dense concrete of the specified proportions and strength and of consistency that will work readily into
position without segregation.
4.1.4 The maximum size of aggregate shall be as follows unless specified otherwise:
 Reinforced concrete with very narrow space - 10mm.

 Reinforced concrete & Plain Concrete - 20mm.
 Lean Concrete M15 -40mm.
4.2 Cement
Cement used shall generally be ordinary Portland Cement conforming to the latest Indian Standard Code
IS:8112 or IS:12269. Alternatively, other varieties of cement other than ordinary Portland Cement such
as Portland Pozzolana Cement conforming to IS;1489 or Portland Slag Cement conforming to IS:455 can
also be used. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer‘s certificate, for each consignment of cement
procured, to the Owner. However Owner reserves the right to direct the Contractor to conduct tests for
each batch/lot of cement used by the Contractor and Contractor will conduct those tests free of cost at the
laboratory so directed by the Owner. The Contractor shall also have no claim towards suspension of work
due to time taken in conducting tests in the laboratory.
4.3 Sand
Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from any adherent coatings or organic matter and shall not
contain clay balls or pellets. The sand shall be free from impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts,
coal, mica, shale or other laminated materials, in such forms or quantities as to affect adversely the
hardening, strength, durability or appearance of concrete or to cause corrosions to any metal in contact
with such concrete. In no case the cumulative percentage of impurities in sand shall be more than 5% by
weight. All sand shall be properly graded. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner all sand shall pass
through IS Sieve no. 2.36 mm. Sand for concrete shall conform to IS:383.
4.4 Water
Water shall be clean, fresh and free from organic matters, acids or soluble salts and other deleterious
substances which may cause corrosion, discoloration, efflorescence etc. Potable water is generally
considered fit for use. Water to be used shall comply with the requirements of IS:456. Average 28 days
compressive strength of at least three 15 cm. cubes of concrete prepared with proposed water shall not
be less than 90% of average strength of three similar cubes prepared with distilled water. PH of water
shall generally be not less than 6.
4.5 Reinforcement
Reinforcement steel shall be clean and free from loose mill scales, dust, loose rust, oil and grease or
other coatings which may impair proper bond. Structural steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard
drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement shall conform to IS:432 (Part-I). The procedure for
corrosion resistance conform to IS:9077 latest edition. Hard drawn steel wire fabric shall conform to
IS:1566. All steel bars including and above 6mm diameter shall be of tested for quality. Substitution of
reinforcement, other than those mentioned above, shall not be permitted without the prior approval of
the Owner.
Grade of steel will be taken Fe-415
Reinforcement in Foundation: 12 mm dia bar with spacing of 150mm in x-direction

and 12 mm dia bar with spacing of 150mm in z-direction.
Reinforcement in Column:
Main bar: 8 – 12 mm dia bar
Tie bar: 8 mm dia bar @ 150mm c/c spacing
Reinforcement in Beam:
At Bottom: 2 – 12 Φ
At Top: 2 - 12 Φ Spacing of beam (8Ø @ 150 C/C)
Reinforcement in Slab:
10 Ø bars @ 200 C/C both ways in slab
5.0 Size of members:
Column = 350 mm X 350 mm

Beam = 200 mm X 250 mm
Slab = 1000 mm X 1000 mm (Thickness = 125 mm)
6.0 Cement Concrete
General
6.0.1 This section of the specification deals with cement concrete, plain or reinforced, and covers the
requirement for concrete mix design, strength and quality, pouring at all levels, forming, protection,
curing finishing, admixtures, inserts and other miscellaneous works.
6.0.2 The provisions of IS:456 shall be complied with, unless permitted otherwise. Any other Indian
Standard Code shall form the part of the specification to the extent it has been referred to or applicable
within this specification.
6.0.3 The Contractor shall furnish all labour, material and equipment to form, place and finish all
structural concrete, concrete works and miscellaneous items complete, as described herein.
Grade of Concrete: M20

The minimum grade of concrete to be used for foundation shall be M-20 with minimum
cement content 400 kg/m3 and maximum water cement ratio of 0.5.
 The slump of concrete shall be maintained between 150 to 200 mm.
 The Contractor shall carry out concrete mix design in accordance with IS: 10262 and
submit mix design calculations and get them approved from the Owner well in advance
of installation of pile foundations. The Contractor shall carry out adequate number of
tests in accordance with IS:456 to ensure concrete of the minimum specified strength at
requisite workability (i.e., slump).
6.1 Workmanship
All workmanship shall be according to the current Industry standard and best practices.
Before starting a pour the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Owner in a ―Pour Card‖
maintained for this purpose. He shall obtain complete instructions about the material and proportions to
be used, Slump / workability, Quantity of water per unit weight of cement, number of test cubes to be
taken, type of finishing to be done, any admixture to be added, any limitation on size of pour and
stopping of concrete in case of premature stopping of pours.
6.2 Mixing of Concrete
6.2.1 All design mix concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated mixer of an approved size and
type capable of ensuring a uniform distribution on the materials through the mass. However, contractor
can also use central batching plant situated within the area allocated for the Contractor‘s particular use.
6.2.2 The proportions of sand, coarse aggregate, cement and water shall be as determined by the mix
design. However, in case of nominal mix concrete (for lean concrete only) the proportions of sand,
coarse aggregate, cement and water shall be fixed. The proportions, as determined for design mix
concrete and shall always be approved by the Owner. The quantities of cement, sand and coarse
aggregates shall be determined by weight.
However, for a faster progress at site, quantities of the cement, sand and coarse aggregates can be
converted to equivalent volume. The water shall be measured accurately after giving proper allowance
for surface water present in the aggregate for which regular check shall be made by the Contractor.
6.2.3 The water shall not be added to the mix until all the cement and aggregates consisting the batch
are already in the drum and dry mixed for at least one minute. Mixing of each batch shall be continued
until there is a uniformity in colour and consistency but in no case shall mixing be done for less than
two (2) minutes and at least forty (40) revolutions after all the materials and water are in the drum.
When absorbent aggregates are used or when the mix is very dry, the mixing time shall be extended as
may be directed by the Owner. Mixers shall not be loaded above their rated capacity as it prevents
thorough mixing. If there is segregation after unloading from the mixer the concrete should be remixed.
6.2.4 The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before the ingredients for the next batch are
fed into the drum. No partly set or remixed or excessively wet concrete shall be used and it shall be
immediately removed from site. Each time the work stops, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned and
when the next mixing commences, the first batch shall have 10% additional cement at no extra cost to
the Owner to allow for loss in the drum.
7. Back Filling
7.1 General Requirement
After completion of foundation footings, pedestals, tie beams and other constructions below the
elevation of the grades, and prior to back filling, all forms of temporary shoring, timber etc. shall be
removed and the excavation cleaned of all trash, debris and perishable materials, back filling shall begin
only with the approval of the Owner.
The soil to be used for back filling purpose shall be inorganic material and shall be free from any
foreign substance which can harm or impair the strength of footing in any manner. In any case the soil
to be used for back filling purpose shall have the prior approval of the Owner.
7.2 Curing and Protection of Concrete
Newly placed concrete shall be protected by approved means from rain, sun & wind. Concrete placed
below ground level shall be protected from falling earth during and after placing. Concrete placed in
ground containing deleterious substances shall be kept free from contact with such ground or with water
leaking from such ground during placing of concrete and for a period of three days or as otherwise
instructed by the Owner after placing of concrete. The ground water around newly poured concrete
shall be kept to an approved level by pumping or other approved means of drainage. Adequate steps
shall be taken to prevent floatation or flooding. Steps, as approved by the Owner, shall also be taken to
protect
8. Stability of Structure
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of the structure at all stages of its erection at site
and shall take all necessary measures by the additions of temporary bracings and guying to ensure
adequate resistance to wind and also to loads due to erection equipment and their operations. Guying
and bracing shall be done for erection equipment and their operations. Guying and bracing shall be
done in such a way that it does not interface with the movement or working of other agencies working
in the area. For the purpose of guying, the Contractor shall not use other structures in the vicinity which
are likely to be damaged by the guy.
Such temporary bracings shall neither be included in the measurement nor extra rate shall be payable.
Such temporary bracings used shall be the property of the Contractor and may be removed by him at the
end of the job from the site of work.
52. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER SECURITY FENCING:

The scope of construction of Distribution transformer Security fencing should cover supply of all
required materials and labour to complete the job as per requirement. The work should be as per
following minimum specification.
13.1 Security fencing shall be provided for 1.5 meter above the ground (FGL) at the switchyard 12 running
meter.
13.2 All structural steel shall conform to IS: 2062 and shall be painted with a coat of steel primer and two
coats of synthetic enamel paint.
13.3 Chain link mesh shall be as per IS: 2721. Mesh size 75x75 mm and nominal wire size shall be 4.0 mm
diameter and shall be galvanized as per TS.
13.4 Post (Size- 75x75x6 mm GI Angle) shall be placed as per drawing.
13.5 Corner Angle Post shall be provided with cleats in four sides suiting to requirement.
13.6 Bottom and top of the fence fabric shall be fixed with 75x6 GI flat.
13.7 Brick Masonry wall in cement Mortar (1:6) shall be provided over PCC base (75 mm thick-1:2:4). PCC
base should be 600 mm below the FGL and Brick Masonry work should be 600 mm below the FGL &
300 mm above the FGL and constructed as per attached drawing. Brick Masonry wall shall be
minimum 230 mm thick below GL & 115 mm thick above the GL.
13.8 Grouting of Angler post should be done as per attached drawing.
13.9 All exposed surface of brick toe wall shall be provided with 20 mm thick. 1:6 cm plaster and coated
with two coats of colour wash with a base coat of white wash with lime.
13.10 All welds are 6 mm thick Continuous fillet welds unless otherwise specified.
13.11 All welded joints shall be confirming is 813.
13.12 The gate shall be made of 75x6 mm GI Flat conforming to IS: 1161 with weld joint. Gate shall be
painted with one coat of steel primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint (Refer attached drawing).

Technical Specification With GTP Format

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specification With GTP Format

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part -2: Technical Specification 1

23. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 33 KV AND 11 KV GANG OPERATED AB SWITCH ....................... 286

1.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR OUTDOOR TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

1 Location At various locations within

6 Maximum altitude above mean sea level (Meters)

Sl. No. Item 11kV Distribution Transformer

Sl. No. Voltage (kV) Impulse Voltage Power Frequency Voltage

Ind ian Standard Title International and

IS 12444 Specification for Copper wire rod ASTM B-49

6. DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION:

Voltage Ratio Rating (kVA) % Max. Losses at Max. Losses at

The efficiency is the ratio of output in KW to the input in

6.4 PERCENTAGE IMPEDANCE:

S. No. Items Upto 200 Above 200

6.6 INSULATION MATERIAL:

6.7.7 PLAIN TANK:

6.7.8 CORRUGATED TANK:

to the conservator which shall also be provided with a drain plug

10.7 Arcing horns shall be provided on HV bushings.

11. TERMINAL CONNECTORS:

13. TERMINAL MARKINGS:

14. TERMINAL MARKING PLATES AND RATING PLATES:

(i) BIS Mark.

The following standard fittings shall be provided:

17. SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING:

18. CLEANING AND SURFACE PREPARATION:

19. PROTECTIVE COATING:

21. PAINTING PROCEDURE:

 Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at the edges.

Total dry film

24. TESTS FOR PAINTED SURFACE:

 The painted surface shall be tested for paint thickness.

25.2 ROUTINE TESTS:

 Ratio, polarity, phase sequence and vector group.

25.3 TYPE TESTS:

i. Determination of sound levels [IS 2026 (Part 10)].

25.5 OTHER TESTS:

Upto and including 750 5.0

25.6 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

25.7 TESTS AT SITE:

26.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF TRANSFORMER OIL:

27. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

information to the purchaser :

28. PENALTY FOR NON PERFORMANCE:

29. DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTATION:

29.3Weight of individual components and total weight.

30. PACKING AND FORWARDING:

31. MANADATORY SPARES:

Mandatory spares will be supplied as per purchaser‘s requirement.

PROFORMA FOR STAGE INSPECTION OF DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

(A) GENERAL INFORMATION:

a) Total quantity inspected

(B) AVAILABILITY OF MATERIAL FOR OFFERED QUANTITY:

(C) POSITION OF MANUFACTURING STAGE OF THE OFFERED QUANTITY:

a) Complete tanked assembly

(a) At least 25% quantity offered has been tanked and

3 Core Dia. (mm)

(3) Diameter of wire used for delta

(G) Clearances: (mm)

(I) Related to core and windings

4) Thickness of locking spacers

Between core - coil assembly and tank: (mm)

1) Between winding and body:

2) Gasket between top cover and tank